IOV18

RS3t
I/O Block
Configuration
Software Version 18, Release 2
August 1994
U.S. Manual PN: 1984-2645-1801
A-4 Size Manual PN: 1984-2645-1811
1984-2645-5006
1984-2645-5016
E 1987--1999 Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Printed in the U.S.A.
Components of the RS3 distributed process control system may be protected by U.S. patent Nos. 4,243,931; 4,370,257; 4,581,734. Other
Patents Pending.
RS3 is a mark of one of the Fisher-Rosemount group of companies. All other marks are property of their respective owners. The contents
of this publication are presented for informational purposes only, and while every effort has been made to ensure their accuracy, they are
not to be construed as warranties or guarantees, express or implied, regarding the products or services described herein or their use or
applicability. We reserve the right to modify or improve the designs or specifications of such products without notice.
Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc.

8301 Cameron Road
Austin, Texas 78754--3895 U.S.A.
Telephone: (512) 835--2190

FAX: (512) 834--7313
Comment Form
RS3t Manuals
I/O Block Configuration 1984-2645-18x1
Please give us your feedback to help improve this manual.

Never Rarely Sometimes Usually Always
1. Do you actually use this manual when
you are:
D configuring ______ ______ ______ ______ ______
D making changes or enhancements ______ ______ ______ ______ ______
D operating the system ______ ______ ______ ______ ______
D troubleshooting ______ ______ ______ ______ ______
D other __________________________ ______ ______ ______ ______ ______
2. Does this manual answer your questions? ______ ______ ______ ______ ______
3. What could be changed in this manual to make it more useful?
Errors and Problems: Please note errors or problems in this manual, including chapter and page number,
if applicable; or send a marked-up copy of the affected page(s).
May we contact you about your comments? j Yes j No
Name ______________________________________________
Company ______________________________________________
Phone ______________________________________________
Date ______________________________________________
Fisher-Rosemount FAX #: (512) 834--7200 Thank you!
Name
Place
Company stamp
here
Address
Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc.

Technical Documentation
8301 Cameron Road
Austin, Texas 78754--3895
U.S.A.
Seal with tape.

IO: v
RS3t
I/O Block Configuration
About This Manual
This manual describes the input and output blocks used in the
Rosemount System 3ä control system.
D Chapter 1 Describes the I/O block types and explains how to

use the I/O Block Configuration, Block Directory,
and Block Status screens.
D Chapter 2 Explains how to configure Analog Input and
Analog Output Blocks (AIBs and AOBs)
D Chapter 3 Describes Pulse Input/Output Block (PIOB)
applications and explains how to configure PIOBs.
D Chapter 4 Describes Temperature Input Block (TIB)
applications and explains how to configure TIBs.
D Chapter 5 Explains how to configure Redundant
Input/Output Blocks (RIOBs).
D Chapter 6 Explains how to configure Contact Input and
Contact Output Blocks (CIBs and COBs).
D Chapter 7 Explains how to configure Multiplex Input Blocks
(MIBs).
D Chapter 8 Explains how to configure Smart Blocks (Smart
Input Blocks and HART Output Blocks) and Value
Input Blocks (VIBs).
D Chapter 9 Describes interfaces for Programmable Logic
Controllers and explains how to configure
Programmable Logic Controller Blocks (PLCBs).
D Chapter 10 Explains how to configure Discrete Input and
Output Blocks (DIBs and DOBs).
RS3: I/O Block Configuration About This Manual

IO: vi
Changes for This Release

D Added information about addressing PLC hardware
(see IO:9-2-4).
D Added Chapter 8 information about HART Output Blocks (HOBs),
Chapter 8, Section 2.
D Added information about new Multipoint hardware as it affects
software and I/O configuration (see Chapter 2, Section 2)
D Added information about a new Write Filter field on the PLCB I/O
Block Configuration Screen (see IO:9-3-21)
D The pagination and format of this book have changed in order to
match the DOCVUE documentation library, a CD--ROM version
of the RS3 manual set.
Revision Level for This Manual
For This Refer to This Document:

Software
Version: Title Date Part Number
18R2 I/O Block Configuration August 1994 1984-2645-18x1
18R1 I/O Block Configuration October 1993 1984-2645-18x1

IO: vii
References to Other Manuals
References to other RS3 user manuals list the manual, chapter, and
sometimes the section as shown below.
Sample Entries:
For ..., see CC: 3. For ..., see CC: 1-1.
Manual Title Chapter Manual Title Chapter-Section
Abbreviations of Manual Titles

AL = Alarm Messages
BA= ABC Batch
CB= ControlBlock Configuration
CC= Console Configuration
DT = Disk and Tape Functions
IO = I/O Block Configuration
OP= Operator’s Guide
OV= System Overview and Glossary
PW= PeerWay Interfaces
RB= Rosemount Basic Language
RI = RNI Release Notes and Installation Guide
RP = RNI Programmer’s Reference Manual
SP = Site Preparation and Installation
SR = System Resource Unit (SRU)
SV = Service

IO: viii
Reference Documents
Prerequisite Documents
You should be familiar with the information in the following documents

before using this manual:
System Overview Manual and Glossary 1984-2640-18x1
Software Release Notes, Version 18 1984-2818-01xx
Related Documents
You may find the following documents helpful when using this manual:
ABC Batch Software Manual 1984-2654-18x1
Alarm Messages Manual 1984-2657-18x1
ABC Batch Quick Reference Guide 1984-2814-11xx
Configuration Quick Reference Guide 1984-2812-08xx
Console Configuration Manual 1984-2643-18x1
ControlBlock Configuration Manual 1984-2646-18x1
I/O Block Configuration Manual 1984-2645-18x1
Operator’s Guide 1984-2647-18x1
PeerWay Interfaces Manual 1984-2650-18x1
Rosemount Basic Language Manual 1984-2653-18x1
RNI Programmer’s Reference Manual 1984-3356-01x1
RNI Release Notes and Installation Guide 1984-3357-01x1
Service Manual, Volume 1 1984-2648-18x1
Service Manual, Volume 2 1984-2648-18x2
Site Preparation and Installation Manual 1984-2642-xxx1
Software Defects for Version 18 1984-2818-03xx
System Resource Unit (SRU) Manual 1984-2651-18x1
User Manual Master Index 1984-2641-18x1

Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction to Input/Output Blocks
Section 1: What are Input/Output Blocks? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1-1

Input/Output Block Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1-2
Role of Input and Output Blocks in a Control Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1-4
How Input/Output Blocks Relate to the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1-5
How Input/Output Blocks Relate to ControlBlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1-5
Scaling Values in a Control Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1-6
Internal Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1-6
Display Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1-7
Section 2: Using an I/O Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2-1

Initially Configuring an I/O Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2-1
Display Screen Access Arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2-3
Section 3: Input/Output Block Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-1

PeerWay Node Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-2
Console Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-2
Addressing within ControlFiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-4
Controller Processor Card Slot (ControlFile Card) Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-4
Card Cage/Discrete Termination Panel Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-6
Card Slot/Communication Line Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-7
Card Cage Card Slot Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-9
Analog Card Cage Field Interface Card (FIC) Slot Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-10
Contact Card Cage Field Interface Card (FIC) Slot Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-11
Communication Connect Card III Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-12
Communication Termination Panel II Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-13
I/O Point Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-14
Analog I/O Point Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-15
Multipoint Analog I/O Point Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-16
Pulse I/O Point Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-17
Contact I/O Point Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-18
Multiplexer Inputs Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-19
Isolated Discrete I/O Point Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-20
Direct Discrete I/O Point Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-21
Section 4: Block Directory and Block Status Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4-1

Viewing Information About Configured Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4-2
Viewing the Block Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4-4
RS3: I/O Block Configuration Contents

IO: x
Section 5: Hints for Configuring I/O Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5-1

Configuration Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5-1
Configuration Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5-1
Chapter 2: Configuring Analog Blocks
Section 1: Configuring an Analog Input Block (AIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-1

Configuring an AIB Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-2
Determining the AIB Filter Time to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-2
Configuring AIB Signal Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-3
Square Root Signal Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-3
Thermocouple or RTD Signal Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-4
Configuring AIB Instrument Bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-7
Configuring AIB Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-8
AIB Instrument Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-8
AIB Critical and Advisory Process Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-9
AIB Alarm Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-9
AIB Alarm Deadbands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-10
AIB Low Cutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-10
AIB Reference Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-11
AIB Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-11
AIB Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-15
Section 2: Configuring an Analog Output Block (AOB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2-1

Configuring Output Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2-2
Normal Output Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2-2
Reverse Output Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2-2
Configuring AOB Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2-4
AOB Reference Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2-5
AOB Block Configuration Screen (Standard I/O hardware) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2-5
AOB Block Configuration Screen
(Multipoint Analog I/O hardware) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2-6
AOB Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2-9
Section 3: Hints for Configuring Analog Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3-1

Chapter 3: Configuring Pulse Input/Output Blocks
Section 1: Applications for the Pulse Input/Output Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-1

Pulse Input PIOB Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-2
Pulse Output PIOB Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-4
Analog Output PIOB Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-6

IO: xi
Combining PIOB Blocks for Loader Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-7

Binary Output Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-7
Analog Output Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-7
Section 2: Configuring a Pulse Input/Output Block (PIOB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-1

PIOB Configuration Screen Common Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-2
Configuring a Pulse Input PIOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-4
Configuring a Contact Pulse Input PIOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-6
Configuring a Voltage Pulse Input PIOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-7
Configuring a PIOB to Measure the Frequency of a Pulse Input . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-9
Configuring a PIOB to Measure the Duration of a Pulse Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-11
Configuring a PIOB to Count Pulse Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-13
Target Count Provided by a ControlBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-13
Target Count Provided by a Configuror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-17
Configuring a Pulse Output PIOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-20
Configuring a PIOB to Output a Pulse with a Specified Frequency . . . . . . . . 3-2-22
Configuring a PIOB to Output a Pulse with a Specified Duration . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-24
Configuring a PIOB to Output a Pulse with a Specified Number of Pulses . . 3-2-26
Configuring an Analog Output PIOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-28
Configuring PIOBs for a Loader Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-32
Loader Address Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-32
Analog Output Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-32
Configuring PIOBs for a Loader Application with a Binary Output . . . . . . . . . 3-2-33
Configuring PIOBs for a Loader Application with an Analog Output . . . . . . . . 3-2-36
Section 3: Hints for Configuring PIOBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3-1

Chapter 4: Configuring Temperature Input Blocks
Section 1: Applications for the Temperature Input Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1-1

Configuring a TIB for an RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1-2
Configuring a TIB for a Thermocouple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1-3
Configuring a TIB for a Cold Junction Compensator RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1-4
Section 2: Configuring a Temperature Input Block (TIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-1

Selecting the Sensor Type and Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-2
Configuring an RTD Sensor TIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-8
Configuring a Thermocouple Sensor TIB or a CJC Sensor TIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-10
Configuring a Thermocouple Sensor TIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-11
Configuring a CJC Sensor TIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-12
Scaling an RTD Sensor TIB or a Thermocouple Sensor TIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-13
Default Display Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-15

IO: xii
Other Display Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-16

TIB Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-17
TIB Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-18
Configuring an RTD Sensor TIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-18
Linking a ControlBlock to a Thermocouple Sensor TIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-20
Section 3: Hints for Configuring TIBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3-1

Chapter 5: Configuring Redundant Input/Output Blocks
Section 1: Configuring a Redundant Input/Output Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1-1

Configuration Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1-2
Configuring an RIOB for an Analog Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1-3
Configuring an RIOB for a Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1-4
Changing the Redundancy Scheme for Analog or Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1-5
Changing the Backup Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1-6
Determining the Backup Status of an FIC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1-7
Determining the Backup Status of an FIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1-9
Section 2: RIOB Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2-1
Section 3: Hints for Configuring RIOBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3-1

Chapter 6: Configuring Contact Blocks
Section 1: Configuring a Contact Input Block (CIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-1

Configuring a CIB Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-2
CIB Filter Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-3
Configuring the CIB Field Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-4
Assigning a Message Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-5
Configuring a Descriptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-6
Setting the Fail Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-7
Configuring an Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-8
Configuring CIB Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-9
CIB Alarm Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-9
CIB Reference Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-10
CIB Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-10
None Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-13

IO: xiii
Delay Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-13

Delay On (D--On) Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-15
Delay Off (D--Off) Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-16
Glitch Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-17
Settle Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-19
Extend Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-21
CIB Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-23
Section 2: Configuring a Contact Output Block (COB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-1

Configuring the COB Field Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-2
Configuring Output Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-3
Configuring COB Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-8
COB Reference Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-9
COB Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-9
COB Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-12
Section 3: Hints for Configuring Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3-1

Chapter 7: Configuring Multiplex Input Blocks
Section 1: Configuring a Multiplex Input Block (MIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-1

Configuring MIB Signal Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-2
Thermocouple Signal Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-3
Resistance Temperature Device (RTD) Signal Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-4
Miscellaneous Device Signal Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-5
Configuring an MIB Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-6
Determining the MIB Filter Time to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-6
Configuring the MIB Skip Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-7
Scaling an MIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-8
Configuring MIB Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-10
MIB Instrument Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-10
MIB Critical and Advisory Process Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-11
MIB Alarm Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-11
MIB Alarm Deadbands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-12
Rate of Change Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-12
Deviation Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-12
Setting MIB Alarm Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-13
Setting the Block Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-14
Section 2: MIB Reference Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2-1

MIB Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2-2
MIB Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2-7

IO: xiv
Section 3: Hints for Configuring MIBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3-1

Chapter 8: Configuring Smart Blocks
Section 1: Configuring SIBs and VIBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-1

How are Smart Transmitter Input Blocks and Value Input
Blocks Related to the Smart Transmitter? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-2
Smart Transmitter Input Block (SIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-2
Value Input Block (VIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-2
How to Call Up Smart Transmitter Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-3
How to Configure SIBs and VIBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-4
Determining the Block Mode to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-4
Auto Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-4
Simulate Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-5
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-6
Configuring an SIB Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-7
Determining Whether to Use Analog or Digital PV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-8
Using Analog PV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-8
Using Digital PV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-8
Using Combined PV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-9
Using Both Analog and Digital PV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-9
Configuring SIB Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-11
SIB Instrument Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-11
SIB Alarm Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-11
SIB Alarm Deadbands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-12
SIB Low Cutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-12
Using the Smart Transmitter Block Configuration Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-13
Using the SIB Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-13
Using the VIB Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-17
Linking a VIB Block to an SIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-20
SIB Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-21
VIB Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-22
Transmitter Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-23
How to View the Field Transmitter Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-23
Command Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-26
How to Change the Transmitter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-28
Viewing the SIB Transmitter Configuration and
Field Transmitter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-28
Field Transmitter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-28
SIB Transmitter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-28
Displaying the Transmitter Configuration Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-29
Uploading and Downloading Transmitter Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-29
Performing Transmitter Configuration Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-30

IO: xv
How to Change the Transmitter Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-32

How to Assign a Tag, Descriptor, Message, or Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-33
How to Set Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-34
How to Assign Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-35
How to Set Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-40
How to Assign Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-41
How to View the SIB Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-42
Transmitter Configuration Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-43
How to Record and View Transmitter Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-47
Generation of Log Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-47
Recording of Log Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-47
Using the Transmitter Maintenance Log Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-48
Section 2: HARTä Output Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-1

How is the HART Output Block Related to a Smart Field Device? . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-2
HART Output Block (HOB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-2
How to Call Up HOB Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-4
How to Configure HOBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-5
Configuring Output Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-6
Configuring HOB Alarm Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-9
Using the HART Output Device Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-13
Entering Data on the HART Output Device Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-14
Output Device Status Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-16
HART Output Device Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-18
Changing HART Field Device Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-19
Uploading and Downloading HART Field Device Configurations . . . . . . . . 8-2-19
Configuring Dead Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-25
Deviation Alarm Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-26
Configuring Slots in the HOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-27
HOB Slot Variable Tables for SMART Field Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-28
Linking a VIB Block to an HOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-29
Hints for Configuring HART Output Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-30
Section 3: Hints for Configuring SIBs and VIBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3-1

Chapter 9: Configuring PLC Blocks
Section 1: What is a PLC Interface? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1-1

PLC Interface Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1-2

IO: xvi
PLC Interface Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1-4

Protocols Supported by a PLC Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1-6
Network Configurations Supported by a PLC Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1-7
Sample Configuration with One I/O Card and One Data Highway . . . . . . . . . 9-1-8
Sample Configuration with Two I/O Cards and One Data Highway . . . . . . . . 9-1-9
Sample Configuration with Two I/O Cards and Two Data Highways . . . . . . . 9-1-10
Sample Configuration with Modbus PLC and Data Highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1-11
Sample Configuration with Mitsubishi PLC RS422 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1-12
Sample Configuration with Mitsubishi PLC Melsec Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1-14
Section 2: Communicating with the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2-1

Modbus Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2-1
Using Consecutive Addresses for PLC Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2-3
PLC Block Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2-4
Mitsubishi Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2-5
Checking Logic Steps with a Simulated PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2-7
Switch Position Requirements for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley PLC . . 9-2-8
Module Switch Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2-8
PLC Communication Module Switch Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2-9
Defining Port-PLC Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2-10
Factors Affecting PLC Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2-15
Section 3: Configuring a PLCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-1

PLC Block Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-1
Preparing to Read and Write to a PLC Register or Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-2
Mapping Between the RS3 and PLC Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-3
Mapping to Allen--Bradley PLC 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-5
Mapping Between the RS3 and PLC Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-8
Reading the Contents of a PLC Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-10
Configuring an I/O Block to Read a PLC Register Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-11
Linking I/O Block Bit Data to a ControlBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-15
Linking Input Directly to a Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-16
I/O Block Bit Descriptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-17
I/O Block Bit Alarm Descriptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-18
Writing to a PLC Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-20
Configuring an I/O Block to Write to a PLC Register Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-21
Writing to Selected Bits of a PLC Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-24
Masking Within the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-24
Masking Within the I/O Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-24
Reading and Writing Through a Single I/O Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-26
Section 4: PLC Interface Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4-1

FIC Redundancy Information for All Supported PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4-2
FIC Redundancy for Allen-Bradley PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4-5
FIC Redundancy for Modicon PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4-6
FIC Redundancy for Mitsubishi PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4-7

IO: xvii
Hints for Using the Redundant PLC Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4-8
Section 5: PLC Guidelines and Reference Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-1

PLC Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-1
Reference Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-2
Checking the PLC Interface Hardware (Loopback Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-3
Port I/O Card Functional Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-4
RS422/RS232 Port I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-4
RS422/RS422 Port I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-6
Interfacing to Allen-Bradley PLC-2, PLC-3, and PLC-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-7
Cable Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-7
Notes on Data Highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-8
Jumpers on Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-9
Jumpers on FICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-9
PLC Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-10
PLC-2 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-12
PLC-2 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-13
PLC--3 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-14
PLC--3 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-15
PLC-5 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-16
PLC--5 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-17
Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-18
General PLC Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-18
PLC Communication Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-19
Mitsubishi Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-20
Chapter 10: Configuring Discrete Blocks
Section 1: Configuring a Discrete Input Block (DIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-1

Configuring a DIB Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-2
DIB Filter Options Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-3
Configuring the DIB Field Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-4
Configuring the Transition Voltage for I/O Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-8
Configuring DIB Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-11
DIB Alarm Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-12
DIB Reference Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-13
DIB Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-13
DIB Filter Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-17

IO: xviii

DIB Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-29
Section 2: Configuring a Discrete Output Block (DOB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2-1

Configuring the DOB Field Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2-2
Configuring DOB Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2-11
DOB Reference Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2-12
DOB Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2-12
DOB Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2-15

IO: xix
List of Figures
Figure 1.1.1. Role of I/O Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:1-1-4

Figure 1.1.2. Flow of Values through a Typical Control Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:1-1-7
Figure 1.2.1. I/O Point Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:1-2-1
Figure 1.2.2. Unconfigured I/O Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:1-2-2
Figure 1.2.3. Example of Access Arrows on an I/O Block Configuration Screen IO:1-2-4
Figure 1.3.1. PeerWay Node Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:1-3-2
Figure 1.3.2. Addressing PeerWay Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:1-3-3
Figure 1.3.3. Controller Processor Card Slot Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:1-3-4
Figure 1.3.4. Controller Processor Card Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:1-3-5
Figure 1.3.5. Card Cage/Discrete Termination Panel Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:1-3-6
Figure 1.3.6. Card Cage Card Slot/Communication Line Address . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:1-3-7
Figure 1.3.7. Card Cage and Communication Line Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:1-3-8
Figure 1.3.8. Card Cage Card Slot Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:1-3-9
Figure 1.3.9. Analog Card Cage Card Slot Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:1-3-10
Figure 1.3.10. Contact Card Cage Card Slot Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:1-3-11
Figure 1.3.11. Communication Connect Card III Line Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:1-3-12
Figure 1.3.12. Communication Termination Panel II Line Addressing . . . . . . . . . IO:1-3-13
Figure 1.3.13. I/O Point Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:1-3-14
Figure 1.3.14. Analog Field Interface Card (FIC) I/O Point Addressing . . . . . . . IO:1-3-15
Figure 1.3.15. Multipoint Analog I/O Point Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:1-3-16
Figure 1.3.16. Pulse Field Interface Card (FIC) I/O Point Addressing . . . . . . . . IO:1-3-17
Figure 1.3.17. Contact FIC I/O Point Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:1-3-18
Figure 1.3.18. Multiplexer Front End Module (FEM) I/O Point Addressing . . . . IO:1-3-19
Figure 1.3.19. Isolated Discrete I/O Point Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:1-3-20
Figure 1.3.20. Direct Discrete I/O Point Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:1-3-21
Figure 1.4.1. Block Directory Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:1-4-2

IO: xx
Figure 1.4.2. Block Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:1-4-4

Figure 2.1.1. AIB Block Configuration Screen—Filter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . IO:2-1-2
Figure 2.1.2. AIB Block Configuration Screen—Signal Characterization Configuration . . . .
IO:2-1-6
Figure 2.1.3. AIB Block Configuration Screen----Instrument Bias Configuration IO:2-1-7
Figure 2.1.4. AIB Block Configuration Screen----Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . . . IO:2-1-10
Figure 2.1.5. AIB Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:2-1-11
Figure 2.1.6. AIB Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:2-1-15
Figure 2.2.1. AOB Block Configuration Screen—Reverse Action Configuration IO:2-2-3

Figure 2.2.2. Configuration Screen—Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:2-2-4
Figure 2.2.3. AOB Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:2-2-5
Figure 2.2.4. AOB Block Configuration Screen—MAIO Hardware Installed . . . IO:2-2-6
Figure 2.2.5. AOB Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:2-2-9
Figure 3.1.1. PIOB Block Configured to Measure the Frequency of a Pulse Input . . . . . . . .
IO:3-1-2
Figure 3.1.2. PIOB Block Configured to Measure the Duration of a Pulse Input IO:3-1-3
Figure 3.1.3. PIOB Block Configured to Count Pulse Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-1-3
Figure 3.1.4. PIOB Block Configured to Output Pulse with Specified Frequency IO:3-1-4
Figure 3.1.5. PIOB Block Configured to Output a Pulse with a Specified Duration . . . . . . . .
IO:3-1-5
Figure 3.1.6. PIOB Block Configured to Output a Specified Number of Pulses IO:3-1-5
Figure 3.1.7. PIOB Block Configured to Output a 4--20 mA Signal . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-1-6
Figure 3.1.8. PIOB Block Configured to Output a 23 V Power Supply . . . . . . . . IO:3-1-6
Figure 3.1.9. Loader Application with Binary Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-1-8
Figure 3.1.10. Loader Application with Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-1-8
Figure 3.2.1. PIOB Configuration Screen—Configuring a PIOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-2
Figure 3.2.2. Hysteresis for Contact Pulse Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-4
Figure 3.2.3. Hysteresis for Voltage Pulse Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-5
Figure 3.2.4. Configuring a Contact Pulse Input PIOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-6
Figure 3.2.5. Configuring a Voltage Pulse Input PIOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-7
Figure 3.2.6. Configuring a PIOB to Measure the Frequency of a Pulse Input . IO:3-2-9
Figure 3.2.7. Configuring Contact Pulse Input PIOB to Measure Pulse Frequency . . . . . . .
IO:3-2-10
Figure 3.2.8. Configuring PIOB to Measure Duration of Pulse Input . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-11
Figure 3.2.9. Configuring Voltage Pulse Input PIOB to Measure Pulse Duration IO:3-2-11
Figure 3.2.10. Duration Input States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-12

IO: xxi
Figure 3.2.11. Configuring a PIOB to Count Pulse Inputs—Target Count Supplied by

a ControlBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-13
Figure 3.2.12. Effect of Target Count on PIOB Output—Target Count from ControlBlock . .
IO:3-2-14
Figure 3.2.13. Configuring Voltage Input PIOB to Count Pulses—Target Count from
ControlBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-15
Figure 3.2.14. Configuring PIOB to Count Pulse Inputs—Target Count from Configuror . . .
IO:3-2-17
Figure 3.2.15. Effect of Target Count on PIOB Output—Target Count from Configuror . . . .
IO:3-2-17
Figure 3.2.16. Sample of a Voltage Input PIOB to Count Pulses—Target Count Provided
by Configuror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-18
Figure 3.2.17. Configuring a Pulse Output PIOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-20
Figure 3.2.18. Configuring a PIOB to Output a Pulse with a Specified Frequency . . . . . . . .

IO:3-2-22
Figure 3.2.19. Configuring a Pulse Output PIOB with a Specified Frequency . . IO:3-2-22
Figure 3.2.20. Configuring a PIOB to Output a Pulse with a Specified Duration IO:3-2-24
Figure 3.2.21. Duty Cycle Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-24
Figure 3.2.22. Configuring a Pulse Output PIOB with a Specified Duration . . . . IO:3-2-25
Figure 3.2.23. Configuring PIOB to Output Specified Number of Pulses . . . . . . IO:3-2-26
Figure 3.2.24. Outputting Fixed Frequency for Specified Number of Pulses . . . IO:3-2-26
Figure 3.2.25. Configuring Pulse Output PIOB with Specified Number of Pulses IO:3-2-27
Figure 3.2.26. Analog Output PIOB Configured to Output 4--20 mA Signal . . . . IO:3-2-29
Figure 3.2.27. Analog Output PIOB Configured to Output a 23 V Power Supply IO:3-2-29
Figure 3.2.28. Analog Output Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-30
Figure 3.2.29. Configuring PIOBs for a Loader Application with a Binary Output IO:3-2-33
Figure 3.2.30. Interaction of PIOBs for a Loader Application with a Binary Output . . . . . . .
IO:3-2-33
Figure 3.2.31. Configuring a Pulse Output PIOB for a Loader Application with a Binary
Output—Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-34
Figure 3.2.32. Configuring a Pulse Input PIOB for a Loader Application with a Binary
Output—Loader Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-34

IO: xxii
Figure 3.2.33. Configuring an Analog Output PIOB for a Loader Application with an
Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-36
Figure 3.2.34. Interaction of PIOBs for a Loader Application with an Analog Output . . . . . .
IO:3-2-37
Figure 3.2.35. Effect of the Target Count on the PIOB Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-37
Figure 3.2.36. Configuring a Pulse Input PIOB for a Loader Application with an Analog
Output—Loader Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-38
Figure 3.2.37. Configuring an Analog Output PIOB for a Loader Application with an
Analog Output—Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-38
Figure 4.1.1. Configuring an RTD Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:4-1-2

Figure 4.1.2. Configuring a Thermocouple Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:4-1-4
Figure 4.2.1. TIB Configuration Screen—Configuring a TIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:4-2-3
Figure 4.2.2. TIB Configuration Screen—Configuring an RTD Sensor TIB . . . . IO:4-2-8
Figure 4.2.3. TIB Configuration Screen—Configuring a Thermocouple Sensor TIB . . . . . . .
IO:4-2-11
Figure 4.2.4. TIB Configuration Screen—Configuring a CJC Sensor TIB . . . . . IO:4-2-12
Figure 4.2.5. Display Scaling of Continuous Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:4-2-14
Figure 4.2.6. Scaling a TIB with the Default Eng Zero and Eng Max Values . . . IO:4-2-15
Figure 4.2.7. Scaling a TIB with Eng Zero and Eng Max Values Other than the Default
Values . IO:4-2-16
Figure 4.2.8. TIB Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:4-2-17
Figure 5.1.1. Configuring an RIOB for an Analog Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:5-1-3

Figure 5.1.2. Configuring an RIOB for a FIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:5-1-4
Figure 5.1.3. RIOB Configuration Screen—Backing Up FICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:5-1-6
Figure 5.1.4. RIOB Configuration Screen—Determining FIC Backup Status . . . IO:5-1-8
Figure 5.1.5. RIOB Configuration Screen for a Second Redundant FIC . . . . . . . IO:5-1-8
Figure 5.1.6. RIOB Configuration Screen—Determining FIM Backup Status . . IO:5-1-9
Figure 5.2.1. Redundant I/O Block (RIOB) Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:5-2-1
Figure 6.1.1. CIB Configuration Screen—Filter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-1-2
Figure 6.1.2. CIB Configuration Screen—Field Contact Configuration . . . . . . . . IO:6-1-4
Figure 6.1.3. CIB Configuration Screen—Message Pair Configuration . . . . . . . . IO:6-1-5
Figure 6.1.4. CIB Configuration Screen—Descriptor Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-1-6
Figure 6.1.5. CIB Configuration Screen—Fail Safe Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-1-7
Figure 6.1.6. CIB Configuration Screen—Event Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-1-8
Figure 6.1.7. CIB Configuration Screen—Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-1-9

IO: xxiii
Figure 6.1.8. CIB Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-1-10
Figure 6.1.9. Delay Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-1-14
Figure 6.1.10. Delay--on Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-1-15
Figure 6.1.11. Delay--off Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-1-16
Figure 6.1.12. Glitch Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-1-17
Figure 6.1.13. Settle Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-1-19
Figure 6.1.14. Extend Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-1-21
Figure 6.1.15. CIB Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-1-23
Figure 6.2.1. COB Configuration Screen—Contact Type Configuration . . . . . . . IO:6-2-2

Figure 6.2.2. COB Configuration Screen—Output Hold Configuration . . . . . . . . IO:6-2-3
Figure 6.2.3. Output Hold Off (Delay On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-2-4
Figure 6.2.4. Output Hold On (Delay Off) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-2-5
Figure 6.2.5. Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-2-6
Figure 6.2.6. COB Configuration Screen—Message Pair Configuration . . . . . . . IO:6-2-7
Figure 6.2.7. COB Configuration Screen—Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-2-8
Figure 6.2.8. COB Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-2-9
Figure 6.2.9. COB Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-2-12
Figure 7.1.1. MIB Block Configuration Screen—Signal Characterization . . . . . . IO:7-1-2

Figure 7.1.2. MIB Block Configuration Screen—Filter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . IO:7-1-6
Figure 7.1.3. MIB Block Configuration Screen—Skip Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:7-1-7
Figure 7.1.4. MIB Block Configuration Screen—Scaling Configuration . . . . . . . . IO:7-1-9
Figure 7.1.5. MIB Block Configuration Screen—Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . . . IO:7-1-13
Figure 7.1.6. MIB Block Configuration Screen—Block Output Configuration . . . IO:7-1-14
Figure 7.2.1. MIB Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:7-2-2

Figure 7.2.2. MIB Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:7-2-7
Figure 8.1.1. Smart Transmitter Input Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:8-1-2
Figure 8.1.2. Value Input Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:8-1-2
Figure 8.1.3. Accessing the SIB I/O Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:8-1-3
Figure 8.1.4. Smart Transmitter Input Block and Value Input Block in Auto Mode . . . . . . . .
IO:8-1-4
Figure 8.1.5. Smart Transmitter Input Block and Value Input Block in Simulate Mode . . . . .
IO:8-1-5

IO: xxiv
Figure 8.1.6. Smart Transmitter Input Block and Value Input Block in Manual Modes . . . . .
IO:8-1-6
Figure 8.1.7. SIB Configuration Screen—Filter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:8-1-7
Figure 8.1.8. SIB Configuration Screen—PV Type Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:8-1-10
Figure 8.1.9. SIB Configuration Screen—Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:8-1-12
Figure 8.1.10. SIB Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:8-1-13
Figure 8.1.11. VIB Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:8-1-17
Figure 8.1.12. VIB Block Configuration Screen—Linking a VIB Block to an SIB
IO:8-1-20
Figure 8.1.13. SIB Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:8-1-21
Figure 8.1.14. VIB Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:8-1-22
Figure 8.1.15. Transmitter Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:8-1-23
Figure 8.1.16. Configuration Screen Entry for Transmitter Configuration Screen
IO:8-1-29
Figure 8.1.17. Transmitter Configuration I/O Screen—Performing Transmitter Commands
IO:8-1-31
Figure 8.1.18. Transmitter Configuration I/O Screen—Performing Transmitter Address
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:8-1-32
Figure 8.1.19. Transmitter Configuration I/O Screen—Assigning a Descriptor .
IO:8-1-33
Figure 8.1.20. Transmitter Configuration I/O Screen—Range Configuration . . .
IO:8-1-34
Figure 8.1.21. Transmitter Configuration I/O Screen—Assigning Units . . . . . . .
IO:8-1-35
Figure 8.1.22. Transmitter Configuration I/O Screen—Damping Configuration . IO:8-1-40
Figure 8.1.23. Transmitter Configuration I/O Screen—Output Configuration . . . IO:8-1-41
Figure 8.1.24. Transmitter Configuration I/O Screen—Block Limit Configuration IO:8-1-42
Figure 8.1.25. Transmitter Configuration I/O Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:8-1-43
Figure 8.1.26. Log Files Directory Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:8-1-47
Figure 8.1.27. Transmitter Maintenance Log Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:8-1-49
Figure 8.2.1. HOB Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:8-2-2

Figure 8.2.2. How an HOB Functions with a Smart FIC or Multipoint Hardware in a Control
Loop . . IO:8-2-3

IO: xxv
Figure 8.2.3. Accessing HOB Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:8-2-4

Figure 8.2.4. HART Output Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:8-2-5
Figure 8.2.5. Output Option Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:8-2-6
Figure 8.2.6. Reverse Output Action Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:8-2-8
Figure 8.2.7. Alarm Priority Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:8-2-9
Figure 8.2.8. HART Output Device Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:8-2-13
Figure 8.2.9. HART Output Device Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:8-2-18
Figure 8.2.10. HART Output Device Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:8-2-24
Figure 8.2.11. The Dead Time field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:8-2-25
Figure 8.2.12. The Deviation Alarm Value field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:8-2-26
Figure 8.2.13. The Slot Fields on the HART Output Device Configuration Screen . . . . . . . .
IO:8-2-27
Figure 8.2.14. VIB Block Configuration Screen—Linking a VIB Block to an HOB
IO:8-2-29
Figure 9.1.1. PLC Interface Hardware Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-1-3
Figure 9.1.2. PLC Interface Software Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-1-5
Figure 9.1.3. Sample Configuration—One Port I/O Card and One Data Highway IO:9-1-8
Figure 9.1.4. Sample Configuration—Two Port I/O Cards and One Data Highway . . . . . . .
IO:9-1-9
Figure 9.1.5. Sample Configuration—Two Port I/O Cards and Two Data Highways . . . . . .
IO:9-1-10
Figure 9.1.6. Sample Configuration—Modbus PLC and Data Highway . . . . . . . IO:9-1-11
Figure 9.1.7. Sample Configuration—Mitsubishi PLC RS422 Network Configuration . . . . .

IO:9-1-13
Figure 9.1.8. Sample Configuration—Mitsubishi PLC Melsec Network Configuration . . . . .
IO:9-1-15
Figure 9.2.1. PLC Addressing Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-2-4
Figure 9.2.2. Sample Simulation Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-2-7
Figure 9.2.3. PLC Configuration Screen for Modbus-Compatible Devices . . . . . IO:9-2-11
Figure 9.2.4. PLC Configuration Screen for Allen-Bradley-Compatible Devices IO:9-2-11
Figure 9.2.5. PLC Configuration Screen for Mitsubishi Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-2-12
Figure 9.3.1. PLCB I/O Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-3-2

Figure 9.3.2. Typical PLC Register Contents and Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-3-10
Figure 9.3.3. PLCB I/O Block Configuration Screen (Read Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-3-11

IO: xxvi
Figure 9.3.4. Bit Designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-3-12
Figure 9.3.5. Using PLC Data in a ControlBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-3-15
Figure 9.3.6. Configuration Window Linking PLC Bit Input to a Graphic . . . . . . . IO:9-3-16
Figure 9.3.7. Bit Descriptor Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-3-17
Figure 9.3.8. Alarm Descriptor Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-3-19
Figure 9.3.9. Writing to a PLC Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-3-20
Figure 9.3.10. PLCB I/O Block Configuration Screen (Write Only) . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-3-22
Figure 9.3.11. Designating a Source for the I/O Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-3-22
Figure 9.3.12. PLCB I/O Block Configuration Screen (Data Type Other Than Flags) . . . . .
IO:9-3-23
Figure 9.3.13. Using the Write Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-3-25
Figure 9.3.14. Reading and Writing Through a Single I/O Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-3-26
Figure 9.4.1. PLC Configuration Screen with Redundancy Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-4-3

Figure 9.4.2. Typical PLC Interface FIC Redundancy for Allen-Bradley PLCs . IO:9-4-5
Figure 9.4.3. Typical PLC Interface FIC Redundancy for Modicon PLCs . . . . . . IO:9-4-6
Figure 9.4.4. Typical Configuration for Mitsubishi PLC Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-4-7
Figure 9.5.1. PLC Configuration Screen with Loopback Test Selected . . . . . . . . IO:9-5-3
Figure 9.5.2. RS422/RS232 Port I/O Card Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-5-5
Figure 9.5.3. RS422/RS422 Port I/O Card Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-5-6
Figure 9.5.4. PLC Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-5-11
Figure 9.5.5. Configuring a PLC--2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-5-12
Figure 9.5.6. PLC--2 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-5-13
Figure 10.1.1. DIB Block Configuration Screen—Filter Configuration . . . . . . . . . IO:10-1-2
Figure 10.1.2. DIB Block Configuration Screen—Field Contact Configuration . IO:10-1-4
Figure 10.1.3. DIB Block Configuration Screen—Message Pair Configuration . IO:10-1-5

IO: xxvii
Figure 10.1.4. DIB Block Configuration Screen—Descriptor Configuration . . . . IO:10-1-6
Figure 10.1.5. DIB Block Configuration Screen—Fail Safe Configuration . . . . . IO:10-1-7
Figure 10.1.6. DIB Block Configuration Screen—FIM Switch Voltage Configuration . . . . . .

IO:10-1-9
Figure 10.1.7. DIB Block Configuration Screen—Event Configuration . . . . . . . .
IO:10-1-10
Figure 10.1.8. DIB Block Configuration Screen—Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . .
IO:10-1-11
Figure 10.1.9. DIB Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:10-1-13
Figure 10.1.10. Delay Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:10-1-18
Figure 10.1.11. Delay--on Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:10-1-19
Figure 10.1.12. Delay--off Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:10-1-21
Figure 10.1.13. Glitch Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:10-1-23
Figure 10.1.14. Settle Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:10-1-25
Figure 10.1.15. Extend Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:10-1-27
Figure 10.1.16. DIB Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:10-1-29
Figure 10.2.1. DOB Block Configuration Screen—Contact Type Configuration IO:10-2-2
Figure 10.2.2. DOB Block Configuration Screen—Output Hold Configuration . . IO:10-2-3
Figure 10.2.3. Output Hold Off (Delay On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:10-2-4
Figure 10.2.4. Output Hold On (Delay Off) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:10-2-5
Figure 10.2.5. Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:10-2-6
Figure 10.2.6. DOB Block Configuration Screen—Message Pair Configuration IO:10-2-7
Figure 10.2.7. DOB Block Configuration Screen—FIM Switch Volt Configuration IO:10-2-9
Figure 10.2.8. DOB Block Configuration Screen—Fail Safe Configuration . . . .

IO:10-2-10
Figure 10.2.9. DOB Block Configuration Screen—Alarm Configuration . . . . . . .
IO:10-2-11
Figure 10.2.10. DOB Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:10-2-12
Figure 10.2.11. DOB Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:10-2-15

IO: xxviii
List of Tables
Table 1.1.1. Types of Input/Output Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:1-1-2

Table 1.2.1. Display Screen Access Arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:1-2-3
Table 1.4.1. Block Status Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:1-4-3
Table 1.4.2. Block Status Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:1-4-5
Table 2.1.1. Thermocouple Configuration Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:2-1-5
Table 2.1.2. RTD Configuration Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:2-1-5
Table 2.1.3. Analog Input Block (AIB) Configuration Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . IO:2-1-12
Table 2.2.1. Analog Output Block (AOB) Configuration Screen Fields ....... IO:2-2-7
Table 3.2.1. Common Fields for the PIOB I/O Block Configuration Screen . . . . IO:3-2-3
Table 3.2.2. Contact Pulse Input PIOB Common Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-6
Table 3.2.3. Voltage Pulse Input PIOB Common Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-8
Table 3.2.4. Pulse Input PIOB Fields to Measure Pulse Frequency . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-10
Table 3.2.5. Pulse Input PIOB Fields to Measure Pulse Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-12
Table 3.2.6. Pulse Input PIOB Fields to Count Pulses--Target Count Provided by
ControlBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-15
Table 3.2.7. Pulse Input PIOB Fields to Count Pulses--Target Count Provided
by Configuror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-19
Table 3.2.8. Pulse Output PIOB Common Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-21
Table 3.2.9. Pulse Output Fields to Output a Pulse at a Specified Frequency . IO:3-2-23
Table 3.2.10. Pulse Output Fields for Pulse Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-25
Table 3.2.11. Pulse Output Fields for a Pulse Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-27
Table 3.2.12. Analog Output PIOB Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:3-2-31
Table 3.2.13. PIOB Fields for a Loader Application with a Binary Output . . . . . . IO:3-2-35
Table 3.2.14. PIOB Fields for a Loader Application with an Analog Output . . . . IO:3-2-39
Table 4.2.1. Common Fields for the TIB Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:4-2-4
Table 4.2.2. Centigrade Temperature Ranges for RTD inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:4-2-7
Table 4.2.3. Centigrade Temperature Ranges for Thermocouple Inputs . . . . . . . IO:4-2-7

IO: xxix
Table 4.2.4. Centigrade Temperature Ranges for CJC Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:4-2-7

Table 4.2.5. Ranges for Millivolt and Ohm Scale Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:4-2-7
Table 4.2.6. Common Fields for an RTD Sensor TIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:4-2-9
Table 4.2.7. Common Fields for a Thermocouple Sensor TIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:4-2-11
Table 5.2.1. Redundant I/O Block (RIOB) Configuration Screen Fields . . . . . . . IO:5-2-2
Table 6.1.1. Contact Input Block (CIB) Filter Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-1-3
Table 6.1.2. Contact Input Block (CIB) Configuration Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . IO:6-1-11
Table 6.1.3. Delay Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-1-14
Table 6.1.4. Delay--on Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-1-15
Table 6.1.5. Delay--off Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-1-16
Table 6.1.6. Glitch Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-1-18
Table 6.1.7. Settle Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-1-20
Table 6.1.8. Extend Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-1-22
Table 6.2.1. Output Hold Off (Delay On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-2-4

Table 6.2.2. Output Hold On (Delay Off) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-2-5
Table 6.2.3. Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:6-2-6
Table 6.2.4. Contact Output Block (COB) Configuration Screen Fields . . . . . . . IO:6-2-10
Table 7.1.1. MIB Ranges for Thermocouple Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:7-1-3

Table 7.1.2. MIB Ranges for RTD Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:7-1-4
Table 7.1.3. MIB Ranges for Miscellaneous Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:7-1-5
Table 7.2.1. Multiplex Input Block (MIB) Configuration Screen Fields . . . . . . . . IO:7-2-3
Table 8.1.1. SIB I/O Block Configuration Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:8-1-14
Table 8.1.2. VIB I/O Block Configuration Screen Fields ................... IO:8-1-18
Table 8.1.3. Transmitter Status Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:8-1-24
Table 8.1.4. Controller Communication Error Messages Generated by the Controller . . . . .

IO:8-1-26
Table 8.1.5. FIC Communication Error Messages Generated by the FIC . . . . . IO:8-1-26
Table 8.1.6. Transmitter Communication Error Generated by the Transmitter . . IO:8-1-27
Table 8.1.7. Transmitter Status Error Messages Generated by the Transmitter IO:8-1-27

IO: xxx
Table 8.1.8. Transmitter Command Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:8-1-30
Table 8.1.9. “Units” Field Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:8-1-36

Table 8.1.10. Alphabetic List of “Units” Field Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:8-1-38
Table 8.1.11. Transmitter Configuration Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:8-1-44
Table 8.1.12. Transmitter Maintenance Log Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:8-1-50
Table 8.2.1. HART Output Block (HOB) Configuration Screen Fields . . . . . . . . IO:8-2-10
Table 8.2.2. HART Output Device Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:8-2-15
Table 8.2.3. Output Device Status Message Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:8-2-16
Table 8.2.4. FIC Communication Error Messages Generated by the FIC . . . . . IO:8-2-17
Table 8.2.5. HART Output Device Configuration Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:8-2-20
Table 8.2.6. Slot Variables for Fisher Transducer Output Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:8-2-28
Table 8.2.7. Slot Variables for Fisher valve, no pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:8-2-28
Table 8.2.8. Slot Variables for Fisher valve with pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:8-2-28
Table 9.2.1. Function Codes for Specific Modbus Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-2-2

Table 9.2.2. Modbus Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-2-2
Table 9.2.3. Mitsubishi PLC Device Ranges and Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-2-6
Table 9.2.4. Station Numbers Octal-Decimal Conversion Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-2-9
Table 9.2.5. PLC Configuration Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-2-13
Table 9.3.1. Discrete Bit Maps for RS3 and Modicon Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-3-3
Table 9.3.2. Discrete Bit Map for RS3 and Modicon Interface (GE Series 6) . . IO:9-3-4
Table 9.3.3. Discrete Bit Map for RS3 and Allen--Bradley PLC 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-3-5
Table 9.3.4. Discrete Bit Map for RS3 and Allen--Bradley PLC 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-3-7
Table 9.3.5. Register Map for RS3 and GE Series 6 PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-3-8
Table 9.3.6. Register Map for RS3 and Modicon PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-3-8
Table 9.3.7. Register Map for RS3 and MItsubishi PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-3-9
Table 9.3.8. 16-bit Binary-to-Hexadecimal Conversion Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-3-12
Table 9.3.9. PLCB I/O Block Configuration Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-3-13
Table 9.3.10. Bit Descriptor and Alarm Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-3-18
Table 9.3.11. Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-3-23

IO: xxxi
Table 9.4.1. PLC Configuration Redundancy Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-4-3

Table 9.5.1. General PLC Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-5-18
Table 9.5.2. PLC Communication Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-5-19
Table 9.5.3. Mitsubishi Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:9-5-20
Table 10.1.1. Discrete Input Block (DIB) Filter Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:10-1-3
Table 10.1.2. Discrete Input Block (DIB) Configuration Screen Fields . . . . . . . .

IO:10-1-14
Table 10.1.3. Delay Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:10-1-18
Table 10.1.4. Delay--on Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:10-1-20
Table 10.1.5. Delay--off Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:10-1-22
Table 10.1.6. Glitch Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:10-1-24
Table 10.1.7. Settle Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:10-1-26
Table 10.1.8. Extend Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IO:10-1-28
Table 10.2.1. Output Hold Off (Delay On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:10-2-4
Table 10.2.2. Output Hold On (Delay Off) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:10-2-5
Table 10.2.3. Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IO:10-2-6
Table 10.2.4. Discrete Output Block (DOB) Configuration Screen Fields . . . . .

IO:10-2-13

1984-2645-7x01
1984-2645-7x11
RS3t
Chapter 1:
Introduction to Input/Output Blocks
Section 1: What are Input/Output Blocks? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1-1

Input/Output Block Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1-2
Role of Input and Output Blocks in a Control Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1-4
How Input/Output Blocks Relate to the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1-5
How Input/Output Blocks Relate to ControlBlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1-5
Scaling Values in a Control Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1-6
Internal Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1-6
Display Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1-7
Section 2: Using an I/O Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2-1

Initially Configuring an I/O Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2-1
Display Screen Access Arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2-3
Section 3: Input/Output Block Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-1

PeerWay Node Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-2
Console Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-2
Addressing within ControlFiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-4
Controller Processor Card Slot (ControlFile Card) Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-4
Card Cage/Discrete Termination Panel Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-6
Card Slot/Communication Line Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-7
Card Cage Card Slot Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-9
Analog Card Cage Field Interface Card (FIC) Slot Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-10
Contact Card Cage Field Interface Card (FIC) Slot Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-11
Communication Connect Card III Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-12
Communication Termination Panel II Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-13
I/O Point Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-14
Analog I/O Point Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-15
Multipoint Analog I/O Point Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-16
Pulse I/O Point Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-17
Contact I/O Point Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-18
Multiplexer Inputs Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-19
Isolated Discrete I/O Point Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-20
Direct Discrete I/O Point Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-21
Section 4: Block Directory and Block Status Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4-1

Viewing Information About Configured Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4-2
Viewing the Block Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4-4
RS3: Introduction to Input/Output Blocks Contents

IO: ii
Section 5: Hints for Configuring I/O Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5-1


IO: iii
List of Figures
Figure Page
1.1.1 Role of I/O Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1-4
1.1.2 Flow of Values through a Typical Control Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1-7
1.2.1 I/O Point Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2-1
1.2.2 Unconfigured I/O Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2-2
1.2.3 Example of Access Arrows on an I/O Block Configuration
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2-4
1.3.1 PeerWay Node Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-2
1.3.2 Addressing PeerWay Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-3
1.3.3 Controller Processor Card Slot Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-4
1.3.4 Controller Processor Card Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-5
1.3.5 Card Cage/Discrete Termination Panel Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-6
1.3.6 Card Cage Card Slot/Communication Line Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-7
1.3.7 Card Cage and Communication Line Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-8
1.3.8 Card Cage Card Slot Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-9
1.3.9 Analog Card Cage Card Slot Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-10
1.3.10 Contact Card Cage Card Slot Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-11
1.3.11 Communication Connect Card III Line Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-12
1.3.12 Communication Termination Panel II Line Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-13
1.3.13 I/O Point Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-14
1.3.14 Analog Field Interface Card (FIC) I/O Point Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-15
1.3.15 Multipoint Analog I/O Point Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-16
1.3.16 Pulse Field Interface Card (FIC)/IO Point Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-17
1.3.17 Contact FIC I/O Point Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-18
1.3.18 Multiplexer Front End Module (FEM) I/O Point Addressing . . . . . . . . . 1-3-19
1.3.19 Isolated Discrete I/O Point Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-20
1.3.20 Direct Discrete I/O Point Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-21
1.4.1 Block Directory Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4-2
1.4.2 Block Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4-4

IO: iv
List of Tables
Table Page
1.1.1 Types of Input/Output Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1-2
1.2.1 Display Screen Access Arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2-3
1.4.1 Block Status Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4-3
1.4.2 Block Status Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4-5

IO: 1-1-1
Section 1:
What are Input/Output Blocks?
This section describes the input and output block types, the role of input
and output blocks in a control loop, and how values are scaled in a
control loop.
RS3: Introduction to Input/Output Blocks What are Input/Output Blocks?

IO: 1-1-2
Input/Output Block Types
Table 1.1.1 briefly describes the I/O block types that are covered in
more detail in the following chapters of this manual.
Table 1.1.1. Types of Input/Output Blocks
Type of Input/Output Block Description
Analog Input Block (AIB) Accepts an analog field input through an analog input Field Interface Card
(FIC) and prepares the data for use by the rest of the system. Performs
analog input signal addressing, signal conditioning, trending, and
alarming.
Analog Output Block (AOB) Prepares a specific analog value for output to the field. Performs analog
output signal storage and addressing and provides for selection of direct
or reverse action.
Pulse Input/Output Block Accepts pulse field input through a pulse input/output FIC and generates
(PIOB) output pulses of specified width, frequency, or total count for output to the
field. The PIOB performs pulse input signal addressing and signal
conditioning as well as pulse output signal storage and addressing.
Temperature Input Block (TIB) Receives a temperature measurement from a resistance temperature
device (RTD) or a thermocouple. It does not require the use of a special
RTD or thermocouple transmitter.
Redundant Input/Output Tracks the health and backup status of the FICs. Performs a backup of an
Block (RIOB) FIC. Configured when redundant FICs or FIMs are being used.
Contact Input Block (CIB) Accepts a contact field input through an optical isolator and contact FIC
and prepares the data for use by the rest of the system. Performs contact
input signal addressing, signal conditioning, event recording, trending, and
alarming.
Contact Output Block (COB) Prepares a specific contact state for output to the field. Performs contact
output signal storage and addressing and provides for inverting output
relative to input.
Multiplex Input Block (MIB) Accepts an analog field input through a Front End Module (FEM) and
prepares the data for use by the rest of the system. Performs analog input
signal addressing, signal conditioning, including selection of thermocouple
or RTD type, trending, and alarming.
Smart Transmitter Input Block Receives signals from the Smart transmitter for use by other blocks.
(SIB) Allows modification of the Smart transmitter configuration parameters.
Configured when the field I/O device is a Rosemount Smart transmitter.
Value Input Block (VIB) Receives digital signals from the Smart transmitter for use by other blocks.
Allows more than one process variable to be measured. Configured when
the field I/O device is a multivariable Rosemount Smart transmitter with
more than one measured process variable.
(continued on next page)

IO: 1-1-3
Table 1.1.1. Types of Input/Output Blocks (continued)
Type of Input/Output Block Description
Receives digital signals from the ControlBlock and prepares either analog
HART Output Block (HOB) or digital signals for output to Smart field devices. Shares characteristics
of both Analog Output Blocks (AOBs) and Smart Input Blocks (SIBs).
Programmable Logic Reads or writes the contents of a PLC register or reads from or writes to a
Controller Block (PLCB) PLC register.
Discrete Input Block (DIB) Accepts a discrete field input through a Discrete Termination Panel and
prepares the data for use by the rest of the system. Performs discrete
input signal addressing, signal conditioning, event recording, trending, and
alarming.
Discrete Output Block (DOB) Prepares a specific discrete state for output to the field. Performs discrete
output signal storage and addressing and provides for inverting output
relative to input.

IO: 1-1-4
Role of Input and Output Blocks in a Control Loop
The shaded blocks in Figure 1.1.1 show an input block and an output
block in a typical control loop.
FIELD FIELD
DEVICE DEVICE
CONTROLLER
PROCESSOR
FIC, FIM INPUT CONTROL OUTPUT FIC or

or BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK FIM
FEM
OPERATOR ENTRY
Figure 1.1.1. Role of I/O Blocks

IO: 1-1-5
How Input/Output Blocks Relate to the Hardware
Input/output (I/O) blocks are used to bring in signals from Field Interface
Cards (FIC), Field Interface Modules (FIM), or Front End Modules
(FEM) to the system and to send system--generated signals back to
FICs or FIMs. The input/output block stores the address of the
corresponding pair of terminals for each signal. I/O blocks can perform
filtering and other signal conditioning functions as well as alarm
checking and event message generating.
An input block and an output block are configured for each signal.
Input/output blocks can be viewed and accessed from numerous
operator console screens.
How Input/Output Blocks Relate to ControlBlocks
Input blocks are used to provide field inputs to ControlBlocks.

ControlBlocks are computational blocks in which control functions are
configured and performed. Continuous calculations and logic functions
are performed in this block. In addition, ControlBlocks can perform
alarm checking and generate event messages.
A ControlBlock can contain:
D Up to 15 continuous inputs and 15 discrete inputs per block.
D One continuous output and 16 discrete outputs per block.
ControlBlock outputs can be sent to output blocks for transport to FICs

or FIMs.

IO: 1-1-6
Scaling Values in a Control Loop
Figure 1.1.2 shows how values are transmitted through a control loop,
beginning with a 4--20 mA signal that is converted to a 0--1 value for
internal use by the RS3 control system.
Internal Scaling
The RS3 control system uses a 0--1 value to perform all I/O block and
ControlBlock functions and calculations. This 0--1 value, which is called
an internal scaling value, is for internal control system use only. This
internal scaling value can be displayed on faceplates and console
screens as a display scaling value that you define.

IO: 1-1-7
Display Scaling
The scaling value that is displayed is called a display scaling value.

This value corresponds to the internal scaling value and is expressed in
terms of the plant units. Input blocks can have display scaling different
from that of output blocks.
You can define the display scaling value as desired, using the “Eng
Zero” and “Eng Max” fields on the I/O Block Configuration screen. You
can define the “Eng Units” field to describe the block values. A
definition of the I/O block scaling fields follows:
D Eng Zero Assigned value that is to be displayed when
the I/O block output is zero percent
D Eng Max Assigned value that is to be displayed when
the I/O block output is 100 percent
D Eng Units Assigned units for the block value
FIELD FIELD
DEVICE DEVICE
INPUT CONTROL OUTPUT FIC or

FIC, BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK
FIM or 0--1 FIM
4--20 0--1 0--1 0--1 4--20
mA FEM value value value value mA
signal signal
Figure 1.1.2. Flow of Values through a Typical Control Loop

IO: 1-2-1
Section 2:
Using an I/O Block Configuration Screen
This section describes the I/O Block Configuration screen.
Initially Configuring an I/O Block Configuration Screen
The I/O Block Configuration screen is used to configure I/O blocks.

- To call up an I/O Block Configuration screen, type:
TA=(I/O block address) [ENTER]
Figure 1.2.1 shows an example of I/O block addressing. For more

information on I/O block addressing, see the System Overview Manual.
Figure 1.2.2 shows an unconfigured I/O Block Configuration screen.
=16 A B 1 05
PeerWay Node Number I/O Point Address

(Must begin with = sign) Analog Points: 01 -- 03
(Leading zeros can be omitted) Pulse Points: 01 -- 03
1--992 Contact Points: 01 -- 06
Discrete Points: 01 -- 32
Multiplexer Points: 01 -- 20
(Leading zeros can be omitted)
Controller Processor Card Slot
(ControlFile)A -- H
Card Cage Card Slot
Analog or Contact (FIC): 1 -- 8
Card Cage
Analog Card Cages: A -- D
Contact Card Cages: A -- B
Figure 1.2.1. I/O Point Address
RS3: Introduction to Input/Output Blocks Using an I/O Block Configuration Screen

IO: 1-2-2
- To initially configure an I/O Block Configuration screen:

Cursor to the “Block Type” field, press [NEXT OPTION] repeatedly
until the desired block type appears and press [ENTER]. The I/O
Block Configuration screen changes according to the type of block
selected.
Cursor to field and press [NEXT OPTION] repeatedly to

select the desired block type; then press [ENTER].
I/O BLOCK CONFIGURATION 25-Jan-90 10:42:34

Address =10AB101 Device Type AIB
Block Type ÞNONE
Block Not Configured
CONFIG 1
Figure 1.2.2. Unconfigured I/O Block Configuration Screen

IO: 1-2-3
Display Screen Access Arrows
Fields on the I/O block configuration screens are often preceded by an

arrow that indicates the user who has access privileges for that field.
Access privileges allow a user to manipulate or make entries to the field
by cursoring to the arrow and pressing the desired keys. Table 1.2.1
lists each access arrow and its corresponding user.
Figure 1.2.3 shows a sample screen with the various access arrows.
The lower right corner of the screen displays the user whose access key
is inserted in the console.
Fields that are lacking an arrow are for display only and cannot be
manipulated by a user. Many fields, however, allow user access only
when an I/O block is in a particular mode, such as Manual.
Table 1.2.1. Display Screen Access Arrows
Arrow User with Access Privileges Key
Þ Configuror Config
® Supervisor (and Configuror) Super
> Operator (and Supervisor, Configuror) Oper
NOTE: In a Password System, there is an additional level of access: system

manager. Fields with sysmgr access only are denoted by an asterisk (*).

IO: 1-2-4
A configuror arrow indicates a A supervisor arrow indicates a field

field that can be manipulated that can be manipulated only by a
only by a configuror. supervisor or configuror.

Address =10AD101 Device Type AIB
Block Tag Þ Block Type ÞAIB Mode ®MANUAL
Auto Lock Þno
Field Value -15.29
-15.29 Filt Time Þ None Block Out >.00
Eng Units Þ Sig Char Þ TC-J F Calibrate ®None
Eng Zero Þ.00 Lo Cutoff Þ .00 Nom Out >None
Eng Max Þ100.00 Inst Bias ®.00
Descriptor Þ
ALARMS
Inst High ®None Crit High ® None Adv High ®None
Inst Low ®None Crit Low ® None Adv Low ®None
Hardware Alarm Code 8 Priority Þ0 Plant UnitÞ0 Al DdBand Þ1.00
No arrow indicates a field An operator arrow indicates a field that

that is for display only. No can be manipulated by an operator,
entries are allowed. supervisor, or configuror.
Figure 1.2.3. Example of Access Arrows on an I/O Block Configuration Screen

IO: 1-3-1
Section 3:
Input/Output Block Addressing
Addressing is the convention used to insure that data is routed from the
field to the system, from one software block to another within the
system, from the system to the field, and between the system and the
consoles.
Data that is present in a software block is available for use by other

software blocks residing on the PeerWay. In order for this data to be
exchanged successfully, an orderly addressing scheme for all system
hardware and software must be employed.
A typical MultiPurpose I/O address is =16AB105. Address numbers are

always preceded by an equals (=) sign, (for example, =27). Also,
leading zeros are not required for an address to be considered valid.
For example, =1BA503 and =001BA503 are both proper addresses for
the same location.
RS3: Introduction to Input/Output Blocks Input/Output Block Addressing

IO: 1-3-2
PeerWay Node Addressing
The maximum number of nodes that can reside on a PeerWay is 32.

Highway Interface Adapters can be used to link PeerWays and connect
up to 992 nodes. Each node is assigned a unique address number
(from 1 to 32) by positioning jumpers that are located internally in the
device. Two nodes cannot have the same PeerWay node address.
Figure 1.3.1 shows PeerWay node addressing. Figure 1.3.2 shows the
components of a PeerWay node address.
=16
PeerWay Node Number

(Must begin with = sign)
1--992
Figure 1.3.1. PeerWay Node Addressing
Console Addressing
The hardware address jumpers for consoles are located on a circuit

board located inside the console. The jumper possibilities available in a
console allow only even-numbered addresses from 2 to 32 (992 for
nodes with HIA) to be selected. No other hardware or software within a
console requires further addressing. Figure 1.3.1 also shows the
components of a console address.

IO: 1-3-3
Command
Console
=12
=3
=28
ControlFile
FlexTerms
MicroVAX Computer
Modem Modem
=14
or
Supervisory
Computer
Interface (SCI)
Supervisory
=6 Computer
Diogenes
Interface
Diogenes
Control
System
=10
System
Resource
Unit (SRU)
Figure 1.3.2. Addressing PeerWay Nodes

IO: 1-3-4
Addressing within ControlFiles
This section describes the addressing scheme for the controller

processor card slot, card cage, card cage card slot, analog card cage
FIC slot, and contact card cage FIC slot.
Controller Processor Card Slot (ControlFile Card) Addressing
The address of the Controller Processor is assigned according to the

ControlFile slot occupied by the Controller Processor card. Each of the
eight individual Controller Processor card slots (A through H) in a
ControlFile has a unique hardware address. Figure 1.3.3 shows the
components of a Controller Processor card slot address. Figure 1.3.4
shows the Controller Processor card addressing.
=16 A
PeerWay Node Number Controller Processor Card Slot

(Must begin with = sign) (ControlFile)
(Leading zeros can be omitted) A -- H
1--992
Figure 1.3.3. Controller Processor Card Slot Address

IO: 1-3-5
ControlFile = 16
B
U
F A B C D E F G H
F
E C C C C C C C C C C
R O O O O O O O O O O
P P O O N N N N N N N N N
O O R R O T T T T T T T T
A W W N
D D R R R R R R R R
E E I I V O O O O O O O O
R R N N O L L L L L L L L
A A L L L L L L L L L
R R T T A E E E E E E E E
B E E O O T R R ControlFile
R R Card
R Slots
R R R
U G G R R I
F U U L P P P P P P P P
F L L P P E R R R R R R R R
E A A R R O O O O O O O O
R T T O O M C C C C C C C C
O O C C E E E E E E E E E
B R R E E M S S S S S S S S
S S O S S S S S S S S
S S R O O O O O O O O
O O Y R R R R R R R R
R R
=16A
=16B
Controller =16C
Processor Card =16D
Addresses
=16E
=16F
=16G
=16H
Figure 1.3.4. Controller Processor Card Addressing

IO: 1-3-6
Card Cage/Discrete Termination Panel Addressing
A Controller Processor card supports up to a total of four card cages

and/or discrete termination panels to facilitate routing signals to and
from the field. The card cages and/or discrete termination panels are
designated A, B, C, and D.
Figure 1.3.5 shows the components of the card cage/discrete

termination panel address.
=16 A B
PeerWay Node Number Card Cage

(Must begin with = sign) Analog Card Cages: A -- D
(Leading zeros can be omitted) Contact Card Cages: A -- B
1--992 Discrete Termination Panel: A -- D
Controller Processor Card Slot
(ControlFile)
A -- H
Figure 1.3.5. Card Cage/Discrete Termination Panel Address
The hardware address jumpers are located on each card cage

assembly and on each discrete termination panel. The jumper
possibilities for card cages allow up to four I/O card cages with address
A through D.
D Contact card cages can occupy only positions A and B.
D Analog card cages can occupy positions A through D.
D The discrete termination panels can use any address (A through
D) that is not used by a card cage.
— If the communication lines come from a Communications
Terminal Panel II, then each communication line can address
four discrete termination panels: A, B, C, and D.
— If the communication lines come from a Communication
Connect Card III that is installed in an analog card cage, only
the unoccupied addresses can be assigned to termination
panels on each communication line. For example, if the
analog card cage is in position A and a contact card cage is in
position B, then discrete termination panels on each line can
be addressed only as C and D.

IO: 1-3-7
Card Slot/Communication Line Addressing
Figure 1.3.6 shows the components of a card cage card slot address.
In an address using discrete I/O, the eight communication lines

correspond to the card--cage slots as shown in Figure 1.3.6.
Communication lines can come from one of two devices:

D Communication Connect Card III installed in a dedicated slot of
the Analog Card Cage.
D Communication Termination Panel II
=16 A B 1
PeerWay Node Number Card Cage Card Slot

or
Communication Line
1--992 Analog, Pulse, or Contact (FIC): 1 -- 8
Communication Line: 1--8
Controller Processor Card Slot Card Cage
(ControlFile) or
A -- H Discrete Termination Panel
Contact Card Cages: A -- B Discrete
Termination Panel: A -- D
Figure 1.3.6. Card Cage Card Slot/Communication Line Address
Figure 1.3.7 shows an example of card cage and communication--line

addressing.

IO: 1-3-8
ControlFile
=16A
Contact
Card Cage A
=16AA
Analog
Card Cage B
=16AB
Communication
Connect Card III
Line 1
Line 2 Line 8
Equivalent of =16ACxxx =16ACxxx . . . =16ACxxx

Card Cage C
=16AC
ADDRESS /
COMM RATE
A B C D E F
Discrete
Termination
Panels HD1
=16ADxxx =16ADxxx . . . =16ADxxx
Equivalent of
Card Cage D
=16AD
Figure 1.3.7. Card Cage and Communication Line Addressing

IO: 1-3-9
Card Cage Card Slot Addressing
Figure 1.3.8 shows the components of a card cage card slot address.
=16 A B 1
PeerWay Node Number Card Cage Card Slot
(Must begin with = sign) Analog, Pulse, or Contact (FIC):
(Leading zeros can be omitted) 1 -- 8
1--992
Controller Processor Card Slot Card Cage

(ControlFile) Analog Card Cages: A -- D
A -- H Contact Card Cages: A -- B
Figure 1.3.8. Card Cage Card Slot Address

IO: 1-3-10
Analog Card Cage Field Interface Card (FIC) Slot Addressing
Up to eight analog Field Interface Cards (FICs) or pulse input/output

FICs reside in the analog card cage. These eight cards represent eight
communication lines linking the card cage with the Controller Processor.
Each of the individual card cage card slots (1 through 8) has a unique
hardware address. Figure 1.3.9 shows the analog card cage FIC
addressing.
Analog Card Cage A

=16AA
=16AA1
=16AA2
Analog =16AA3
Card Cage =16AA4
Card Slots
=16AA5
=16AA6
=16AA7
=16AA8
Figure 1.3.9. Analog Card Cage Card Slot Addressing

IO: 1-3-11
Contact Card Cage Field Interface Card (FIC) Slot Addressing
Up to eight contact Field Interface Cards (FICs) reside in the contact

card cage. These eight cards represent eight communication lines
linking the card cage with the Controller Processor.
Each of the individual card cage card slots (1 through 8) has a unique
hardware address. Figure 1.3.10 shows the contact card cage FIC
addressing.
Contact Card Cage B

=16AB
Contact =16AB4
Card Cage =16AB3
Card Slots =16AB2
=16AB1
Contact =16AB5
Card Cage =16AB6
Card Slots
=16AB7
=16AB8
Figure 1.3.10. Contact Card Cage Card Slot Addressing

IO: 1-3-12
Communication Connect Card III Addressing
Up to eight communication lines from the Communication Connect Card

III can each run to a discrete termination panel. Up to three discrete
termination panels can be connected to each line if no additional card
cages are connected to the CP card slot.
Each communication line (1 through 8) has a unique hardware address.

Figure 1.3.11 shows the communication line addressing with slots A and
B occupied by card cages.
CP Card Slot A Communication Connect Card II

=16A in Analog Card Cage B
Communication Lines 1 -- 8
Line 1
Line 2
Line 8
Equivalent of =16AC1xx =16AC2xx . . . =16AC8xx

Card Cage C
=16AC
ADDRESS /
COMM RATE
A B C D E F
Discrete
Termination
Panels HD1
=16AD1xx =16AD2xx . . . =16AD8xx
Equivalent of
Card Cage D
=16AD
Figure 1.3.11. Communication Connect Card III Line Addressing

IO: 1-3-13
Communication Termination Panel II Addressing
Up to eight communication lines from a Communication Termination

Panel II can connect directly to a discrete termination panel. Up to four
discrete termination panels can be connected to each line.
Each communication line (1 through 8) has a unique hardware address.

Figure 1.3.12 shows the communication line addressing.
CP Card Slot A
=16A
Communication Termination Panel
II
Communication
Lines 1 -- 8
Line 1
Line 2
Line 8
Equivalent of =16AC1xx =16AC2xx . . . =16AC8xx

Card Cage C
=16AC
ADDRESS /
COMM RATE
A B C D E F
Discrete
Termination
Panels HD1
=16AD1xx =16AD2xx . . . =16AD8xx
Equivalent of
Card Cage D
=16AD
Figure 1.3.12. Communication Termination Panel II Line Addressing

IO: 1-3-14
I/O Point Addressing
The Field Interface Cards (FICs), Front End Modules (FEMs), and
discrete termination panels communicate with input/output (I/O) devices
in the field. The number of points on an FIC varies for each type of
card. Each of the I/O points residing on an FIC, FEM, or discrete
termination panel has a unique hardware address. Figure 1.3.13 shows
the components of an I/O point address.
=16 A B 1 05
PeerWay Node Number I/O Point Address

(Must begin with = sign) Analog Points: 01 -- 03
(Leading zeros can be omitted) Contact Points: 01 -- 06
1--992 Discrete Points; 01 -- 32
TC/RTD Points: 01 -- 20
Controller Processor Card Slot Card Cage Card Slot

(ControlFile) Analog or Contact (FIC): 1 -- 8
A -- H Communication Line: 1 -- 8
Card Cage
Contact Card Cages: A -- B
Discrete Termination Panel: A -- D
Figure 1.3.13. I/O Point Address

IO: 1-3-15
Analog I/O Point Addressing
An analog Field Interface Card (FIC) supports 3 points. These can be

defined as 2 input points and 1 output point, or 3 input points. The
analog I/O points have an address of 1 through 3 (with the analog
output residing in point 3). Figure 1.3.14 shows analog FIC point
addressing.
NOTE: Analog I/O points can also include other block types with the
following addressing limitations.
D SIB (Smart Transmitter Input Blocks): 01 -- 03
D VIB (Value Input Blocks): 04 -- 32
D TIB (Temperature Input Blocks): 01 -- 02
D HOB (HART Output Blocks): 03
Analog Field Interface Card Slots

Analog I/O =16AA1 through =16AA8
points
=16AA101
=16AA102
=16AA103
=16AA201
=16AA202
=16AA203
=16AA701
=16AA702
=16AA703
Third point on each card can be

analog input or output
Figure 1.3.14. Analog Field Interface Card (FIC) I/O Point Addressing

IO: 1-3-16
Multipoint Analog I/O Point Addressing
A multipoint analog Field Interface Module (FIM) supports 16 points.

The points are either all inputs or all outputs, depending on the FIM
hardware.
=16AA101
=16AA102
=16AA103
=16AA104
=16AA105
=16AA106
=16AA107
=16AA108
=16AA109
=16AA110
=16AA111
=16AA112
=16AA113
=16AA114
=16AA115
=16AA116
Figure 1.3.15. Multipoint Analog I/O Point Addressing

IO: 1-3-17
Pulse I/O Point Addressing
A pulse input/output Field Interface Card (FIC) supports 3 points.

These can be defined as 2 pulse input or 2 pulse output points and 1
pulse mA output point. The pulse I/O points have an address of 1
through 3 (with the pulse mA output residing in point 3). Figure 1.3.16
shows pulse FIC point addressing.
Pulse Field Interface Card Slots

=16AA1 through =16AA8
Pulse I/O points
=16AA101 Pulse input or output

=16AA103 Pulse mA output


Figure 1.3.16. Pulse Field Interface Card (FIC) I/O Point Addressing

IO: 1-3-18
Contact I/O Point Addressing
A contact Field Interface Card (FIC) supports 6 points. The contact I/O
points have an address of 1 through 6. Figure 1.3.17 shows contact
FIC point addressing.
Contact Field Interface Card Slots

=16AB1 through =16AB8
Contact
I/O points
=16AB101
=16AB102
=16AB103
=16AB104
=16AB105
=16AB106
=16AB601
=16AB602
=16AB603
=16AB604
=16AB605
=16AB606
Figure 1.3.17. Contact FIC I/O Point Addressing

IO: 1-3-19
Multiplexer Inputs Addressing
The Multiplexer FlexTerm supports up to five Front End Modules

(FEMs). It is not possible to install analog FICs or contact FICs in any
position in a Multiplexer FlexTerm. Each FEM supports up to 20 input
points for a total of 100 points. Terminations are made to terminal strips
on the FEM. The position that the particular signal occupies in the FEM
determines the address of that input. Figure 1.3.18 shows the FEM
input addressing in a Multiplexer FlexTerm.
Multiplexer
input points
=16A1
=16A2
=16A3
=16A4 FlexTerm Card Cage
=16A5 =16A
=16A6
=16A7
=16A8
=16A9
=16A10
=16A11 =16A41
=16A12 =16A42
=16A13 =16A43
=16A14 =16A44
=16A15 =16A45
=16A16 =16A46
=16A17 =16A47
=16A18 =16A48
=16A19 =16A49
=16A20 =16A50
=16A51
=16A52
=16A53
=16A54
=16A55
=16A56
=16A57
=16A58
=16A59
=16A60
Figure 1.3.18. Multiplexer Front End Module (FEM) I/O Point Addressing

IO: 1-3-20
Isolated Discrete I/O Point Addressing
An isolated discrete termination panel consists of two parts: Panel A

supports a total of 16 input and/or output points. Panel B supports up to
16 input--only points. Figure 1.3.19 shows I/O point addressing for an
isolated discrete termination panel.
Discrete Termination Panel =16AC1
=16AC101
=16AC102 Inputs or outputs:
=16AC103 01 -- 16 Isolated
=16AC104 Discrete
=16AC105 Termination
=16AC106 Panel A
=16AC107
=16AC108
=16AC109
=16AC110
=16AC111
=16AC112
=16AC113
=16AC117
=16AC114
=16AC118
=16AC115
=16AC119
=16AC116
=16AC120
Inputs only:
=16AC121 Isolated
17 -- 32
=16AC122 Discrete
=16AC123 Termination
=16AC124 Panel B
=16AC125
=16AC126
=16AC127
=16AC128
=16AC129
=16AC130
=16AC131
=16AC132
Figure 1.3.19. Isolated Discrete I/O Point Addressing

IO: 1-3-21
Direct Discrete I/O Point Addressing
A direct discrete termination panel supports up to a total of 32 points.

Addresses 01 to 16 can be either input or output; addresses 17 to 32
can be input--only points. Figure 1.3.20 shows I/O point addressing for
a direct discrete termination panel.
Discrete Termination Panel =16AC1
=16AC101
=16AC102 Inputs or outputs:
=16AC103 01 -- 16
=16AC104
=16AC105
=16AC106 =16AC117
=16AC107 =16AC118 Inputs only:
=16AC108 =16AC119 17 -- 32
=16AC109 =16AC120
=16AC110 =16AC121
=16AC111 =16AC122
=16AC112 =16AC123
=16AC113 =16AC124 Direct
=16AC114 =16AC125 Discrete
=16AC115 =16AC126 Termination
=16AC116 =16AC127 Panel
=16AC128
=16AC129
=16AC130
=16AC131
=16AC132
Figure 1.3.20. Direct Discrete I/O Point Addressing

IO: 1-4-1
Section 4:
Block Directory and Block Status Screens
This section describes the Block Directory screen and the Block Status
screen, which provide information about the configured I/O blocks and
ControlBlocks.
RS3: Introduction to Input/Output Blocks Block Directory and Block Status Screens
IO: 1-4-2
Viewing Information About Configured Blocks
The Block Directory screen displays information about configured I/O

blocks and ControlBlocks. This screen is for display only; you cannot
make entries from it.
- To call up the Block Directory screen, type:
CBD: [ENTER]
The Block Directory screen for the first available Controller Processor is
displayed first. I/O blocks are listed first, followed by ControlBlocks.
Press [PAGE AHEAD] to view all configured blocks in that Controller
Processor; and then press [PAGE AHEAD] to see the blocks for the next
Controller Processor. Press [EXCH] to call up the Block Status screen
for the Controller Processor.
Figure 1.4.1 shows a sample Block Directory screen for Controller
Processor =3C. Table 1.4.1 describes the types of information provided
in the screen areas.
- To call up an I/O Block Configuration

screen or a ControlBlock Faceplate
screen:
D Cursor to the tag or address of the Identifies the Controller Processor on
desired block and press [SELECT]. which the blocks are configured
BLOCK DIRECTORY: 3C 01-Oct-90 11:47:12

Steps in Plant Size
Block Tag Type Mode Alarm Manual Unit Stat Dyn Total
=3C-01 XMTR-1 SIB Auto 2 25 8 33
=3C-02 CIB AUTO 2 24 9 34
=3C-05 AUTOSET DISC AUTO a 2 269 31 300
=3C-06 MANSET DISC OPERATOR 2 131 31 162
=3C-07 MATRIX DISC AUTO 2 95 39 134
=3C-10 Motor-1 DISC AUTO 2 116 72 188
=3C-11 MCC-1 DISC AUTO 2 237 55 292
=3C-14 Valve-1 DVC AUTO 2 109 64 173
=3C-16 VCC-1 DISC AUTO 2 241 55 296
=3C-18 Valve-2 DVC AUTO 2 109 64 173
=3C-20 VCC-2 DISC AUTO 2 241 55 296
=3C-22 Valve-3 DVC AUTO 2 110 64 174
*MORE*
Figure 1.4.1. Block Directory Screen
IO: 1-4-3
Table 1.4.1. Block Status Screen Fields
Field Description
Block Address of the block.
Tag User--defined block tag.
Type Type of block. For ControlBlocks, identifies the ControlBlock function.
Mode Current block mode.
Indicates whether the block is currently in alarm. Not all block alarms trigger an
Alarm
indication.
For ControlBlocks only, this field displays any steps that are currently in manual
Steps in Manual
mode.
Plant Unit User--defined group to which the block is assigned.
Amount of static and dynamic space (bytes) used by the block and the total amount
Size
of space (bytes) the block uses. This information is displayed for a configuror only.
IO: 1-4-4
Viewing the Block Status
The Block Status screen displays the configured I/O blocks and
ControlBlocks that are in modes other than Auto or that are in alarm.
This screen is for display only; you cannot make entries from it.
- To call up the Block Status screens, type:
CBS [ENTER]
The Block Status screen for the first available Controller Processor is
displayed first. I/O blocks are listed first, followed by ControlBlocks.
Press [PAGE AHEAD] to view all other blocks in that Controller
Processor, and then press [PAGE AHEAD] to see the blocks for the next
Controller Processor. Press [EXCH] to call up the Block Directory
screen for the Controller Processor.
Figure 1.4.2 shows a sample Block Status screen for Controller

Processor =3C. Table 1.4.2 describes the types of information provided
in the screen areas.
- To call up an I/O Block Configuration

screen or a ControlBlock Faceplate
screen:
D Cursor to the tag or address of the Identifies the Controller Processor on
desired block and press [SELECT]. which the blocks are configured
BLOCK STATUS: 3C 01-Oct-90 11:47:12

Steps in Plant Size
Block Tag Type Mode Alarm Manual Unit Stat Dyn Total
=3C-04 XMTR SIB Auto 2 25 8 33
=3C-05 AOB Auto 2 112 115 225
=3C-06 MANSET DISC OPERATOR 2 131 31 162
=3C-43 Valve-1 DISC AUTO ALARM 2 210 65 275
=3C-44 Valve-1 DISC OPERATOR 2 109 119 228
=3C-97 VCC-1 PID MANUAL b 2 262 55 317
=3C-98 VCC-1 PID MANUAL 2 191 75 266
=3C-99 VCC-1 PID MANUAL 2 241 50 291
=3CA101 SIB SIB MANUAL 2 25 8 33
*END*
Figure 1.4.2. Block Status Screen
IO: 1-4-5
Table 1.4.2. Block Status Screen Fields
Field Description
Block Address of the block.
Tag User--defined block tag.
Type Type of block. For ControlBlocks, identifies the ControlBlock function.
Indicates whether the block is currently in alarm. Not all block alarms trigger an
Alarm
indication.
Steps in Manual For ControlBlocks only, displays any steps that are currently in manual mode.
Plant Unit User--defined group to which the block is assigned.
Amount of static and dynamic space (bytes) used by the block and the total amount
Size
of space (bytes) the block uses. This information is displayed for a configuror only.
IO: 1-5-1
Section 5:
Hints for Configuring I/O Blocks
This section discusses some of the problems that you may encounter
when configuring I/O blocks and some possible ways to deal with them.
This section also provides tips that are helpful when configuring I/O
blocks.
Configuration Problems
Listed below are typical problems that occur when configuring I/O blocks
and possible ways to handle them.
- When reconfiguring an I/O block, I cannot access some of the
screen fields to reconfigure an entry.
Try changing the I/O block mode. Many fields are accessible only
when the I/O block is in a particular mode, such as Manual.
- When I try to configure some of the I/O block types, I get a
“Controller Got Bad Message” error.
Some I/O blocks require special hardware in order to configure the
I/O Block Configuration screen. Check that the proper hardware is
installed for the block that you are trying to configure.
Configuration Tips
Listed below are hints to help you when configuring I/O blocks.
- Accessing screen fields
Remember that you can only access the I/O Block Configuration
screen fields for which you have the proper access, such as
configuror, supervisor, or operator access.
- Unconfiguring an I/O block
When unconfiguring an I/O block, be sure to configure the “Block
Type” as “None”.
RS3: Introduction to Input/Output Blocks Hints for Configuring I/O Blocks

RS3t
Chapter 2:
Configuring Analog Blocks
Section 1: Configuring an Analog Input Block (AIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-1

Configuring an AIB Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-2
Determining the AIB Filter Time to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-2
Configuring AIB Signal Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-3
Square Root Signal Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-3
Thermocouple or RTD Signal Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-4
Configuring AIB Instrument Bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-7
Configuring AIB Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-8
AIB Instrument Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-8
AIB Critical and Advisory Process Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-9
AIB Alarm Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-9
AIB Alarm Deadbands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-10
AIB Low Cutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-10
AIB Reference Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-11
AIB Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-11
AIB Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-15
Section 2: Configuring an Analog Output Block (AOB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2-1

Configuring AOB Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2-4
AOB Reference Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2-5
AOB Block Configuration Screen (Standard I/O hardware) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2-5
AOB Block Configuration Screen (Multipoint Analog I/O hardware) . . . . . . . . 2-2-6
AOB Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2-9
Section 3: Hints for Configuring Analog Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3-1

RS3: Configuring Analog Blocks Contents

IO: ii
List of Figures
Figure Page
2.1.1 AIB Block Configuration Screen—Filter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-2
2.1.2 AIB Block Configuration Screen—Signal Characterization
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-6
2.1.3 AIB Block Configuration Screen----Instrument Bias
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-7
2.1.4 AIB Block Configuration Screen----Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-10
2.1.5 AIB Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-11
2.1.6 AIB Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-15
2.2.1 AOB Block Configuration Screen—Reverse Action
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2-3
2.2.2 Configuration Screen—Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2-4
2.2.3 AOB Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2-5
2.2.4 AOB Block Configuration Screen—MAIO Hardware Installed . . . . . . . 2-2-6
2.2.5 AOB Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2-9

IO: iii
List of Tables
Table Page
2.1.1 Thermocouple Configuration Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-5
2.1.2 RTD Configuration Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-5
2.1.3 Analog Input Block (AIB) Configuration Screen Fields ............ 2-1-12
2.2.1 Analog Output Block (AOB) Configuration Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . 2-2-7

IO: 2-1-1
Section 1:
Configuring an Analog Input Block (AIB)
Analog Input Blocks (AIBs) accept an analog field input through an

analog input Field Interface Card (FIC) and prepare the data for use by
the rest of the system. The AIB performs analog input signal
addressing, signal conditioning, trending, and alarming.
This section provides the following information for configuring an AIB
block:
D Configuring an AIB filter
D Configuring AIB signal characterization
D Configuring AIB instrument bias
D Configuring AIB alarms
D AIB reference material
— AIB Block Configuration screen and table of screen fields
— AIB functional block diagram
RS3: Configuring Analog Blocks Configuring an Analog Input Block (AIB)

IO: 2-1-2
Configuring an AIB Filter
An AIB filter is used to provide a first order lag response to the AIB
input. The shaded area of Figure 2.1.1 shows the section of the AIB
Block Configuration screen used for configuring an AIB filter. The AIB
block in Figure 2.1.1 is configured with a filter time of 10 seconds.
Determining the AIB Filter Time to Use
A filter time constant is applied to the field value to smooth the effect of
any changes. The longer the filter time, the smoother the curve. You
can configure the filter time constant between 0 and 3276 seconds.
A filter time constant is normally used for indicators. If you use a filter
time constant in a control loop, configure a filter time that is less than
10% of the integral time.
- To set the filter time:
D Cursor to the “Filt Time” field and enter the desired delay time
constant in seconds. Press [ENTER].

Block Tag Þ Block Type ÞAIB Mode ®AUTO
Auto Lock Þno
Field Value -15.29
-15.29 Filt Time Þ 10. sec Block Out .00
Eng Units Þ Sig Char None
Eng Zero Þ.00 Lo Cutoff .00 Nom Out >None
Eng Max Þ100.00 Inst Bias .00
Descriptor Þ
ALARMS
CONFIG 1
Figure 2.1.1. AIB Block Configuration Screen—Filter Configuration

IO: 2-1-3
Configuring AIB Signal Characterization
Depending on the type of field device being used, you can configure one
of the following signal characterizations: square root, thermocouple, or
resistance temperature device.
Square Root Signal Characterization
Square root signal characterization is typically used for differential

pressure flow transmitters. This function has a low limit of zero, so only
positive inputs are converted. (The math function “sqrt” converts
negative values as well as positive values.) The gain function is limited
to 10, so inputs below 1% are converted linearly.

IO: 2-1-4
Thermocouple or RTD Signal Characterization
You can select thermocouple or RTD signal characterization for use with
transmitters that are linear in millivolts or ohms.
The field value in engineering units is inaccurate because it uses the

range linearly. However, the field value in percent is accurate for the
percent of the calibrated millivolt or ohm range of the transmitter.
NOTE: The Rosemount 444R RTD transmitters are linear in

temperature over the range of --50 °C to 750 °C and do not require
characterization in the AIB.
Table 2.1.1 provides the types of thermocouples and the corresponding

temperature range for each. Table 2.1.2 provides the RTD types and
the corresponding configuration temperature ranges for each type of
device.

IO: 2-1-5
Table 2.1.1. Thermocouple Configuration Ranges
Device Configuration Range* °F ( °C )
E Type thermocouple (TC--E) --300 (--184) to +1800 (980)
T Type thermocouple (TC--T) --300 (--184) to +700 (370)
J Type thermocouple (TC--J) --300 (--184) to +1375 (750)
K Type thermocouple (TC--K) --300 (--184) to +2400 (1315)
R Type thermocouple (TC--R) +100 (38) to +2900 (1600)
S Type thermocouple (TC--S) +100 (38) to +2900 (1600)
B Type thermocouple (TC--B) +800 (425) to +3000 (1650)
* The ranges provided in this table are for rated accuracy. Using limits other than
these will reduce accuracy.
Table 2.1.2. RTD Configuration Ranges
Device Configuration Range* °F ( °C )
100 ohm platinum (RTD--100) --275 (--170) to +1100 (600)
1000 ohm platinum (RTD--1000) --275 (--170) to +1100 (600)
120 ohm nickel (RTD--120) --90 (--70) to +600 (315)
10 ohm copper (RTD--10) --40 (--40) to +284 (140)
* The ranges provided in this table are for rated accuracy. Using limits other than
these will reduce accuracy.

IO: 2-1-6
The two shaded areas of Figure 2.1.2 show the sections of the AIB
Block Configuration screen for configuring AIB signal characterization.
The AIB block in Figure 2.1.2 is configured for type J thermocouple
signal characterization with the configuration temperature range in
degrees Fahrenheit.
NOTE: Before configuring thermocouple or RTD signal
characterization, be sure to calibrate the transmitter for the ohms or
millivolts corresponding to the range.
- To configure AIB signal characterization:
1. Cursor to the “Mode” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to select
Manual; then press [ENTER].
2. Cursor to the “Sig Char” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to select
the desired signal characterization to be used. Press [ENTER].
3. An F or C appears to select the type of temperature units. Press
[NEXT OPTION] to select the desired temperature units (F for
Fahrenheit, C for Centigrade). Press [ENTER].
4. Cursor to the “Eng Max” field and enter the desired maximum
temperature value and press [ENTER]. Then cursor to the “Eng
Zero” field; enter the desired minimum temperature value; and
press [ENTER].
5. If desired, cursor to the “Eng Units” field and enter the desired
temperature units; then press [ENTER].
Auto; then press [ENTER].

Auto Lock Þno
Field Value -15.29
Eng Units Þ Sig Char Þ TC-J ÞC Calibrate ®None
Eng Zero Þ.00 Nom Out >None
Descriptor Þ
ALARMS
CONFIG 1
Figure 2.1.2. AIB Block Configuration Screen—Signal Characterization Configuration

IO: 2-1-7
Configuring AIB Instrument Bias
Instrument bias counteracts an instrument that is out of adjustment by

allowing you to modify the field value by a factor that you define. When
the flow is known to be zero, the instrument bias value is normally set to
the negative value of the field value. The instrument bias value affects
both the field value and the output value of the AIB.
The shaded area of Figure 2.1.3 shows the section of the AIB Block
Configuration screen for configuring instrument bias.
- To configure AIB instrument bias:
2. Cursor to the “Inst Bias” field and enter the bias value (in percent)
of the field instrument; then press [ENTER].

Address =10HO23 Device Type AIB
Auto Lock Þno
Field Value -15.29
Eng Units Þ Sig Char Þ None Calibrate ®None
Eng Zero Þ.00 Lo Cutoff Þ.00 Nom Out >None
Descriptor Þ
ALARMS
CONFIG 1
Figure 2.1.3. AIB Block Configuration Screen-- --Instrument Bias Configuration

IO: 2-1-8
Configuring AIB Alarms
The shaded areas of Figure 2.1.4 show the sections of the AIB Block
Configuration screen for configuring AIB alarms. In most cases, you will
configure instrument alarms (also called hardware alarms) for AIB
blocks. You can configure critical or advisory process alarms, but we do
not recommend it. The best practice for easiest traceability is to set
process alarms on ControlBlocks, rather than on I/O blocks. This
section provides a brief description of the AIB alarms.
AIB Instrument Alarms
We recommend that you configure instrument alarms and alarm priority

for each AIB. Instrument alarms (also called hardware alarms) inform
the operator of a problem with the RS3 hardware or transmitter.
It is good practice to set an instrument low alarm for an AIB block. A

typical low instrument value is --6%. You may also want to set an
instrument high alarm. A typical instrument high alarm is 103%. When
a filter is being used, instrument alarms are evaluated on the AIB input
before the input is filtered.

IO: 2-1-9
AIB Critical and Advisory Process Alarms
We do not recommend that you configure process alarms for

input/output blocks. The best practice for easiest traceability is to set
process alarms on ControlBlocks, rather than on I/O blocks. When a
filter is being used, process alarms are evaluated on the AIB input after
the input is filtered.
If you do configure a process alarm, we recommend that you also

configure the alarm priority.
Critical and advisory process alarms inform the operator of an alarm

condition that is affecting a process. Critical process alarms represent
conditions that require immediate action. Advisory process alarms
usually represent conditions that may require attention in the future.
Critical alarms have priority over advisory alarms.
AIB Alarm Priority
If you configure an AIB alarm, we recommend that you also configure

the alarm priority. You can configure alarm priority by using a numeral
from 0 to 3. An entry of 0 indicates the highest alarm priority. An entry of
3 indicates the lowest priority. The default value is 0.
If the RS3 control system generates more than one unacknowledged

process alarm at one time, the corresponding alarm banner for each
alarm appears at the bottom of the console screen in the order of
priority. Configure the priority of an AIB block process alarm in the
“Priority” field on the AIB Block Configuration screen. You can configure
the default value for the “Alarm Priority” field on the Alarm Configuration
screen.

IO: 2-1-10
AIB Alarm Deadbands
Use alarm deadbands to prevent repeated tripping of alarms by a

variable that drifts in and out of alarm condition. After a variable goes
into alarm, the variable must vary from the alarm limit by the deadband
value before the alarm condition is considered cleared.
AIB Low Cutoff
Configuring a low cutoff value prevents inaccurate flowmeter readings

by forcing undesirable low level signals to a cutoff value. When a low
cutoff value is configured, the block output value is compared to the low
cutoff value. If the block output value is less than the low cutoff value
and the low cutoff value is:
D A positive value, the output is set to zero.
D A negative value, the output is set to the low cutoff value.
NOTE: If the Controller setpoint is zero, integration stops.

Auto Lock Þno
Field Value -15.29
Descriptor Þ
ALARMS
Figure 2.1.4. AIB Block Configuration Screen-- --Alarm Configuration

IO: 2-1-11
AIB Reference Material
This section provides an AIB Block Configuration screen and an AIB

functional block diagram.
AIB Block Configuration Screen
You configure an AIB block on the I/O Block Configuration screen.

Figure 2.1.5 shows the AIB Block Configuration screen. Table 2.1.3
provides a description of the AIB Block Configuration screen fields.

Auto Lock Þno
Field Value -15.29
Descriptor Þ
ALARMS
Figure 2.1.5. AIB Block Configuration Screen

IO: 2-1-12
Table 2.1.3. Analog Input Block (AIB) Configuration Screen Fields
Access
Field Description Allowable Entries
Level
Address NA Address of the block. Display only
Up to 16 alphanumeric
Block Tag Conf User defined block tag.
characters
NONE, AIB,CIB, DIB,
AOB,COB, DOB, ADS,
Block Type Conf Type of input/output block.
MIB, PLCB, SIB, RIOB,
VIB, PIOB, TIB
Current block mode.
If “Auto”, the block function drives the block output.
Mode Supr AUTO, MANUAL
If “Manual”, the operator can directly manipulate the
block output from the console.
Indicates whether or not the block is locked into Auto
mode.
Auto Lock Conf If “yes”, the block is locked in Auto mode. The block yes, no
cannot be changed to Manual mode.
If “no”, the block can be switched to Manual mode.
Current transmitter input value in engineering units
Field Value NA Display only
and percent.
Max = 999999
Block output value in engineering units.
Block Out Oper Min = --999999
Must be in Manual mode to enter.
Default=.00
Eng Units Conf Engineering units assigned with the block output. Maximum of 8 characters
Value to be displayed when the block output is 0%. Max = 999999.
Eng Zero Conf Must match the transmitter calibration for Min = --999999.
thermocouple and RTD signal characterization. Default=.00
Calibration field. For information about calibrating an
Calibrate Supr AIB block, see SV: 7. None, Cal Low, Cal High
Must be in Manual mode to calibrate.
Max = 999999. %
Nom Out Oper Not used at this time. Min = --999999. %
Default=None
Value to be displayed when the block output is 100%. Max = 999999.
Eng Max Conf Must match the transmitter calibration for Min = --999999.
thermocouple and RTD signal characterization. Default=100.00

IO: 2-1-13
Table 2.1.3. Analog Input Block (AIB) Configuration Screen Fields (continued)
Access
Level
Max = 999999. %
Bias signal used to modify the field value.
Inst Bias Supr Min = --999999. %
Must be in Manual mode to configure.
Default=.00
Descriptor Conf User configured descriptor. Any characters up to 24
User assigned filter time constant applied to the field Max = 3276.79 S
Filt Time Conf
value. Min = None
User selectable signal characterization curve. None, SQR, TC--B,

TC--E, TC--J, TC--K,
If a thermocouple or RTD device is used, a field for
TC--R, TC--S, TC--T,
Sig Char Conf selecting temperature units appears: C selects
RTD--100,
Centigrade, F selects Fahrenheit.
RTD--1000, RTD--120,
Must be in Manual mode to configure. RTD--10
User enterable low cutoff value.
D A positive low cutoff value: The block output
value is set to zero for a block output value less
Max = 999999.
than the low cutoff.
Lo Cutoff Conf Min = --999999.
D A negative low cutoff value: The block output
Default=.00
value is set to the low cutoff limit for a block
output value less than the low cutoff limit
Max = 999999.%
High hardware alarm point (in percent) applied to the
Inst High Supr Min = --999999.%
field value.
Default=None
Max = 999999.%
Low hardware alarm point (in percent) applied to the
Inst Low Supr Min = --999999.%
field value.
Default=None
Max = 999999.
High critical process alarm point (in engineering units)
Crit High Supr Min = --999999.
applied to the block output value.
Default=None
Max = 999999.
Low critical process alarm point (in engineering units)
Crit Low Supr Min = --999999.
Default=None
Max = 999999.
High advisory process alarm point (in engineering
Adv High Supr Min = --999999.
units) applied to the block output value.
Default=None
Max = 999999.
Low advisory process alarm point (in engineering
Adv Low Supr Min = --999999.
units) applied to the block output value.
Default=None

IO: 2-1-14
Table 2.1.3. Analog Input Block (AIB) Configuration Screen Fields (continued)
Access
Level
Hardware
Indicates an FIC hardware fault. For information on
Alarm NA Display only
alarm messages, see the Alarm Messages Manual.
Code
Assigns alarm priority to hardware alarms and critical
Priority Conf and advisory process alarms. 0 indicates highest 0--3
priority. 3 indicates lowest priority.
Indicates a user defined group to which the block is
assigned. Access to I/O blocks from a console may
Plant Unit Conf be restricted if the console has not been assigned to 0--255
the I/O block plant unit.
For more information on plant units, see CC: 1.
Max = 999999.%
Deadband value (in percent of engineering units
Al DdBand Conf Min = .00%
scale) that is applied to all block alarm points.
Default=1.00
NOTE: Bold text indicates default selection.

IO: 2-1-15
AIB Functional Diagram
Figure 2.1.6 shows the Analog Input Block functional diagram. All items
within the dotted line reside in the AIB software.
Console Keyboard
None
Field Value Block Out
Cal Low
50.00 50.00
Cal High
MAN
A/D Instrument Signal Low To
Filter
Bias Character Cutoff CB
AUTO
From
Instrument Advisory Critical
FIC
Alarm Alarms Alarms
Figure 2.1.6. AIB Functional Block Diagram

IO: 2-2-1
Section 2:
Configuring an Analog Output Block (AOB)
Analog Output Blocks (AOBs) prepare a specific analog value for output
to the field. The AOB performs analog output signal storage and
addressing and provides for selection of direct or reverse action.
This section provides the following information for configuring an
AOB block:
D Configuring output action
D Configuring AOB alarms
D AOB reference material
— AOB Block Configuration screen and table of screen fields
— AOB functional block diagram
AOBs can be configured for standard I/O or the new Multipoint Analog
I/O (MAIO) hardware family. For information on changes to the AOB
screen with MAIO hardware installed, see IO: 2-2-6.
RS3: Configuring Analog Blocks Configuring an Analog Output Block (AOB)

IO: 2-2-2
Configuring Output Action
The “Reverse Acting” field allows you to configure normal or reverse

output action. A “yes” indicates that reverse output action is selected;
“no” indicates that normal output action is selected. The default is “no”.
To configure reverse output action, the block must be in Manual mode.

The shaded area of Figure 2.2.1 shows the section of the AOB Block
Configuration screen used for configuring the reverse output action of a
block.
Normal Output Action
With normal output action configured, the Controller Processor instructs

the FIC to output 0% as 4 mA and 100% as 20 mA. The zero failure
option (and power supply failures) result in 0 mA output.
Reverse Output Action
With reverse output action configured, the Controller Processor instructs

the FIC to output 0% as 20 mA and 100% as 4 mA. This action allows
all displays to show an output of 0% for all closed valves, even those
that do not fully close. The zero failure option (and power supply
failures) result in 0 mA output.

IO: 2-2-3

Address =1AA103 Device Type AIB or AOB
Block Tag Þ Block Type ÞAOB Mode ® MANUAL
Auto Lock Þ no
Source Þ
Actual Value .00
Value .00 Output Value > .00
.00%
Eng Units Reverse Acting Þno
Calibrate ® None
0% Value 4. ma
100% Value 20. ma
Alarm Priority Þ0 Plant Unit Þ0
Hardware Alarm Code 8 Fail Safe Jumper Hold Output Card Rev 2.1
CONFIG 1
Figure 2.2.1. AOB Block Configuration Screen—Reverse Action Configuration

IO: 2-2-4
Configuring AOB Alarms
The shaded area of Figure 2.2.2 shows the section of the AOB Block
Configuration screen used for configuring the alarm priority for hardware
alarms. If the RS3 control system generates more than one
unacknowledged hardware alarm at one time, the corresponding alarm
banner for each alarm appears at the bottom of the console screen in
the order of priority. You can configure the priority of an AOB block
hardware alarm in the “Alarm Priority” field on the AOB Block
Configuration screen.
You configure alarm priority using a numeral from 0 to 3. An entry of 0

indicates the highest alarm priority. An entry of 3 indicates the lowest
priority. The default value is 0.
You configure the default value for the “Alarm Priority” field on the Alarm

Block Tag Þ Block Type ÞAOB Mode ® AUTO
Auto Lock Þ no
Source Þ
Actual Value .00
.00%
Calibrate ® None
0% Value 4. ma
100% Value 20. ma
CONFIG 1
Figure 2.2.2. Configuration Screen—Alarm Configuration

IO: 2-2-5
AOB Reference Material
This section provides an AOB I/O Block Configuration screen and an

AOB functional block diagram.
AOB Block Configuration Screen (Standard I/O hardware)
You configure an AOB block on the I/O Block Configuration screen.

Figure 2.2.3 shows the AOB Block Configuration screen with standard
I/O hardware. Table 2.2.1 provides a description of the AOB Block
Configuration screen fields.

Auto Lock Þ no
Source Þ
Actual Value .00
.00%
Calibrate ® None
0% Value 4. ma
100% Value 20. ma
CONFIG 1
Figure 2.2.3. AOB Block Configuration Screen

IO: 2-2-6
AOB Block Configuration Screen

(Multipoint Analog I/O hardware)
Several differences appear on the AOB screen with Multipoint Analog

I/O (MAIO) hardware installed.
Previously, the FailSafe option was controlled by a jumper position on

the hardware. With MAIO hardware, the holding of the last value is
software configurable with the Fail Safe field. Figure 2.2.4 highlights the
Fail Safe field.

Address =1AA103 Device Type AOB or HOB
Auto Lock Þ no
Source Þ

.00%
Calibrate ® None
Fail Safe >Hold 0% Value 4. ma
100% Value 20. ma
Hardware Alarm Code 8 Output Card Rev 2.1
CONFIG 1
Figure 2.2.4. AOB Block Configuration Screen—MAIO Hardware Installed
The Fail Safe field allows the configuration of a failure option upon loss
of communication with the Field Interface Module (FIM). The Fail Safe
field can be configured as either Hold or Zero. Hold indicates that the
last valid PV is the fail safe signal. Zero sets the the signal to 3.5 mA if
communication with the FIM is lost. See Table 2.2.1 for a description of
the new field.
In addition, there is no Actual Value field with MAIO hardware.

IO: 2-2-7
Table 2.2.1. Analog Output Block (AOB) Configuration Screen Fields
Access
Level
characters
NONE, AIB,CIB, DIB,
Block AOB,COB, DOB, ADS,
Conf Type of input/output block.
Type MIB, PLCB, SIB, RIOB,
VIB, PIOB, TIB, HOB
Current block mode.
Mode Supr If “Manual”, the operator can directly manipulate the AUTO, MANUAL
If “Override”, the output bypass card drives the block
output.
mode.
Auto Lock Conf If “Yes”, the block is locked in Auto mode. The block yes, no
If “No”, the block can be switched to Manual mode.
The tag of the block from which the input originated.
The source tag may be entered as a block tag, block
characters; at least one
Source Conf link (tag/x), or the address of the source block. After
must be an alphabetical
entering the source tag, the address of the block
character
appears below the tag.
The output feedback value.
Actual
NA NOTE: This field does not appear when Multipoint Display only
Value
Analog I/O (MAIO) hardware is installed.
Value NA The signal value at the input of the block. Display only
Max = 112.5% of
The signal value at the output of the block. engineering scale
Output
Oper Must be in Manual mode to configure the output value Min = --12.5% of
Value
in engineering units. Also displays the percent value. engineering scale
Default=.00
Eng Units Conf Engineering units of the source block. Display only
Reverse
Conf User defined block input to output relationship. yes, no
Acting
AOB block, see SV: 7. None, Cal Low, Cal High,
Calibrate Supr
Calibrate
NOTE: Bold text indicates the default selection.

IO: 2-2-8
Table 2.2.1. Analog Output Block (AOB) Configuration Screen Fields (continued)
Access
Level
Low calibration correction value. Max = 5.0 mA
0% Value NA
Must be in Manual mode to appear. Min = 3.0 mA
100% High calibration correction value. Max = 22 mA

NA
Value Must be in Manual mode to appear. Min = 18 mA
Appears only if MAIO hardware is installed. Allows Hold=last PV
Fail Safe Conf configuration of the type of failure option upon loss of
communication with the Field Interface Module. Zero=3.5 mA
Alarm Assigns alarm priority to hardware alarms. 0 indicates

Conf 0--3
Priority highest priority. 3 indicates lowest priority.
Indicates the user defined group to which the block is
assigned. Access to I/O blocks from a console may be
Plant Unit Conf restricted if the console has not been assigned to the 0--255
I/O block plant unit.
Hardware
Indicates an FIC hardware fault. For information on
Alarm NA Display only
alarm messages, see AL.
Code
Output FIC jumper position.
Fail Safe
NA NOTE: This field does not appear if MAIO hardware is Display only
Jumper
installed.
Output
NA Output FIC revision number. Display only
Card Rev
NOTE: Bold text indicates the default selection.

IO: 2-2-9
AOB Functional Diagram
Figure 2.2.5 shows the Analog Output Block functional diagram. All
items within the dotted lines reside in the AOB software.
Console keyboard
Value Output Value
50.00 50.00
MANUAL
From REVERSE
Inverter Correction D/A
CB AUTO
DIRECT
CAL
0% Value
4. ma A/D
Calibrate
100% Value
50.00
20. ma
Actual Value
Console Keyboard
Figure 2.2.5. AOB Functional Block Diagram

IO: 2-3-1
Section 3:
Hints for Configuring Analog Blocks
when configuring analog blocks and some possible ways to deal with
them. This section also provides tips that are helpful when configuring
analog blocks.
Listed below are typical problems that occur when configuring analog
blocks and possible ways to handle them.
- I cannot manipulate some of the block fields.
Try changing the I/O block mode. Many fields are accessible
only in Manual mode.
- I think the flowmeter readings are inaccurate.
You might want to configure a low cutoff value or an instrument
bias.
RS3: Configuring Analog Blocks Hints for Configuring Analog Blocks

IO: 2-3-2
Configuration Tips
Listed below are hints to help you when configuring analog blocks.
- Configuring AIB alarms
You will probably want to configure instrument alarms and alarm
priority for each AIB.
- Evaluation of alarms when using a filter
Remember that if you are using a filter, process alarms are
evaluated in the AIB input after the input is filtered.
- Configuring the filter time
If you use a filter time constant in a control loop, you probably want
to configure a filter time that is less than 10% of the integral time.
- Configuring low cutoff
Remember that when a low cutoff is configured and the Controller
Processor setpoint is zero, integration stops.
- Using Rosemount transmitter model 444R
Remember that the Rosemount transmitter model 444R series of
TRD transmitters are linear in temperature over the range of --50° C
to 750° C and do not require characterization in an AIB.
- Using a Thermocouple or an RTD with an AIB
D For rated accuracy when using a thermocouple or an RTD with
an AIB, be sure to use the signal characterization provided in
Section 1: “Configuring Analog Input Blocks.”
D Be sure to calibrate the transmitter for the ohms or millivolts
corresponding to the range before configuring thermocouple or
RTD signal characterization.
RS3: Configuring Analog Blocks Hints for Configuring Analog Blocks

RS3t
Chapter 3:
Configuring Pulse Input/Output Blocks
Section 1: Applications for the Pulse Input/Output Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-1

Pulse Input PIOB Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-2
Pulse Output PIOB Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-4
Analog Output PIOB Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-6
Combining PIOB Blocks for Loader Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-7
Analog Output Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-7
Section 2: Configuring a Pulse Input/Output Block (PIOB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-1

PIOB Configuration Screen Common Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-2
Configuring a Pulse Input PIOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-4
Configuring a Contact Pulse Input PIOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-6
Configuring a Voltage Pulse Input PIOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-7
Configuring a PIOB to Measure the Frequency of a Pulse Input . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-9
Configuring a PIOB to Measure the Duration of a Pulse Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-11
Configuring a PIOB to Count Pulse Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-13
Target Count Provided by a ControlBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-13
Target Count Provided by a Configuror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-17
Configuring a Pulse Output PIOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-20
Configuring a PIOB to Output a Pulse with a Specified Frequency . . . . . . . . 3-2-22
Configuring a PIOB to Output a Pulse with a Specified Duration . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-24
Configuring a PIOB to Output a Pulse with a Specified Number of Pulses . . 3-2-26
Configuring an Analog Output PIOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-28
Configuring PIOBs for a Loader Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-32
Loader Address Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-32
Analog Output Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-32
Configuring PIOBs for a Loader Application with a Binary Output . . . . . . . . . 3-2-33
Configuring PIOBs for a Loader Application with an Analog Output . . . . . . . . 3-2-36
Section 3: Hints for Configuring PIOBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3-1

RS3: Configuring Pulse Input/Output Blocks Contents

IO: ii
List of Figures
Figure Page
3.1.1 PIOB Block Configured to Measure the Frequency of a Pulse Input . . 3-1-2
3.1.2 PIOB Block Configured to Measure the Duration of a Pulse Input . . . 3-1-3
3.1.3 PIOB Block Configured to Count Pulse Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-3
3.1.4 PIOB Block Configured to Output Pulse with Specified Frequency . . . 3-1-4
3.1.5 PIOB Block Configured to Output a Pulse with a Specified Duration . 3-1-5
3.1.6 PIOB Block Configured to Output a Specified Number of Pulses . . . . 3-1-5
3.1.7 PIOB Block Configured to Output a 4--20 mA Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-6
3.1.8 PIOB Block Configured to Output a 23 V Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-6
3.1.9 Loader Application with Binary Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-8
3.1.10 Loader Application with Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-8
3.2.1 PIOB Configuration Screen—Configuring a PIOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-2
3.2.2 Hysteresis for Contact Pulse Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-4
3.2.3 Hysteresis for Voltage Pulse Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-5
3.2.4 Configuring a Contact Pulse Input PIOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-6
3.2.5 Configuring a Voltage Pulse Input PIOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-7
3.2.6 Configuring a PIOB to Measure the Frequency of a Pulse Input . . . . . 3-2-9
3.2.7 Configuring Contact Pulse Input PIOB to Measure Pulse Frequency . 3-2-10
3.2.8 Configuring PIOB to Measure Duration of Pulse Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-11
3.2.9 Configuring Voltage Pulse Input PIOB to Measure Pulse Duration . . . 3-2-11
3.2.10 Duration Input States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-12
3.2.11 Configuring a PIOB to Count Pulse Inputs—Target Count
Supplied by a ControlBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-13
3.2.12 Effect of Target Count on PIOB Output—Target Count from
ControlBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-14
3.2.13 Configuring Voltage Input PIOB to Count Pulses—Target Count
from ControlBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-15
3.2.14 Configuring PIOB to Count Pulse Inputs—Target Count from
Configuror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-17
3.2.15 Effect of Target Count on PIOB Output—Target Count from Configuror 3-2-17
3.2.16 Sample of a Voltage Input PIOB to Count Pulses—Target Count
Provided by Configuror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-18
3.2.17 Configuring a Pulse Output PIOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-20
3.2.18 Configuring a PIOB to Output a Pulse with a Specified Frequency . . . 3-2-22
3.2.19 Configuring a Pulse Output PIOB with a Specified Frequency . . . . . . . 3-2-22

IO: iii
3.2.20 Configuring a PIOB to Output a Pulse with a Specified Duration . . . . . 3-2-24

3.2.21 Duty Cycle Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-24
3.2.22 Configuring a Pulse Output PIOB with a Specified Duration . . . . . . . . . 3-2-25
3.2.23 Configuring PIOB to Output Specified Number of Pulses . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-26
3.2.24 Outputting Fixed Frequency for Specified Number of Pulses . . . . . . . . 3-2-26
3.2.25 Configuring Pulse Output PIOB with Specified Number of Pulses . . . . 3-2-27
3.2.26 Analog Output PIOB Configured to Output 4--20 mA Signal . . . . . . . . . 3-2-29
3.2.27 Analog Output PIOB Configured to Output a 23 V Power Supply . . . . 3-2-29
3.2.28 Analog Output Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-30
3.2.29 Configuring PIOBs for a Loader Application with a Binary Output . . . . 3-2-33
3.2.30 Interaction of PIOBs for a Loader Application with a Binary Output . . 3-2-33
3.2.31 Configuring a Pulse Output PIOB for a Loader Application with a
Binary Output—Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-34
3.2.32 Configuring a Pulse Input PIOB for a Loader Application with a
Binary Output—Loader Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-34
3.2.33 Configuring an Analog Output PIOB for a Loader Application with
an Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-36
3.2.34 Interaction of PIOBs for a Loader Application with an Analog Output . 3-2-37
3.2.35 Effect of the Target Count on the PIOB Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-37
3.2.36 Configuring a Pulse Input PIOB for a Loader Application with an
Analog Output—Loader Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-38
3.2.37 Configuring an Analog Output PIOB for a Loader Application with
an Analog Output—Loader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-38

IO: iv
List of Tables
Table Page
3.2.1 Common Fields for the PIOB I/O Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . 3-2-3
3.2.2 Contact Pulse Input PIOB Common Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-6
3.2.3 Voltage Pulse Input PIOB Common Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-8
3.2.4 Pulse Input PIOB Fields to Measure Pulse Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-10
3.2.5 Pulse Input PIOB Fields to Measure Pulse Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-12
3.2.6 Pulse Input PIOB Fields to Count Pulses--Target Count Provided
by ControlBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-15
3.2.7 Pulse Input PIOB Fields to Count Pulses--Target Count Provided
by Configuror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-19
3.2.8 Pulse Output PIOB Common Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-21
3.2.9 Pulse Output Fields to Output a Pulse at a Specified Frequency . . . . 3-2-23
3.2.10 Pulse Output Fields for Pulse Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-25
3.2.11 Pulse Output Fields for a Pulse Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-27
3.2.12 Analog Output PIOB Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-31
3.2.13 PIOB Fields for a Loader Application with a Binary Output . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-35
3.2.14 PIOB Fields for a Loader Application with an Analog Output . . . . . . . . 3-2-39

IO: 3-1-1
Section 1:
Applications for the Pulse Input/Output Block
You can use the Pulse Input/Output Block (PIOB) for a variety of
applications. You can configure the PIOB block as a pulse input, pulse
output, or analog output, depending on the desired application. To
perform a particular application, configure selections in the “Point Type,”
“Type,” “Function Type,” and “Output Type” fields on the PIOB Block
Configuration screen for the PIOB block.
This section describes and illustrates the PIOB block applications and
the corresponding field selections for each application:
D Pulse input PIOB applications
D Pulse output PIOB applications
D Analog output PIOB applications
D Combinations of input PIOB blocks and output PIOB blocks for
loader applications
RS3: Configuring Pulse Input/Output Blocks Applications for the Pulse Input/Output Block
IO: 3-1-2
Pulse Input PIOB Applications
You can configure a pulse input PIOB block to perform the following
applications:
D Measure the frequency of a pulse input (Figure 3.1.1); for more
information, see “Configuring a PIOB to Measure the Frequency
of a Pulse Input” in Section 2 on page IO:3-2-9.
D Measure the duration of a pulse input (Figure 3.1.2); for more
information, see “Configuring a PIOB to Measure the Duration of
a Pulse Input” in Section 2 on page IO:3-2-11.
D Count the total number of pulse inputs (Figure 3.1.3); for more
information, see “Configuring a PIOB to Count Pulse Inputs” in
Section 2 on page IO:3-2-13.
Point Type ÞPulse Input

Type ÞContact or Voltage
Function Type ÞFrequency
PIOB BLOCK Frequency ControlBlock

of pulses
=xxxx01 (Hz)
Field Pulses or
=xxxx02
Figure 3.1.1. PIOB Block Configured to Measure the Frequency of a Pulse Input
IO: 3-1-3

Function Type ÞDuration
PIOB BLOCK Duration ControlBlock

of pulses
=xxxx01 (Hz)
Field Pulses or
=xxxx02
Figure 3.1.2. PIOB Block Configured to Measure the Duration of a Pulse Input

Pulses Type ÞContact or Voltage
Field
Function Type ÞCounter
ControlBlock PIOB BLOCK Number ControlBlock

of
=xxxx01 pulses
or
Target =xxxx02
count
from one
of these
sources
Manual Entry
Figure 3.1.3. PIOB Block Configured to Count Pulse Inputs
IO: 3-1-4
Pulse Output PIOB Applications
You can configure a pulse output PIOB block to perform the following
applications:
D Output a pulse with a specified frequency (Figure 3.1.4); for more
information, see “Configuring a PIOB to Output a Pulse with a
Specified Frequency” in Section 2 on page IO:3-2-22.
D Output a pulse with a specified duration (Figure 3.1.5); for more
information, see “Configuring a PIOB to Output a Pulse with a
Specified Duration” in Section 2 on page IO:3-2-24.
D Output a specified number of pulses (Figure 3.1.6); for more
information, see “Configuring a PIOB to Output a Specified
Number of Pulses” in Section 2 on page IO:3-2-26.
Point Type ÞPulse Output

ControlBlock PIOB BLOCK

Square
0--1 =xxxx03 wave
value frequency
Field
Figure 3.1.4. PIOB Block Configured to Output Pulse with Specified Frequency
IO: 3-1-5

=xxxx03 Fixed frequency

Duty Cycle varying ON time
Field
0--1
value
Figure 3.1.5. PIOB Block Configured to Output a Pulse with a Specified

Duration

Function Type ÞCount

Number of
pulses to Fixed frequency for
=xxxx03
generate number of pulses
Field
Figure 3.1.6. PIOB Block Configured to Output a Specified Number of Pulses
IO: 3-1-6
Analog Output PIOB Applications
You can configure an analog output PIOB block to perform various

applications.
D Output a 4--20 mA signal (Figure 3.1.7).
D Serve as a 23 V nominal power supply (Figure 3.1.8).
For more information about these pulse analog output PIOB

applications, see “Configuring an Analog Output PIOB” in Section 2 on
page IO:3-2-28.
Point Type ÞmA Output

Function Type ÞAnalog

0--1 =xxxx03 4-20 mA
value signal
Field
Figure 3.1.7. PIOB Block Configured to Output a 4--20 mA Signal

Function Type ÞAnalog
PIOB BLOCK
=xxxx03 23 V Power
Supply at 60 mA
Field
Figure 3.1.8. PIOB Block Configured to Output a 23 V Power Supply
IO: 3-1-7
Combining PIOB Blocks for Loader Applications
You can configure an input PIOB with an output PIOB for a loader
application that provides a quick output response when a counter input
reaches a target value. The input PIOB acts as a loader counter to
count the pulse inputs. A ControlBlock is linked to the loader counter to
provide the target count. The output PIOB acts as a loader output that
is controlled by the loader counter. The loader can be a binary output
PIOB as shown in Figure 3.1.9 or an analog output PIOB as shown in
Figure 3.1.10.
For more information about PIOB loader applications, see Section 2:

“Configuring a Pulse Input/Output Block (PIOB)” for one of the following
applications:
D “Configuring PIOBs for a Loader Application with a Binary
Output” (page IO:3-2-33)
D “Configuring PIOBs for a Loader Application with an Analog
Output” (page IO:3-2-36)
Binary Output Loader
A binary output loader outputs a 1.0 value while the loader counter is
counting, and a 0.0 value when the counter reaches the target value.
Analog Output Loader
An analog output loader outputs a 4--20 mA signal (controlled from a

ControlBlock) while the counter is counting, and a 0 mA value when the
counter reaches the target value.
IO: 3-1-8

Function Type ÞLoader Counter
Tied toÞPoint 2
Begins
ControlBlock PIOB BLOCK counting PIOB BLOCK
Target Loader Loader 1.0 value
Field
Count Counter
=xxxx02
=xxxx01
0.0 value
Reaches Field
Target

Function Type ÞLoader
Figure 3.1.9. Loader Application with Binary Output
ControlBlock

Type ÞContact or Voltage 0--1 value
Function Type ÞLoader Counter from
ControlBlock
Tied to ÞPoint 3
Begins
ControlBlock PIOB counting PIOB 4--20 mA
BLOCK BLOCK signal
Loader Loader Field
Target Count Counter
=xxxx03 0 mA
=xxxx01 signal
Reaches Field
Target

Output Type ÞLoader
Figure 3.1.10. Loader Application with Analog Output
IO: 3-2-1
Section 2:
Configuring a Pulse Input/Output Block (PIOB)
Pulse Input/Output Blocks (PIOBs) accept pulse field input through a

pulse input/output FIC and generate output pulses of specified width,
frequency, or total count for output to the field. The PIOB performs
pulse input signal addressing and signal conditioning as well as pulse
output signal storage and addressing.
This section describes the PIOB Configuration screen and how to

configure a PIOB for each application:
D Pulse input PIOB for frequency, duration, and count applications
D Pulse output PIOB for frequency, duration, and count applications
D Analog output PIOB for output applications
D PIOBs for loader applications
RS3: Configuring Pulse Input/Output Blocks Configuring a Pulse Input/Output Block (PIOB)
IO: 3-2-2
PIOB Configuration Screen Common Fields
You configure a PIOB on the I/O Block Configuration screen. The fields
that appear on the I/O Block Configuration screen depend on the entries
that you configure in some of these fields. Figure 3.2.1 shows the I/O
Block Configuration screen fields that are common to all PIOB
applications. Table 3.2.1 describes these fields.
The “Point Type” field determines the basic function of the PIOB—pulse
input, pulse output, or analog output.
D Pulse input PIOBs can be configured in addresses =xxxx01 and
=xxxx02.
D Pulse output PIOBs can be configured in addresses =xxxx01 and
=xxxx02.
D Analog output PIOBs can be configured in address =xxxx03.
Determines basic application of block:

D Pulse Input = pulse input
D Pulse Output = pulse output
D mA Output = analog output
Displays the block output value.
Other fields appear depending on the Must be in Manual mode to configure.
application you select.
I/O BLOCK CONFIGURATION 25-Jun-92 10:42:34

Address =10AD101 Device Type PIOB
Block Tag Þ Block Type ÞPIOB Mode ®MANUAL
Point Type ÞPulse Input Auto Lock Þno
Block Output >.00
Hardware Alarm Code 0 Plant UnitÞ0 Alarm Priority Þ0

CONFIG 1
Figure 3.2.1. PIOB Configuration Screen—Configuring a PIOB
IO: 3-2-3
Table 3.2.1. Common Fields for the PIOB I/O Block Configuration Screen
Access
Level
Block Tag Conf User defined block tag. characters, one of which
must be alphabetic
NONE, AIB, CIB, AOB,
COB, ADS, MIB, PLCB,
SIB, RIOB, VIB, PIOB,
TIB, DIB, DOB, HOB
Current block mode.
If “Auto,” the block function drives the block output.
If “Manual,” the operator can directly manipulate
the block output from the console.
Type of PIOB:
Pulse Input = pulse input Pulse Input, Pulse
Point Type Conf
Pulse Output = pulse output Output, mA Output
mA Output = analog output
Output value of the block in engineering units. Max=999999
Block Output Oper
Must be in Manual mode to configure. Min=--999999
Indicates whether the block is locked in Auto mode.

If “yes,” the block is locked in Auto mode. The
Auto Lock Conf no, yes
block cannot be changed to Manual mode.
If “no,” the block can be switched to Manual mode.
HW Alarm Indicates the FIC hardware fault. For a list of the
NA Display only
Code alarm codes, see AL.
Indicates the user defined group to which the block
is assigned. Access to I/O blocks from a console
Plant Unit Conf may be restricted if the console has not been 0--255
assigned to the I/O block plant unit.
A user assigned alarm priority applied to hardware
Alarm Priority Conf alarms from this block. 0 indicates highest priority; 0--3
3 indicates lowest priority.
NOTE: Bold text indicates default selections.
IO: 3-2-4
Configuring a Pulse Input PIOB
Configure a pulse input PIOB as a contact pulse input or a voltage pulse

input. A pulse input PIOB can be configured for addresses =xxxx01 and
=xxxx02.
Contact Input Signals
Generally, for contact input signals with a nominal threshold, a signal

greater then 9 mA is considered to be on and less than 5 mA is
considered to be off. Hysteresis allows for varying pulse input signals,
with a signal of 8 mA or greater to be considered on and a signal of 6
mA or less to be off. Signal variation within the hysteresis area has no
effect on the signal state. Figure 3.2.2 shows the hysteresis areas for
contact pulse inputs.
On (>8 mA)
Threshold Hysteresis Area
Off (<6 mA)
Figure 3.2.2. Hysteresis for Contact Pulse Inputs
IO: 3-2-5
Voltage Input Signals
Voltage input signals can be unipolar signals or bipolar signals.

Unipolar signals have a threshold at 50% of the selected input voltage
range. A positive voltage is on and a voltage near 0 is off. Bipolar
signals have a threshold at 0 volts and signals go positive and negative.
A positive voltage is on and a negative voltage is off.
Input Signal Hysteresis
Hysteresis exists for varying pulse input signals and uses 20% of the
nominal range with ±10% about the threshold. Signals above the
hysteresis area are considered to be a 20 mA signal. Signals below the
hysteresis area are considered to be a 0 mA signal. Within the
hysteresis area, signal variation has no effect on the signal.
Figure 3.2.3 shows the hysteresis areas for unipolar and bipolar signals.
Unipolar
Signals
100%
60%
50% Threshold
40%
0%
Bipolar Signals Hysteresis Area
+5 0%
+1 0%
0% Threshold
--10%
--50%
Figure 3.2.3. Hysteresis for Voltage Pulse Inputs
IO: 3-2-6
Configuring a Contact Pulse Input PIOB
Figure 3.2.4 shows an I/O Block Configuration screen for a contact

pulse input PIOB. Table 3.2.2 describes the screen fields that are
common for contact pulse input PIOBs.
Configured as a contact pulse input

Tag Þ Block Type ÞPIOB Mode ®AUTO
Block Output .00
Type ÞContact
Debounce Þ5 mS
Function Type Þ
Figure 3.2.4. Configuring a Contact Pulse Input PIOB
Table 3.2.2. Contact Pulse Input PIOB Common Fields

Specifies the type of input pulse.
Voltage Specifies that the input pulse is
provided as a voltage.
Type Contact, Voltage
Contact Specifies that the input pulse is
provided from a switch or relay dry
contact closure.
Specifies a debounce filter time. Minimum time that
a switch must be detected as opened or closed
before it is considered valid. Debounce can be used None, 1.00, 2.00, 5.00,
Debounce when the input frequency value is 0--500 Hz. Using 10.00, 20.00, 50.00 mS
debounce increases the response time. NOTE: The Default = 0.00
“Debounce” field does not appear if the “Function
type” is “Frequency.”
Frequency, Duration,
Function Type Specifies the type of measurement to be made.
Counter, Loader Counter
IO: 3-2-7
Configuring a Voltage Pulse Input PIOB
Figure 3.2.5 shows an I/O Block Configuration screen for a voltage

pulse input PIOB. Table 3.2.3 describes the screen fields that are
common for voltage pulse input PIOBs.
Configured as a voltage input pulse

Type ÞVoltage Block Output .00
Threshold ÞZero Range Þ30.00 volts Source HF > yes
Function Type Þ
Figure 3.2.5. Configuring a Voltage Pulse Input PIOB
IO: 3-2-8
Table 3.2.3. Voltage Pulse Input PIOB Common Fields

Specifies the type of input pulse.
Voltage Specifies that the input pulse is provided as
Type a voltage. Contact, Voltage
Contact Specifies that the input pulse is provided
from a switch or relay dry contact closure.
Selects the on/off threshold appropriate for a particular
voltage signal.
Zero Appropriate for bipolar voltage signals, which
go positive and negative. The threshold is at
0 volts. A positive voltage is on and a
negative voltage is off. Most useful for sine
Threshold wave inputs. Zero, 50 Percent
50 Percent Appropriate for unipolar voltage signals,
where a positive voltage is on and a voltage
near zero is off. The threshold is nominally
50% of the selected input voltage range.
Most useful for inputs that are zero based
and do not go below the zero volt point.
Selects the expected voltage range for the input and sets 0.1, 0.3, 1.0, 3.0, 10.0,
Range
the actual 50% threshold and hysteresis. 30.0 volts
Frequency, Duration,
Function Type Selects the type of measurement to be made.
Counter, Loader Counter
IO: 3-2-9
Configuring a PIOB to Measure the Frequency of a Pulse Input
You can configure a PIOB to measure the frequency of a sine wave or

pulse input signal. Scale the input and output values as desired and
configure a low limit input frequency if desired.
Figure 3.2.6 shows a functional diagram of a PIOB configured to

measure the frequency of a pulse input. The PIOB accepts pulses from
the field and provides the corresponding output to a ControlBlock.
Figure 3.2.7 shows a sample PIOB Configuration screen configured to

measure the frequency of a contact pulse input. The example has a low
cutoff value of 100 Hz configured so that pulse inputs less than 100 Hz
are set to 0 Hz. Table 3.2.4 describes the fields for configuring a PIOB
to measure the frequency of a pulse input.
NOTE: Configure the Range Max to include the highest possible real
input frequency in order to prevent the generation of hardware alarms
and the loss of input values.

Field signals PIOB ControlBlock

Frequency
Pulses =xxxx01 of pulses Continuous
or (Hz) Q
=xxxx02
Discrete
Figure 3.2.6. Configuring a PIOB to Measure the Frequency of a Pulse Input
IO: 3-2-10
Actual frequency as measured in Hertz
Scaled value based on fields

configured in shaded area

Block Output .00
Type ÞContact Freq (Hz) : 0.

Range Zero (Hz) Þ0. Eng Zero Þ0
Range Max (Hz) Þ1000. Eng Max Þ100.
Low Cutoff (Hz) Þ100 Eng Units Þ
Figure 3.2.7. Configuring Contact Pulse Input PIOB to Measure Pulse Frequency
Table 3.2.4. Pulse Input PIOB Fields to Measure Pulse Frequency

Max = 50000.
Range Zero Input frequency value (in Hertz) that corresponds to a Min = 0.0
(Hz) block output of 0.
Default = 0.0
Max = 1000000.
Eng Zero Value to be displayed when the block output is 0%. Min = --999999.
Default = 0.00
Input frequency value (in Hertz) that corresponds to a
block output of 1.0.
Max = 50000.
Range Max (Hz) You can configure debounce for contact type input when Min = 0.0
the maximum range value is 0--500.00 Hz. When the Default = 1000.0
maximum range value is greater than 500.00 Hz
automatic prescaling is active.
Max = 1000000.
Eng Max Value to be displayed when the block output is 100%. Min = --999999.
Default = 100.00
Frequency input value (in Hertz) below which the Max = 50000.
Low Cutoff (Hz) frequency input is set to zero and block output flag i is Min = 0.0
set. Default = 1
Maximum of 8
Eng Units Engineering units assigned with the block output.
alphanumeric characters
IO: 3-2-11
Configuring a PIOB to Measure the Duration of a Pulse Input
You can configure a PIOB to measure the duration of square wave

edges of a pulse input. (This is valid for a frequency of up to ~2500 Hz.)
measure the duration of a pulse input. The PIOB accepts pulses from
the field and provides the corresponding output to a ControlBlock.
Figure 3.2.9 shows a sample PIOB Configuration screen configured to
measure the duration of a voltage pulse input at the fall--to--rise signal
portion.

PIOB Duration ControlBlock
Field signals of pulses Continuous
=xxxx01 (up to 500 seconds)
Pulses or Q
=xxxx02
Discrete
Figure 3.2.8. Configuring PIOB to Measure Duration of Pulse Input
Output state when the measured Block output is the last measured
duration is greater than 1 second length of the duration

Block Output 15.
Type ÞVoltage State : OFF
Threshold Þ50 Percent Range Þ30.00 volts Source HF > yes
Measure fromÞfall to rise
High Cutoff (sec) Þ1
Ten Period Avg. ÞNo
Figure 3.2.9. Configuring Voltage Pulse Input PIOB to Measure Pulse Duration
IO: 3-2-12
Table 3.2.5 describes the fields for configuring a PIOB to measure the
duration of a pulse input. Figure 3.2.10 shows an example of the
duration input states for contact and voltage signals.
Table 3.2.5. Pulse Input PIOB Fields to Measure Pulse Duration

Selects the input transition at which the timing is to begin and fall to rise, fall to fall,
Measure from
end. See Figure 1.2.10 for an example of the input states. rise to fall, rise to rise
Specifies a maximum value for the duration and maximum value
High Cutoff of the block output. If an input duration reaches the “High 0--1000 seconds
(sec) Cutoff” value, the output remains at the “High Cutoff” value and Default = 500
flag i is set.
Specifies whether the block output is the average of the last 10
measured duration values, with the duration input state (rise to
rise, fall to fall, rise to fall, or fall to rise) as you configured.
Ten Period
No= Specifies the block value is the last measured length of No, Yes
Avg.
the duration.
Yes= Specifies the block value is the average of the last 10
measured values for the duration.
Contact Rise--to--fall Rise--to--rise

Signals
Threshold
Fall--to--rise
Fall--to--fall
Voltage Rise--to--rise
Signals Rise--to--fall
Threshold
Fall--to--rise
Fall--to--fall
Figure 3.2.10. Duration Input States
IO: 3-2-13
Configuring a PIOB to Count Pulse Inputs
You can configure a PIOB to count pulse inputs. When the count
reaches a target value, the count resets to zero. The target value can
be supplied by a ControlBlock or by the configuror.
Target Count Provided by a ControlBlock
Figure 3.2.11 shows a functional diagram of a PIOB configured to count

pulses with the target count provided by a ControlBlock.

Field signals
PIOB ControlBlock
Pulses Output—
Count No. of pulses Continuous
xxxx01 Q
or Discrete
xxxx02 Actual count=
ControlBlock Target Count
Target Target count
Continuous
When the PIOB
Q m Reset Target count reaches the
target value, PIOB
flag k is toggled, and
Discrete n Reset Counter the count is reset to
zero.
With a ControlBlock linked to the PIOB, the
ControlBlock provides the target value. Anytime
that logic step m rises (turns on), the ControlBlock
output value becomes the PIOB target value.
Anytime that logic step n rises (turns on), the
PIOB count is set to zero, and PIOB flag k is set
to zero.
Figure 3.2.11. Configuring a PIOB to Count Pulse Inputs—Target Count Supplied by a ControlBlock
IO: 3-2-14
Figure 3.2.12 shows an example of the effect of the source link value
and flags on the PIOB output.
ControlBlock
Target count 3
Target count 1
Target count 2
Source Link
0 Value
1
0 user flag m
1
0 user flag n
PIOB Target count 3

Counter Target count 1
Target count 2
0 PIOB
Output
1
0 user flag k
For the ControlBlock, configured logic conditions in the ControlBlock set the source link
value as the target count and flag m rises.
For the PIOB counter, assuming a constant input frequency through this example, the
PIOB output begins counting and counts to the target count. When the target count is
reached, the PIOB output resets to 0 and flag k toggles to 1. In the ControlBlock, source
link flags m and n return to 0 due to configured logic conditions.
The PIOB continually checks for a new target value from the source link. The example
shows the interaction of a PIOB with a source link during three different target--count
values.
Figure 3.2.12. Effect of Target Count on PIOB Output—Target Count from ControlBlock
IO: 3-2-15
Figure 3.2.13 shows a sample I/O Block Configuration screen for a

PIOB that has a target value of 6000 provided by a ControlBlock.
Table 3.2.6 describes the fields used to configure a PIOB to count
pulses.
Target count, provided by the ControlBlock,

to which the counter is counting
Actual value of the ControlBlock output Block output is the current value in the counter

Point Type ÞPulse Input Source ÞMOUT Auto Lock Þno
Source Value 10.61
Block Output 7.
Type ÞVoltage Target Cnt :6000.
Threshold Þ50 Percent Range Þ10.00 volts Source HF >yes
Prescale Þ1

CONFIG 1
Figure 3.2.13. Configuring Voltage Input PIOB to Count Pulses—Target Count from ControlBlock
Table 3.2.6. Pulse Input PIOB Fields to Count Pulses--Target Count Provided by ControlBlock

Tag or address of the ControlBlock providing the target
input to the PIOB. If configured, the value of the
source becomes the PIOB target count when the Maximum of 16
Source source user flag m rises. characters
Cursor to the “Source” field and press [SELECT] to call
up the Faceplate screen for the source block.
Selects the hold forward flag option for the source.
“Yes” = The hold forward flag from the source is
Source HF taken into account. yes, no
“No” = The hold forward flag from the source is
ignored.
Value entered by the configuror to slow the maximum
input frequency to less than 500 Hz for the Pulse FIC 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128
Prescale
Default = 1
or to extend the range of the counter.
IO: 3-2-16
For processing, you can internally slow down an input frequency that is
greater than 500 Hz by prescaling the input frequency. You can also
slow down an input frequency to extend the range of the counter.
Use the “Prescale” field to configure the prescale value. If the prescale
value is n, the counter is incremented by 1 for each n input pulses. To
prevent hardware alarms from being generated or counts from being
lost, properly configure the “Prescale” field.
- To configure the prescale value:
1. Use the following formula to determine the prescale value:
Maximum input frequency

Prescale Value =
500 Hz
2. Press [NEXT OPTION] to select the prescale value option that is

equal to the prescale value and press [ENTER]. If the resulting
prescale value does not have a corresponding option, choose the
next greater option available.
IO: 3-2-17
Target Count Provided by a Configuror
Figure 3.2.14 shows a functional diagram of a PIOB configured to count

pulses, with the target count provided by the configuror. Figure 3.2.15
shows the effect of the target count on the PIOB output.

Field signals
PIOB ControlBlock
Pulses Output— Continuous
Count
No. of pulses Q
xxxx01
or Actual count= Discrete
Manual Entry xxxx02
of Target Count Target count
Target
When the PIOB count reaches the

target value, PIOB flag k is toggled,
and the count is reset to zero.
Figure 3.2.14. Configuring PIOB to Count Pulse Inputs—Target Count from

Configuror
Target
count
0 PIOB
Output
1
0 user flag k
Figure 3.2.15. Effect of Target Count on PIOB Output—Target Count from

Configuror
For processing, you can internally slow down an input frequency that is
greater than 500 Hz by prescaling the input frequency. You can also
slow down an input frequency to extend the range of the counter.
Use the “Prescale” field to configure the prescale value. If the prescale
value is n, the counter is incremented by 1 for each n input pulses. To
prevent hardware alarms from being generated or counts from being
lost, properly configure the “Prescale” field.
IO: 3-2-18
- To configure the prescale value:

1. Use the following formula to determine the prescale value:
Maximum input frequency

Prescale Value =
500 Hz
2. Press [NEXT OPTION] to select the prescale value option that is

equal to the prescale value and press [ENTER]. If the resulting
prescale value does not have a corresponding option, choose the
next greater option available.
Figure 3.2.16 shows a sample I/O Block Configuration screen for a

PIOB that has a target value of 12000000 provided by the configuror.
Table 3.2.7 describes the fields used to configure a PIOB to count
pulses.
Target count, provided by the ControlBlock,

to which the counter is counting
Actual value of the ControlBlock output Block output is the current value in the counter

Source Value 10.61
Block Output 7.
Type ÞVoltage Target Cnt :12000000.
Prescale Þ1 Target Count Þ12000000
Target count is manually configured----12000000
Figure 3.2.16. Sample of a Voltage Input PIOB to Count Pulses—Target Count Provided by Configuror
IO: 3-2-19
Table 3.2.7. Pulse Input PIOB Fields to Count Pulses--Target Count Provided by Configuror

yes =The hold forward flag from the source is taken into
Source HF yes, no
account.
no =The hold forward flag from the source is ignored.
Value entered by the configuror to slow the maximum input

Prescale frequency to less than 500 Hz for the Pulse FIC or to extend 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128
the range of the counter.
Allows selection of a fixed target count.

Target Count Maximum 12000000
Configured only when a “Source” is not configured.
IO: 3-2-20
Configuring a Pulse Output PIOB
PIOB addresses =xxxx01 and =xxxx02 can be configured as a pulse

output. A pulse output PIOB has input provided by a ControlBlock and
outputs a signal to the field. Figure 3.2.17 shows a PIOB Configuration
screen configured as an I/O output pulse. Table 3.2.8 describes the
fields common to the pulse output PIOB Configuration screen.
Configured as a Pulse Output ControlBlock to which the output is linked

Block Tag Þ Block Type ÞPIOB Mode ®AUTO
Point Type ÞPulse Output Source ÞMOUT Auto Lock Þno
Source Value .34553
Block Output .34553
Comm Fail ÞZero Output Pulses to Go 0.
Function Type Þ
Hardware Alarm Code 0 Plant UnitÞ 0 Alarm PriorityÞ0
Figure 3.2.17. Configuring a Pulse Output PIOB
IO: 3-2-21
Table 3.2.8. Pulse Output PIOB Common Fields
Tag or address of the ControlBlock providing the input to

the PIOB.
If the source is unconfigured at a later time, the
Source Maximum of 16 characters
ControlBlock output will be zero.
up the Faceplate screen for the linked block.
Actual value of the ControlBlock output.

Source Value NOTE: If system flag g (hold forward) is set to 1, the Display only
source value is held at the last value.
Selects the PIOB output value if communication between

the Pulse FIC and the Controller Processor fails.
“Hold Output” with a frequency function configured
specifies that the output value at the time of the
communication failure is saved. This frequency
continues to be output.
“Hold Output” with a duration function configured
specifies that the pulse duty cycle received at the time of Hold Output,
Comm Fail
Zero Output
the communication failure is saved and continues to be
output.
“Hold Output” with a counter function configured specifies
that the FIC continues to output pulses until the correct
count is output, at which time the output is set to zero.
“Zero Output” specifies that the output value is set to
zero at the time of the communication failure.
Selects the type of signal to be output. Fields differ Frequency, Duration,

Function
depending on the function selected. Counter, Loader
IO: 3-2-22
Configuring a PIOB to Output a Pulse with a Specified Frequency
You can configure a PIOB to generate a pulse with a specified

frequency. A ControlBlock outputs a 0--1 value that the PIOB scales to
a frequency of pulses per second or counts per hour.
generate a pulse with a specified frequency. Figure 3.2.19 shows the
I/O Block Configuration screen. Table 3.2.9 describes the fields used to
configure a pulse output PIOB to generate a pulse with a specified
frequency.
Point TypeÞPulse Output

TypeÞContact or Voltage
Function TypeÞFrequency
ControlBlock PIOB Square

Continuous wave
Q 0--1 value =xxxx01 frequency
or Field signals
=xxxx02 0--1000 Hz
Discrete
Figure 3.2.18. Configuring a PIOB to Output a Pulse with a Specified Frequency
Determines the frequency at which the pulse is to be generated Current frequency value

Address =10AD102 Device Type
PIOB Tag Þ Block Type ÞPIOB Mode ®AUTO
Source Value .34553
Block Output .34553
Comm Fail ÞZero Output Freq (Hz) : 34.55

Full Scale Þ100.
Units ÞPPS
Max On Time (Sec) Þ0.
Figure 3.2.19. Configuring a Pulse Output PIOB with a Specified Frequency
IO: 3-2-23
Table 3.2.9. Pulse Output Fields to Output a Pulse at a Specified Frequency
Selects the PIOB output value if communication between

the Pulse FIC and the Controller Processor fails.
Hold Output = Specifies that the output value at the
time of the communication failure is
Hold Output,
Comm Fail saved and this frequency continues to be
Zero Output
output.
Zero Output = Specifies that the output value is set to
zero at the time of the communication
failure.
Specifies the full scale output frequency. When the

Full Scale source value is 1, the Pulse FIC outputs the full scale Maximum 1000 Hz*
frequency.
Determines the units in which the frequency output is

expressed.
PPS = Indicates a frequency output in terms of
pulses per second (PPS), or Hertz. PPS
is generally used for high frequency
Units outputs. The maximum frequency output PPS, CPH
is 1000 Hz.*
CPH = Indicates a frequency output in terms of
counts per hour (CPH). CPH is generally
used for low frequency outputs. The
minimum frequency output is 1 CPH.
Selects the maximum number of seconds that the

frequency output is to be on.
A value of 0 results in a square wave with equal on time
Max on Time and off time. (When you enter 0, “NONE” appears in the
0--999999
(Sec) field.)
The minimum non--zero value is .0005 seconds, which
can be used to create constant width pulses of variable
frequency.
* If both =xxxx01 and =xxxx02 are configured, the maximum frequency output of each point is 750 Hz.
IO: 3-2-24
Configuring a PIOB to Output a Pulse with a Specified Duration
The duty cycle is equal to the period of the output waveform. The
Minimum ON Time sets the pulse width as a percentage of the duty
cycle that is output when the source value is 0. The Maximum ON Time
sets the pulse width as a percentage of the duty cycle that is output
when the source value is 1. As the Source Value changes from 0 to 1,
the duty cycle varies linearly from the Minimum ON Time to the
Maximum ON Time.
Even if you configured Minimum and Maximum ON Times, you must

limit the Source Value to a range of 0 to 1, or another appropriate value.

output a pulse with a specified duration. Figure 3.2.21 shows an
example of a duty cycle configured at 10--90% and a PIOB output of
.25. In the example shown the ControlBlock output is on for 30% of the
duration.

Function TypeÞDuration
ControlBlock PIOB
Continuous
Duty cycle =xxxx01 Fixed frequency
Q
or Field
0--1 value =xxxx02 Variable ON time
Discrete
Figure 3.2.20. Configuring a PIOB to Output a Pulse with a Specified Duration
0% ControlBlock output 100% ControlBlock output

Duration: Up to 500 10% Duty cycle 90% Duty cycle
seconds
Duty cycle: Range with source link
Min On Time 10% value 0--1
Max On Time 90%
Source Link Value: 0.25 Pulse Output
0% Duration 100%
Figure 3.2.21. Duty Cycle Example
IO: 3-2-25
Figure 1.2.22. shows a sample I/O Block Configuration screen used to

configure a pulse output PIOB to output a pulse with a duration of 1.5
seconds. Table 1.2.10. describes the fields on the screen.
Determines the duration of the pulse to be output

Block Tag Þ Block Type ÞPIOB Mode ®AUTO
Source Value .25
Block Output .25
Comm Fail ÞHold Output ON time (S) .003

Frame Duration (Sec) Þ.01
Minimum ON Time (%) Þ10
Maximum ON Time (%) Þ90
Hardware Alarm Code 0 Plant UnitÞ0 Alarm Priority Þ0 Auto Lock Þno
Number of seconds that the block output is on
Figure 3.2.22. Configuring a Pulse Output PIOB with a Specified Duration
Table 3.2.10. Pulse Output Fields for Pulse Duration
Selects the PIOB output value if communication between the

Pulse FIC and the Controller Processor fails.
Hold Output = pulse duty cycle received at the time of the
Comm Hold Output,
communication failure is saved and continues
Fail Zero Output
to be output.
Zero Output = specifies that the output value is set to zero at
the time of the communication failure.
Maximum 3600 seconds

Frame
Specifies the period (1/frequency) at which the output is to be (1 pulse per hour)
Duration
fixed. Minimum 0.001 seconds
(Sec)
(1000 Hz) Default = 1.0
Specifies the percentage of pulse on time associated with a

Minimum
source value of 0. If the percentage of pulse on time results in a 0--100%
ON Time
value of less than 500 microseconds, the output goes off Default = 0.0
(%)
continuously.
Specifies the percentage of pulse off time associated with a

Maximum
source value of 1.0. If the percentage of pulse off time results in a 0--100%
ON Time
value of less than 500 microseconds, the output goes on Default = 100.0
(%)
continuously.
IO: 3-2-26
Configuring a PIOB to Output a Pulse with a Specified Number of Pulses
You can configure a pulse output PIOB to output a specified number of

pulses at a fixed square wave frequency. A ControlBlock outputs the
number of pulses. When logic step m of the ControlBlock rises (goes
from off to on), the PIOB outputs the specified number of pulses.
During pulse outputs, flag k rises.
output a specified number of pulses at a fixed frequency. Figure 3.2.24
shows an example of a PIOB configured to output a fixed frequency for
eight pulses.

Function TypeÞCount
ControlBlock PIOB Fixed

Continuous No. of pulses frequency for
Q to generate =xxxx01 no. of pulses
or Field
Discrete =xxxx02
m
Reset count
Whenever ControlBlock logic step m rises, the PIOB outputs the

specified number of pulses at the fixed frequency.
During pulse outputs, PIOB flag k rises.
Figure 3.2.23. Configuring PIOB to Output Specified Number of Pulses
1 sec
Target Value: 8 pulses

Pulse rate (Frequency): 4 Hz
Duty cycle: 50%
User flag m (from
ControlBlock)
User flag k (from
PIOB)
Figure 3.2.24. Outputting Fixed Frequency for Specified Number of Pulses
Figure 3.2.25 shows a sample I/O Block Configuration screen used to

configure a PIOB to output 31 pulses at 100 Hz. Table 3.2.11 describes
the fields on the screen.
IO: 3-2-27
Number of pulses remaining to be generated—17.

All pulses must be generated before a new target
Number of pulses to be generated—31. count is accepted.

Source Value 31.
Block Output 31.
Comm Fail ÞZero Output Pulses To Go 17.
Function Type ÞCount

Pulse Rate (Hz) Þ100.
Duty Cycle (%) Þ10.
Figure 3.2.25. Configuring Pulse Output PIOB with Specified Number of Pulses
Table 3.2.11. Pulse Output Fields for a Pulse Count
Selects the PIOB output value if communications between the

Pulse FIC and the Controller Processor fail.
Hold Output = Specifies that the FIC continues to output
Hold Output,
Comm Fail pulses until the correct count is output. The
Zero Output
output is then set to zero.
Zero Output = Specifies that the output value is set to zero at
the time of the communication failure.
Maximum 1000 Hz*

Pulse Rate Minimum 0.00028 Hz
Specifies the frequency of the output pulses.
(Hz)
(1 pulse per hour)
Allows configuration of the on time (duty cycle) of the output

pulses in percentage of pulse period. A duty cycle of 50% results
Duty Cycle in a square wave with equal on and off times. The % duty cycle 10--90%
(%) Default=50%
value must result in on and off times of at least 500
microseconds, or the PIOB output is off.
* If both =xxxx01 and =xxxx02 are configured, the maximum frequency output of each point is 750 Hz.
IO: 3-2-28
Configuring an Analog Output PIOB
PIOB address =xxxx03 can be configured as an analog output. You can

configure an analog output PIOB to output a 4--20 mA signal with
overrange from 0 to 60 mA or to serve as a 23 V power supply at 60
mA.
The 4--20 mA output of a PIOB Field Interface Card (FIC) is different

from a 4--20 mA output of another type of FIC. The analog output (point
=xxxx03) has 0.5% basic accuracy and does not need calibration to
meet this specification. If an analog output point on a pulse FIC is being
backed up by a redundant pulse FIC and a redundant switchover
occurs, the output current may vary by up to a few percent of span.

provide a 4--20 mA output. Figure 3.2.27 shows a functional diagram of
a PIOB configured to provide 23 V at up to 60 mA.
IO: 3-2-29
Point TypeÞmA Output

Output TypeÞAnalog
ControlBlock PIOB
4--20 mA
=xxxx03 signal
0--1 value
Field
Figure 3.2.26. Analog Output PIOB Configured to Output 4--20 mA Signal
Point TypeÞmA Output

Output TypeÞSupply
PIOB
23 V Power Supply
=xxxx03 up to 60 mA
Field
Figure 3.2.27. Analog Output PIOB Configured to Output a 23 V Power Supply
IO: 3-2-30
Figure 3.2.28 shows the I/O Block Configuration screen for an analog
output. Table 3.2.12 describes the fields on the screen.

Address =2AA103 Device Type PIOB
Block Tag Þ Block Type ÞPIOB Mode ÞAUTO
Point Type ÞmA Output Source ÞMOUT Auto Lock Þno
Source Value .25908
Output Type ÞAnalog Block Output .25908
Comm Fail ÞZero Output Current (mA) 8.1453
Hardware Alarm Code 0 Plant Unit Þ0 Alarm Priority Þ0

CONFIG 1
Figure 3.2.28. Analog Output Configuration Screen
IO: 3-2-31
Table 3.2.12. Analog Output PIOB Fields
Allowable
Field Description
Entries
Tag or address of the ControlBlock providing the input to the PIOB.

Field is present for analog output types only. Maximum of 16
Source
Cursor to the “Source” field and press [SELECT] to call up the characters
Faceplate screen for the linked block.
Actual value of the ControlBlock output. Field is present for analog

output types only.
Source Value Display only
NOTE: If system flag g (hold forward) is set to 1, the source value is
ignored.
Analog, Supply,
Output Type Selects the type of output to be provided by the block.
Loader
Displays the block output value or state, depending on the output type
configured.
Block Output For Analog output types, displays the block output value. Display only
For Supply output types, displays the block output state. The block
output state is always on.
Selects the output value assigned if communication between the

Pulse FIC and the Controller Processor fails. This field appears for
output and supply output points only.
Hold Output = Specifies that the output value at the time of the Hold Output,
Comm Fail
communication failure is saved and continues to Zero Output
be output.
Zero Output = Specifies that the output value is set to zero at the
time of the communication failure.
Current (mA) Displays the output current for Analog output types only. Display only
IO: 3-2-32
Configuring PIOBs for a Loader Application
You can configure an input PIOB with an output PIOB for a loader
application that provides a quick output response when a counter input
reaches a target value. The input PIOB acts as a loader counter to
count the pulse inputs. A ControlBlock is linked to the loader counter to
provide the target count. The output PIOB acts as a loader output that
is controlled by the loader counter. The loader can be a binary output
PIOB or an analog output PIOB.
Loader Address Options
The input PIOB must be configured in address =xxxx01. If a binary

output PIOB is used, it must be configured in address =xxxx02. If an
analog output PIOB is used, it must be configured in address =xxxx03.
Binary Output Loader
A binary output loader outputs a 1.0 value while the loader counter is
counting and a 0.0 value when the counter reaches the target value.
Analog Output Loader
An analog output loader outputs a 4--20 mA signal (controlled from a

ControlBlock) while the counter is counting and a 0 mA value when the
counter reaches the target value.
IO: 3-2-33
Configuring PIOBs for a Loader Application with a Binary Output
Figure 3.2.29 shows a functional diagram of a pulse input PIOB

configured to act as a loader counter and a binary output PIOB
configured to act as a loader. Figure 3.2.30 shows the interaction of
these PIOBs.
Field signals Point Type ÞPulse Input

Tied toÞPoint 2
ControlBlock Begins PIOB
PIOB counting Loader
Continuous Target Count 1.0 value
Loader Field
Q
Counter =xxxx02
Discrete m
Reset target =xxxx01
0.0 value
n Field
Reaches
Reset count Target
When logic step m rises, the ControlBlock Point Type ÞPulse Output
outputs a new target value, and flag k is set Function Type ÞLoader
to 0.
When logic step n rises, the loader counter When the loader counter reaches the
PIOB count is set to 0, and flag k of the target value, flag k is set to 1.
loader counter PIOB is set to 0.
Figure 3.2.29. Configuring PIOBs for a Loader Application with a Binary Output
Point 1
100%
Target count=Actual count
On
0% Point 2 output
Off
User flag n (from ControlBlock)
User flag m (from ControlBlock)
User flag k (from PIOB)
Figure 3.2.30. Interaction of PIOBs for a Loader Application with a Binary Output
IO: 3-2-34
Figure 3.2.31 shows a sample I/O Block Configuration screen for

configuring a pulse output PIOB to act as a loader. Figure 3.2.32 shows
a sample I/O Block Configuration screen for configuring a loader
counter that is linked to a binary output PIOB.
PIOB =xxxx02 can be configured as a loader

Point Type ÞPulse Output Auto Lock Þno
Block Output ON
Figure 3.2.31. Configuring a Pulse Output PIOB for a Loader Application with a Binary
Output—Loader
Only PIOB =xxxx01 may be Loader counter =10AD101 is tied to

configured as a loader counter point 2 for a binary output loader

Source Value 10.61
Type ÞVoltage Block Output 7.
Comm Fail ÞZero Output Target Cnt: 10.
Threshold Þ50 Percent Range Þ10.00 volts Source HF > yes
Prescale Þ1
Tied to ÞPoint 2
Figure 3.2.32. Configuring a Pulse Input PIOB for a Loader Application with a Binary Output—Loader
Counter
IO: 3-2-35
Table 3.2.13 describes the fields used to configure a pulse input PIOB
to act as a loader counter.
Table 3.2.13. PIOB Fields for a Loader Application with a Binary Output
Tag or address of the ControlBlock providing the target

count to the PIOB.
up the Faceplate screen for the linked block.
Actual value of the ControlBlock output that provides the

target count.
NOTE: If system flag g (hold forward) is set to 1, the
source value is ignored.
Selects the output value assigned if communication

between the Pulse FIC and the Controller Processor fails.
Hold Output = Specifies that the output value at the
time of the communication failure is
saved.
Comm Fail Zero Output = Specifies that the output value is set Hold Output, Zero Output
to zero at the time of the
communication failure.
For the loader counter, “output” refers to the “Tied to”
point, which performs the output portion of the loader
function.
Slows the maximum input frequency to less than 500 Hz

for the Pulse FIC or extends the range of the counter.
Prescale 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128
For contact input types, debounce is performed only with
a prescale value of 1.
Point 2 (binary output

loader),
Tied to Selects the point to which the loader counter is to be tied.
Point 3 (analog output
loader)
IO: 3-2-36
Configuring PIOBs for a Loader Application with an Analog Output
Figure 3.2.33 shows a functional diagram of an input PIOB configured

to act as a loader counter and an analog output PIOB configured to act
as a loader.
Loader
Source Link
ControlBlock
Continuous
Q
Discrete

Field signals Type ÞContact or Voltage
Function Type ÞLoader Counter 0--1 value
Tied toÞPoint 3
4--20 mA
PIOB signal
ControlBlock Begins
PIOB Loader Field
Target Count Loader Counter counting Actual count
Continuous
Q =xxxx03 < Target count
=xxxx01
Discrete m Actual count
Reset target ³ Target count
Field
n Reaches 0 mA
Reset count Target signal
Loader Counter
Source Link Point Type ÞmA Output
Figure 3.2.33. Configuring an Analog Output PIOB for a Loader Application with an Analog Output
IO: 3-2-37
Figure 3.2.34 shows the interaction of these PIOBs. Figure 3.2.35

shows the effect of the target count on the PIOB outputs.
Point 1
100%
Target count=Actual
count
Valve shuts
0% Point 3 output
User flag n
User flag m
User flag k
Figure 3.2.34. Interaction of PIOBs for a Loader Application with an Analog Output
Loader Counter Link Target count 2

Target count 1
Target count 3
1
0 user flag m
1
0
Loader Counter Target count 2

Target count 1
Target count 3
0 PIOB Output
1
0 user flag k
Point 2 ON
OFF user flag k
Figure 3.2.35. Effect of the Target Count on the PIOB Outputs
IO: 3-2-38
Figure 3.2.36 shows a sample I/O Block Configuration screen for

configuring a loader counter that is linked to an analog output PIOB.
Figure 3.2.37 shows a sample I/O Block Configuration screen for an
analog output PIOB to act as a loader.
Only PIOB =xxxx01 can be Loader counter =10AD101 is tied to

configured as a loader counter point 3 for an analog output loader

Source Value 10.61
Type ÞVoltage Block Output 7.
Comm Fail ÞZero Output Target Cnt: 10.
Prescale Þ1
Tied to ÞPoint 3
Figure 3.2.36. Configuring a Pulse Input PIOB for a Loader Application with an Analog
Output—Loader Counter
Block output is controlled by the source

PIOB =xxxx03 can Source of analog link as long as the actual count is less
be configured as a loader signal 4--20 mA than the target count. If the block output
is 0 mA, the target has been reached.
Point Type ÞmA Output Source ÞMOUT Auto Lock Þno
Source Output .25908
Output Type ÞLoader Block Output 0.25908
Current (mA) 8.1453
Figure 3.2.37. Configuring an Analog Output PIOB for a Loader Application with an Analog
Output—Loader
IO: 3-2-39
39Table 3.2.14 describes the fields used to configure a pulse input

PIOB to act as a loader counter.
Table 3.2.14. PIOB Fields for a Loader Application with an Analog Output
Tag or address of the ControlBlock providing the input to

the PIOB.
Cursor to the “Source” field and press [SELECT] to call up
the Faceplate screen for the linked block.
Actual value of the ControlBlock output that provides the

target count.
NOTE: If system flag g (hold forward) is set to 1, the
source value is ignored.
Selects the output value assigned if communication

between the Pulse FIC and the Controller Processor fails.
Hold Output = Specifies that the output value at the time
of the communication failure is saved.
Comm Fail Hold Output, Zero Output
Zero Output = Specifies that the output value is set to zero
at the time of the communication failure.
For the loader counter, “output” refers to the “tied to” point,
which performs the output portion of the loader function.

Yes = The hold forward flag from the source is taken
Source HF yes, no
into account.
No = The hold forward flag from the source is ignored.
Slows the maximum input frequency to less than 500 Hz

for the Pulse FIC or extends the range of the counter. For 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128
Prescale
contact input types, debounce is performed only with a Default = 1
prescale value of 1.
Point 2 (binary output

loader),
Tied to Selects the point to which the loader counter is to be tied.
Point 3 (analog output
loader)
IO: 3-3-1
Section 3:
Hints for Configuring PIOBs
when configuring PIOBs and some possible ways to deal with them.
This section also provides tips that are helpful when configuring PIOBs.
Listed below are typical problems that occur when configuring PIOBs
- I am trying to enter a value in the “Prescale” field but the value that
I need is not an option.
If the exact prescale value is not listed, select the next greater value.
RS3: Configuring Pulse Input/Output Blocks Hints for Configuring PIOBs

IO: 3-3-2
Configuration Tips
Listed below are hints to help you when configuring PIOBs.

- Configuring a PIOB
D Remember that when configuring a pulse input counter, loader
counter, pulse output, or analog output, you must configure a
valid link on the “Source Link” field.
D Remember that a ControlBlock will not automatically track a
PIOB that is in Manual mode. Use the following procedure to
track the PIOB output when the PIOB is in Manual mode (or
whenever the hold forward flag is set).
1. Link the PIOB to the source link ControlBlock on the Continuous
Links screen. Use the default condition “No” for the “Hold” field.
2. Configure one of the ControlBlock logic steps as follows:
Conditions
xÞX.s.g
Actions
ONÞQ=X;Q.s.x=1
NOTE: X is the ControlBlock register to which the PIOB is linked.

- Reminders for configuring pulse input PIOBs
D For voltage pulse input PIOBs, remember that you may want to
configure a zero threshold for sine wave inputs with bipolar
voltage signals.
D For voltage pulse input PIOBs, remember that you may want to
configure a 50--percent threshold for zero--based inputs that do
not go below the zero volt point with unipolar voltage signals.
D For a loader counter pulse input, remember that if system flag g
(hold forward) is set to 1, the source link value is ignored.
D When configuring a pulse input PIOB to measure the frequency
of a pulse input, be sure to configure the “Range Max” field to
include the highest possible real input frequency. This will
prevent the generation of hardware alarms and the loss of input
values.
D When configuring a pulse input PIOB to count pulses, be sure to
configure the “Prescale” field properly.

IO: 3-3-3
- Increasing the response time for a contact pulse input PIOB

D Remember that you can configure the “Debounce” field to
increase the response time.
- Configuring Pulse output PIOBs
D Remember that if system flag g (hold forward) is set to 1, the
source link value is ignored.
D When configuring a pulse output PIOB, if both =xxxx01 and
=xxxx02 are configured (either as one input and one output or as
two outputs), the maximum frequency of the output(s) is 750 Hz.
D Remember that to output a pulse of a specified duration, the

source link value must be limited to a value within a 0--1 range or
to another appropriate value.
D Remember that the first time that a PIOB configured to output a
pulse with a specified duration outputs a pulse signal, the output
signal might stay on for several seconds before beginning to
pulse at the configured frequency and duty cycle.
- Configuring Analog output PIOBs
Remember that if system flag g (hold forward) is set to 1, the source
link value is ignored.

RS3t
Chapter 4:
Configuring Temperature Input Blocks
Section 1: Applications for the Temperature Input Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1-1

Configuring a TIB for an RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1-2
Configuring a TIB for a Thermocouple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1-3
Configuring a TIB for a Cold Junction Compensator RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1-4
Section 2: Configuring a Temperature Input Block (TIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-1

Selecting the Sensor Type and Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-2
Configuring an RTD Sensor TIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-8
Configuring a Thermocouple Sensor TIB or a CJC Sensor TIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-10
Scaling an RTD Sensor TIB or a Thermocouple Sensor TIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-13
Default Display Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-15
Other Display Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-16
TIB Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-17
TIB Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-18
Configuring an RTD Sensor TIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-18
Linking a ControlBlock to a Thermocouple Sensor TIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-20
Section 3: Hints for Configuring TIBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3-1

RS3: Configuring Temperature Input Blocks Contents

IO: ii
List of Figures
Figure Page
4.1.1 Configuring an RTD Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1-2
4.1.2 Configuring a Thermocouple Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1-4
4.2.1 TIB Configuration Screen—Configuring a TIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-3
4.2.2 TIB Configuration Screen—Configuring an RTD Sensor TIB . . . . . . . . 4-2-8
4.2.3 TIB Configuration Screen—Configuring a Thermocouple
Sensor TIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-11
4.2.4 TIB Configuration Screen—Configuring a CJC Sensor TIB . . . . . . . . . 4-2-12
4.2.5 Display Scaling of Continuous Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-14
4.2.6 Scaling a TIB with the Default Eng Zero and Eng Max Values . . . . . . . 4-2-15
4.2.7 Scaling a TIB with Eng Zero and Eng Max Values Other than
the Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-16
4.2.8 TIB Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-17

IO: iii
List of Tables
Table Page
4.2.1 Common Fields for the TIB Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-4
4.2.2 Centigrade Temperature Ranges for RTD inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-7
4.2.3 Centigrade Temperature Ranges for Thermocouple Inputs . . . . . . . . . 4-2-7
4.2.4 Centigrade Temperature Ranges for CJC Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-7
4.2.5 Ranges for Millivolt and Ohm Scale Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-7
4.2.6 Common Fields for an RTD Sensor TIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-9
4.2.7 Common Fields for a Thermocouple Sensor TIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-11

IO: 4-1-1
Section 1:
Applications for the Temperature Input Block
Temperature inputs from a resistance temperature device (RTD) or a

thermocouple can be brought into the RS3 distributed control system
without the use of a special RTD or thermocouple transmitter.
D An RTD sensor provides a temperature value from a platinum
wire that changes its resistance directly with temperature.
D A thermocouple sensor provides a temperature value from two
wires of dissimilar metals that produce a steady electrical current.
Cold junction compensation for the thermocouple is provided by
either a Rosemount supplied 57--Ohm cold junction compensator
RTD or a ControlBlock. The thermocouple temperature value
consists of its own measurement plus or minus the cold junction
compensation measurement.
To obtain the temperature measurement from an RTD or a

thermocouple, you must configure a Temperature Input Block (TIB).
The TIB may be used for an RTD application, a thermocouple
application, or a cold junction compensator RTD application. The
desired application is configured in the “Sensor Type” field on the TIB
The RTD, thermocouple, and cold junction compensator (CJC) sensors

have an open sensor detect circuit, which determines whether the
sensor is open and, if so, generates an alarm if the Inst High and Inst
Low fields have been configured.
This section describes and illustrates the following TIB applications:

D RTD application
D Thermocouple or cold junction compensator RTD application
RS3: Configuring Temperature Input Blocks Applications for the Temperature Input Block
IO: 4-1-2
Configuring a TIB for an RTD
You can configure a TIB to linearize a standard 100--Ohm nominal

platinum resistance temperature detector (RTD) device. An RTD
application requires a TIB configured as an RTD sensor.
Figure 4.1.1 shows a functional diagram of a TIB that has been

configured as an RTD sensor.
Sensor TypeÞRTD
Ext. ResÞ0--327
TEMP TIB ControlBlock

INPUT
FIC
FIELD
MOUNTED
3--WIRE RTD
Linearizes the measured value Determines

(in Ohms) and converts the value scaling limits and
to the configured temperature allows alarming
range
Figure 4.1.1. Configuring an RTD Sensor
IO: 4-1-3
Configuring a TIB for a Thermocouple
You can configure a TIB for a thermocouple application by configuring

the TIB as a thermocouple sensor. A thermocouple sensor must be
linked to another block that provides a cold junction compensation
value. If the cold junction compensation is a known value, you can link
the thermocouple sensor to a ControlBlock. If the cold junction
compensation value is unknown, you must link the thermocouple sensor
to a TIB that you have configured as a cold junction compensator (CJC)
sensor.
IO: 4-1-4
Configuring a TIB for a Cold Junction Compensator RTD
You can configure a TIB for a cold junction compensator RTD

application by configuring the TIB as a CJC sensor. This TIB must be
linked to another TIB that is configured as a thermocouple sensor. One
CJC sensor can be linked to numerous thermocouples. The CJC
sensor can reside on the same FIC as the thermocouple sensor, or it
can reside on another FIC.
Figure 4.1.2 shows a functional diagram of a TIB configured as a

thermocouple sensor with a TIB configured as a CJC sensor. The CJC
sensor provides the cold junction compensation.
Sensor
TypeÞCJC
Measures the Temp (in mV)
and scales the value for the
thermocouple sensor
TEMP INPUT TIB

FIC CJC
Cold Junction Input 1

Compensation
RTD
57 Ohms nominal To other
Measures the thermocouple
temp TIBs
(in °C ) CJC correction
Input 2
TIB ControlBlock
Thermocouple
Thermocouple
Measures the temp
(in °C)
Sensor TypeÞJ, K, T, E, R, S, B, --E, or --T

Linearizes the scaled value to NBS
standards and converts the value to the
configured TIB temperature range
Figure 4.1.2. Configuring a Thermocouple Sensor
IO: 4-2-1
Section 2:
Configuring a Temperature Input Block (TIB)
This section describes how to configure Temperature Input Blocks

(TIBs) when using a resistance temperature device or thermocouple in
place of a transmitter field device.
A TIB can be configured to display temperature from a resistance

temperature device (RTD) or a thermocouple.
D An RTD sensor is a platinum wire that changes its resistance
directly with temperature and, thereby, provides a temperature
value.
D A thermocouple sensor consists of two wires of dissimilar metals
that produce a steady electrical current to measure temperature.
Cold junction compensation for the thermocouple is generated by
a Rosemount supplied 57-Ohm RTD, called a cold junction
compensator (CJC). The CJC is mounted on the Analog
Marshalling Panel. The thermocouple temperature measurement
consists of its own measurement plus or minus the CJC
measurement.
RS3: Configuring Temperature Input Blocks Configuring a Temperature Input Block (TIB)
IO: 4-2-2
Selecting the Sensor Type and Scaling
You use the I/O Block Configuration screen to configure a TIB. The
“Sensor Type” field determines the function of the TIB-RTD application,
thermocouple application, or cold junction compensator RTD
application. Some of the fields that appear on the I/O Block
Configuration screen depend on the type of sensor being configured.
Figure 4.2.1 shows the I/O Block Configuration screen fields that are
common to all TIB applications. Table 4.2.1 describes these fields. The
fields that appear only for particular applications are described later.
HINT: To save configuration time once a TIB is configured, use [PAGE

AHEAD] to call up the next unconfigured TIB, which has all entries
configured the same as the previously configured TIB, except for the
block tag.
- To select the sensor and its scaling:
Manual. Press [ENTER].
2. Cursor to the “Sensor Type” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to
select the desired sensor type. Press [ENTER].
3. For thermocouple and RTD sensors, a “Temp” field appears.
Cursor to the “Temp” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to select
the desired temperature units. Press [ENTER].
IO: 4-2-3
Linearized temperature from the field, converted

from Centigrade if applicable.
Letter following temperature indicates the
temperature scale selected.
Determines the application of the block:
Displays the Displays the block
RTD = RTD
current field value output value
J, K, T, E, R, S, B, --E, --T, CJC = Thermocouple
MV or OHM = Calibration
Address =10AB101 Device Type TIB
TIB Tag Þ Block Type ÞTIB Mode ® MANUAL
Auto Lock Þ no
Field Value -30. C
88.22 ohms Sensor Type Þ RTD Block Out > .00
Temp Þ C
Eng Units Þ Range > 1
Ext. Res Þ .00
Eng Zero Þ Cal Mode > No
Offset Cal > No
Eng Max Þ
Descriptor Þ Full Range -245 to 12 C
ALARMS
Inst High ® None Crit High ® None Adv High ® None
Inst Low ® None Crit Low ® None Adv Low ® None
Hardware Alarm Code 8 Priority Þ 0 Plant UnitÞ0 Al DdBand Þ None
Figure 4.2.1. TIB Configuration Screen—Configuring a TIB
IO: 4-2-4
Table 4.2.1. Common Fields for the TIB Configuration Screen
Access
Level
Block Tag Conf User defined block tag. characters; at least one
must be alphabetic.
TIB, DIB, DOB, HOB
Current block mode.
If “Auto,” the block function drives the block
Mode Supr output. AUTO, MANUAL
If “Manual,” the operator can directly manipulate
Indicates whether or not the block is locked into
Auto mode.
If “Yes,” the block is locked in Auto mode. The
Auto Lock Conf yes, no
If “No,” the block can be switched to Manual
mode.
Current input value and the corresponding
Temperature scale.
The upper value is the linearized input value. If a
temperature scale other than centigrade is
configured, this value has been converted from
centigrade to the configured temperature scale.
The lower value is the actual value of the current
field input (in millivolts or ohms).
Block output value in engineering units or percent
of span, depending on the display scaling. For
Max.=999999
more information, refer to page 4-2-13, “Scaling
(Eng Max)
Block Out Oper an RTD Sensor TIB or a Thermocouple Sensor
TIB” later in this section. Min.=--999999
(Eng Zero)
Must be in Manual mode to enter a value for test
purposes.
User selectable signal characterization curve.
Depending on the type of sensor selected,
additional fields may appear. All thermocouples RTD, J, K, T, E, R, S, B,
Sensor Type Conf
use NBS standards. --E, --T, CJC, OHM, MV
IO: 4-2-5
Table 4.2.1. Common Fields for the TIB Configuration Screen (continued)
Access
Field Level Description Allowable Entries
Engineering units assigned to the block output.

For more information, see page 4-2-13 “Scaling
an RTD Sensor TIB or a Thermocouple Sensor Maximum of 8
Eng Units Conf
TIB” later in this section. characters
Value to be displayed when the block output is
0%. For more information, see page 4-2-13 Max = 999999.
Eng Zero Conf “Scaling an RTD Sensor TIB or a Thermocouple Min = --999999.
Sensor TIB” later in this section. Default = .00
Value to be displayed when the block output is
100%. For more information, see page 4-2-13 Max = 999999.
Eng Max Conf “Scaling an RTD Sensor TIB or a Thermocouple Min = --999999.
Sensor TIB” later in this section. Default = 1.00
No,
MV Range 1:
Lo --4 mv, Hi 22 mv
MV Range 2:
Mode of calibration. For information about Lo --16 mv, Hi 88 mv
Cal Mode Supr calibrating a TIB, see SV: 7. OHM Range 1:
Must be in Manual mode to calibrate a TIB. Lo 0.0 OHM,
Hi 100 OHM
OHM Range 2:
Lo 0.0 OHM,
Hi 400 OHM
Sensitivity range of the temperature input FIC for
allowing selection of more accuracy or wider
range.
Range Conf For the RTD temperature ranges, see Table 1.2.2. 1, 2
For the thermocouple temperature ranges, see
Table 1.2.3. For the cold junction compensation
temperature ranges, see Table 1.2.4. For the
millivolt and Ohm ranges, see Table 1.2.5.
Descriptor Conf User configured descriptor. Any characters up to 24
Full range of the sensor type selected in degrees
Full Range NA Display only
Celsius.
IO: 4-2-6
Table 4.2.1. Common Fields for the TIB Configuration Screen (continued)
Access
High hardware alarm point applied to the field

value.
If an Eng Zero of .00 and an Eng Max of 1.0 are Engineering units:
configured, the high hardware alarm point is in
Inst High Supr Max = 999999.
engineering units.
Min = --999999.
If an Eng Zero and an Eng Max are configured to
any other value, the high hardware alarm point is
in percent.
Low hardware alarm point applied to the field
value.
If an Eng Zero of .00 and an Eng Max of 1.0 are Engineering units:
configured, the low hardware alarm point is in
Inst Low Supr Max = 999999.
engineering units.
Min = --999999.
If an Eng Zero and an Eng Max are configured to
any other value, the low hardware alarm point is in
percent.
High critical process alarm point (in engineering Max = 999999.

Crit High Conf
units) applied to the block output value. Min = --999999.
Low critical process alarm point (in engineering Max = 999999.

Crit Low Conf
High advisory process alarm point (in engineering Max = 999999.

Adv High Conf
Low advisory process alarm point (in engineering Max = 999999.

Adv Low Conf
Deadband value (in percent of engineering units) Max = 999999.

Al DdBand Conf
applied to all of the block alarm points. Min = .00
Hardware Indicates an FIC hardware fault. For information
NA Display only
Alarm Code on alarm messages, see: AL.
Assigns alarm priority to hardware alarms and
critical and advisory process alarms. 0 indicates
Priority Conf highest priority; 3 indicates lowest priority. 0--3
You can configure the default value for the “Alarm
Priority” field on the Alarm Configuration screen.
Indicates a user defined group of blocks to which
the block is assigned. Access to I/O blocks from
Plant Unit Conf a console may be restricted if the console has not 0--256
been assigned to the I/O block plant unit.
IO: 4-2-7
Table 4.2.2. Centigrade Temperature Ranges for RTD inputs
Sensor Type (Ohms) Range 1 Range 2

RTD --245 to 12 °C --245 to 850 °C
Table 4.2.3. Centigrade Temperature Ranges for Thermocouple Inputs
Sensor Type Range 1 (22 mV) Range 2 (88 mV)

J --64 to 433 °C --210 to 760 °C
K --92 to 565 °C --240 to 1372 °C
T --98 to 400 °C --245 to 400 °C
E --51 to 336 °C --255 to 1000 °C
R 0 to 1768 °C None
S 0 to 1768 °C None
B 400 to 1820 °C None
*--E --255 to 89 °C None
*--T --245 to 118 °C None
* --E and --T sensor types allow the thermocouple input leads to be connected with
reverse polarity and provide added sensitivity in the lower temperature ranges for
more accurate cryogenic--type applications.
Table 4.2.4. Centigrade Temperature Ranges for CJC Inputs
Sensor Type (Degrees) Range 1 Range 2

CJC --30 to 70 °C --30 to 70 °C
Table 4.2.5. Ranges for Millivolt and Ohm Scale Inputs
Sensor Type Range 1 (22 mV) Range 2 (88 mV)

MV --4.250 to 22.500 mV --17.000 to 90.000 mV
OHM 0 to 105 Ohm 0 to 420 Ohm
IO: 4-2-8
Configuring an RTD Sensor TIB
You can configure a TIB as an RTD sensor.
Figure 4.2.2 shows a TIB Configuration screen for an RTD sensor TIB.
Table 4.2.6 describes the fields that are common to RTD sensor TIBs.
(Refer to Table 4.2.1 for a description of the fields common to all TIBs.)
You can configure an offset resistance to improve RTD resolution for

temperature ranges using Range 1. The RTD Range 1 has a span of
100 Ohms (0--100 Ohms). If you add an external bias resistor to the
current lead of the RTD leads, the FIC can provide the added resolution
of the lower range to any temperature desired by moving the Range 1
usable scale as high as needed. The span remains at 100 Ohms. For
the field wiring terminations for an external resistor, see SV: 5.
For example, the normal temperature readout for Range 1 is 0--100

Ohms or --245 °C to 0 °C. Adding an external resistor of 100 Ohms and
configuring an “Ext. Res” of 100.00 allows the input to provide the
added accuracy of Range 1 from 100 to 200 Ohms (0 °C to 267 °C). To
calculate the temperature shift for any given external resistance
required, see a standard platinum RTD temperature table.
Use the “Ext. Res” field to configure external resistance. The external
resistance can be any value from 0.00 to 600.00 Ohms.

Auto Lock Þ no
Field Value -32.00 F
100 ohms Sensor Type Þ RTD Block Out > 32.00
Temp Þ F
Eng Units Þ Range > 1
Ext. Res Þ .00
Eng Zero Þ .00 Cal Mode > No
Offset Cal > No
Eng Max Þ 1.00
ALARMS
Figure 4.2.2. TIB Configuration Screen—Configuring an RTD Sensor TIB
IO: 4-2-9
Table 4.2.6. Common Fields for an RTD Sensor TIB
Access
Level
C (Celsius),
Selects the Temperature units for the RTD sensor. F (Fahrenheit),
Temp Conf
Must be in Manual mode to configure. K (Kelvin),
R (Rankine)
Selects the value of the external resistance for the
RTD sensor, allowing Range 1 to be biased to any
temperature range up to 850 °C, 100 Ohm span .00--600.00
Ext. Res Conf
only. Default = .00
Used for lead resistance calibration
Offset Cal Oper This field appears when the block is in Manual No, Yes
mode.
Used for lead resistance calibration.
Off. Value Oper Display Only
This field appears when the block is in Auto mode.
IO: 4-2-10
Configuring a Thermocouple Sensor TIB or a CJC

Sensor TIB
A TIB configured for a thermocouple application requires a

thermocouple sensor TIB and a cold junction compensation value. This
value can be provided by a ControlBlock or by a TIB configured as a
CJC sensor. The block providing the cold junction compensation must
be linked to the thermocouple sensor TIB.
If the cold junction compensation value is known, you can link a

thermocouple sensor TIB to a ControlBlock. The ControlBlock requires
an Eng Zero of .00 and an Eng Max of 1.0.
If the cold junction compensation value is unknown, you can link a

thermocouple sensor TIB to a CJC sensor TIB. For more information,
see page 4-2-12 “Configuring a CJC Sensor TIB”.
IO: 4-2-11
Configuring a Thermocouple Sensor TIB
Figure 4.2.3 shows a TIB Configuration screen configured to act as a

thermocouple. Table 4.2.7 describes the fields that are common to
thermocouple sensor TIBs. (See Table 4.2.1 for a description of the
fields common to all TIBs.)
Address of the block providing the Temperature range for the

cold junction compensation temperature inputs

Auto Lock Þ no
Field Value 15.29 C
-0.762 ohms Sensor Type Þ j Block Out > .00
Temp Þ C
Eng Units Þ Deg C Range > 1
CJC Þ 10AB102
1.00 CJC Value > 23.6
Eng Max Þ
ALARMS
Figure 4.2.3. TIB Configuration Screen—Configuring a Thermocouple Sensor TIB
Table 4.2.7. Common Fields for a Thermocouple Sensor TIB
Access
Level
Temperature units of the thermocouple sensor. C (Celsius),

Temp Conf F (Fahrenheit),
Must be in Manual mode to configure. K (Kelvin), R (Rankine)
Tag or address of the source link that is to provide
the cold junction compensation for the
thermocouple. The temperature is measured in Maximum of 16
CJC Conf degrees Celsius and then is internally scaled for characters
the TIB.
CJC Value Conf Internally scaled temperature value. Display Only
IO: 4-2-12
Configuring a CJC Sensor TIB
When you use a Rosemount cold junction compensator RTD, configure

a CJC sensor TIB to correct the cold junction compensation of a
thermocouple sensor. Figure 4.2.4 shows a TIB Configuration screen
configured to act as a CJC sensor. (See Table 4.2.1 for a description of
the fields common to all TIBs.)
You can link a CJC sensor TIB to more than one thermocouple sensor;
however, until you configure the CJC link to a thermocouple application,
an “Input Configuration Error” is generated. If, after you configure the
link, a hold forward flag is asserted, the last known good value for the
CJC is sent to the FIC. To ensure that the hold forward flag is asserted,
you should configure the Inst High and Inst Low fields.
NOTE: To use a trending function to view the operation of a CJC

sensor TIB, you must link the CJC sensor TIB to a ControlBlock; then
use logic functions to make scaling corrections and display the
ControlBlock link. The cold junction compensation value remains as is,
without any internal scaling performed by the RS3 distributed control
system.

Auto Lock Þ no
Field Value -30. C
57.025 ohms Sensor Type Þ CJC Block Out > .2270
Temp Þ C
Range > 1
Ext. Res Þ .00
Cal Mode > No
Offset Cal > No
Eng Max Þ
ALARMS
Figure 4.2.4. TIB Configuration Screen—Configuring a CJC Sensor TIB
IO: 4-2-13
Scaling an RTD Sensor TIB or a Thermocouple Sensor

TIB
The “Sensor Type” and “Range” fields determine the temperature inputs
for the TIB. The default display scaling is an Eng Zero value of .00 and
an Eng Max value of 1.00. This default value (.00--1.00) differs from
other I/O blocks, which default to a range of .00 to 100.00%. This
difference allows scale values for batch input.
You can configure a display scaling other than .00 to 1.00 to view
fluctuations in the temperature range that otherwise may not appear on
the faceplate. To alter the display scaling to display slight temperature
variations, configure the “Eng Zero” and “Eng Max” fields to reflect the
desired scale.
Figure 4.2.5 shows three continuous faceplates for a type K

thermocouple with range 2, --240 to 1372 °C. Each faceplate has a
different display scaling configured: .00 to 1.00, --240.00 to 1372, and
--20.00 to 120.00. The faceplate on the right, with a display scaling of
--20.00 to 120.00, shows the best representation of the temperatures
being measured.
IO: 4-2-14
Default Display Scaling Scaling Other than Default Display Scaling
Faceplate scaling— Faceplate scaling— Faceplate scaling—

.00 = Eng Zero --240.00 = Eng Zero --20.00 = Eng Zero
1.00 = Eng Max 1372.00 = Eng Max 120.00 = Eng Max
A 100. A 100. A 100.

B 75. B 75. B 75.
1-- 1372-- 120--
85--
-- 551--
50--
.5-- 140.5--
-- 15--
}
0-- --240-- --20
55.47 Normal temperature
55.47 range in which 55.47
OUT OUT viewing is
OUT
desired—
GPM --20 to 120
GPM GPM
Figure 4.2.5. Display Scaling of Continuous Faceplates
IO: 4-2-15
Default Display Scaling
If you use the default display scaling (Eng Zero of 0.0, Eng Max of 1.0),
the field value input to the TIB is not altered in any way for the block
output. Figure 4.2.6 shows a TIB that is configured as an RTD using
temperature range 2, --245 to 850 degrees Celsius (Table 4.2.2). The
TIB uses the default display scaling of Eng Zero of .00 and an Eng Max
of 1.0. Figure 4.2.6 shows that the block output value is the same as
the block input value. All configured alarms use the engineering value
over the full range of the sensor.
No limits on the TIB output value

Auto Lock Þ no
Field Value 72.00. C
127.84 ohms Sensor Type Þ RTD Block Out > 72.00
Temp Þ C
Eng Units Þ Deg Range > 1
Ext. Res Þ .00
Offset Cal > No
Eng Max Þ 1.00
ALARMs
Inst High ® 840.00 Crit High ® 600.00 Adv High ® 550.00
Inst Low ® -240.00 Crit Low ® -200.00 Adv Low ® -150.00
Figure 4.2.6. Scaling a TIB with the Default Eng Zero and Eng Max Values
IO: 4-2-16
Other Display Scaling
If you configure a display scaling other than the default display scaling
for the TIB, the block output is a percentage of span of the Eng Zero
and Eng Max. This percentage of span has an upper limit of +15% of
the span and a lower limit of --15% of the span. The TIB output value
must be between the limits. If the TIB output value exceeds one of
these limits, the output value is limited to a value ±15% of the Eng Zero
and Eng Max range.
Figure 4.2.7 shows a TIB that is configured as an RTD sensor using

temperature range 2, --245 to 850 degrees Celsius. The shaded box in
Figure 4.2.7 shows that the TIB temperature display scaling has been
reconfigured to display --20 to 120 degrees Celsius temperatures only.
Because display scaling other than the default display scaling is being
used, any TIB output values must be within the range --41 to 141 °C due
to the output limits.
Figure 4.2.6 also shows that when you configure a display scaling other
than the default scaling, the instrument high and instrument low alarms
are entered as a percentage of scale.
TIB input value is 600.00 degrees. However, the upper limit of the displayed
scaling limit is 141.0. The block output cannot exceed this limit.

Auto Lock Þ no
Field Value 600.00 C
313.59 ohms Sensor Type Þ RTD Block Out > 141.0
Temp Þ C
Eng Units Þ Deg Range > 1
Ext. Res Þ .00
Eng Zero Þ -20.00 Cal Mode > No
Offset Cal > No
Eng Max Þ 120.00
ALARMS
Inst High ® 105.00% Crit High ® 110.00 Adv High ® 100.00
Inst Low ® -5.00% Crit Low ® -15.00 Adv Low ® -10.00
Figure 4.2.7. Scaling a TIB with Eng Zero and Eng Max Values Other than the Default Values
IO: 4-2-17
TIB Functional Diagram
Figure 4.2.8 shows the Temperature Input Block functional diagram.
FIC Software
None
Field
Cal Low Value
50.00
Cal High Voltage/ °C
A/D Resistance to
TEMP
Filter Conversion
TC/ Software
RTD
3 Lead
Compensation
Range 1
220 Microamp Range 2

Current Source
for RTD
Console Keyboard
TIB CJC
Software Link
Block Out
Ext Res 50.00
Value
MAN
To
AUTO CB
Instrument Advisory Critical

Alarm Alarm Alarm
Figure 4.2.8. TIB Functional Block Diagram
IO: 4-2-18
TIB Summary
This part of the section provides a configuration summary of an RTD

sensor TIB, a thermocouple sensor TIB, and a CJC sensor TIB. This
summary also describes how to link a ControlBlock to a thermocouple
sensor.
Configuring an RTD Sensor TIB
A TIB can be configured to display temperature from an RTD. An RTD

sensor is a platinum wire that changes its resistance directly with
temperature, and thereby provides a temperature value.
A TIB configured as an RTD sensor requires configuration of the field

wiring terminations for an RTD application. An external resistor can be
added to improve the RTD resolution.
In addition, a TIB must be configured as an RTD sensor.

- To configure an RTD sensor TIB:
1. Configure the “Sensor Type” as an RTD.
2. Configure the temperature “Range” as 1 or 2.
3. If a temperature range other than Celsius is to be used, select
the desired “Temp” (F, K, or R).
4. If an external resistance is desired to improve the RTD
resolution, enter the “Ext. Res” value.
5. If another scaling other than default scaling (.00 to 1.00) is
desired, enter the “Eng Zero” and “Eng Max” values.
IO: 4-2-19
Configuring a Thermocouple Sensor TIB
A TIB can be configured to display temperature from a thermocouple. A

thermocouple sensor consists of two wires of dissimilar metals that
produce a steady electrical current to measure temperature. Cold
junction compensation for the thermocouple is either generated by a
Rosemount supplied 57--Ohm cold junction compensator RTD, or is
supplied by a ControlBlock.
A TIB configured as a thermocouple requires configuration of the field

wiring terminations for a thermocouple application. In addition, a
thermocouple requires configuration of a thermocouple sensor TIB.
The thermocouple must be linked to the block providing the cold
junction compensation.
- To configure a thermocouple sensor TIB:
1. Configure the “Sensor Type” as a thermocouple
(J, K, T, E, R, S, B, --E, or --T).
2. Configure the temperature “Range” as 1 or 2.
3. If a temperature range other than Celsius is to be used, select
the desired “Temp” (F, K, or R).
4. Enter the address of the block providing the cold junction
compensation in the “CJC Link” field.
5. If another scaling other than default scaling (.00 to 1.00) is
desired, enter the “Eng Zero” and “Eng Max” values.
IO: 4-2-20
Configuring a CJC Sensor TIB
A TIB can be configured to provide a cold junction compensation value

to a thermocouple from a Rosemount supplied 57--Ohm cold junction
compensator RTD.
A TIB configured as a CJC sensor requires that the cold junction

compensator RTD be connected to the Analog Marshalling Panel. One
cold junction compensator RTD can be used to provide cold junction
compensation for numerous thermocouples. In addition, a CJC sensor
requires configuration of a CJC sensor TIB. This CJC sensor TIB must
be linked to a thermocouple. To configure a CJC sensor TIB on the TIB
Configuration screen, configure the “Sensor Type” as a “CJC.”
Linking a ControlBlock to a Thermocouple Sensor TIB
A ControlBlock can be linked to a thermocouple to provide a known cold

junction compensation value. On the Continuous Links screen, the
ControlBlock Eng Zero must be configured as .00 and the Eng Max
must be configured as 1.0, with a resulting value of 23.0 or greater.
IO: 4-3-1
Section 3:
Hints for Configuring TIBs
This section provides tips that are helpful when configuring TIBs.
Configuration Tips
Listed below are hints to help you when configuring TIBs.

- Time saver for configuring TIBs
To save time when configuring TIBs, after configuring one TIB block,
use [PAGE AHEAD] to call up the next unconfigured TIB block. All
of the entries are already configured the same as the previously
configured TIB block, except for the block tag.
- Configuring the CJC sensor TIB
D If you know the cold junction compensation value, you can link
the thermocouple sensor TIB to a ControlBlock.
D If you do not know the cold junction compensation value, you
have to link the thermocouple sensor TIB to a TIB configured as
a CJC sensor.
D Be sure to link the CJC sensor to a thermocouple sensor TIB.
- Delayed indication when a thermocouple or RTD is suddenly
opened
If a thermocouple or RTD is suddenly opened, the TIB input slowly
ramps up. It might take up to 25 seconds for a configured
instrument high alarm to appear or for a hold forward flag to indicate
that the thermocouple or RTD is open.
- Trending CJC information
If you would like to use a trending function to view the operation of a
CJC sensor TIB, link the CJC sensor TIB to a ControlBlock; then use
logic functions to make the scaling corrections and display the
ControlBlock link. The cold junction compensation value remains as
is, without any internal scaling performed by the RS3 control system.
RS3: Configuring Temperature Input Blocks Hints for Configuring TIBs

RS3t
Chapter 5:
Configuring Redundant Input/Output Blocks
Section 1: Configuring a Redundant Input/Output Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1-1

Configuration Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1-2
Configuring an RIOB for an Analog Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1-3
Configuring an RIOB for a Discrete Termination Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1-4
Changing the Redundancy Scheme for Analog or Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1-5
Changing the Backup Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1-6
Determining the Backup Status of an FIC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1-7
Determining the Backup Status of an FIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1-9
Section 2: RIOB Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2-1
Section 3: Hints for Configuring RIOBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3-1

RS3: Configuring Redundant Input/Output Blocks Contents

IO: ii
List of Figures
Figure Page
5.1.1 Configuring an RIOB for an Analog Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1-3
5.1.2 Configuring an RIOB for a FIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1-4
5.1.3 RIOB Configuration Screen—Backing Up FICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1-6
5.1.4 RIOB Configuration Screen—Determining FIC Backup Status . . . . . . 5-1-8
5.1.5 RIOB Configuration Screen for a Second Redundant FIC . . . . . . . . . . 5-1-8
5.1.6 RIOB Configuration Screen—Determining FIM Backup Status . . . . . . 5-1-9
5.2.1 Redundant I/O Block (RIOB) Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2-1

IO: iii
List of Tables
Table Page
5.2.1 Redundant I/O Block (RIOB) Configuration Screen Fields ......... 5-2-2

IO: 5-1-1
Section 1:
Configuring a Redundant Input/Output Block
This section explains how to use Redundant I/O Blocks (RIOBs).

RIOBs are used to configure redundancy for Analog Card Cages and
Discrete Termination Panels. RIOBs also track the health and backup
status of the FIC cards, Transfer cards, and FIMs.
If an Analog Card Cage has redundant FICs or if a Discrete Termination

Panel has redundant FIMs, a Redundant I/O Block (RIOB) must be
configured for the card cage or panel. The RIOB provides the system
with a software configuration of the redundancy scheme and also
provides information about the status of the cards in the card cage or
the FIMs.
Redundancy with the Discrete Termination Panel is different from

normal redundancy in the following ways:
D The first FIM on switches the point on.
D The last FIM off switches the point off.
D Both FIMs are connected to the field at the same time.
D The two FIMS operate cooperatively. Both FIMs are actively
following the DIBs and controlling the DOBs.
For more information on redundancy and on--line replacement, see the

Service Manual, Chapter 5.
RS3: Configuring Redundant Input/Output Blocks Configuring a Redundant Input/Output Block

IO: 5-1-2
Configuration Guidelines
D You must consider the RIOB as the first block on the first
redundant card slot:
NOTE: The Discrete Termination Panel does not have 7/1 and 3/1
capabilities. It only has 1:1 redundancy capabilities.
— with 7/1 redundancy, the RIOB is at address =xxx801
— with 3/1 redundancy, the RIOB is at address =xxx401 or
xxx801
— with 1/1 redundancy, the RIOB is at address =xxx201,
xxx401, xxx601, or xxx801
D The 1/1 redundancy scheme is available only when using a
Multipurpose Controller Processor running the MPCA or MPC+
software image.
D No additional blocks can be configured on the FIC or FIM if an
RIOB has been configured.
D The RIOB must be in Auto mode for redundancy to be in effect.
D The FICs in the card cage and the Discrete Termination Panel
and Isolated Termination Panels must have the redundancy
scheme jumpers set for the proper redundancy scheme. For
information about redundancy scheme jumper positions, see
SV: 5.
D If the primary FIM fails and you replace it, as soon as the new
FIM powers up it will assume cooperative redundancy along with
the FIM that is currently running.

IO: 5-1-3
Configuring an RIOB for an Analog Card Cage
To configure a redundant Analog or Pulse FIC, you must configure an

RIOB. Figure 5.1.1 shows the RIOB Configuration screen.
- To configure a redundant Analog or Pulse FIC:
1. Make sure the FICs in the card cage are properly jumpered. For
the redundancy scheme jumper positions, see SV: 5.
2. Call up the I/O Block Configuration screen for the RIOB address
(=xxx801, =xxx601, =xxx401, or =xxx201, depending on the
redundancy scheme).
3. Cursor to the “Block Type” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to
select RIOB. Press [ENTER].
4. Cursor to the “Redundancy Scheme” field and press [NEXT
OPTION] to select the redundancy scheme. Press [ENTER].
5. Cursor to the “Block Tag” field and enter the block tag. Press
[ENTER].
6. Cursor to the “Backup” field for each FIC. Press [NEXT OPTION]
to select YES if the FIC is to be backed up by a redundant FIC.
Press [ENTER]. Otherwise press [NEXT OPTION] to select NO.
Press [ENTER].

Address =2AA801 Device Type AIB
Block TagÞ Block Type ÞRIOB Mode ® MANUAL
Auto Lock Þ no
Redundancy Scheme >7/1
Cage Line A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8
Backup Þ NO Þ NO Þ NO Þ NO Þ NO Þ NO Þ NO
Health
Xfer Health
Backup Status FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE
Reset Backup (press Enter) >0 (none)
Force Backup on Number >0 (none)

FIC Type AIO Rev 2.1 HW Alarm Code 0
CONFIG 1
Figure 5.1.1. Configuring an RIOB for an Analog Card Cage

IO: 5-1-4
Configuring an RIOB for a Discrete Termination Panel
To configure a redundant Field Interface Module, you must configure an

RIOB. Figure 5.1.2 shows the RIOB Configuration screen.
- To configure a redundant Field Interface Module:
1. Make sure the Field Interface Modules are properly jumpered.
For the redundancy scheme jumper positions, see the Service
Manual, Chapter 6, Section 1.
2. Call up the I/O Block Configuration screen for the RIOB address
(=xxx801, =xxx601, =xxx401, or =xxx201, depending on the
address of the primary FIM, =xxx701, =xxx501, =xxx301,
=xxx101).
3. Cursor to the “Block Type” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to
select RIOB; then press [ENTER].
4. Cursor to the “Block Tag” field and enter the block tag; then press
[ENTER].
5. Cursor to the “Backup” field for the primary FIM. Press [NEXT
OPTION] to select YES if the FIM is to be backed up by a
redundant FIM; then press [ENTER]. Otherwise press [NEXT
OPTION] to select NO; then press [ENTER].

Address =2AA801 Device Type DIB or DOB
Auto Lock Þ no
Backup Þ YES
Health GOOD
Xfer Health
Backup Status CO-OP R-2
Reset Backup of Line 2 (press enter)

CONFIG 1
Figure 5.1.2. Configuring an RIOB for a FIM

IO: 5-1-5
Changing the Redundancy Scheme for Analog or Pulse
- To change the redundancy scheme from 3/1 to 7/1 or from 7/1 to

3/1:
1. Cursor to the “Redundancy Scheme” field and change it to the
desired scheme.
2. Put the RIOB in Manual mode.
3. Force a backup on any associated FIC.
4. Put the RIOB in Auto mode.
NOTE: Discrete termination panels allow only 1/1 redundancy.

IO: 5-1-6
Changing the Backup Option
You can configure the FIC or FIM to indicate whether it is to be backed

up by a redundant FIC or FIM in case of a failure. You can change this
backup option at any time.
- To change from Nonbackup Mode to Backup Mode:
1. Cursor to the “Backup” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to select
Yes; then press [ENTER]. The “Backup Status” field displays the
following message:
READY
Figure 5.1.3 shows that the FICs in slots A1 and A2 are to be backed up
by the redundant FIC in slot A4.
- To change from Backup Mode to Nonbackup Mode:
1. Cursor to the “Backup” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to select
No; then press [ENTER]. The “Backup Status” field displays the
following message:
FREE
Figure 5.1.3 shows that the FIC in slot A3 is not being backed up by a
redundant FIC.

Block TagÞ Block Type ÞRIOB Mode ® AUTO
Auto Lock Þ no
Backup Þ YES Þ YES Þ NO
Health GOOD GOOD
Xfer Health GOOD
Backup Status READY READY FREE R-4 FREE FREE FREE FREE

CONFIG 1
Figure 5.1.3. RIOB Configuration Screen—Backing Up FICs

IO: 5-1-7
Determining the Backup Status of an FIC Card
The “Backup Status” field on the RIOB Configuration screen displays

the backup status of the FIC. The status types that may occur are
described below and are shown in Figure 5.1.4
BACKUP The FIC has failed and the backup FIC is now functioning
for the FIC.
Figure 5.1.4 shows that the FIC in slot A2 is in the process
of being backed up by the FIC in slot A4. The green LEDs
on the FIC card in slot A2 flash while the card is being
backed up.
READY The FIC is functional and the FIC is backed up by a

redundant FIC.
Figure 5.1.4 shows that the FIC in slot A1 is ready to
receive signals.
FREE The FIC is functional and is not being backed up by a
redundant FIC.
Figure 5.1.4 shows that the FIC in slot A3 is not being
backed up by a redundant FIC.
R--x The FIC is functional as the redundant backup FIC. The x
refers to the slot number of the redundant card.
Figure 5.1.4 shows that the FIC in slot A4 is the redundant
card for the FICs in slots A1 through A3.
No. 2, 4, 6, The FIC is being backed up by the redundant FIC in slot,
or 8 2, 4, 6, or 8. Figure 5.1.4 shows that the FICs in slots A5
through A7 are being backed up by the redundant FIC in
slot A8. Figure 5.1.5 shows the RIOB Configuration
screen for the redundant FIC in slot A8.

IO: 5-1-8

Block TagÞ PEAR Block Type ÞRIOB Mode ® AUTO
Auto Lock Þ no
Backup Þ YES Þ YES Þ NO
Health GOOD BAD
Xfer Health GOOD GOOD
Backup Status READY READY FREE R-4 FREE FREE FREE FREE

CONFIG 1
Figure 5.1.4. RIOB Configuration Screen—Determining FIC Backup Status

Block TagÞ PEAR Block Type ÞRIOB Mode ® AUTO
Auto Lock Þ no
Backup Þ NO Þ YES Þ YES
Health GOOD GOOD
Xfer Health GOOD GOOD
Backup Status 4 4 4 R-4 FREE READY READY R-8

CONFIG 1
Figure 5.1.5. RIOB Configuration Screen for a Second Redundant FIC

IO: 5-1-9
Determining the Backup Status of an FIM
The “Backup Status” field on the RIOB Configuration screen displays the backup
status of the FIM. The status types that may occur are described below and are
shown in Figure 5.1.6.
BACKUP The FIM has failed and the backup FIM is now functioning for the FIM.
Figure 5.1.6 shows that the FIM in slot A1 is backed up by the FIM in
slot A2. If the FIM in slot A fails, the green LEDs on the FIM card in slot
A1 flash while the card is being backed up.
READY The FIM is functional and the FIM is backed up by a redundant FIM. If
the FIM were ready to receive signals, the backup status would show
ready.
FREE The FIM is functional and is not being backed up by a redundant FIM.
The “Backup Status” field shows free if the “Backup” field is set to no.
R-x The FIM is functional as the redundant backup FIM. The x refers to the
slot number of the redundant card. Figure 5.1.6 shows that the FIM in
slot A2 is the redundant card for the FIM in slot A1.
CO--OP Redundancy is enabled and both FIMs are healthy and running. The
FIMs are running cooperatively, with both cards reading inputs and
driving outputs together. Figure 5.1.6 shows that both FIMs are running.

Block TagÞ Block Type ÞRIOB Mode ® AUTO
Auto Lock Þ no
Backup Þ YES
Health GOOD
Xfer Health
Backup Status CO-OP R-2
CONFIG 1
Figure 5.1.6. RIOB Configuration Screen—Determining FIM Backup Status

IO: 5-2-1
Section 2:
RIOB Block Configuration Screen
This section describes the fields on the RIOB configuration screen.

Figure 5.2.1 shows the screen, and Table 5.2.1 explains the fields.

Auto Lock Þ no
Backup Þ NO Þ NO Þ NO Þ NO Þ NO Þ NO Þ NO
Health
Xfer Health
Backup Status FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE

CONFIG 1
Figure 5.2.1. Redundant I/O Block (RIOB) Configuration Screen
RS3: Configuring Redundant Input/Output Blocks RIOB Block Configuration Screen

IO: 5-2-2
Table 5.2.1. Redundant I/O Block (RIOB) Configuration Screen Fields
Access
Level
NONE, AIB, CIB,
AOB, COB, ADS,
MIB, PLCB, SIB,
RIOB, VIB, PIOB,
TIB, DIB, DOB,
HOB
Determines the operating mode of FICs or FIMs.
NOTE: Auto is the normal operating mode of the block.
In the case of a failure, Auto mode allows the redundant
Mode Supr card to back up the failed FIC or FIM. Auto, Manual
In the case of a failure, Manual mode does not allow
FIC or FIM redundancy. Manual mode allows the user
to select “Reset Backup” or “Force Backup on Number.”
mode.
Auto Lock Conf If “Yes”, the block is locked in Auto mode. The block no, yes
none, 1/1, 3/1, 7/1
Type of redundancy scheme to be used.
Redundancy The
NOTE:
Conf NOTE: The 1/1 option is functional only when using a
Scheme Discrete Termination
Multipurpose Controller Processor running the MPCA or
Panel allows only
MPC+ software image.
1/1 redundancy.
Displays the FIC or FIM slot positions in order from left
to right.
Cage Line NA To call up an RIOB Configuration screen for an FIC or Display only
FIM in a particular slot, cursor to the desired slot
number in the “Cage Line” field and press [SELECT].
Backup (for Determines whether or not this RIOB provides
Cage Line A1 Conf redundancy for the FIC or FIM designated in the “Cage YES, NO
through A7) Line” field.
Identifies the health of the FIC or FIM.
Health NA GOOD = Functional. Display only
BAD = Not functional.
Identifies the health of the Transfer card.
GOOD = Functional.
BAD = Not functional.
Xfer Health NA Display only
NOTE: This field applies only to the Analog, TC/RTD,
and Pulse RIOB screens. It does not appear on the
Discrete Termination Panel RIOB screen.
NOTE: Bold text indicates the default condition.

IO: 5-2-3
Table 5.2.1. Redundant I/O Block (RIOB) Configuration Screen Fields (continued)
Access
Identifies the backup status of the FIC or FIM.

BACKUP = The FIC or FIM has failed and the
backup FIC or FIM is now functioning
for the failed FIC or FIM.
READ = The FIC or FIM is functional and the
FIC or FIM is backed up by a redundant
FIC or FIM.
R--2, R--4, = The FIC or FIM is functional as the
R--6, R--8 redundant backup FIC or FIM. 2, 4, 6,
or 8 indicates the slot number of the
redundant FIC or FIM backing up the
Backup FIC or FIM identified in the “Cage Line”
NA Display only
Status field.
CO--OP = Backup status of the FIM. Redundancy
is enabled and both FIMs are healthy
and running. The FIMs are running
cooperatively with both cards reading
the inputs and driving the outputs
together.
FREE = The FIC or FIM is functional and is not
being backed up by a redundant FIC or
FIM.
ERR = Cannot back up the card. Illegal
configuration.
Selects the backup FIC or FIM that has been replaced
Reset Backup and is ready to act as backup again.
Oper [ENTER]
(press enter)
Must be in Manual mode to reset.
Resets the FIC or FIM or forces the selected FIC or
FIM to be backed up (for testing or calibration
purposes).
Force Backup 0 (none),
Oper 0 =Resets the FIC or FIM
on Number 1 through 7
1--7 =FIC or FIM on which the backup is forced
Must be in Manual mode to reset.
Configured type of FIC card or FIM communicating with
AIO, CIO, AIO--R,
the I/O block: analog I/O (AIO), contact I/O (CIO),
AIO--RS, PULSE,
redundant analog I/O (AIO--R), redundant AIO with
FICType, Rev NA TEMP, DIO, MAI,
Smart daughter board (AIO--RS), temperature input
MAO
(TEMP), discrete I/O (DIO), multipoint input (MAI),
Display Only
multipoint output (MAO).

IO: 5-2-4
Table 5.2.1. Redundant I/O Block (RIOB) Configuration Screen Fields (continued)
Access
Assigns alarm priority to hardware alarms. 0 indicates

highest priority; 3 indicates lowest priority. You can
Alarm Priority Conf 0--3
configure the default value for the “Alarm Priority” field
on the Alarm Configuration screen.
Plant Unit Conf restricted if the console has not been assigned to the 0--255
I/O block plant unit.

IO: 5-3-1
Section 3:
Hints for Configuring RIOBs
when configuring RIOBs and some possible ways to deal with them.
This section also provides tips that are helpful when configuring RIOBs.
Listed below are typical problems that occur when configuring RIOBs
- I can not force a backup or reset a backup on a specified FIC or
FIM.
The RIOB must be in Manual mode in order to force a backup on an
FIC or FIM. Be sure that the “Mode” field is in Manual.
RS3: Configuring Redundant Input/Output Blocks Hints for Configuring RIOBs

IO: 5-3-2
Configuration Tips
Listed below are hints to help you when configuring RIOBs.

- Configuring 1/1 redundancy
The 1/1 redundancy scheme is available only when using a
Multipurpose Controller Processor running the MPCA or MPC+
software image.
- Configuring additional blocks
If you configure an RIOB on an FIC or FIM, no additional blocks can
be configured on the FIC or FIM.
- Configuring the RIOB address
Remember that you have to configure the RIOB as the first block on
the first redundant card slot or FIM:
D with 7/1 redundancy, the RIOB is at address =xxx801
D with 3/1 redundancy, the RIOB is at address =xxx401 or xxx801
D with 1/1 redundancy, the RIOB is at address =xxx201, xxx401,
xxx601, or xxx801
- Setting redundancy scheme jumpers
Remember to properly set the redundancy scheme jumpers for the
FICs in the card cage or FIM for the redundancy scheme that you
plan to use.
- Configuring the RIOB mode
For active redundancy, be sure that the RIOB is in Auto mode for
redundancy to be in effect.
- Changing the redundancy scheme
To change the FIC redundancy scheme of an RIOB from 3/1 to 7/1
or from 7/1 to 3/1, you must perform the following procedure to
ensure that redundancy operates properly:
1. Cursor to the RIOB “Redundancy Scheme” field and change it to
“7/1” or “3/1”.
2. Put the block in Manual mode.
3. Force a backup on any associated FIC.
4. Put the block in Auto mode.
- Returning control from a redundant FIC to a new (replaced) FIC
To switch control from a redundant FIC to an FIC that has just
replaced a bad FIC, use the “Reset Backup” or “Force Backup” field
on the RIOB configuration screen.
RS3: Configuring Redundant Input/Output Blocks Hints for Configuring RIOBs

RS3t
Chapter 6:
Configuring Contact Blocks
Section 1: Configuring a Contact Input Block (CIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-1

Configuring a CIB Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-2
Configuring the CIB Field Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-4
Configuring CIB Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-9
CIB Alarm Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-9
CIB Reference Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-10
CIB Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-10
CIB Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-23
Section 2: Configuring a Contact Output Block (COB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-1

Configuring the COB Field Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-2
Configuring COB Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-8
COB Reference Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-9
COB Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-9
COB Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-12
Section 3: Hints for Configuring Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3-1

RS3: Configuring Contact Blocks Contents

IO: ii
List of Figures
Figure Page
6.1.1 CIB Configuration Screen—Filter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-2
6.1.2 CIB Configuration Screen—Field Contact Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-4
6.1.3 CIB Configuration Screen—Message Pair Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-5
6.1.4 CIB Configuration Screen—Descriptor Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-6
6.1.5 CIB Configuration Screen—Fail Safe Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-7
6.1.6 CIB Configuration Screen—Event Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-8
6.1.7 CIB Configuration Screen—Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-9
6.1.8 CIB Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-10
6.1.9 Delay Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-14
6.1.10 Delay--on Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-15
6.1.11 Delay--off Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-16
6.1.12 Glitch Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-17
6.1.13 Settle Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-19
6.1.14 Extend Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-21
6.1.15 CIB Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-23
6.2.1 COB Configuration Screen—Contact Type Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-2
6.2.2 COB Configuration Screen—Output Hold Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-3
6.2.3 Output Hold Off (Delay On) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-4
6.2.4 Output Hold On (Delay Off) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-5
6.2.5 Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-6
6.2.6 COB Configuration Screen—Message Pair Configuration . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-7
6.2.7 COB Configuration Screen—Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-8
6.2.8 COB Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-9
6.2.9 COB Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-12

IO: iii
List of Tables
Table Page
6.1.1 Contact Input Block (CIB) Filter Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-3
6.1.2 Contact Input Block (CIB) Configuration Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-11
6.2.3 Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-6
6.2.4 Contact Output Block (COB) Configuration Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-10

IO: 6-1-1
Section 1:
Configuring a Contact Input Block (CIB)
Contact Input Blocks (CIBs) accept a contact field input through an

optical isolator and a contact FIC, and prepare the data for use by the
rest of the system. The CIB performs contact input signal addressing,
signal conditioning, event recording, trending, and alarming.
This section provides the following information for configuring a CIB:

D Configuring a CIB filter
D Configuring the CIB field contact
D Assigning a message pair
D Configuring a descriptor
D Setting the fail safe
D Configuring an event
D Configuring CIB alarms
D CIB reference material
— CIB Configuration screen and table of screen fields
— CIB filter options
— CIB functional block diagram
RS3: Configuring Contact Blocks Configuring a Contact Input Block (CIB)

IO: 6-1-2
Configuring a CIB Filter
You can use a CIB filter to eliminate contact bounce by filtering the CIB
Raw State when it is received in order to determine the Output State.
The shaded area of Figure 6.1.1 shows the section of the CIB
Configuration screen used for configuring a CIB filter. To configure a
filter, the block must be in Manual mode.

Address =10AB203 Device Type CIB or COB
Block Tag Þ Block Type ÞCIB Mode ®MANUAL
Auto Lock Þno
Filtered State OFF Output State> OFF
Raw State OFF
Field Contact ÞNO
Message Pair Þ*1 Filt Type ÞNone
true ON Fail Safe Þno
false OFF
Descriptor Þ
EVENTS ALARMS
Rising Edge ®no Event Type ®0 Alarm Cond ®None
Falling Edge ®no
Hardware Alarm Code 9 Priority Þ0 Plant UnitÞ0 Contact I/O Card Rev 3.1
CONFIG 1
Figure 6.1.1. CIB Configuration Screen—Filter Configuration

IO: 6-1-3
CIB Filter Options
Table 6.1.1 lists and briefly describes the CIB filter options available.
The effect on the Output State by the FIC is explained in detail in “CIB
Filter Options” later in this section.
- To select a filter type:
Manual, then press [ENTER].
2. Cursor to the “Filt Type” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to select
the desired filter type. Press [ENTER].
3. For options other than “None”, cursor to the “Filt Time” field to
assign the desired filter time. Enter the time in seconds using a
minimum of 0.00 seconds and a maximum of 1023.75 seconds.
Press [ENTER].
Table 6.1.1. Contact Input Block (CIB) Filter Options
Filter Option Effect on the CIB

None No effect on the block. The Output State always equals the Raw State.
The Output State turns on (or off) after the Raw State has been on (or off) for
Delay
at least the duration of the time configured in the “Filt Time” field.
The Output State turns on after the Raw State has been on for at least the
Delay On (D--On)
duration of the time configured in the “Filt Time” field.
The Output State turns off after the Raw State has been off for at least the
Delay Off (D--Off)
duration of the time configured in the “Filt Time” field.
An Output State change is held for at least the interval assigned in the “Filt
Time” field. A change in the Raw State during the hold time causes the Output
Glitch
State to respond to the change after the hold expires and again hold for the
time assigned in the “Filt Time” field.
An Output State change is held until a matching Raw State is maintained for
Settle the interval assigned in the “Filt Time” field. A change in the Raw State
causes a change in the Output State.
The Output State is held for the interval assigned in the “Filt Time” field. The
Extend Output State responds only to the most recent Raw State at the end of the
hold.
NOTE: The Output State is equal to the Filtered State when the block is in Auto mode

IO: 6-1-4
Configuring the CIB Field Contact
You can configure a CIB to allow inversion of the field contact position.
Configuration screen used for configuring the CIB field contact position.
To configure the field contact, status of the the block must be in Manual
mode.
Configure the field contact as normally opened or normally closed. The

“Field Contact” field displays “NO” to indicate that the field contact is
normally open. “NC” indicates that the field contact is normally closed.
This option allows for optional logic inversion.
- To select the type of field contact:
2. Cursor to the “Field Contact” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to
select to the desired field contact. Press [ENTER].

Block Tag Þ Block Type ÞCIB Mode ®MANUAL
Auto Lock Þno
Filtered State ON Output State> OFF
Raw State ON
Field Contact ÞNO
false OFF
Descriptor Þ
EVENTS ALARMS
Falling Edge ®no
CONFIG 1
Figure 6.1.2. CIB Configuration Screen—Field Contact Configuration

IO: 6-1-5
Assigning a Message Pair
You can assign a standard message pair or a user message pair to a

CIB input and output. The shaded area of Figure 6.1.3 shows the
section of the CIB Configuration screen used for assigning message
pairs to a CIB.
One hundred standard message pairs and up to 155 user message
pairs are available. Standard message pairs are designated by an
asterisk. The default message pair is standard message pair number 1
(*1) that displays on when the designated value is true and off when the
designated value is false.
For more information about message pairs, see CC: 1.
- To assign a message pair to a CIB:
D Cursor to the “Message Pair” field and enter the desired
message pair number (precede the number by an asterisk for a
standard message pair), then press [ENTER]. The true and false
statements for the block I/O are displayed below the field. The
message pair statements appear in the “Filtered State”, “Raw
State”, and “Output State” fields.
or
D Repeatedly press [NEXT OPTION] to scroll the message pair
options, or enter the first letter of the desired option, such as the
letter S for the Start/Stop messages, and use [NEXT OPTION] to
begin scrolling with the selected letter.

Block Tag Þ Block Type ÞCIB Mode ®AUTO
Auto Lock Þno
Raw State OFF
Field Contact ÞNO
false OFF
Descriptor Þ
EVENTS ALARMS
Falling Edge ®no
CONFIG 1
Figure 6.1.3. CIB Configuration Screen—Message Pair Configuration

IO: 6-1-6
Configuring a Descriptor
You can configure a descriptor for a CIB. The descriptor appears on the
Alarm Message and Alarm Lists. The shaded area of Figure 6.1.4
shows the section of the CIB Configuration screen that is used for
assigning descriptors to a CIB.

Auto Lock Þno
Raw State OFF
Field Contact ÞNO
false OFF
Descriptor ÞState of Pump #1
EVENTS ALARMS
Falling Edge ®no
CONFIG 1
Figure 6.1.4. CIB Configuration Screen—Descriptor Configuration

IO: 6-1-7
Setting the Fail Safe
The “Fail Safe” field allows you to configure the type of failure option for
loss of communication with the FIC.
D “No” indicates that the FIC holds the last valid Output State if
communication is lost. “No” is the default selection.
D “Yes” indicates that you can set the block output to on or off if
communication with the FIC fails. When “yes” is selected, the
“Safe State” field appears below the “Fail Safe” field. The “Safe
State” field allows you to select whether the Output State is to be
on or off in the case of a communication failure.
Configuration screen that is used for setting the CIB fail safe.

Auto Lock Þno
Raw State OFF
Field Contact ÞNO
true ON Fail Safe Þyes
false OFF
Safe State ÞOFF
Descriptor ÞState of Pump 1
EVENTS ALARMS
Falling Edge ®no
CONFIG 1
Figure 6.1.5. CIB Configuration Screen—Fail Safe Configuration

IO: 6-1-8
Configuring an Event
The rising or falling Raw State may be used to trigger an event

message. The event message may appear on an event list. A rise
occurs when the Raw State changes from 0 to 1. A fall occurs when the
Raw State changes from 1 to 0. A value of “Yes” in the “Rise” or “Fall”
field triggers an event message. A value of “No” does not trigger an
event. The default condition is “No”. For information about configuring
event lists, see CC: 1.
Configuration screen used for configuring CIB events. The example in
Figure 6.1.6 shows a CIB with an event triggered on the rising edge.
- To set an event type:
D Cursor to the “Event Type” field and enter the desired event type
number (1--255), then press [ENTER].
- To set an event trigger using a rising edge:
D Cursor to the “Rising Edge” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to
select yes. Press [ENTER].
- To set an event trigger using a falling edge:
D Cursor to the “Falling Edge” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to
select the desired falling edge state. Press [ENTER].

Auto Lock Þno
Raw State OFF
Field Contact ÞNO
false OFF
Descriptor Þ
EVENTS ALARMS
Rising Edge ®yes Event Type ®0 Alarm Cond ®None
Falling Edge ®no
CONFIG 1
Figure 6.1.6. CIB Configuration Screen—Event Configuration

IO: 6-1-9
Configuring CIB Alarms
The shaded areas of Figure 6.1.7 show the sections of the CIB Configuration
screen used for configuring CIB alarms. An alarm may be generated
depending on the on or off state of the Output State. If no alarm is desired,
select “None”. “None” is the default alarm condition. Figure 6.1.7 shows a
sample CIB that generates a critical alarm when the Output State is off.
- To configure a CIB input alarm:
1. Cursor to the “Alarm Cond” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to

select the condition that is to trigger the alarm. Press [ENTER].
2. Cursor to the “Alarm Type” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to
select the desired type of alarm to be generated. Press [ENTER].
CIB Alarm Priority
If you have configured a CIB alarm, we recommend that you also configure
alarm priority. Configure alarm priority using a numeral from 0 to 3. An entry
of 0 indicates the highest alarm priority; 3 the lowest.
If the RS3 generates more than one unacknowledged critical or advisory
process alarm or hardware alarm at one time, the corresponding alarm
banner for each alarm appears at the bottom of the console screen in the
order of priority. Configure priority of a CIB critical or advisory process alarm
or hardware alarm in the “Priority” field on the CIB Configuration screen.
Configure the default value for the “Alarm Priority” field on the Alarm
Auto Lock Þno
Raw State OFF
Field Contact ÞNO
false OFF
Descriptor Þ
EVENTS ALARMS
Rising Edge ®no Event Type ®0 Alarm Cond ®OFF
Falling Edge ®no Alarm Type ®Crit
CONFIG 1
Figure 6.1.7. CIB Configuration Screen—Alarm Configuration

IO: 6-1-10
CIB Reference Material
A CIB Configuration screen and a CIB functional block diagram are

provided for reference.
CIB Configuration Screen
Configure a CIB on the I/O Block Configuration screen. Figure 6.1.8

shows the CIB configuration screen. Table 6.1.2 provides a description
of the CIB configuration screen fields.

Auto Lock Þno
Filtered State OFF Field Contact NO
Output State> OFF
Raw State OFF Filt Type None
Filt Time 45.S
Message Pair Þ*1
false OFF
Descriptor Þ
EVENTS ALARMS
Falling Edge ®no
CONFIG 1
Figure 6.1.8. CIB Configuration Screen

IO: 6-1-11
Table 6.1.2. Contact Input Block (CIB) Configuration Screen Fields
Access
Level
characters
NONE,
AIB,CIB,AOB,COB,
Block Type Conf Type of input/output block. DIB, DOB, ADS, MIB,
PLCB, SIB, RIOB,
VIB, PIOB, TIB
Current block mode.
If “Auto”, the block function drives the block
If “Manual”, the operator can directly manipulate
Auto mode.
If “Yes”, the block is locked in Auto mode. The
If “No”, the block can be switched to Manual
mode.
The signal value of the block after block
Filtered State NA Display only
conditioning.
The signal value at the output of the block. Toggle, Clear (OFF),
Output State Oper
Must be in Manual mode to manipulate. Set (ON)
Raw State NA Displays the raw (unfiltered) input state. Display only
User defined block input to output relationship.
Field Contact Conf NO, NC
Message Pair Conf Assigns a message pair to the output state field. *1--*100, 1--155
User selectable signal characterization. None, D--On, D--Off,

Filt Type Conf Delay, Glitch, Settle,
Must be in Manual mode to configure. Extend
User selectable output failure option.
If “No”, the FIC holds the last valid block output
value if communication is lost.
Fail Safe Conf no, yes
If “Yes”, a “Safe State” field appears to indicate
whether the block output is to be on or off in the
case of a communication failure.
Descriptor Conf User configured descriptor. Any characters

IO: 6-1-12
Table 6.1.2. Contact Input Block (CIB) Configuration Screen Fields (continued)
Access
Rising Edge Supr Triggers an event message. no, yes

Falling Edge Supr Triggers an event message. no, yes
User selectable event type to be generated. For
Event Type Conf 0--255
information about event types, see CC: 1.
Activate an alarm if the field state is on or off. If
on or off is selected, the “Alarm Type” field
Alarm Cond Conf appears for selection of the desired type of alarm None, ON, OFF
to be activated: None, Advisory (Adv), Critical
(Crit), or Hardware (Hdwr).
Indicates the FIC hardware fault. For information
Hardware about alarm messages, see the Alarm Messages
NA Display only
Alarm Code
Manual.
Priority Conf critical and advisory process alarms. 0 indicates 0--3
highest priority, 3 indicates lowest priority.
the block is assigned. Access to I/O blocks from
Plant Unit Conf a console may be restricted if the console has not 0--255
Contact I/O
NA The revision number of the installed contact FIC. Display only
Card Rev

IO: 6-1-13
CIB Filter Options
Use one of the filter options available in the CIB to manipulate the Raw
State. The effect on the Output State relative to the Raw State supplied
by the FIC is explained in this section along with a brief description and
timing diagram for each of the following filter types:
D None filter option
D Delay filter option
D Delay On filter option
D Delay Off filter option
D Glitch filter option
D Settle filter option
D Extend filter option
None Filter Option
If no filter is used on a CIB block, there is no effect on the block. The

Output State always equals the Raw State when the block is in Auto
mode.
Delay Filter Option
Using a delay filter on a CIB block delays the CIB by the interval
assigned in the “Filt Time” field. The delay has an effect on the CIB
block when the Raw State changes to on (0 to 1) and changes to off (1
to 0) (0 = off, 1= on). If the “Raw State” changes but does not maintain
that state for greater than or equal to the “Filt Time”, the Output State
does not change.
Figure 6.1.9 shows the effect of a delay filter used on a CIB block.
Table 6.1.3 describes the “Raw State” effect on the Output State at
different times

IO: 6-1-14
T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
1
Raw
State
0
Output 1
State
0
Filt Time duration
duration
duration > < duration
TIME Filt Time Filt Time >
<
Filt Time
Filt Time
Figure 6.1.9. Delay Filter Option
Table 6.1.3. Delay Filter Option
Time Raw State Output State
T0 Initial condition. Off condition from the field Initial condition. Output State off.
(Raw State).
T1 Raw State changes to on condition. Output State remains off.
T2 Raw State remains on. Output State changes to on in response to

Raw State changing to on at T1 plus the
interval assigned in “Filt Time” field of the CIB.
T3 Raw State changes to off condition. Output State remains on.
T4 Raw State changes to on condition. Output State remains on because the duration
of the Raw State off condition was less than
the Filt Time.
T5 Raw State changes to off condition. Output State remains on because there has
been no uninterrupted off Raw State condition
greater than or equal to the Filt Time.
T6 Raw State remains off. Output State changes to off when the Raw
State off exceeds the Filt Time.
NOTE: The Output State is equal to the Filtered State when the block is in Auto mode.

IO: 6-1-15
Delay On (D-- On) Filter Option
The D--on filter delays the CIB output by the interval assigned in the “Filt
Time” field. The delay has an effect only when the Raw State changes
to on (0 to 1). The Output State responds immediately when the Raw
State changes to off (1 to 0).
Figure 6.1.10 shows the effect of a D--on filter used on a CIB block.
Table 6.1.4 describes the Raw State effect on the Output State at
different times.
T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5
1
Raw
State
0
1
Output
State
0
duration
= Filt Time duration
TIME < Filt Time
Figure 6.1.10. Delay--on Filter Option
Table 6.1.4. Delay--on Filter Option
T0 Initial condition. Off condition from the field Initial condition. Output State off.
(Raw State).
T1 Raw State changes to on. Output State remains off.
T2 Raw State remains on. Output State changes to on in response to the

Raw State changing to ON at T1 plus interval
assigned in “Filt Time” field of CIB.
T3 Raw State changes to off. Output State changes to off. Output State
always changes immediately to off in response
to Raw State changing to off.
T4 Raw State changes to on. Output State remains off and begins delay
interval.
T5 Raw State changes to off. Output State remains off. Delay is canceled
when the Raw State is changed to off.
NOTE: The Output State is equal to the Filtered State when the block is in Auto mode.

IO: 6-1-16
Delay Off (D--Off) Filter Option
Using a delay off filter delays the CIB Output State by the interval
assigned in the “Filt Time” field. The delay has an effect only when the
Raw State is changing to off (1 to 0). The Output State responds
immediately when the input changes to on (0 to 1).
Figure 6.1.11 shows the effect of a delay off filter used on a CIB block.
different times.
T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
1
Raw
State
0
1
Output
State
0
duration duration
TIME
= Filt Time < Filt Time
Figure 6.1.11. Delay--off Filter Option
Table 6.1.5. Delay--off Filter Option
T0 Initial condition. Off condition Initial condition. Output State off.

from the field (Raw State).
T1 Raw State changes to on. Output State changes to on. Output State always changes
immediately to on in response to the Raw State changing to on.
T2 Raw State changes to off. Output State remains on and begins delay interval.
T3 Raw State remains off. Output State changes to off in response to the Raw State
changing to off at T2 plus the interval assigned in the “Filt Time”
field of CIB.
T4 Raw State changes to on. Output State changes to on. Output State always changes
immediately to on in response to the Raw State changing to on.
T5 Raw State changes to off. Output State remains on and begins delay interval.
T6 Raw State changes to on. Output State remains on. Delay is canceled when the Raw State
is changed to on.
* The Output State is equal to the Filtered State when the block is in Auto mode.

IO: 6-1-17
Glitch Filter Option
A glitch filter holds the CIB Output State each time that the Output State
changes for a minimum time as specified in the “Filt Time” field. If the
Raw State changes state during the hold time, the Output State
responds to that change after the hold expires and again holds for the
time defined by “Filt Time”. In the event of multiple Raw State changes
during the hold time, the Output State responds to the first and last Raw
State changes only.
Figure 6.1.12 shows the effect of a glitch filter used on a CIB block.
different times.
T2 T4 T6 T10 T11
T0 T1 T3 T5 T7 T8 T9 T12 T13
1
Raw
State
0
1
Output
State
0
TIME duration
= Filt Time
Figure 6.1.12. Glitch Filter Option

IO: 6-1-18
Table 6.1.6. Glitch Filter Option
T0 Initial condition. Initial condition. Output State off.

Off condition from the field (Raw State).
T1 Raw State rises to on. Output State changes to on. Duration defined
by Filt Time begins.
T2 Raw State falls to off. Output State remains on in response to T1 for

the duration of the Filt Time.
T3 Raw State remains off. Output State changes to off in response to Raw
State falling to off at T2.
T4 Raw State rises to on. Output State remains off in response to T2 for

Raw State rising to on at T4.

T7 Raw State rises to on. Output State remains on in response to T4 for

T8 Raw State remains on. Output State changes to off in response to the
Raw State falling to off at T6.

T11 Raw State rises to on. Output State remains on in response to T7 for
T12 Raw State remains on. Output State changes to off in response to the
Raw State falling to off at T10.

IO: 6-1-19
Settle Filter Option
A settle filter holds the CIB output in the changed state until the same Raw State is
maintained for a minimum time equal to “Filt Time”. At that time a change in the Raw
State causes an immediate change in the Output State. Figure 6.1.13 shows the
effect of a settle filter used on a CIB block. Table 6.1.7 shows the “Raw State” effect
on the Output State at various times.
T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8
1
Raw
State
0
1
Output
State
0
duration duration duration

= Filt Time = Filt Time > Filt Time
TIME duration duration
< Filt Time < Filt Time
Figure 6.1.13. Settle Filter Option

This filter type creates a state where the Output State refuses to change until the
Raw State stays equal to the Output State for the filter time. Once the Raw State
stays equal to the Output State for the filter time, the Output State will change
immediately when the Raw State changes. Note that when the Raw State remains 0
at T10, the output will remain 1 forever (until another Raw State change). Glitches
less than the filter time will have this effect, which may or may not be desirable.
T8 T9 T10
1
Raw
State
0
1
Output
State
0
duration
> Filt Time
duration
TIME < Filt Time
Settle Filter Option (cont.)

IO: 6-1-20
Table 6.1.7. Settle Filter Option

T1 Raw State changes to on. Output State changes to on immediately.
T2 Raw State changes to off. Output State changes to off immediately because
the interval between T1 and T2 was equal to Filt
Time.
T3 Raw State changes to on. Output State remains off because the interval
between T2 and T3 was less than the Filt Time.
T4 Raw State changes to off. Output State remains off.
T5 Raw State changes to on. Output State changes to on immediately because

the interval between T4 and T5 was equal to the Filt
Time.
T6 Raw State changes to off. Output State remains on because the interval
T7 Raw State changes to on. Output State remains on.
the interval between T7 and T8 was greater than the
Filt Time.

the interval between T8 and T9 was greater than or
equal to the Filt Time.
T10 Raw State changes to off. Output State remains on because the Output State
was not equal to the Raw State for the filter time.
The Output State will remain different from the Raw
State forever until the Raw State changes.

IO: 6-1-21
Extend Filter Option
An extend filter holds the CIB Output State for the time assigned in the
“Filt Time” field. Subsequent Raw State changes that occur within the
output hold time are ignored, with the exception of the most recent Raw
State at the end of the hold to which the Output State responds.
Figure 6.1.14 shows the effect of an extend filter used on a CIB block.
different times.
T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
1
Raw
State
0
1
Output
State
0
duration duration=
TIME = Filt Time Filt Time
Figure 6.1.14. Extend Filter Option

IO: 6-1-22
Table 6.1.8. Extend Filter Option

T1 Raw State rises to on. Output State changes to on immediately.
T2 Raw State falls to off. Output State remains on in response to field

input at T1 for the duration of Filt Time.
T3 Raw State remains off. Output State changes to off in response to

Raw State at T2.
T4 Raw State changes of various durations.

through Output State remains off in response to field
input at T2 for the duration of Filt Time.
T5
T6 Raw State changes to on. Output State changes to on immediately

because interval between T3 and T6 was
equal to Filt Time. The Raw State changes
which occurred during the interval T4 through
T5 were ignored. The Output State will
respond only to the Raw State present at the
end of the Filt Time.

IO: 6-1-23
CIB Functional Diagram
Figure 6.1.15 shows the Contact Input Block functional diagram. All
items within the dotted line reside in the CIB software.
Console Keyboard
Output
Raw State Filtered State State
Off Off
Off
MAN
NC To
FIC Inverter Debounce
Filter CB
NO AUTO
Events Alarms
Figure 6.1.15. CIB Functional Block Diagram

IO: 6-2-1
Section 2:
Configuring a Contact Output Block (COB)
Contact Output Blocks (COBs) prepare a specific contact state for

output to the field. The COB performs contact output signal storage and
addressing, and provides for inverting output relative to input.
This section provides the following information for configuring a COB:

D Configuring the COB field contact
D Configuring Output Hold
D Configuring COB Alarms
D COB reference material
— COB Configuration screen and table of screen fields
— COB functional block diagram
RS3: Configuring Contact Blocks Configuring a Contact Output Block (COB)

IO: 6-2-2
Configuring the COB Field Contact
You can configure a COB to allow inversion of the field contact position.
The shaded area of Figure 6.2.1 shows the section of the COB
Configuration screen that is used for configuring the COB field contact
position. To configure the field contact, the status of the block must be
in Manual mode.

“Field Contact” field displays “NO” to indicate that the field contact is
normally opened. “NC” indicates that the field contact is normally
closed. This option allows for optional logic inversion.
2. Cursor to the “Contact Type” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to
select the desired field contact. Press [ENTER].
Auto, then press [ENTER].

Tag Þ Block Type ÞCOB Mode ®MANUAL
Auto Lock Þno
Source Þ
Addr
Contact Type ÞNO
Input State OFF Output Hold ÞNONE Output State >OFF
Message Pair Þ*1
true ON
false OFF
Alarm Priority Þ0 Plant UnitÞ0

Hardware Alarm Code 9 Fail Safe Jumper Hold Contact I/O Card Rev 2.1
CONFIG 1
Figure 6.2.1. COB Configuration Screen—Contact Type Configuration

IO: 6-2-3
Configuring Output Hold
You can delay the COB output state for a designated hold time
depending on the output hold configuration. The block output state can
be held on (Off), held off (On), set to pulse (Pulse), or not held at all
(none). “None” is the default selection. If you choose On, Off, or Pulse
options, a “Hold Time” field appears. In the “Hold Time” field, configure
the number of seconds, from 0 to 511, that the output state is to hold in
this field. To configure output hold, the block must be in Manual mode.
Configuration screen used for configuring output hold for a COB. The
block in Figure 6.2.2 has an on output hold configured for 5 seconds.
- To set the output hold:
2. Cursor to the “Output Hold” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to
select the desired hold condition. Press [ENTER]. If an output
hold is selected, the “Hold Time” field appears.
3. Cursor to the “Hold Time” field and enter the number of seconds
for which the output state is to be held. Press [ENTER].

Tag Þ Block Type ÞCOB Mode ®MANUAL
Auto Lock Þno
Source Þ
Addr
Contact Type ÞNO
Message Pair Þ*1 Hold Time Þ5.S
true ON
false OFF

CONFIG 1
Figure 6.2.2. COB Configuration Screen—Output Hold Configuration

IO: 6-2-4
Figure 6.2.3 shows the effect of configuring the “Output Hold” field to
stay on. Table 6.2.1 describes the field input effect on the block output
at different times.
T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
1
Block Input
0
1
Block Output
0
TIME Hold Hold

Time Time
Figure 6.2.3. Output Hold Off (Delay On)
Table 6.2.1. Output Hold Off (Delay On)
Time Block Input Block Output

T0 Initial condition. Block input off. Initial condition. Block output off.
T1 Block input changes to on condition. Output remains off because the hold time interval has not
elapsed.
T2 Block input remains on. Hold time Output changes to on condition in response to the block
interval is complete. input change to on at T1 and when the interval assigned
in “Hold Time” field of DOB has expired.
T3 Block input changes to off condition. Output changes to off immediately.
T4 Block input changes to on condition. Output remains off because the hold time interval has not
elapsed.
T5 Block input changes to off condition. Output remains off because the input was not in the on
state for the duration of the hold time.

IO: 6-2-5
Figure 6.2.4. shows the effect of configuring the “Output Hold” field to
stay off. Table 6.2.2 describes the field input effect on the block output
at different times.
T0 T1 T2 T3
1
Block Input
0
1
Block Output
0
TIME
Hold
Time
Figure 6.2.4. Output Hold On (Delay Off)
Table 6.2.2. Output Hold On (Delay Off)

T1 Block input changes to on condition. Output changes to on condition immediately.
T2 Block input changes to off condition. Output remains on for the duration of the hold time.
T3 Block input remains off. Output changes to off condition because the hold time
interval is complete.

IO: 6-2-6
Figure 6.2.5 shows the effect of configuring the “Output Hold” field for
the pulse option. Table 6.2.3 describes the field input effect on the
block output at different times.
T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
1
Block Input
0
1
Block Output
0
TIME Hold Hold

Time Time
Figure 6.2.5. Pulse
Table 6.2.3. Pulse

T1 Block input changes to on condition. Output changes to on condition.
T2 Block input remains on. Output changes to off condition when the hold time
T3 Block input changes to off condition. Output remains off. This resets the hold time.
T5 Block input changes to off condition. Output changes to off condition. Because the hold time
interval was not complete the output follows the input.

IO: 6-2-7

CIB block input and output. The shaded area of Figure 6.2.6 shows the
section of the COB Configuration screen that is used for assigning
message pairs to a COB.
One hundred standard message pairs and 155 user message pairs are
available. Designate a standard message pair with an asterisk. The
default message pair is standard message pair number 1 (*1) which
displays On when the designated value is true and off when the
- To assign a message pair to a COB:
D Cursor to the “Message Pair” field, enter the desired message

pair number (precede the number by an asterisk for a standard
message pair), then press [ENTER]. The true and false
message pair statements appear in the “Input State” and “Output
State” fields.
or
D Repeatedly press [NEXT OPTION] to scroll the available
message pair options, or enter the first letter of the desired
option, such as the letter S for the Start/Stop messages, and use
[NEXT OPTION] to scroll the messages beginning with the
selected letter.
Tag Þ Block Type ÞCOB Mode ®AUTO
Auto Lock Þno
Source Þ
Addr
Contact Type NO
Input State OFF Output Hold NONE Output State >OFF
Message Pair Þ*1
true ON
false OFF

CONFIG 1
Figure 6.2.6. COB Configuration Screen—Message Pair Configuration

IO: 6-2-8
Configuring COB Alarms
Configuration screen used for configuring the alarm priority for COB
hardware alarms. If the RS3 generates more than one
the order of priority. Configure the priority of a COB hardware alarm in
the “Alarm Priority” field on the COB Configuration screen.
Configure alarm priority using a numeral from 0 to 3. An entry of 0

priority. The default value is 0. You can configure the default value on
the Alarm Configuration screen.

Auto Lock Þno
Source Þ
Addr
Contact Type ÞNO
Message Pair Þ*1
true ON
false OFF

CONFIG 1
Figure 6.2.7. COB Configuration Screen—Alarm Configuration

IO: 6-2-9
COB Reference Material
A COB Configuration screen and a COB functional block diagram are

provided for reference.
COB Configuration Screen
Configure a COB on the I/O Block Configuration screen. Figure 6.2.8

shows the COB configuration screen. Table 6.2.4 provides a
description of the COB configuration screen fields.

Auto Lock Þno
Source Þ
Addr
Contact Type ÞNO
Input State OFF Output Hold ÞD-on Output State >OFF
Message Pair Þ*1 Hold Time 15.0 S
true ON
false OFF

CONFIG 1
Figure 6.2.8. COB Configuration Screen

IO: 6-2-10
Table 6.2.4. Contact Output Block (COB) Configuration Screen Fields
Access
Level
characters
NONE,
AIB,CIB,AOB,COB,
Block Type Conf Type of input/output block. DIB, DOB, ADS, MIB,
PLCB, SIB, RIOB, VIB,
PIOB, TIB
Current block mode.


Auto mode.
mode.
The tag of the block from which the input

originated. The source tag may be entered as a
Source block tag, block link (tag/x), or the address of the Up to 16 alphanumeric
Conf
Addr characters
source block. After entering the source tag, the
address of the block appears below the tag.

Contact Type Conf NO, NC
User selectable signal characterization.

Output Hold Conf NONE, On, Off, Pulse
User assigned signal characterization time in

seconds. This field appears only when “Output
Hold Time Conf Hold” is selected. 0--15 seconds
Input State NA The field signal value at the input of the block. Display only
The signal value at the output of the block. Toggle, Clear (OFF),
Output State Oper
Must be in Manual mode to configure. Set (ON)

IO: 6-2-11
Table 6.2.4. Contact Output Block (COB) Configuration Screen Fields (continued)
Access
Level
Assigns alarm priority to hardware alarms. 0

Alarm Priority Conf indicates highest priority, 3 indicates lowest 0--3
priority.
Indicates the user defined group of blocks to

which the block is assigned. Access to I/O
blocks from a console may be restricted if the
Plant Unit Conf console has not been assigned to the I/O block 0--255
plant unit.
Hardware Indicates an FIC hardware fault. For information

NA Display only
Alarm Code on alarm messages, see SV: 10.
Output FIC jumper position. Position the failure

option jumpers on the FIC to correspond with the
Fail Safe selection in the “Output Hold” field. For
Conf Display only
Jumper
information about the fail safe jumpers,
see SV: 5.
Contact I/O The revision number of the installed contact FIC.

NA Display only
Card Rev

IO: 6-2-12
COB Functional Diagram
Figure 6.2.9 shows the COB functional block diagram. All items within
the dotted line reside in the COB software.
Console Keyboard
Input State Output State
Off Off
MAN
From Output NC Inverter FIC

CB Hold AUTO
NO
Figure 6.2.9. COB Functional Block Diagram

IO: 6-3-1
Section 3:
Hints for Configuring Contact Blocks
when configuring contact blocks and some possible ways to deal with
them. This section also provides tips that are helpful when configuring
contact blocks.
Listed below are typical problems that occur when configuring contact
blocks and possible ways to handle them.
- I cannot access some of the contact Block Configuration
screen fields.
In order to configure many screen fields, the block must be in
Manual mode. Be sure that the block is in Manual mode.
Configuration Tips
Listed below are hints to help you when configuring contact blocks.
- Configuring a contact block alarm
D Remember that if you configure a contact block alarm, you
should also configure the alarm priority.
D Be sure that the failure option jumpers on the FIC correspond
with the selection in the “Output Hold” field.
RS3: Configuring Contact Blocks Hints for Configuring Contact Blocks

RS3t
Chapter 7:
Configuring Multiplex Input Blocks
Section 1: Configuring a Multiplex Input Block (MIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-1

Configuring MIB Signal Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-2
Thermocouple Signal Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-3
Resistance Temperature Device (RTD) Signal Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-4
Miscellaneous Device Signal Characterization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-5
Configuring an MIB Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-6
Determining the MIB Filter Time to Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-6
Configuring the MIB Skip Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-7
Scaling an MIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-8
Configuring MIB Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-10
MIB Instrument Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-10
MIB Critical and Advisory Process Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-11
MIB Alarm Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-11
MIB Alarm Deadbands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-12
Rate of Change Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-12
Deviation Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-12
Setting MIB Alarm Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-13
Setting the Block Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-14
Section 2: MIB Reference Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2-1

MIB Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2-2
MIB Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2-7
Section 3: Hints for Configuring MIBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3-1

RS3: Configuring Multiplex Input Blocks Contents

IO: ii
List of Figures
Figure Page
7.1.1 MIB Block Configuration Screen—Signal Characterization . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-2
7.1.2 MIB Block Configuration Screen—Filter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-6
7.1.3 MIB Block Configuration Screen—Skip Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-7
7.1.4 MIB Block Configuration Screen—Scaling Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-9
7.1.5 MIB Block Configuration Screen—Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-13
7.1.6 MIB Block Configuration Screen—Block Output Configuration . . . . . . 7-1-14
7.2.1 MIB Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2-2
7.2.2 MIB Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2-7

IO: iii
List of Tables
Table Page
7.1.1 MIB Ranges for Thermocouple Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-3
7.1.2 MIB Ranges for RTD Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-4
7.1.3 MIB Ranges for Miscellaneous Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1-5
7.2.1 Multiplex Input Block (MIB) Configuration Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2-3

IO: 7-1-1
Section 1:
Configuring a Multiplex Input Block (MIB)
Multiplex Input Blocks (MIBs) accept an analog field input through a

Front End Module (FEM) and prepare the data for use by the rest of the
system. The MIB performs analog input signal addressing, signal
conditioning, including selection of thermocouple or resistance
temperature detector (RTD) type, trending, and alarming.
This section provides the following information for configuring an MIB

block:
D Configuring MIB signal characterization
D Configuring an MIB filter
D Skipping MIB point processing
D Scaling an MIB
D Configuring MIB alarms
D Setting MIB block output
RS3: Configuring Multiplex Input Blocks Configuring a Multiplex Input Block (MIB)
IO: 7-1-2
Configuring MIB Signal Characterization
You can configure an MIB block with a transmitter, thermocouple device,

resistance temperature device (RTD), or other input device. The MIB
input signal received can be characterized by the type of thermocouple
or RTD device used. This section provides tables of the input device
types and their corresponding temperature ranges.
The shaded area of Figure 7.1.1 shows the section of the MIB Block
Configuration screen used for configuring MIB signal characterization.
The MIB block in Figure 7.1.1 is configured for signal characterization of
a 3 wire 100--ohm platinum element. The configuration temperature
range is in degrees Centigrade.
- To select the type of signal characterization:
2. Cursor to the “Sig Char” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to
select the desired signal characterization. Press [ENTER].
3. An F or C appears to select the type of temperature units. Press
[NEXT OPTION] to select the desired temperature units (F for
Fahrenheit, C for Centigrade). Press [ENTER].

Address =10A01 Device Type MIB
Block Tag Þ Block Type ÞMIB Mode ®MANUAL
Auto Lock Þno
Field Value 0. counts
0.0 % Filt Time Þ None Block Out >.00
Input Eng Sig Char Þ3 PT0D C
Scale Units Þ Nom Out >None
Skip Þno
Þ-216.74 Zero Þ.0 Calibrate ®None
FEM Type RTD
Þ356.50 Max Þ100.00 Cal Const default
Descriptor Þ
ALARMS
Plant Unit 0 Inst High None Crit High None Adv High None
Priority 0 Low None Low None Low None
Al DdBand 1.00 % Rate-Chg None Rate-Chg None
Hardware Alarm Code 8 Dev None Dev None
CONFIG 1
Figure 7.1.1. MIB Block Configuration Screen—Signal Characterization
IO: 7-1-3
Thermocouple Signal Characterization
Table 7.1.1 provides the types of thermocouples and the corresponding

temperature range and resolution for each thermocouple type.
An MIB block configured with a 4--20 mA temperature transmitter and a

thermocouple device cannot linearize the input signal. With all other
configurations, the input signal can be linearized.
Table 7.1.1. MIB Ranges for Thermocouple Inputs
Function Range Resolution

+543.8 to +3309.6 °F 0.2 °F
B NBS
+284.3 to +1820.8 °C 0.1 °C
--358.6 to +1836.5 °F 0.2 °F
E NBS
--217.0 to +1002.5 °C 0.1 °C
--331.6 to +2195.0 °F 0.2 °F
J NBS
--202.0 to +1201.6 °C 0.1 °C
--327.4 to +2510.3 °F 0.2 °F
K NBS
--199.7 to +1376.8 °C 0.1 °C
--72.3 to +3216.0 °F 0.2 °F
R NBS
--57.9 to +1768.8 °C 0.1 °C
--67.1 to +3223.5 °F 0.2 °F
S NBS
--55.1 to +1773.0 °C 0.1 °C
--372.2 to +753.7 °F 0.2 °F
T NBS
--225.1 to +400.9 °C 0.1 °C
--314.5 to +1654.6 °F 0.2 °F
J DIN
--192.5 to +901.4 °C 0.1 °C
--333.2 to +749.9 °F 0.2 °F
T DIN
--202.9 to +398.8 °C 0.1 °C
Ref--J +32 to +150 °F 0.2 °F
(Ref. junction temp.) 0 to +65 °C 0.1 °C
B NBS mV --10 to +22 mV 1 mV
E NBS mV --40 to +88 mV 2 mV
J NBS mV --40 to +88 mV 2 mV
K NBS mV --40 to +88 mV 2 mV
R NBS mV --10 to +22 mV 1 mV
S NBS mV --10 to +22 mV 1 mV
T NBS mV --10 to +22 mV 1 mV
J DIN mV --40 to +88 mV 2 mV
T DIN mV --10 to +22 mV 1 mV
* NBS: National Bureau of Standards
DIN: Deutsche Institut fur Normung (European standards institute)
IO: 7-1-4
Resistance Temperature Device (RTD) Signal Characterization
Table 7.1.2 provides the RTD types and the corresponding temperature
ranges and resolution for each type of device.
Table 7.1.2. MIB Ranges for RTD Inputs
Function* Range Resolution

--358.12 to +655.34 °F .02 °F
3 PT0D
--216.74 to +346.50 °C .01 °C
--358.12 to +655.34 °F .02 °F
4 PT0D
--216.74 to +346.50 °C .01 °C
--360.76 to +999.98 °F .04 °F
3 PT1D
--218.20 to +728.14 °C .02 °C
--360.76 to +999.98 °F .04 °F
4 PT1D
--218.20 to +728.14 °C .02 °C
--351.54 to +643.02 °F .02 °F
3 PT0N
--213.07 to +339.45 °C .01 °C
--351.54 to +643.02 °F .02 °F
4 PT0N
--213.07 to +339.45 °C .01 °C
--354.24 to +999.98 °F .04 °F
3 PT1N
--214.58 to +728.14 °C .02 °C
--354.24 to +999.98 °F .04 °F
4 PT1N
--214.58 to +728.14 °C .02 °C
3W ohms 0 to 650 ohms .01 ohms
4W ohms 0 to 650 ohms .01 ohms
4 Cu1N --328 to +500 °F .4 °F
(10 ohm copper) --200 to +260 °C .2 °C
3 Cu1N --328 to +500 °F .4 °F
(10 ohm copper) --200 to +260 °C .2 °C
4 Ni0N --112 to +608 °F .2 °F
(120 ohm nickel) --80 to +320 °C .1 °C
3 Ni0N --112 to +608 °F .2 °F
(120 ohm nickel) --80 to +320 °C .1 °C
* 3=3 wire, 4=4 wire; 0 or 1 is a subscript; N for elements
with a=0.00392; D for elements with a=0.00385;
PT=100--ohm platinum
IO: 7-1-5
Miscellaneous Device Signal Characterization
Table 7.1.3 provides the miscellaneous input devices and the

corresponding range and resolution for each device type.
Table 7.1.3. MIB Ranges for Miscellaneous Inputs
Function Range Resolution

Raw Counts 0 to 65000 counts 1 count
10 mV --9.9995 to +9.9995 mV 0.5 mV
20 mV --10 to +22 mV 1 mV
80 mV --40 to +88 mV 2 mV
400 mV --200 to +440 mV 10 mV
2V --1 to +2.2 V 100 mV
20 V --10 to +22 V 1 mV
4--20 mA 0 to 100 % 0.01 %
Ground 300 ± 50 counts (RTD)
1 count
(self--test) 20879 ± 400 counts (others)
<=1% linearized to a limit gain of 10
4--20 mA sqrt (if negative, set to 0) 0.01 %
>=1% sqrt
IO: 7-1-6
Configuring an MIB Filter
Use an MIB filter to provide a first order response to the MIB input. A
filter provides a delay between the time when the input is received and
the time when the output is sent.
Configuration screen that is used for configuring an MIB filter. The MIB
block in Figure 7.1.2 is configured for a filter time of 15 seconds.
Determining the MIB Filter Time to Use
A filter time constant is applied to the field value to delay and smooth
the effect of any changes. The longer the filter time, the smoother the
curve. Configure the filter time constant as desired.
2. Cursor to the “Filt Time” field and enter the desired time constant
in seconds. Press [ENTER].
NOTE: When configuring the filter time, remember that the update rate
of each point can be up to 7 seconds for a 100 point Multiplexer.

Block Tag Þ Block Type Þ MIB Mode ® MANUAL
Auto Lock Þ no
Field Value 0 counts
0.0 % Filt Time Þ 15.00 S Block Out .00
Input Eng Sig Char Raw Cnts
Scale Units Nom Out > None
Skip no
0. Zero .0
FEM Type V/A
65000. Max 100.00
Descriptor Þ
ALARMS
CONFIG 1
Figure 7.1.2. MIB Block Configuration Screen—Filter Configuration
IO: 7-1-7
Configuring the MIB Skip Function
Configure the MIB skip function to select whether the system is to

process or ignore the input for which a block is configured. The skip
function allows you to look at a process loop and, if desired, to quickly
bypass the point processing without disabling all of the blocks.
Configuration screen used for configuring the MIB skip function.
- To set the skip function:
2. Cursor to the “Skip” field and select “yes” or “no.” Press
[ENTER].

Auto Lock Þ no
0.0 % Filt Time Þ None Block Out .00
Input Eng Sig Char J NBS
Scale UnitsÞ Nom Out > None
Skip no
Þ -202.0 Zero Þ .0 Calibrate® None
FEM Type V/A
Þ 1201.6 Max Þ 100.00 Cal Const default
Descriptor Þ
ALARMS
CONFIG 1
Figure 7.1.3. MIB Block Configuration Screen—Skip Function
IO: 7-1-8
Scaling an MIB
You can configure the display scaling of the block input for display on a
continuous faceplate. You can also scale the temperature range for the
MIB input signal. The block must be in Manual mode to change either
type of scaling.
Use the “Zero” and “Max” fields to configure the display scaling.
Use the “Input Scale” fields to scale the MIB block input as desired to
correspond with the display scaling. These fields must be defined
within the ranges corresponding to the input device type. The top input
scale number corresponds to the desired engineering zero. The bottom
input scale number corresponds to the engineering units maximum
value.
CAUTION
Be careful if you change the input scaling since this could
result in inaccurate values. The “Zero” and “Max”
engineering units should be the same as the Input scale
values for all “Sig Char” types except
“4--20 mA” and “4-- 20 sqrt”; otherwise, the “Block Out” will
not be the same as the “Field Value.” The 4-- 20 mA, unlike
temperature, has no determined value; therefore, you use
the MIB to show the real engineering unit range of the
transmitter.
The shaded areas of Figure 7.1.4 show the sections of the MIB Block
Configuration screen that are used to configure scaling.
IO: 7-1-9
- To set the scaling:

2. To configure the display scaling, cursor to the “Zero” and “Max”
fields to enter the desired scaling range. Press [ENTER].
3. To configure the input scaling, cursor to the “Input Scale” fields
and enter the desired scaling range. Press [ENTER].
Fields for configuring Fields for configuring

input scaling display scaling

Auto Lock Þ no
Input Eng Sig Char E NBS C
Scale UnitsÞ Nom Out > None
Skip no
Þ -217.0 Zero Þ .0 Calibrate® None
FEM Type None
Þ 1002.5 Max Þ 100.00 Cal Const default
Descriptor Þ
ALARMS
CONFIG 1
Figure 7.1.4. MIB Block Configuration Screen—Scaling Configuration
IO: 7-1-10
Configuring MIB Alarms
You will usually want to configure instrument alarms for MIB blocks.
Depending on how you are using the MIB, you may also want to
configure critical or advisory process alarms.
The following section provide brief descriptions of the MIB alarms.
MIB Instrument Alarms
We recommend that you configure instrument alarms and alarm priority

for each MIB. Instrument alarms (also called hardware alarms) inform
the operator of a problem with the RS3 hardware, transmitter,
resistance temperature device, or thermocouple.
It is good practice to set a low instrument alarm for an MIB block. A

typical instrument low alarm value is --6%. If desired, you can set an
instrument high alarm. A typical instrument high alarm value is 106%.
When you use a filter, instrument alarms are evaluated on the MIB input
before the input is filtered.
IO: 7-1-11
MIB Critical and Advisory Process Alarms
Depending on how the MIB is to function, you may want to configure

process alarms for the MIB on the MIB, or on the ControlBlock to which
it is linked.
D If you link the MIB to a ControlBlock, you may want to configure
process alarms for the MIB on the ControlBlock for easiest
traceability.
D If you do not link the MIB to a ControlBlock, you will want to
configure process alarms on the MIB.
Critical and advisory process alarms inform the operator of an alarm

condition that is affecting a process. Critical process alarms represent
conditions that require immediate action. Advisory process alarms
usually represent conditions that may require attention in the future.
Critical alarms have priority over advisory alarms. You can set limits for
process alarms in order to assign a maximum and minimum value for
the MIB input. When you use a filter, process alarms are evaluated on
the MIB input after the input is filtered.
If you configure a process alarm, we recommend that you also

MIB Alarm Priority
If you configure an MIB alarm, we recommend that you also configure

the alarm priority. Configure alarm priority with a numeral from 0 to 3.
An entry of 0 indicates the highest alarm priority. An entry of 3 indicates
the lowest priority. The default is 0. You can configure the default value
for the “Alarm Priority” field on the Alarm Configuration screen.
If the RS3 generates more than one unacknowledged process alarm at

a time, the corresponding alarm banner for each alarm appears at the
bottom of the console screen in the order of priority. Configure the
priority of an MIB block process alarm in the “Priority” field on the MIB
Block Configuration screen.
IO: 7-1-12
MIB Alarm Deadbands

Rate of Change Alarms
Rate of change alarms inform the operator that the block output is
changing at a particular rate.
D Critical rate of change alarms represent conditions that require
immediate action.
D Advisory rate of change alarms represent conditions that may
require attention in the future.
Deviation Alarms
Deviation alarms inform the operator of a block output that is lower than
the nominal output minus the deviation value or higher than the
deviation value plus the nominal output.
IO: 7-1-13
Setting MIB Alarm Limits
You can set alarm limits to trigger an instrument alarm, critical or

advisory process alarm, rate of change alarm, deviation alarm, or alarm
deadband. The shaded area of Figure 7.1.5 shows the section of the
MIB Block Configuration screen that is used for configuring MIB alarms.
- To configure alarms:
1. Cursor to the “Home” position or to any field, and press [EXCH].
2. Cursor to a field in the alarm section, and enter the desired
value. Press [ENTER].
Use the “Nom Out” field to configure

the nominal output for use with the
deviation alarms.

Auto Lock Þ no
Skip no
0. Zero .0 Calibrate® None
FEM Type None
65000. Max 100.00
Descriptor Þ
ALARMS
CONFIG 1
Figure 7.1.5. MIB Block Configuration Screen—Alarm Configuration
IO: 7-1-14
Setting the Block Output
The MIB “Block Output” field shows the current block output in
engineering units. Modify the value by putting the block in Manual
mode and entering a value in the “Block Output” field. The block must
be in Manual mode to change the block output manually.
D If an MIB block is out of range, the following block input and block
output is displayed:
99999
D If no device is connected to an MIB block, the following block
output is displayed:
77777
Configuration screen that is used for changing the block output.
- To change the block output:
2. Cursor to the “Block Out” field and enter the desired block output.
Press [ENTER].

Auto Lock Þ no
Skip no
0. Zero .0 Calibrate® None
FEM Type None
65000. Max 100.00 Cal Const default
Descriptor Þ
ALARMS
CONFIG 1
Figure 7.1.6. MIB Block Configuration Screen—Block Output Configuration
IO: 7-2-1
Section 2:
MIB Reference Material
This section provides the following reference material:

D MIB Configuration screen
D MIB functional block diagram
RS3: Configuring Multiplex Input Blocks MIB Reference Material

IO: 7-2-2
MIB Configuration Screen
You configure an MIB on the I/O Block Configuration screen.

Figure 7.2.1 shows the MIB configuration screen. Table 7.2.1 provides
a description of the MIB configuration screen fields.

Block Tag Þ Block Type Þ MIB Mode ® AUTO
Auto Lock Þ no
Skip no
0. Zero .0
FEM Type None
65000. Max 100.00
Descriptor Þ
ALARMS
CONFIG 1
Figure 7.2.1. MIB Configuration Screen

IO: 7-2-3
Table 7.2.1. Multiplex Input Block (MIB) Configuration Screen Fields
Access
Level
Up to 16
alphanumeric
Block Tag Conf User defined block tag. characters; at least
one must be
alphabetic.
NONE, AIB, CIB,

AOB, COB, ADS,
MIB, PLCB, SIB,
RIOB, VIB, PIOB,
TIB, DIB, DOB,
HOB
Current block mode.

If “Auto,” the block function drives the block output.
If “Manual,” the operator can directly manipulate the

mode.
Auto Lock Conf If “Yes,” the block is locked in Auto mode. The block yes, no
If “No,” the block can be switched to Manual mode.
Field Value NA Current transmitter input value in engineering units. Display only
Max = 112.5% of
eng. scale
Block output value in engineering units.
Block Out Oper Min.= --12.5% of
eng. scale
Default=.00
Block input scaling as configured by the user; top and

bottom values must correspond to “Eng. zero“ and “Eng.
Input Scale Conf Max” respectively, for all “Sig Char” types except “4--20 --999999 to 999999
mA” and “4--20 mA sqrt.”
Engineering units assigned to the block output. Maximum of 8

Eng Units Conf
Must be in Manual mode to configure. characters
Value to be displayed when block output is 100%;; must

correspond to bottom “Input Scale” for all “Sig Char” Max = 999999.
Eng Max Conf types except “4--20 mA” and “4--20 mA sqrt.” Min = --999999.
Default=100.00

IO: 7-2-4
Table 7.2.1. Multiplex Input Block (MIB) Configuration Screen Fields (continued)
Access
Level
Value to be displayed when lock output is 0%; must

correspond to top “Input Scale” for all “Sig Char” types Max = 999999.
Eng Zero Conf except “4--20 mA” and “4--20 mA sqrt.” Min = --999999.
Default=.0
User--assigned filter time constant applied to the field Max = 3276 sec.
Filt Time Conf
value. Min = None
User selectable signal characterization curve. Refer to Table 7.1.1

If a thermocouple or RTD device is used, a field for through Table 7.1.3.
Sig Char Conf selecting temperature units appears: C selects Entries are not in the
Centigrade, and F selects Fahrenheit. order in which the
Must be in Manual mode to configure. options appear.
Designates whether the input is processed or skipped.

Skip Conf yes, no
Max = 112.5%
Nom Out Oper Value used in conjunction with deviation alarms. Min = --12.5 %
Default=None

MIB, see SV: 7. None, Cal Low, Cal
Calibrate Supr
High
Displays the type of FEM actually installed and the

FEM Type NA Display only
revision of the FlexTerm Processor.
User configured information. Any character up to

Descriptor Conf
Press [EXCH] to access the “Descriptor” field. 24
Calibration constants supplied with each FEM;

Max = 9.99999
Cal Const Conf configurable only if block is calibrating.
Min = 0.00000

Plant Unit Conf restricted if the console has not been assigned to the I/O 0--255
block plant unit.
Assigns alarm priority to hardware alarms and critical and

Priority Conf advisory process alarms. 0 indicates highest priority; 3 0--3
indicates lowest priority.

IO: 7-2-5
Access
Level
Max = 999999.
Deadband value (in engineering units) applied to all block
Al DdBand Conf Min = .00
alarms.
Default=1.00
Hardware
Alarm Indicates an FIC hardware fault. For information about
NA Display only
alarm messages, see the Alarm Messages Manual.
Code
Max = 999999.%
High hardware alarm point (in percent) applied to the field
Inst High Supr Min = --999999.%
value.
Default=None
Max = 999999.%
Low hardware alarm point (in percent) applied to the field
Inst Low Supr Min = --999999.%
value.
Default=None
Max = 999999.
High critical process alarm point (in engineering units)
Crit High Conf Min = --999999.
Default=None
Max = 999999.
Low critical process alarm point (in engineering units)
Crit Low Conf Min = --999999.
Default=None
Max = 999999.
Crit Critical rate of change process alarm point (in
Conf Min = --999999.
Rate--Chg engineering units) applied to the block output value.
Default=None
Max = 999999.
Critical process alarm point (in engineering units) based Min = --999999.
Crit Dev Conf
on difference between block output value and Nom Out. (Nom Out ¹ None)
Default=None
Max = 999999.
High advisory process alarm point (in engineering units)
Adv High Conf Min = --999999.
Default=None
Max = 999999.
Low advisory process alarm point (in engineering units)
Adv Low Conf Min = --999999.
Default=None

IO: 7-2-6
Access
Level
Max = 999999.
Adv Advisory rate of change process alarm point (in
Conf Min = --999999.
Rate--Chg engineering units) applied to the block output value.
Default=None
Max = 999999.
Advisory process alarm point (in engineering units) based
Min = --999999.
Adv Dev Conf on difference between the block output value and Nom
Out. (Nom Out ¹ None)
Default=None

IO: 7-2-7
MIB Functional Diagram
Figure 7.2.2 shows the MIB functional block diagram. All items within
the dotted line reside in the MIB software.
Console Keyboard
None
Cal High
50.00 50.00
Send Const
Man
To
Signal Filter Scaling
Char CB
Auto
FEM
Instrument Rate Advisory Critical

From Alarm Alarms Alarms Alarms
Field
Figure 7.2.2. MIB Functional Block Diagram

IO: 7-3-1
Section 3:
Hints for Configuring MIBs
when configuring MIBs and some possible ways to deal with them. This
section also provides tips that are helpful when configuring MIBs.
Listed below are typical problems that occur when configuring MIBs and
possible ways to handle them.
- I can not access some of the MIB Block Configuration screen
fields.
D In order to configure many screen fields, the block must be in
D If you are trying to access the “Descriptor” field or one of the
alarm fields, press [EXCH].
- The MIB block input and block output are displayed as 99999.
This indicates that the MIB block is out of range.
- The MIB block output is displayed as 77777.
This indicates that there is no device connected to the MIB block.
- There is no field for selecting the temperature units when you
are using a thermocouple or RTD device with an MIB.
The temperature field is displayed when you select the desired
signal characterization, if that signal characterization is a
thermocouple or RTD device.
- The MIB input value seems inaccurate
Be sure that the “Input Scale” field is properly configured.
RS3: Configuring Multiplex Input Blocks Hints for Configuring MIBs

IO: 7-3-2
Configuration Tips
Listed below are hints to help you when configuring MIBs.

- Configuring a filter
When configuring the filter time, remember that the update rate of
each point can be up to 7 seconds for a 100 point Multiplexer.
- Configuring MIB alarms
D Remember that you will probably want to configure instrument
alarms and the alarm priority for each MIB.
D Remember that if you configure an MIB alarm, you should also
RS3: Configuring Multiplex Input Blocks Hints for Configuring MIBs

RS3t
Chapter 8:
Configuring Smart Blocks
Section 1: Configuring SIBs and VIBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-1

Blocks Related to the Smart Transmitter? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-2
Smart Transmitter Input Block (SIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-2
Value Input Block (VIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-2
How to Call Up Smart Transmitter Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-3
How to Configure SIBs and VIBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-4
Auto Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-4
Simulate Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-5
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-6
Configuring an SIB Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-7
Determining Whether to Use Analog or Digital PV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-8
Using Analog PV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-8
Using Digital PV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-8
Using Combined PV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-9
Using Both Analog and Digital PV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-9
Configuring SIB Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-11
SIB Instrument Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-11
SIB Alarm Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-11
SIB Alarm Deadbands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-12
SIB Low Cutoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-12
Using the Smart Transmitter Block Configuration Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-13
Using the SIB Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-13
Using the VIB Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-17
Linking a VIB Block to an SIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-20
SIB Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-21
VIB Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-22
Transmitter Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-23
How to View the Field Transmitter Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-23
Command Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-26
RS3: Configuring Smart Blocks Contents

IO: ii
How to Change the Transmitter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-28

Viewing the SIB Transmitter Configuration and Field Transmitter
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-28
Field Transmitter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-28
SIB Transmitter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-28
Displaying the Transmitter Configuration Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-29
Uploading and Downloading Transmitter Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-29
Performing Transmitter Configuration Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-30
How to Change the Transmitter Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-32
How to Set Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-34
How to Assign Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-35
How to Set Damping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-40
How to Assign Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-41
How to View the SIB Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-42
Transmitter Configuration Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-43
How to Record and View Transmitter Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-47
Generation of Log Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-47
Recording of Log Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-47
Using the Transmitter Maintenance Log Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-48
Section 2: HARTä Output Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-1

How is the HART Output Block Related to a Smart Field Device? . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-2
HART Output Block (HOB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-2
How to Call Up HOB Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-4
How to Configure HOBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-5
Configuring Output Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-6
Configuring HOB Alarm Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-9
Using the HART Output Device Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-13
Entering Data on the HART Output Device Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-14
Output Device Status Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-16
HART Output Device Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-18
Changing HART Field Device Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-19
Uploading and Downloading HART Field Device Configurations . . . . . . . . 8-2-19
Configuring Dead Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-25
Deviation Alarm Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-26
Configuring Slots in the HOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-27
HOB Slot Variable Tables for SMART Field Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-28
Linking a VIB Block to an HOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-29
Hints for Configuring HART Output Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-30
Section 3: Hints for Configuring SIBs and VIBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3-1


IO: iii
List of Figures
Figure Page
8.1.1 Smart Transmitter Input Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-2
8.1.2 Value Input Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-2
8.1.3 Accessing the SIB I/O Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-3
8.1.4 Smart Transmitter Input Block and Value Input Block in
Auto Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-4
Simulate Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-5
Manual Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-6
8.1.7 SIB Configuration Screen—Filter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-7
8.1.8 SIB Configuration Screen—PV Type Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-10
8.1.9 SIB Configuration Screen—Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-12
8.1.10 SIB Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-13
8.1.11 VIB Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-17
8.1.12 VIB Block Configuration Screen—Linking a VIB Block to
an SIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-20
8.1.13 SIB Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-21
8.1.14 VIB Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-22
8.1.15 Transmitter Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-23
8.1.16 Configuration Screen Entry for Transmitter Configuration
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-29
8.1.17 Transmitter Configuration I/O Screen—Performing
Transmitter Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-31
8.1.18 Transmitter Configuration I/O Screen—Performing
Transmitter Address Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-32
8.1.19 Transmitter Configuration I/O Screen—Assigning a
Descriptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-33
8.1.20 Transmitter Configuration I/O Screen—Range Configuration . . . . . . . . 8-1-34
8.1.21 Transmitter Configuration I/O Screen—Assigning Units . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-35
8.1.22 Transmitter Configuration I/O Screen—Damping
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-40
8.1.23 Transmitter Configuration I/O Screen—Output Configuration . . . . . . . 8-1-41
8.1.24 Transmitter Configuration I/O Screen—Block Limit
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-42
8.1.25 Transmitter Configuration I/O Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-43
8.1.26 Log Files Directory Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-47

IO: iv
8.1.27 Transmitter Maintenance Log Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-48

8.2.1 HOB Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-2
8.2.2 How an HOB Functions with a Smart FIC or Multipoint
Hardware in a Control Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-3
8.2.3 Accessing HOB Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-4
8.2.4 Hart Output Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-5
8.2.5 Output Option Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-6
8.2.6 Reverse Output Action Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-8
8.2.7 Alarm Priority Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-9
8.2.8 HART Output Device Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-13
8.2.9 HART Output Device Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-18
8.2.10 HART Output Device Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-24
8.2.11 The Dead Time field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-25
8.2.12 The Deviation Alarm Value field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-26
8.2.13 The Slot Fields on the HART Output Device Configuration
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-27
8.2.14 VIB Block Configuration Screen—Linking a VIB Block
to an HOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-29

IO: v
List of Tables
Table Page
8.1.1 SIB I/O Block Configuration Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-14
8.1.2 VIB I/O Block Configuration Screen Fields ...................... 8-1-18
8.1.3 Transmitter Status Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-24
8.1.4 Controller Communication Error Messages Generated
by the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-26
8.1.5 FIC Communication Error Messages Generated by the FIC . . . . . . . . 8-1-26
8.1.6 Transmitter Communication Error Generated by the
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-27
8.1.7 Transmitter Status Error Messages Generated by the
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-27
8.1.8 Transmitter Command Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-30
8.1.9 “Units” Field Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-36
8.1.10 Alphabetic List of “Units” Field Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-38
8.1.11 Transmitter Configuration Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-44
8.1.12 Transmitter Maintenance Log Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1-49
8.2.1 HART Output Block (HOB) Configuration Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-10
8.2.2 HART Output Device Status Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-15
8.2.3 Output Device Status Message Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-16
8.2.4 FIC Communication Error Messages Generated by the FIC . . . . . . . . 8-2-17
8.2.5 HART Output Device Configuration Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-20
8.2.6 Slot Variables for Fisher Transducer Output Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-28
8.2.7 Slot Variables for Fisher valve, no pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-28
8.2.8 Slot Variables for Fisher valve with pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2-28

IO: 8-1-1
Section 1:
Configuring SIBs and VIBs
This section describes how to configure Smart transmitter Input Blocks

(SIBs) and Value Input Blocks (VIBs) when a Rosemount Smart
transmitter is the field device.
This section provides the following information for configuring an SIB or

VIB block:
D Relationship of SIBs and VIBs to the Smart transmitter
D Calling up the Smart transmitter input screens
D Configuring Smart transmitter input blocks
D Viewing the field transmitter or FIC configuration
D Changing the transmitter configuration
D Recording and viewing Smart transmitter events
RS3: Configuring Smart Blocks Configuring SIBs and VIBs

IO: 8-1-2

Blocks Related to the Smart Transmitter?
You can use both Smart transmitter Input Blocks (SIBs) and Value Input
Blocks (VIBs) RS3 communication with Smart transmitters.
Smart Transmitter Input Block (SIB)
A Smart transmitter Input Block (SIB) receives signals from a smart

transmitter for use by other blocks and checks for alarm conditions.
The SIB also allows modification of the smart transmitter configuration
parameters.
Figure 8.1.1 shows that an SIB receives input from a smart transmitter
and sends its output to a ControlBlock.
Smart Smart ControlBlock

Transmitter Transmitter
Input Block
(SIB)
Figure 8.1.1. Smart Transmitter Input Block
Value Input Block (VIB)
Use a Value Input Block (VIB) with an SIB for multi--variable transmitters
that have more than one process variable. Configure an SIB to
measure the primary output and configure a VIB block for each
additional variable that needs to be measured to calculate the primary
output of the SIB. You can configure up to three VIBs for one SIB,
which allows up to four variables to be read from one transmitter.
Figure 8.1.2 shows how a VIB block receives input from an SIB and
sends its output to a ControlBlock.

Input Block
(SIB)
Value Input
Block (VIB)
Figure 8.1.2. Value Input Block

IO: 8-1-3
How to Call Up Smart Transmitter Screens
Each SIB has four associated screen displays:

D I/O Block Configuration Defines the I/O block as a Smart
screen transmitter Input Block (SIB)
D Transmitter Status Shows the current status of the smart
screen transmitter
D Transmitter Shows the present Smart transmitter
Configuration screen configuration and allows transmitter
configuration
D More Transmitter Has no function at this time
Configuration screen
Figure 8.1.3 shows how to access the SIB screen displays.
I/O Block Configuration Screen

SIB
More
Transmitter
Configuration
Screen
Status Configuration
Screen Screen
KEY
[EXCHANGE] key
[PAGE AHEAD] key
[PAGE BACK] key
Figure 8.1.3. Accessing the SIB I/O Screens

IO: 8-1-4
How to Configure SIBs and VIBs
Use a Smart transmitter Input Block (SIB) to bring a measurement from

a smart transmitter to the RS3 and to check for alarm conditions. This
block can also be used to hold a copy of the transmitter configuration
and allow you to change that configuration. If a Smart transmitter is
used for more than one process variable, Value Input Blocks (VIBs) are
used for the additional variables.
NOTE: Serial I/O limits: The maximum number of SIBs and VIBs that
can be configured per FIC is 3 SIBs and 13 VIBs. The limit of SIBs per
MPCI or MPCII controller is 32. Ideally, 2 SIBs per FIC is suggested.
NOTE: Multipoint I/O (MAIO) limits: 16 SIBs and 16 VIBs per FIM.
Determining the Block Mode to Use
SIB and VIB blocks can be in one of three modes: Auto, Simulate, or
Manual.
Auto Mode
Auto mode is the normal operating mode of the SIB and VIB blocks. In
Auto mode, the transmitter provides input to the SIB. The SIB provides
the transmitter input to a VIB block, if necessary. Both the SIB and VIB
outputs are sent to a ControlBlock. Figure 8.1.4 shows the SIB and VIB
blocks in Auto mode.

Input Input Block Output
(SIB)
Value Input
Block (VIB)
Output
Figure 8.1.4. Smart Transmitter Input Block and Value Input Block in Auto Mode

IO: 8-1-5
Simulate Mode
An SIB in Simulate mode uses the input from another block instead of
the transmitter. The SIB provides output to a ControlBlock. With a VIB
block in Simulate mode, the VIB block uses the input from another block
instead of the SIB. The VIB provides output to a ControlBlock.
Figure 8.1.5 shows the SIB and VIB blocks in Simulate mode.
Smart
Transmitter
SIB in
Simulate mode Smart ControlBlock
Simulate
Block Transmitter
Input Block Output
Input (SIB)

Input Block
VIB Block in (SIB)
Simulate mode
Simulate Value Input
Block Block (VIB)
Input Output
Figure 8.1.5. Smart Transmitter Input Block and Value Input Block in Simulate Mode

IO: 8-1-6
Manual Mode
In Manual mode, the transmitter provides the input to the SIB or VIB
block, but the SIB or VIB block output is held constant. The operator
can issue commands through the SIB to change the configuration of the
Smart transmitter. In addition, other SIB or VIB fields can be modified.
Figure 8.1.6 shows the SIB and VIB blocks in Manual mode.
SIB or
Transmitter Transmitter Operator
Change Smart Change
SIB in Smart Transmitter
Manual mode Transmitter Input Block
(SIB) Output ControlBlock
Smart Smart
Input Block
VIB Block in (SIB)
Manual mode
VIB Operator
Value Input Change
Block (VIB)
Output ControlBlock
Figure 8.1.6. Smart Transmitter Input Block and Value Input Block in Manual Modes

IO: 8-1-7
Configuring an SIB Filter
Use an SIB filter to provide a delay between the time when the input is
received and the time when the output is sent. The shaded area of
Figure 8.1.7 shows the section of the SIB Configuration screen that is
used for configuring an SIB filter. The SIB in Figure 8.1.7 is configured
for a filter time of 15 seconds.
1. Cursor to the “Filt Time” field and enter the desired time constant
I/O BLOCK CONFIGURATION 12-Aug-92 16:01:49

Address =2AA101 Device Type AIB or SIB
Block Tag Þ Block Type ÞSIB Mode ÞAUTO
Auto Lock Þ no
Use ÞAnalog PV .03 Block Out .03
.03 % . .03 %
4.01 mA
Filt Time Þ15.0 S Eng Units Þ
Xmtr Type 1151S
Xmtr Units in H2O Lo Cutoff .00 Zero Þ.00
Range 4 mA .00
20 mA 100.00 Sim Tag Þ Max Þ 100.00
Xmtr Status 00000000 Plant Unit Þ 0 Alarm PriorityÞ0
Xmtr Address 0 Inst Low ÞNone
Inst High ÞNone
Deadband Þ1.00 %
FIC Type AIO-RS Rev 2.1 HW Alarm Code 9
CONFIG 1
Figure 8.1.7. SIB Configuration Screen—Filter Configuration

IO: 8-1-8
Determining Whether to Use Analog or Digital PV
You can use the SIB PV value in analog or digital, depending on your
needs.
Select the PV option on the SIB Configuration screen. The shaded area
of Figure 8.1.8 shows the section of the SIB Configuration screen used
for configuring the PV type and the values that are displayed.
Using Analog PV
The analog PV displays the 4 to 20 mA signal coming into the FIC. The
analog PV is sampled 16 times each second.
Using Digital PV
The digital PV displays the digital communication, which is the actual

value sent from the transmitter. The digital PV sampling time varies,
depending on the number of SIBs configured on an FIC. With one SIB
configured, the digital PV is sampled approximately 2 times each
second. With two SIBs configured, the digital PV is sampled
approximately 1 time each second. With three SIBs configured, the
digital PV is sampled approximately 1 time each 1--1/2 seconds.

IO: 8-1-9
Using Combined PV
Combined PV is used to disable the “Output Current Saturated” alarm

message on the SIB and Transmitter Status screens. All other SIB
functionality is unaffected. When selected, the SIB “Block Out” value
displayed is the Analog value. This option is intended to be used in
combination with a VIB block which is configured using SIB Input 1
(Digital Value), and with the transmitter analog value ranged for the
control range desired. The VIB block output can be used over the full
range of the transmitter for non--control purposes only. Therefore, when
the analog value has become saturated, the digital value can be used
as a reference.
- To inhibit the analog output saturation message:
1. Cursor to the “Use” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to select the
“Combined PV” field, then press [ENTER].
Using Both Analog and Digital PV
If you need to use both the analog and digital values, you can use the
analog value in the SIB and the digital value by configuring a VIB. If you
configure a VIB block to display a PV value, the VIB block must be
scaled the same as the corresponding SIB.
- To set the PV type:
1. Cursor to the “Use” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to select the
desired type of PV, then press [ENTER].

IO: 8-1-10
SIB Value
Analog PV Digital PV

Auto Lock Þ no
Use ÞAnalog PV 4.01mA Block Out .03
.03 % . .03 %
.03
Filt Time ÞNone Eng Units Þ
Xmtr Type 1151S
Range 4 mA .00
20 mA 100.00 Sim Tag Þ Max Þ 100.00
Inst High ÞNone
Deadband Þ1.00 %
CONFIG 1
Figure 8.1.8. SIB Configuration Screen—PV Type Configuration

IO: 8-1-11
Configuring SIB Alarms
The shaded area of Figure 8.1.9 shows the section of the SIB
Configuration screen used for configuring SIB alarms. Instrument
alarms are usually configured for SIBs.
SIB Instrument Alarms
We recommend that you configure instrument alarms and an alarm

priority for an SIB. Instrument alarms (also called hardware alarms)
inform the operator of a problem with the RS3 hardware or transmitter.
It is good practice to set a low instrument alarm for an SIB. A typical

instrument low alarm value is --6%. You can also set an instrument high
alarm. A typical instrument high alarm value is 106%.
SIB Alarm Priority
If you configure an SIB alarm, we recommend that you also configure

the alarm priority. You can configure the priority of an SIB instrument
alarm in the “Alarm Priority” field on the SIB Configuration screen using
a numeral from 0 to 3. An entry of 0 indicates the highest alarm priority.
An entry of 3 indicates the lowest priority. The default value is 0.
If the RS3 generates more than one unacknowledged instrument alarm

at one time, the corresponding alarm banner for each alarm appears at
the bottom of the console screen in the order of priority.
You can configure the default value for the “Alarm Priority” field on the
Alarm Configuration screen.

IO: 8-1-12
SIB Alarm Deadbands

SIB Low Cutoff
You can configure a low cutoff value that is the block output value below
which the block output is set to zero. Values below the assigned cutoff
value do not generate instrument alarms. The SIB must be in Manual
mode to configure a low cutoff. Figure 8.1.9 shows the Low Cutoff field.

Auto Lock Þ no
Use ÞAnalog PV 0. Block Out .03
.03 % . .03 %
4.01 mA
Xmtr Type 1151S
Range 4 mA .00
20 mA 100.00 Sim Tag Þ Max Þ 100.00
Inst High ÞNone
Deadband Þ1.00 %
CONFIG 1
Figure 8.1.9. SIB Configuration Screen—Alarm Configuration

IO: 8-1-13
Using the Smart Transmitter Block Configuration Screens
Configure the Smart transmitter Input Blocks on the I/O Block

Using the SIB Configuration Screen
Use the I/O Block Configuration screen to configure an SIB

Figure 8.1.10 shows the SIB configuration screen. Table 8.1.1 provides
a description of the SIB configuration screen fields.

Auto Lock Þ no
Use ÞAnalog PV .03 Block Out .03
.03 % . .03 %
4.01 mA
Xmtr Type 1151S
Range 4 mA .00
20 mA 100.00 Sim Tag Þ Max Þ 100.00
Inst High ÞNone
Deadband Þ1.00 %
CONFIG 1
Figure 8.1.10. SIB Configuration Screen

IO: 8-1-14
Table 8.1.1. SIB I/O Block Configuration Screen Fields
Access
Level
characters

TIB, DIB, DOB
Current block mode. See “Determining the

Block Mode to Use” for information about block AUTO, MANUAL,
Mode Supv
SIMULATE
modes.

Auto mode.
If “yes”, the block is locked in Auto mode. The
Auto Lock Conf no, yes
If “no”, the block can be switched to Manual
mode.
Type of transmitter signal used.

Analog PV, Digital PV, or
Use Conf Displays the transmitter input value in xmtr Combined PV
engineering units and mA.
Block output value in engineering units and

Þ of engineering unit span. Eng Units Maximum,
Block Out Oper
Eng Units Minimum
User--assigned filter time constant applied to Max = 3276.7 sec

Filt Time Conf
the field value. Min = 0 sec
Eng Units Conf Engineering units displayed for the block.
characters
Xmtr Type NA Type of transmitter. Display only
Xmtr Units NA Engineering units configured for the transmitter. Display only
Block output value below which the block

output is set to zero. Max = 999999
Lo Cutoff NA
Min = --999999
Max = 999999
Zero Conf Value displayed when the block output is 0Þ.
Min = --999999

IO: 8-1-15
Table 8.1.1. SIB I/O Block Configuration Screen Fields (continued)
Access
Level
4 mA engineering units value configured for the

Range 4 mA NA Display only
transmitter.
20 mA engineering units value configured for

Range 20 mA NA Display only
the transmitter.
Tag of the block used for the input when the I/O Any existing block tag.
Sim Tag Conf
block is in Simulate mode. Address is display only.
Value displayed when the block output is Max = 999999

Max Conf
100Þ. Min = --999999
SIB calibration field. NONE, Cal Low,

Calibrate Conf
Must be in Manual mode to configure. Cal High
Bit mapped representation code of the

Xmtr Status NA Display only
transmitter status messages. See Table 8.1.7
A user assigned alarm priority applied to

Alarm Priority Conf hardware alarms from this block. 0 indicates 0--15
highest priority, 3 indicates lowest priority.
Indicates the user--defined group to which the

block is assigned. Access to I/O blocks from a
console may be restricted if the console has
Plant Unit Conf not been assigned to the I/O block plant unit. 0--255
Address of the transmitter.

“0” indicates a transmitter with a 4--20 mA
signal. 0 is the default.
“1”--“15” indicates a transmitter in multidrop
Xmtr Address Conf mode, in which the analog input signal is 0--15
locked at 4 mA.
NOTE: Configuring this field will have no
effect, because the RS3 does not support
multidrop mode at this time.

IO: 8-1-16
Table 8.1.1. SIB I/O Block Configuration Screen Fields (continued)
Access
Level
Max = 999999
Low hardware (sensor failure) alarm point (in Min = --999999
Inst Low Conf
engineering units) applied to field value.
Default=None
Max = 999999
High hardware (sensor failure) alarm point (in Min = --999999
Inst High Conf
engineering units) applied to field value.
Default=None
Max = 999999
Deadband value (in engineering units) applied Min = --999999
Deadband Conf
to all block alarm points.
Default=1.00
Configured type of FIC card or FIM

communicating with the I/O block: analog I/O
(AIO), contact I/O (CIO), redundant analog I/O AIO, CIO, DIO, AIO--R,
FIC Type, Rev NA (AIO--R), redundant AIO with Smart daughter AIO--RS, MAI, MAO
board (AIO--RS), temperature input (TEMP), Display only
discrete I/O (DIO), multipoint input (MAI),
multipoint output (MAO).
HW Alarm Indicates the FIC hardware fault. For a list of

NA Display only
Code the alarm codes, see AL.

IO: 8-1-17
Using the VIB Block Configuration Screen
Use the Value Input Block (VIB) with an SIB for multi--variable
transmitters that have more than one measured output. Up to three
VIBs can be configured for one SIB.
The VIB I/O Block Configuration screen, once configured, displays the
SIB tag and address of the corresponding SIB and the SIB input. When
configuring a VIB block, the block must be linked to an SIB residing on
the same FIC. Figure 8.1.11 shows the VIB block configuration screen.
Table 8.1.2 provides a description of the VIB block configuration screen
fields.

Address =2AA104 Device Type NO DEVICE
Block Tag Þ Block Type ÞVIB Mode ®AUTO
Auto Lock Þno
Field Value .00 Block Out .00
.00 % .00 %
SIB Tag Þ Eng Units Þ
Addr Sim Tag Þ
Addr Zero Þ.00
SIB Input Þ1
Max Þ100.00
Plant Unit Þ0
Alarm Priority Þ0
HW Alarm Code 9
Figure 8.1.11. VIB Block Configuration Screen

IO: 8-1-18
Table 8.1.2. VIB I/O Block Configuration Screen Fields
Access
Level
characters

COB, ADS, MIB, PLCB, SIB,
RIOB, VIB, PIOB, TIB, DIB,
DOB
Current block mode. See “Determining the

Block Mode to Use” for more information AUTO, MANUAL,
Mode Supv
SIMULATE
about block modes.
Indicates whether or not the block is locked

into Auto mode.
If “Yes”, the block is locked in Auto mode.
Auto Lock Conf The block cannot be changed to Manual no, yes
mode.
mode.
Current transmitter input value in transmitter

engineering units and percent.
Block output value in engineering units and Eng Units Maximum,

Block Out Oper % output. Eng Units Minimum
Must be in Manual mode to configure. Display only
SIB Tag Tag or address of the SIB that is connected Up to 16 alphanumeric

Conf
Addr to the transmitter. characters
Sim Tag Link from which the simulation data is

Conf Address is display only.
Addr obtained.
Eng Units Conf Engineering units displayed for the block.
characters
Max = 999999
Zero Conf Value displayed when the block output is 0%. Min = --999999
Default=.00
Max = 999999
Value displayed when the block output is Min = --999999
Max Conf
100%.
Default=100.00
NOTE: Bold text indicates the default selections.

IO: 8-1-19
Table 8.1.2. VIB I/O Block Configuration Screen Fields (continued)
Access
Level
The digital variable number to get from the

transmitter. For the corresponding
transmitter outputs, refer to the transmitter
SIB Input Conf manual. 1--4
1 = Primary variable
2, 3, or 4 = Secondary, 3rd, or 4th variable
Indicates the user--defined group to which

the block is assigned. Access to I/O blocks
from a console may be restricted if the
Plant Unit Conf console has not been assigned to the I/O 0--255
block plant unit.
For more information on plant units, see
CC: 1.
Assigns priority to hardware alarms. 0

Alarm Priority Conf indicates highest priority, 3 indicates lowest 0--3
priority.
Indicates an FIC hardware fault or

HW Alarm Code NA configuration error. For information about Display only
alarm messages, see AL.
NOTE: Bold text indicates the default selections.

IO: 8-1-20
Linking a VIB Block to an SIB
When configuring a VIB block, the block must be linked to an SIB

residing on the same FIC card. An FIC card may have up to three SIBs.
FIC block addresses 1 through 3 are reserved for SIBs. FIC block
addresses 4 through 16 are reserved for VIB blocks.
Up to four VIB blocks can serve as inputs from an SIB. The SIB input
number identifies which SIB input is being linked to a particular VIB
block.
The shaded area of Figure 8.1.12 shows the section of the VIB Block
Configuration screen used for linking a VIB block to an SIB. The
example in Figure 8.1.12 shows the VIB block at =129AB204 is linked to
an SIB at =129AB203.
- To link a VIB block to an SIB:
1. Cursor to the “SIB/HOB Tag” field and enter the tag or address of
the SIB to which the VIB block is to be linked.
2. Cursor to the “SIB/HOB Input” field and enter the number of the
SIB input to which the VIB block is to be linked, then press
[ENTER].

Address =129AB204 Device Type NO DEVICE
Block Tag > Block Type >VIB Mode > AUTO
Auto Lock >no
.00 % .00 %
SIB/HOB Tag >=129AB203 Eng Units >
Addr =129AB203 Sim Tag >
Addr Zero >.00
SIB/HOB Input >4
Max >100.00
Xmtr Units ???
Plant Unit >0
Alarm Priority >0
HW Alarm Code 9
Figure 8.1.12. VIB Block Configuration Screen—Linking a VIB Block to an SIB

IO: 8-1-21
SIB Functional Diagram
Figure 8.1.13 shows the SIB functional block diagram. All items within
the dotted line reside in the SIB software.
None
Cal Low
50.00 50.00
Cal High
MAN
Use Analog or
From Combined
FIC Filter To
A/D CB
Use Digital AUTO
SIM
From
FIC Filter
Xmtr Simulate
Comm Use Analog or Tag
Combined Instrument
Alarm
Use Digital
Figure 8.1.13. SIB Functional Block Diagram

IO: 8-1-22
VIB Functional Diagram
Figure 8.1.14 shows the VIB functional block diagram. All items within
the dotted line reside in the VIB software.
Input Field Value Block Out

Source
50.00 50.00
Variable 1
MAN
From
FIC/ Scale To
Xmtr CB
AUTO
Comm
Variable 4 SIM
Eng Simulate
Units Tag
Figure 8.1.14. VIB Functional Block Diagram

IO: 8-1-23
Transmitter Status Screen
The Transmitter Status screen shows the transmitter configuration that

is saved in the transmitter.
- To call up a Transmitter Status Screen:
D Press [EXCH] from the I/O Block Configuration screen.
or
D Press [PAGE BACK] from the Transmitter Configuration screen.
Figure 8.1.15 shows the Transmitter Status screen for a 3051C
Pressure Transmitter. Table 8.1.3 describes the Transmitter Status
screen fields.
How to View the Field Transmitter Status
A configuror can make entries in the “Xmtr Address” field, although

configuring this field will have no effect at this time, because multidrop
mode is not supported. A supervisor or a configuror can make entries
in the “Command” field. All other fields of the Transmitter Status screen
are for display only.
For information about changing the transmitter address, see “How to
Change the Transmitter Address” later in this section. For information
about using the transmitter configuration commands, see “Performing
Transmitter Configuration Commands” later in this section.
TRANSMITTER STATUS 01-Aug-92 16:01:49

Block Tag Press-1 Addr =2AA101 Mode AUTO Block Out 4.31
Mfr ID 38
Xmtr Type 3051C Xmtr Address 0 Ser Num 8195 Rev 2.2.0, 2.1
Tag LT-101 Desc LEVEL IN TANK Mesg
Date 01-Aug-89 Range 4 mA 0. 20 mA 13.998 Units in H2O
Limits Low -277.3 High 277.296 in H2O
Damping 0.0 Sec Output Linear Alarm Set Low
Analog Val 4.01201 Xmtr Status 00000000 Diagnostic Status
8.59 mA
Digital Val 4.03408
8.610 mA
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Command ®Done Stat 39.0 000 Num 15.0 000
CONFIG 1
Figure 8.1.15. Transmitter Status Screen

IO: 8-1-24
Table 8.1.3. Transmitter Status Screen Fields
Field Description
Block Tag Tag assigned to the SIB.
Addr Hardware/software address of the SIB.
Mode Current operating mode of the SIB.
Block Out Current output value of the SIB.
Shows the identification code for the manufacturer of the transmitter being used. The
Mfr ID manufacturer identification code is entered automatically by the RS3.
See Table 8.1.8.
Xmtr Type Type of transmitter.

“0” = Indicates a transmitter with a 4--20 mA signal. 0 is the default.
Xmtr Address “1”--“15” = Indicates a transmitter in multidrop mode, where the analog input signal is
locked at 4 mA.
NOTE: Configuring this field will have no effect because the RS3 does not support
multidrop at this time.
Ser Num Serial number of the transmitter.
Rev Revision level of the transmitter.
Tag assigned to the transmitter.

Tag
Up to 16 alphanumeric characters can be used.
Description of the transmitter.

Desc
Message associated with the transmitter.

Mesg
Date Date as entered by the user (transmitter date) in the format dd/mm/yy.
Range The range of the transmitter.
Units The units of the Range, “Analog Val” and “Digital Val” fields.
Limits The factory--set transmitter limits.
Damping value for the transmitter. Damping is used to increase the response time of
Damping
the transmitter to smooth the output when there are rapid input variations.
Output Type of transmitter output signal.
Alarm Set Transmitter alarm/failure jumper setting.
Analog Val Current analog input value in engineering units and mA.
Xmtr Status Bit mapped representation code of the transmitter status messages. See Table 8.1.7.

IO: 8-1-25
Table 8.1.3. Transmitter Status Screen Fields (continued)
Field Description
Diagnostic Status Hexadecimal code number of diagnostic status message.
Digital Val Current digital input value in engineering units and mA.
Indicates the type of command in progress: Upload Xmtr Config, Send Config to
Xmtr, Xmtr Self Test, Save Xmtr Config, End Fixed Current, (Trim Xmtr DAC, 4mA)
Command (Trim Xmtr DAC, 20mA) Set Output Current, Re--Zero Xmtr, Set Xmtr Address.
Must be in Manual mode to configure a transmitter configuration command.
Configurable by a supervisor or configuror.
Failed command and transmitter response code status. Only the first failure or
response code in a group of commands is retained.
There are two types of definitions for command--specific response codes: those with
the word warning in them and those without.
D The error definitions with WARNING indicate that the command was accepted
Stat and successfully executed, but some condition existed within the device that
affected the result. The response data bytes are returned with the data as
modified by the device.
D Error definitions that do not begin with warning indicate that an error was
found while attempting to execute the command and the execution of the
command could not be completed. The response data bytes are not returned
when errors are being reported.
Num Indicates status of the current command being sent to the transmitter.

IO: 8-1-26
Command Error Messages
Table 8.1.4 lists the Controller Processor error messages that might
appear on the Transmitter Status screen or the SIB Configuration
screen when using the transmitter commands.
Table 8.1.4. Controller Communication Error Messages Generated by the
Controller
Message Description
Cont Comm Error 129 Error in FIC reply.
Cont Comm Error 130 Timeout, no transmitter response.
Error in reply from transmitter. See

Cont Comm Error 132
Table 8.1.5.
Cont Comm Error 133 Error in FIC message length.
Transmitter returns communication error.

Cont Comm Error 134
See Table 8.1.6.
Cont Comm Error 135 Error in transmitter message length.
Cont Comm Error 137 Transmitter busy.
Cont Comm Error 139 Error in message length.
Cont Comm Error 145 Communication aborted.
Table 8.1.5 lists the FIC error messages that might appear on the
Transmitter Status screen or the SIB Configuration screen when you are
using the transmitter commands. It shows error messages that may
occur in communication between the FIC and transmitter.
Table 8.1.5. FIC Communication Error Messages Generated by the FIC
Code Description
FIC Comm Err 1000 0001 The transmitter modem signal was lost.
FIC Comm Err 1000 0010 Buffer overrun error. Too many characters were received.
Smart transmitter parity byte error. The calculated checksum did not
FIC Comm Err 1000 0100
match the checksum at the end of the message.
Character/message timeout error. The message was not received

within the required time.
Framing error. The Stop Bit of one or more bytes received was not
detected.
Overrun error. At least one byte of data in the receive buffer was
overwritten before it was read.
Character parity error. The parity of one or more of the bytes received
was incorrect.

IO: 8-1-27
Table 8.1.6 and Table 8.1.7 list the transmitter error messages that
might appear on the Transmitter Status screen, the SIB Configuration
screen, or the Transmitter Configuration screen when using the
transmitter commands.
Table 8.1.6. Transmitter Communication Error Generated by the Transmitter
Message Description
Xmtr Comm Err 1000 0001 Undefined.
Buffer overflow. The message was too long for the receive buffer of
Xmtr Comm Err 1000 0010
the device.
Xmtr Comm Err 1000 0x00 Bit 2 is reserved. It is set to zero by the transmitter.
Message Checksum Error. The parity byte calculated by the device

did not match the parity byte at the end of the message.
Framing Error. The stop bit of one or more bytes received by the
device was not detected by the UART.
Overrun Error. At least one byte of data in the receive buffer of the
UART was overwritten before it was read.
Byte Parity Error. The parity of one or more of the bytes received by
the device was incorrect.
Table 8.1.7. Transmitter Status Error Messages Generated by the Transmitter
Xmtr Status
Message Description
field
PV Out of Xmtr Limits 00000001 Primary variable is out of the transmitter operating limits.
Non PV out of Limits 00000010 A Non--primary variable value is out of the transmitter limits.
Output Current Saturated 00000100 Primary variable is reading above 20 mA or below 4 mA.
Primary variable current readings are held at the requested

Fixed Current Mode 00001000
value. The digital PV is still valid.
More status information is available than can be returned in

More Status Available 00010000 an Upload Xmtr Config command. See the Diagnostic Status
field on the Transmitter Status screen.
Power has been turned off and then on, which reinstalls the
Cold Start 00100000
setup information.
Xmtr Config Changed 01000000 A write or set command has been executed.
A hardware error or failure has been detected. See the

Xmtr Failure 10000000
Diagnostic Status field on the Transmitter Status screen.

IO: 8-1-28
How to Change the Transmitter Configuration
Use the Transmitter Configuration screen to configure a transmitter

initially. Once it is configured, you can view information about the
transmitter or changes to the transmitter configuration on the
Transmitter Status screen. You can view a transmitter’s performance
on the Transmitter Maintenance Log screen.
Viewing the SIB Transmitter Configuration and Field

Transmitter Configuration
The Transmitter Configuration screens contain the SIB transmitter

configurations. Two transmitter configurations exist for each transmitter:
the field configuration and the SIB configuration.
Field Transmitter Configuration
The field transmitter configuration exists in the transmitter and cannot

be edited at the console.
SIB Transmitter Configuration
The SIB transmitter configuration is saved to the SIB and can be

changed by the configuror. The SIB configuration can then be loaded
into the transmitter to change the transmitter configuration.

IO: 8-1-29
Displaying the Transmitter Configuration Values
Each configurable entry has two values, as shown in Figure 8.1.16.

The top number is the SIB transmitter configuration value and can be
changed by the configuror. The bottom number is the field transmitter
configuration value and cannot be edited at the console.
Upon initial configuration of the Transmitter Configuration screen, the

two configuration fields may not be present. To display both fields,
perform a “Save Xmtr Config” function. The “Save Xmtr Config”
function, as well as the other transmitter functions, are described in
more detail in “Performing Transmitter Configuration Commands” later
in this section.
Uploading and Downloading Transmitter Configurations
The configuror can use the SIB commands described later in this
section to upload the field transmitter configuration to the SIB and to
download the SIB transmitter configuration to the field device.
Part of the SIB (static)

Range 20 mA Þ 13.998 transmitter configuration
13.998
Part of the field transmitter
configuration
Figure 8.1.16. Configuration Screen Entry for Transmitter Configuration Screen

IO: 8-1-30
Performing Transmitter Configuration Commands
Commands are available for performing many transmitter functions

such as changing the SIB transmitter configuration, uploading or
downloading transmitter configurations, calibrating the transmitter D/A,
and changing the transmitter address. Table 8.1.8 lists the commands
that can be used with transmitters.
The shaded area of Figure 8.1.17 shows the section of the Transmitter
Configuration screen used for performing transmitter functions. To
select the desired command, the block must be in Manual mode.
- To perform a transmitter command:
1. Cursor to the “Mode” field and press the [OPERATOR] key to
select Manual mode or press [NEXT OPTION].
2. Cursor to the “Command” field, press [NEXT OPTION] to select
the desired function; then press [ENTER].
3. Cursor to the “Mode” field, press the [AUTO] key to select Auto
mode or press [NEXT OPTION]; then press [ENTER].
Table 8.1.8. Transmitter Command Descriptions
Command Description
Indicates that there is no active command. This is not a user option, but is
Done
displayed to indicate that a command has been completed.
Copies the transmitter configuration from the transmitter in the field to the dynamic
Upload Xmtr Config portion of the SIB. This happens automatically when a new transmitter is configured
or when any transmitter configuration is changed.
Sends the transmitter configuration from the static portion of the SIB to the
Send Config to Xmtr transmitter in the field. Also causes an automatic upload of the transmitter
configuration.
Causes the transmitter to begin a self test and indicates the result in the “Diagnostic
Xmtr Self Test
Status” field on the Transmitter Status screen.
Copies the field transmitter configuration (SIB dynamic portion) to the SIB (static)
Save Xmtr Config
configuration.
Exits the transmitter fixed current output mode. The “End Fixed Current” must be
End Fixed Current performed following any of the “Trim Xmtr DAC” command functions or the “Set
Output Current”.
Sets the transmitter to 4 mA. When selected, the “Enter the Trim Value” field
Trim Xmtr DAC, appears. This field allows the user to calibrate the transmitter D/A zero. The trim
4 mA
value is entered in mA.
Sets the transmitter to 20 mA. When selected, the “Enter the Trim Value” field
Trim Xmtr DAC, appears. This field allows the user to calibrate the transmitter D/A gain. Must be
20 mA followed by an “End Fixed Current” command function. The trim value is entered in
mA.

IO: 8-1-31
Table 8.1.8. Transmitter Command Descriptions (continued)
Command Description
Sets the transmitter current to the user value. When selected, the “Enter the Output
Current” field appears. This field allows the user to select a particular output for the
Set Output Current
transmitter to check that the transmitter is working properly. Must be followed by an
“End Fixed Current” command function.
Re--Zero Xmtr Adjusts the zero at the transmitter.
Changes the address of the transmitter. Puts the transmitter into Fixed Current
Set Xmtr Address Mode. Fixes the digital and analog currents at 4.0 mA. The digital PV provides the
transmitter reading.
TRANSMITTER CONFIG 01-Aug-92 16:01:49

Block Tag Press-2 Addr =87EA101 Mode MANUAL Block Out 50.31
Mfr ID 38
Xmtr Type 3051C Xmtr Address Þ0 Date Þ 29-Jul-89
3051C 16-Jun-89
Tag ÞLEVEL Desc ÞHigh Tank Mesg Þ
XXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXX
Range 4 mA Þ0. 20 mA Þ13.998 Units Þin H2O Damping Þ0.0 Sec
0. 13.998 in H2O 0.0 Sec
Limits Low -200.0 High 200.0 in H2O Output ÞLinear
Linear

CONFIG 1
Figure 8.1.17. Transmitter Configuration I/O Screen—Performing Transmitter Commands

IO: 8-1-32
How to Change the Transmitter Address
The Transmitter Configuration screen may be used to change the

transmitter address.
The shaded area of Figure 8.1.18 shows the area of the Transmitter
Configuration screen used for changing the transmitter address. To
change the transmitter address, the block must be in Manual mode.
- To change the transmitter address:
1. Be sure that the SIB is in Manual mode.
2. Cursor to the “Command” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to
select “Set Xmtr Address”. Press [ENTER].
3. When the “Enter Xmtr Address” field appears, enter the number
corresponding to the transmitter address. Enter a 0 for a 4--20
mA signal transmitter, and 1--15 for a transmitter with a signal
locked at 4 mA. Assign any number from 1--15 as long as the
number is a unique address. Press [ENTER]. The new address
appears in the “Xmtr Address” field.
If the address number is not accepted, use the Rosemount
Model 268 Remote Transmitter Interface to determine the
address number to enter. Repeat this step, and enter the new
address number.
4. Cursor to the “Mode” field and press the [AUTO] key to select
Auto mode or press [NEXT OPTION].

Mfr ID 38
3051C 16-Jun-89
0. 13.998 in H2O 0.0 Sec
Linear
Enter Xmtr AddressÞ

Command ®Set Xmtr Address Stat 39.0 000 Num 15.0 000
CONFIG 1
Figure 8.1.18. Transmitter Configuration I/O Screen—Performing Transmitter Address Configuration

IO: 8-1-33
How to Assign a Tag, Descriptor, Message, or Date
The Transmitter Configuration screen may be used to assign a tag,

descriptor, message, or date to a transmitter. Although this descriptor is
for the transmitter, you can also use it as an SIB descriptor. If the SIB
information is being trended, this descriptor appears on the trend
display. The tag is only the transmitter tag. It is not the SIB tag.
Configuration screen used for assigning a tag, descriptor, message, or
date to a transmitter. To assign any of these, the block must be in
Manual mode.
- To assign a tag, descriptor, message, or date:
1. Be sure that the SIB is in Manual mode.
select “Save Xmtr Config”; then press [ENTER].
3. Cursor to the “Tag”, “Desc”, “Mesg”, or “Date” field and enter the
desired tag, descriptor, message, or date. Press [ENTER].
select “Send Config to Xmtr”; then press [ENTER].
New descriptor to be assigned Descriptor that is currently in

to the transmitter and the SIB the transmitter memory

Mfr ID 38
3051C 16-Jun-89
0. 13.998 in H2O 0.0 Sec
Linear
Command ®Send Config to Xmtr Stat 39.0 000 Num 15.0 000
CONFIG 1
Figure 8.1.19. Transmitter Configuration I/O Screen—Assigning a Descriptor

IO: 8-1-34
How to Set Ranges
The Transmitter Configuration screen may be used to change the

transmitter range. When setting the range, be sure to use a range that
is within the transmitter limits.
Configuration screen used for changing the transmitter range. To set
the transmitter range, the block must be in Manual mode.
- To set the transmitter range:
2. Cursor to the low “Range” field and enter the desired low
transmitter range (in the units displayed for the transmitter); then
press [ENTER].
3. Cursor to the high “Range” field and enter the desired high
transmitter range (in the units displayed for the transmitter); then
press [ENTER].
5. Cursor to the “Mode” field and press the [AUTO] key to select
Auto mode or press [NEXT OPTION].

Mfr ID 38
3051C 16-Jun-89
0. 13.998 in H2O 0.0 Sec
Linear
CONFIG 1
Figure 8.1.20. Transmitter Configuration I/O Screen—Range Configuration

IO: 8-1-35
How to Assign Units
Configuration screen used for assigning the Units. To assign the units,
the block must be in Manual mode.
- To assign the units:
1. Cursor to the “Mode” field and press the [OPERATOR] key or
press [NEXT OPTION] to select Manual mode; then press
[ENTER].
2. Cursor to the “Units” field; press [NEXT OPTION] to select the
desired units; then press [ENTER].
3. Cursor to the “Command” field; press [NEXT OPTION] to select
“Send Config to Xmtr”; then press [ENTER].
4. Cursor to the “Mode” field and press the [AUTO] key or press
[NEXT OPTION] to select Auto mode.
Table 8.1.9 and Table 8.1.10 show the codes that provide the RS3 with
the appropriate unit. Table 8.1.9 is listed by code number. Table 8.1.10
is listed by alphabetical order.
If a question mark is shown for the Transmitter Type field, the device is
not fully supported. Enter the appropriate code, shown in the tables
below, in the “Units” field.

Mfr ID 38
3051C 16-Jun-89
0. 13.998 in H2O 0.0 Sec
Linear

CONFIG 1
Figure 8.1.21. Transmitter Configuration I/O Screen—Assigning Units

8-1-36
Table 8.1.9. “Units” Field Codes Table 8.1.9. “Units” Field Codes (continued)
Code Transmitter Units Code Transmitter Units
1 inches H2O @ 68 degrees Fahrenheit 26 cubic feet/second
2 inches Hg @ 0 degrees Celsius 27 cubic feet/day

3 feet H2O @ 68 degrees Fahrenheit 28 cubic meters/second
millimeters H2O @ 68 degrees 29 cubic meters/day
4
Fahrenheit
30 imperial gallons/hour
5 millimeters Hg @ 0 degrees Celsius
31 imperial gallons/day
6 pounds/square inch
32 degrees Celsius
7 bars
33 degrees Fahrenheit
8 millibars
34 degrees Rankine
9 grams/square centimeter
35 Kelvin
10 kilograms/square centimeter
36 millivolts
11 pascals
37 ohms
12 kilopascals
13 torr @ 0 degrees Celsius 38 hertz
14 atmospheres 39 milliamperes
15 cubic feet/minute 40 gallons
16 gallons/minute 41 liters
17 liters/minute 42 imperial gallons
18 imperial gallons/minute 43 cubic meters
19 cubic meters/hour 44 feet
20 feet/second 45 meters
21 meters/second 46 barrels
22 gallons/second 47 inches
23 million gallons/day 48 centimeters
24 liters/second 49 millimeters
25 million liters/day 50 minutes

8-1-37
Table 8.1.9. “Units” Field Codes (continued) Table 8.1.9. “Units” Field Codes (continued)
Code Transmitter Units Code Transmitter Units

51 seconds 86 short tons (2000 pounds)/day
52 hours 90 specific gravity units
53 days 91 grams/cubic centimeter
60 grams 92 kilograms/cubic meter
61 kilograms 93 pounds/gallon
62 metric tons
94 pounds/cubic foot
63 pounds
95 grams/milliliter
64 short tons (2000 pounds)
96 kilograms/liter
65 long tons (2240 pounds)
97 grams/liter
70 grams/second
98 pounds/cubic inch
71 grams/minute
99 short tons (2000 pounds)/cubic yard
72 grams/hour
100 degrees Twaddell
73 kilograms/second
101 degrees Briz
74 kilograms/minute
102 degrees Baume—heavy
75 kilograms/hour
103 degrees Baume—light
76 kilograms/day
104 degrees API
77 metric tons/minute
105 percent solids/weight
78 metric tons/hour
106 percent solids/volume
79 metric tons/day
80 pounds/second 110 bushels
81 pounds/minute 111 cubic yards
82 pounds/hour 112 cubic feet
83 pounds/day 113 cubic inches
84 short tons (2000 pounds)/minute 120 meters/hour
85 short tons (2000 pounds)/hour 253 special

8-1-38
Table 8.1.10. Alphabetic List of “Units” Field Table 8.1.10. Alphabetic List of “Units” Field
Codes Codes (continued)
Transmitter Units Code Transmitter Units Code
atmospheres 14 feet H2O @ 68 degrees Fahrenheit 3
barrels 46 feet/second 20
bars 7 gallons 40
bushels 110 gallons/minute 16
centimeters 48 gallons/second 22
cubic feet 112 grams 60
cubic feet/day 27 grams/cubic centimeter 91
cubic feet/minute 15 grams/hour 72
cubic feet/second 26 grams/liter 97
cubic inches 113 grams/milliliter 95
cubic meters 43 grams/minute 71
cubic meters/day 29 grams/second 70
cubic meters/hour 19 grams/square centimeter 9
cubic meters/second 28 hertz 38
cubic yards 111 hours 52
days 53 imperial gallons 42
degrees API 104 imperial gallons/day 31
degrees Baume—heavy 102 imperial gallons/hour 30
degrees Baume—light 103 imperial gallons/minute 18
degrees Briz 101 inches 47
degrees Celsius 32 inches H2O @ 68 degrees Fahrenheit 1
degrees Fahrenheit 33 inches Hg @ 0 degrees Celsius 2
degrees Rankine 34 Kelvin 35
degrees Twaddell 100 kilograms/cubic meter 92
feet 44 kilograms 61

8-1-39
Table 8.1.10. Alphabetic List of “Units” Field Table 8.1.10. Alphabetic List of “Units” Field
Codes (continued) Codes (continued)
Transmitter Units Code Transmitter Units Code
kilograms/day 76 million gallons/day 23
kilograms/hour 75 million liters/day 25
millivolts 36
kilograms/liter 96
minutes 50
kilograms/minute 74
ohms 37
kilograms/second 73
pascals 11
kilograms/square centimeter 10
percent solids/volume 106
kilopascals 12
percent solids/weight 105
liters 41
pounds 63
liters/minute 17
pounds/cubic foot 94
liters/second 24
pounds/cubic inch 98
long tons (2240 pounds) 65
pounds/day 83
meters 45 pounds/gallon 93
meters/hour 120 pounds/hour 82
meters/second 21 pounds/minute 81
metric tons 62 pounds/second 80
metric tons/day 79 pounds/square inch 6
metric tons/hour 78 seconds 51
metric tons/minute 77 short tons (2000 pounds) 64
short tons (2000 pounds)/cubic yard 99

milliamperes 39
short tons (2000 pounds)/day 86
millibars 8
short tons (2000 pounds)/hour 85
millimeters 49
short tons (2000 pounds)/minute 84
millimeters H2O @ 68 degrees
4
Fahrenheit specific gravity units 90
millimeters Hg @ 0 degrees Celsius 5 torr @ 0 degrees Celsius 13

IO: 8-1-40
How to Set Damping
When there are rapid input variations, you can use transmitter damping
to smooth the transmitter output. However, for more reliability with
redundant configurations, we recommend that you use the SIB filter
time instead of the transmitter damping.
Configuration screen used for setting the transmitter damping. To set
the transmitter damping, the block must be in Manual mode.
- To set the damping:

2. Cursor to the “Damping” field and enter the desired damping time

Mfr ID 38
3051C 16-Jun-89
0. 13.998 in H2O 0.0 Sec
Linear
CONFIG 1
Figure 8.1.22. Transmitter Configuration I/O Screen—Damping Configuration

IO: 8-1-41
How to Assign Output
You may configure the SIB output to be a linear or square root function,
depending on the type of transmitter to which the block is configured.
Configuration screen used for assigning the block output. To assign the
block output, the status of the block must be in Manual mode.
- To assign the block output:

1. Cursor to the “Mode” field and press the [OPERATOR] key or
press [NEXT OPTION] to select Manual mode.
2. Cursor to the “Output” field; press [NEXT OPTION] to select the
desired output type; then press [ENTER].
3. Cursor to the “Command” field; press [NEXT OPTION] to select
“Send Config to Xmtr”; then press [ENTER].

Mfr ID 38
3051C 16-Jun-89
0. 13.998 in H2O 0.0 Sec
Linear

CONFIG 1
Figure 8.1.23. Transmitter Configuration I/O Screen—Output Configuration

IO: 8-1-42
How to View the SIB Limits
You can view the transmitter limits on the Transmitter Configuration

screen. The transmitter high and low limits may not be changed.
Configuration screen used for viewing the high and low transmitter limits
and the type of units corresponding to the limits.

Mfr ID 38
3051C 16-Jun-89
0. 13.998 in H2O 0.0 Sec
Linear

CONFIG 1
Figure 8.1.24. Transmitter Configuration I/O Screen—Block Limit Configuration

IO: 8-1-43
Transmitter Configuration Screen Fields
The Transmitter Configuration screen displays the field transmitter

configuration and the SIB configuration. This screen allows changes to
the transmitter configuration.
- To call up the Transmitter Configuration screen:
D From an SIB Configuration screen, press [EXCH] and then
[PAGE AHEAD]
or
D From the Transmitter Status screen, press [PAGE AHEAD]
Figure 8.1.25 shows the Transmitter Configuration screen for a 3051C

Pressure Transmitter. Table 8.1.11 describes the Transmitter
Configuration screen fields.

Mfr ID 38
3051C 16-Jun-89
0. 13.998 in H2O 0.0 Sec
Linear

CONFIG 1
Figure 8.1.25. Transmitter Configuration I/O Screen

IO: 8-1-44
Table 8.1.11. Transmitter Configuration Screen Fields
Access
Level
Block Tag NA SIB identification. Display only
Addr NA Address of SIB. Display only
Mode Supv Current mode of SIB. Display only
Block Out NA Output value of SIB in engineering units. Display only
Shows the identification code for the manufacturer of the

Mfr ID NA transmitter being used. The manufacturer identification Display only
code is entered automatically by the RS3.
Type of transmitter.
NOTE: A list of the codes and the corresponding
transmitters follows. This field might display a code
preceded by a question mark to refer to the transmitter
that is connected to it rather than displaying the name of
the transmitter type.
0 =ASCII
Manufacturer Identification Code 38 (Rosemount)
3051 Pressure Transmitter
3044 Temperature Transmitter
1151S Pressure Transmitter
Xmtr Type Conf 8712 Mag Flow Meter Display only
8712H Mag Flow Meter
2001 Pressure Transmitter
3051C Pressure Transmitter
3001L Pressure Transmitter
3044C Temperature Transmitter
3001C Pressure Transmitter
8800 Vortex Flow Transmitter
1152S Pressure Transmitter
Options ?7, ?8, ?9, ?10 in the Xmtr Type field are
reserved transmitter type code numbers for future use.

IO: 8-1-45
Table 8.1.11. Transmitter Configuration Screen Fields (continued)
Access
Level
Manufacturer Identification Code 46 (Rosemount

Analytical)
1181S pH Transmitter
1181s Conductivity
2054A pH Transmitter (formerly 1054A)
2054A Conductivity (formerly 1054A)
Options ?1, ?2, ?3, ?4, ?5, ?8, ?9 in the Xmtr Type field
are reserved transmitter type code numbers for future use
Manufacturer Identification Code 25 (Kay

Ray/Sensall)
Xmtr Type 4050 Level Transmitter
Conf 3680 Density Transmitter Display only
(Continued)
3280 Steam Quality Transmitter
Options ?1, ?2, ?3, ?4, ?5, ?6, ?7, ?10, ?11, ?12, ?13,
?14 in the Xmtr Type field are reserved transmitter type
code numbers for future use
Manufacturer Identification Code 31 (Micro Motion)

9712 Mass Flow Transmitter
9739 Mass Flow Transmitter
Options ?1, ?2, ?3, ?4, ?5, ?6, ?8, ?9, ?10, ?11, ?12, ?13,
?14, ?15, ?16, ?17, ?18, ?19, ?20 in the Xmtr Type field
are reserved transmitter type code numbers for future
use.

An address of 0 indicates a transmitter with a 4--20 mA
signal. 0 is the default.
Xmtr
Conf An address of 1--15 indicates a transmitter in multidrop 0--15
Address
mode, where the analog input signal is locked at 4 mA.
NOTE: Configuring this field will have no effect because
the RS3 does not support multidrop at this time.
Date Conf Date entered by the user. dd/mm/yy
Up to 16
Tag Conf Transmitter identification tag. alphanumeric
characters
Up to 16
Desc Conf Description of the transmitter. alphanumeric
characters

IO: 8-1-46
Table 8.1.11. Transmitter Configuration Screen Fields (continued)
Access
Level
Up to 32
Mesg Conf Any user message or note. alphanumeric
characters
Range 4 Engineering units value associated with the Max = 999999

Conf
mA 4 mA signal. These units are transmitter dependent. Min = --999999
Range 20 Engineering units value associated with the 20 mA signal. Max = 999999
Conf
mA These units are transmitter dependent. Min = --999999
Engineering units displayed for the transmitter values.

These units are transmitter dependent.
NOTE: This field might display a code to refer to the
transmitter units rather than displaying the actual units.
Table 8.1.10 lists the codes and the corresponding units.
Table 8.1.11 lists the units alphabetically with the
corresponding codes. Each transmitter supports certain For a list of the
unit types. available units, see
Units Conf
Table 8.1.9 or
To change the transmitter units: Table 8.1.10
D Press [NEXT OPTION] to scroll the transmitter
units recognized by the RS3 control system.
or
D Enter the code from Table 8.1.10 or Table 8.1.11
and then press [ENTER].
Decreases the response time of the transmitter to smooth

Damping Conf output when input fluctuates rapidly. Damping entries are 4.0
transmitter dependent.
Limits Low NA Factory--set transmitter low limit. Display only
LimitsHigh NA Factory--set transmitter high limit. Display only
Base units NA Units used by the transmitter. Display only
Relationship between input and 4--20 mA output. The

Output Conf Linear, Sq. root
type of output is transmitter dependent.
Type of command in progress.

Command Oper Must be in Manual mode to perform a transmitter See Table 8.1.8
configuration command.
Stat NA Failed command transmitter response code. Display only
Indicates the current command and its associated

Num NA Display only
response code being sent to the transmitter.

IO: 8-1-47
How to Record and View Transmitter Events
Transmitter event entries are automatically logged to the transmitter file

residing in the Log Files folder. The Log File Directory lists a transmitter
serial number maintenance log and a transmitter address maintenance
log for each transmitter. Figure 8.1.26 shows the Log File Directory
screen.
Generation of Log Entries
Log entries resulting from transmitter operation are generated on the

Transmitter Maint Log screen when any changes are made to the
transmitter configuration, such as recalibrating the transmitter, changing
SIBs, or turning the transmitter on or off.
Recording of Log Entries
Log entries are made in chronological order from top to bottom of the
display. Unless specified otherwise, all event entries for a transmitter
are recorded on both the transmitter address maintenance log and the
transmitter serial number maintenance log.
LOG FILE DIRECTORY 11-Nov-92 16:01:49

Disk Name CCBOOT6 At Node 16 On Drive 1
Free Bytes 2043648
Description Sort Criterion >Filename Sort Order >Ascending
Filename File Type Size #Entry First Entry Time Last Entry
Time
=87EB502 SMART Maint 256 1 04-Nov-88 12:14:45 04-Nov-88
12:14:45
C00001059 SMART Maint 256 1 04-Nov-88 12:14:45 04-Nov-88
12:14:45
*END*
CONFIG 1
Figure 8.1.26. Log Files Directory Screen

IO: 8-1-48
Using the Transmitter Maintenance Log Screen
The Transmitter Maint Log screen provides a log of entries from the
operation of a transmitter. Each transmitter has a transmitter address
maintenance log screen and a transmitter serial number maintenance
log screen. All event entries for a transmitter are recorded on both the
transmitter address maintenance log and the transmitter serial number
maintenance log. You can configure information entered in the “Log
Entry” field to be recorded on the selected log only, or on both the
selected and related logs.
You can call up either the address or serial number Transmitter Maint
Log screen. The specific log called up is called the selected log. The
corresponding log is called the related log. Figure 8.1.27 shows the
Transmitter Maint Log screen for the transmitter with serial number
S004009936; The figure also identifies its related log by the address
=87FA201.
Figure 8.1.27 shows the Transmitter Maint Log screen. Table 8.1.12
describes the Transmitter Maint Log screen fields.
- To call up the Transmitter Maintenance Log screen:
D From the command line, type T L , (address or serial number)
[ENTER]. Move between the selected log and the related log by
cursoring to the “Related Log” field and pressing [SELECT].
or
D From the Log File Directory, cursor to the desired transmitter
address or serial number and press [SELECT]. Move between
the selected log and the related log by cursoring to the “Related
Log” field and pressing [SELECT].
or
D From another node, type T L (volume name, address or serial
number) [ENTER].

IO: 8-1-49
TRANSMITTER MAINT LOG 01-Jun-92 16:01:49

File Name S004009936 Related Log =87FA201 Send to both?Þno Max entries Þ100
Orig Node Þ87 Orig Plant Unit Þ0
Log EntryÞ
Time -----------------------------------------------Top Entry # 1Þ
16:07:36 NEW BLOCK
17:36:47 NEW BLOCK
17:40:32 4mA range changed to -11. from -10.
17:58:57 20mA range changed to 9. from 10.
18:05:15 Xmtr Configuration Changed
18:30:03 Xmtr tag changed from XMTR-4 to XMTR-6
*END*
Figure 8.1.27. Transmitter Maintenance Log Screen

IO: 8-1-50
Table 8.1.12. Transmitter Maintenance Log Screen Fields
Field Description
Displays the serial number of the transmitter for the serial number
File Name maintenance log or the address of the transmitter for the address maintenance
log.
Displays the serial number or address of the transmitter.

Related Log If the address log is selected, its related log is the serial number log. If the
serial number log is selected, its related log is the address log.
Determines whether or not the user entry is to be listed on both the address
and serial number log files.
“No” = The entry configured in the “Log Entry” field is listed only on the log
Send to both?
file of the selected maintenance log. “No” is the default.
“Yes” = The entry configured in the “Log Entry” field is listed on both the log
file of the selected maintenance log and the related log.
Maximum number of entries that can be entered in a log file. If the number of
Max entries entries exceeds the maximum, the oldest entries are deleted from the file.
The default is 1000.
Orig Node Node at which the message was generated.
Orig Plant Unit Plant unit at which the message was generated.
Allows the user to make a manual entry into the transmitter maintenance log.
To add an entry, type a line of text and press the [ENTER] key.
Also allows display of the following information about the entries by cursoring
to the “Log Entry” field (or the command line) and repeatedly pressing [EXCH]:
D Date the entries were generated
Log Entry D Time the entries were generated
D Tag from which the entry was generated
D Address from which the entry was generated
D Serial number from which the entry was generated
D Key number
Displays the first display entry. To display the most current log entry, cursor to
the field and press [ENTER].
Top Entry To display a particular log entry, cursor to the field, type in the number of the
entry, and press [ENTER]. If the line number of the entry is unknown, use the
trackball to scroll down the screen to locate the desired entry.

IO: 8-2-1
Section 2:
HARTä Output Block
This section describes the functions of the HART Output Block (HOB).
The HOB allows users to communicate with SMARTä field actuator
devices such as valve positioners. By allowing communication between
the ControlBlock and a HART field device, the HART Output Block can
determine actual valve position. The HOB also allows the operator to
distinguish between transmitter and valve problems.
In this section, you will find the following information relating to the HOB:
D Relationship of the HOB to Smart field devices

D Calling up the HART Output Block screen and related screens
D Configuring HOB inputs and outputs
For information about new Multipoint I/O hardware used with the HOB,
see SV:6.
RS3: Configuring Smart Blocks HARTä Output Block

IO: 8-2-2
How is the HART Output Block Related to a Smart Field

Device?
The HART Output Block receives data from the ControlBlock and
transmits that data to a field device either through a Digital/Analog
converter, or as a digital HART--protocol message.
HART Output Block (HOB)
The HART Output Block connects ControlBlock signals to field devices,

as shown in Figure 8.2.1.
Essentially, the HOB shares attributes of both an Analog Output Block

(AOB) and a Smart Input Block (SIB), as shown in Figure 8.2.1.
ControlBlock HART Output HART field

Block (HOB) device
Figure 8.2.1. HOB Function
It may be used in conjunction with Value Input Blocks (VIBs) to allow

tracking of process variables on console displays. See 8-2-29 for more
information on linking VIB with an HOB.

IO: 8-2-3
Figure 8.2.2 shows how an HOB would be used in a 4--20 mA control

loop.
MPCII
SIB XMTR PROCESS
Smart
Input SMART
Control Block Field Interface
Block Card (FIC)
PV A
PID Q HOB
SP B
MTCC Digital
Console VIB Valve
Graphics Controller
Value Input
Blocks
VIB
MAI
MPCII FIM
SIB XMTR PROCESS
Smart
Input
Control Block
Block
PV A
PID Q HOB
SP B MAO
FIM
MTCC Digital
Console VIB Valve
Graphics Controller
Value Input
VIB Blocks
Figure 8.2.2. How an HOB Functions with a Smart FIC or Multipoint Hardware in a Control Loop

IO: 8-2-4
How to Call Up HOB Screens
Each HOB will have three associated screens.Figure 8.2.3 shows how
to access each screen:
D I/O Block Configuration Screen Defines the I/O block as a

HART Output block
D HART Output Device Status Displays status of the HART

Screen field device
D HART Output Device Displays and allows

Configuration Screen changes to configuration of
HART field device

Screen
Configured as HOB
[EXCHANGE] [EXCHANGE]
HART Output Device

HART Output Device [PAGE BACK] Configuration Screen
Status Screen
[PAGE AHEAD]
Figure 8.2.3. Accessing HOB Screens

IO: 8-2-5
How to Configure HOBs
Use the I/O Block Configuration screen to configure an HOB.

Figure 8.2.4 shows the HOB configuration screen. Table 8.2.1 provides
a description of the fields in an HOB configuration.
I/O BLOCK CONFIGURATION 12-Nov-93 09:18:08

Address =47AA103 Device Type AIB, AOB, SIB, or HOB
Block Tag Þ Block Type ÞHOB Mode ® MANUAL
Auto Lock Þno
Source Þ=47A-01
Addr =47A-01 Output Option >Analog
Actual Value 50.09
Reverse Acting ®no
Value 50.00
Output Value >50.00
Eng Units 50.00 %
Dig PV Read 8.59
Field Device: DFI Tran
Calibrate ®None
FIC/Device Comm ERR 10010001 0% Value 4. ma
Output Device Status 00000000 100% Value 20. ma

Hardware Alarm Code 8 Fail Safe Jumper Zero Output Card Rev 2.1
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ALARM LINE~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~CONFIG 1
Figure 8.2.4. HART Output Block Configuration Screen
Determining the Block Mode to Use
Like most other I/O blocks, The HART Output Block can be in either
Manual or Auto mode.
D If the block is in “Auto” mode, the block function drives the block
output.
D If the block is in “Manual” mode, the operator can directly
manipulate the block output from the console.
NOTE: Some fields in the HOB appear only in Manual mode.

IO: 8-2-6
Configuring Output Option
The “Output Option” field allows you to configure analog or digital

conversion of the HART block output. Analog is the default value.
The Digital option will set the valve’s position with a HART command,
rather than by analog current. This is not recommended for closed--loop
control operations. Figure 8.2.5 shows the Output Option Field.
- To set the Output Option field:
1. Cursor to the “Output Option” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to
select Analog or Digital, then press [ENTER].

Auto Lock Þno
Source Þ=47A-01
Actual Value 50.09
Reverse Acting ®no
Value 50.00
Output Value >50.00
Eng Units 50.00 %
Dig PV Read 8.59
Calibrate ®None
0% Value 4. ma

Figure 8.2.5. Output Option Field

IO: 8-2-7
Configuring Output Action
The “Reverse Acting” field allows you to configure normal or reverse

output action. A “yes” indicates that reverse output action is selected;
“no” indicates that normal output action is selected. The default is “no”.
To configure reverse output action, the block must be in Manual mode.
The shaded area of Figure 8.2.6 shows the section of the HOB Block
Configuration screen used for configuring the reverse output action of a
block.
Normal Output Action
With normal output action configured, the Controller Processor instructs

the FIC to output 0% as 4 mA and 100% as 20 mA. The zero failure
option (and power supply failures) result in 0 mA output. Normal output
results in a valve that opens as the current increases.

IO: 8-2-8
Reverse Output Action
With reverse output action configured, the Controller Processor instructs

the FIC to output 0% as 20 mA and 100% as 4 mA. This action allows
all displays to show an output of 0% for all closed valves, even those
that do not fully close. The zero failure option (and power supply
failures) result in 0 mA output. Reverse output results in a valve that
closes as the current increases.

Auto Lock Þno
Source Þ=47A-01
Actual Value 50.09
Reverse Acting ®no
Value 50.00
Output Value >50.00
Eng Units 50.00 %
Dig PV Read 8.59
Calibrate ®None
0% Value 4. ma

Figure 8.2.6. Reverse Output Action Field

IO: 8-2-9
Configuring HOB Alarm Priority
The shaded area of Figure 8.2.7 shows the section of the HOB
Configuration screen used for configuring HOB alarm priority.
You can configure the priority of an HOB instrument alarm in the “Alarm
Priority” field on the HOB Configuration screen using a numeral from 0
to 3. An entry of 0 indicates the highest alarm priority. An entry of 3
indicates the lowest priority. The default value is 0.
If the RS3 generates more than one unacknowledged instrument alarm

at one time, the corresponding alarm banner for each alarm appears at
the bottom of the console screen in the order of priority.
You can configure the default value for the “Alarm Priority” field on the
Alarm Configuration screen.

Auto Lock Þno
Source Þ=47A-01
Actual Value 50.09
Reverse Acting ®no
Value 50.00
Output Value >50.00
Eng Units 50.00 %
Dig PV Read 8.59
Calibrate ®None
0% Value 4. ma

Figure 8.2.7. Alarm Priority Field

IO: 8-2-10
Table 8.2.1. HART Output Block (HOB) Configuration Screen Fields
Access
Field Description Allowable entries
Level
Address NA Address of the block Display only
Device Type NA FIM Device type Display only
Block Tag Conf User defined block tag
characters

Block Type Conf Type of input/output block
TIB, DIB, DOB, HOB
Current block mode. See “Determining

the Block Mode to Use” on
Mode Supr Auto,Manual
page 8-2-5 for information about
block modes
Indicates whether or not the block is

locked in Auto mode.
If “yes”, the block is locked in Auto
Auto Lock Conf mode. It cannot be switched to Manual no, yes
mode.
If “no”, the block may be toggled
between Auto and Manual modes.
Indicates the tag of the block from

which the input originated. You may Up to 16 alphanumeric
enter a block address, a block link characters; at least one
Source Conf
(tag/x), or a block tag in this field. The must be an alphabetical
block address appears below either character
input.
Allows either analog or digital

Output Option* Oper Analog, Digital
conversion of HOB output.
The output feedback value.

Actual Value NA NOTE: This field appears only when Display only
Field Interface Cards (FICs) are part of
the configuration.
Value NA The output value of the source tag. Display only
If “yes”, then valve closes as current

approaches 20mA.
Reverse Acting* Supr no, yes
If “no”, then valve opens as current
approaches 20mA
* This field is only operable when the Mode is in manual.


IO: 8-2-11
Table 8.2.1. HART Output Block (HOB) Configuration Screen Fields (continued)
Access
Level
The output value of the block. Max= 112.5 % of

Must be in Manual mode to configure engineering scale
Output Value* Oper the output value in engineering units. Min= --12.5% of
Displays the percent value below the engineering scale
enterable field Default = 0.0
Eng Units NA Engineering units of the source block Display only
Appears only if a deviation alarm is

Deviation Alarm NA Display only
detected by the field device.
Displays the primary variable as read

Dig PV Read NA Display only
from the field device.
Field Device NA Displays the name of the field device. Display only
Appears only if there is a

communication error between the
Cont Comm ERR NA controller and the Field Interface Card Display only
(FIC) or MAIO Field Interface Module
(FIM).

For more information about calibrating None, Cal low, Cal high,
Calibrate* Supr
an HOB see the Service Manual, vol.2, Calibrate.
chapter 8.
Appears only if there is a

communication error between the Field
FIC/Device Comm ERR NA Interface Card or MAIO FIM and the Display only
field device. See Table 8.2.4 for a list
of error codes.
Low calibration correction value

0% Value* Supr Appears only in Manual mode, and Any
when Calibrate field is set to Cal Low.
High calibration correction value

100% Value* Supr Appears only in Manual mode, and Any
when Calibrate field is set to Cal High.
Displays status of field device. See

Output Device Status NA Table 8.2.3 for explanation of Display only
bitmapped representation code.
Allows configuration of alarms

Alarm Priority Conf 0,1,2,3
generated by the HOB.


IO: 8-2-12
Table 8.2.1. HART Output Block (HOB) Configuration Screen Fields (continued)
Access
Level
Indicates a user defined group to which

the block is assigned. Access to I/O
blocks from a console may be
Plant Unit Conf restricted if the console has not been 0--255
assigned to the I/O block plant unit.
For more information about plant units,
see CC:1.
DIsplays an FIC hardware fault. For a

Hardware Alarm Code NA list of the alarm codes, see the Alarm Display only
Messages manual.
Displays the fail safe jumper position

on the Field Interface Card. Configurable with Field
Fail Safe Jumper NA Displays either “Hold” or “Zero”. Interface Module (FIM)
NOTE: Field only appears with a FIC installed.
installed.
Displays the revision number of the

Output Card Revision NA Field Interface Card or MAIO FIM Display only
Firmware.


IO: 8-2-13
Using the HART Output Device Status Screen
The HART Output Device Status Screen displays the status of the
HART field device. Figure 8.2.8 displays the screen.
I/O Block
Configuration
Screen
HART Output HART Output

Device [PAGE Device
Status BACK] Configuration
Screen [PAGE Screen
AHEAD]
HART OUTPUT DEVICE STATUS 12-Nov-93 09:21:21

Addr =47AA103
Block Tag =47AA103 Mode ® MANUAL Block Out 50.00
Mfr ID Fisher Controls Serial # 01193046 Rev 5.1.16, 2.0

Field Device Type DFI Tran
Tag NEWTAG Desc NEWDESCRIPTOR Mesg NEWMESSAGE
Date 29-Nov-00 Dead Time 0. Sec Dev. Alarm Val. 0.%

Inst. Mode Norm Output Device Status 00000000 Diagnostic Status 00000000000000
Returned Digital PV 8.59 Units % Servo Action Direct
Control Mode Manual
Command ®Done Stat 44.0 064 cmd not implemented Num 38.0 000
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ALARM LINE~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ CONFIG 1
Figure 8.2.8. HART Output Device Status Screen
Only the Mode and Command fields can be changed on the HART
Output Device Status Screen; the rest are for display only.

IO: 8-2-14
Entering Data on the HART Output Device Status Screen
Only two fields are enterable on the HART Output Device Status
Screen: the Mode field and the Command field, which are listed below.
Table 8.2.2 lists all the fields and their descriptions.
D The “Mode” field can be toggled In AUTO mode, the controller

between AUTO and MANUAL processor reads the output
using [OPTION]. It is enterable at value from a source link and
the supervisor level. sends the value to the
analog Field Interface Card.
In MANUAL, the output is
controlled by an operator.
D The “Command” field can be Options include Upload Xmtr

changed only when the mode is Config, Send Config To Xmtr,
MANUAL. It is enterable at the Save Xmtr Config, and
supervisor level. Update Xmtr Variables. For
more information on
Command Options, see
“Using the HART Output
Device Configuration” later in
this section.

IO: 8-2-15
Table 8.2.2. HART Output Device Status Screen
Field Description
Addr Address of the HOB
Block Tag Tag of the HOB
Mode The current operating mode of the HOB. Supervisor--level access only.
Block Out Current output value of the HOB
Mfr ID Manufacturer I.D. of the HART field device
Serial # Serial number of the HART field device
Rev Revision number of the HART field device
Field Device Type Name of the field device type (e.g. valve positioner)
Tag The 8--character tag of the HART field device
Desc The 16--character description of the HART field device
Mesg The 32--character message of the HART field device
Date Date of the HART field device
Dead Time Deviation alarm deadtime of the HART field device
Dev Alarm Val Deviation alarm trip value of the HART field device
Inst. Mode Instrument mode of the HART field device
Output Device Status Status of the HART field device. See Table 8.2.3 for list of field values
Diagnostic status of the HART field device, in hexadecimal notation. See field
Diagnostic Status
device documentation for device--specific codes.
Returned Digital PV Primary variable value.
Units Units of the HART device’s primary variable
Servo Action Action of the field device----either reverse or direct acting
Communication status between the controller and the Field Interface Card.
Cont Comm Err
If 0, nothing displayed.
Control Mode Control mode of the field device: Manual, automatic, or remote
Communication status between the Field Interface Card and the HART field
FIC/Device Comm Err device.
If 0, nothing displayed.
Command Displays the command in progress.
Stat Status of the current command.
Num HART command number being sent to the field device.

IO: 8-2-16
Output Device Status Field
The Output Device Status field returns binary information to the HOB on
both the I/O Block Configuration screen and the HART Output Device
Status screen. Table 8.2.3 provides a description of the possible field
displays. Table 8.2.4 provides a list of the FIC communication error
messages from the FIC/Device Comm Err field.
Table 8.2.3. Output Device Status Message Descriptions
Code Description
Field device malfunction; Cleared

Output Device Status 1000 0000
by field device self--test.
Configuration has been changed

Output Device Status 0100 0000 by the user. Cleared by user
command and RESET.
Reset sequence executed; on

power--up
Output Device Status 0001 0000 More status available
Analog input saturated. Indicates

the 4--20mA variable exceeds the
user--configured lower or upper
limit or cutoff values. This error
clears automatically when variable
is within operating limits.
A field device internal sensor

exceeded its operating limits. This
Output Device Status 0000 0010 error is cleared automatically
when all sensors are within
operating limits.
An active measured variable

Output Device Status 0000 0001 exceeded its user--configured
range.

IO: 8-2-17
Table 8.2.4. FIC Communication Error Messages Generated by the FIC
Code Description
FIC/Device Comm Err 1000 0001 A retry was done.
FIC/Device Comm Err 1000 0010 Buffer overrun error. Too many characters were received.
Smart transmitter parity byte error. The calculated checksum did not
FIC/Device Comm Err 1000 0100
match the checksum at the end of the message.
Character/message timeout error. The message was not received

within the required time.
Framing error. The Stop Bit of one or more bytes received was not
detected.
Overrun error. At least one byte of data in the receive buffer was
overwritten before it was read.
Character parity error. The parity of one or more of the bytes received
was incorrect.

IO: 8-2-18
HART Output Device Configuration Screen
I/O Block
Configuration
Screen
HART Output HART Output

Device [PAGE Device
Status BACK] Configuration
Screen [PAGE Screen
AHEAD]
The HART Output Device Configuration Screen allows initial

configuration of the HART field device. Because each HART field device
has its own internal configuration which cannot be directly edited at the
console, the HART Output Device Configuration Screen displays two
fields for each user--configurable field.
The top number is the HOB device configuration value, which can be
edited at the console. This information resides in the HOB. The bottom
number is the field device configuration, which is located in the specific
device. It cannot be directly edited at the console, but can be changed
by performing a “Send Config to Xmtr” command in the Command field.
Figure 8.2.9 shows the screen.
HART OUTPUT DEVICE CONFIG 12-Nov-93 09:24:28

Addr =47AA103
Mfr ID Unknown Field Device Type Unknown DateÞ 29-Nov-93

Fisher Controls DFI Tran 29-Nov-93
Tag Þ NEWTAG DescÞ NEWDESCRIPTOR Mesg Þ NEWMESSAGE

NEWTAG NEWDESCRIPTOR NEWMESSAGE
Dead TimeÞ0. Sec Dev. Alarm Val. Þ0.% Inst. Mode ÞNorm
0. Sec 0.% Norm
# of Variables Þ4
4
Slot 0 Var ID Code Prim. Analog In Slot 1 Var ID Code Pressure
(HOB Input 1) Prim. Analog In (HOB Input 2) Pressure
Slot 2 Var ID Code Þ1 Slot 3 Var ID Code Þ211
(HOB Input 3) Aux Analog In(1) (HOB Input 4) Temperature(211)
Command >Done Stat 44.0 064 cmd not implemented Num 38.0 000
FULL CONFIG 1
Figure 8.2.9. HART Output Device Configuration Screen

IO: 8-2-19
Changing HART Field Device Configuration
Each configurable entry has two values, as shown in Table 8.2.5 The
top number is the device configuration value and can be changed by the
configuror. The bottom number is the field device configuration value
and cannot be edited at the console.
Upon initial configuration of the HART Output Device Configuration

screen, the two configuration fields may not be present. To display both
fields, perform a “Save Xmtr Config” function. The “Save Xmtr Config”
function, as well as the other transmitter functions, are described in
more detail in “Performing Transmitter Configuration Commands” later
in this section.
Uploading and Downloading HART Field Device Configurations
The configuror can use the HOB commands described later in this
section to upload the field device configuration to the HOB and to
download the HOB field device configuration.

IO: 8-2-20
Table 8.2.5. HART Output Device Configuration Screen Fields
Access
Level
Address NA Address of the block Display only
Current block mode. See “Determining
Mode Supr the Block Mode to Use” onpage 8-2-5 Auto, Manual
for more information.
Block Out NA Displays the Output value from the HOB. Display only
Block Tag NA User defined block tag.
characters
There are two displays on the screen:
D The top indicates the
manufacturer I.D., which is
Mfr ID NA Display only
located in the HOB static data
D The bottom indicates the actual
I.D. of the field device
D The top indicates the device type
located in the HOB static data.
Field Device Type Conf Display only
device type of the connected field
device
D The top indicates the date of the
Conf field device stored in the HOB
Date dd/mm/yy
static data
date of the field device
D Enter the tag of the field device in
Conf the top field. Up to 8 alphanumeric
Tag
characters
D The bottom field indicates the
actual tag of the field device.
D Enter the descriptor of the field
Conf device in the top field. Up to 16 alphanumeric
Desc
D The bottom field indicates the characters
actual descriptor of the field
device.

IO: 8-2-21
Table 8.2.5. HART Output Device Configuration Screen Fields (continued)
Access
Field Level Description Allowable entries

D Enter the message of the field
Conf device in the top field. Up to 32 alphanumeric
Mesg
D The bottom field indicates the characters
actual message of the field
device.
User--configurable delay period. The

Conf deviation must exceed the deviation Max= 60 sec.
Dead Time
alarm value for longer than the Dead Min= 0.015 sec.
Time before an alarm is generated.
The percentage deviation from the

setpoint at which an alarm is enabled.
Max=100
Dev Alarm Val Oper D Enter the value in the top field.
Min=0.1
value stored in the field device.
Status of field device.

D [NEXT OPTION] toggles between
In Service and Out of Service.
NOTE: After a field device is Out of
Conf Service, performing a download with the
Inst. Mode I.S., O.S.
Inst. mode at I.S. returns it to regular
operation.
actual condition of the field
device.
The number of slot variables the

controller is requesting from the field
device. The controller always asks for at
least two: slot 0, which is the primary
Conf variable, and slot 1, which is either
# of Variables valve position or pressure, depending 2--4
on the field device.
number of variables returned by
the field device.
This field displays the primary variable.

Slot 0 Var ID Code NA Display only
It is not enterable.
This field displays ’position’ when the

field device is a positioner, and
Slot 1 Var ID Code NA Display only
’pressure’ when the field device is a
transducer.

IO: 8-2-22
Access
Will depend on the type of

Conf The device code that is requested from field device.
Slot 2 Var ID Code
slot 2. [NEXT OPTION] pages
through choices.
Will depend on the type of
Conf The device code that is requested from field device
Slot 3 Var ID Code
slot 3. [NEXT OPTION] pages
through choices.
The [OPTION] key allows paging
between the following commands:
DONE— Indicates that there is no

active command. This is not a user
option, but is displayed to indicate that a
command has been completed.
UPLOAD— Copies the transmitter
configuration from the transmitter in the
field to the dynamic portion of the HOB.
This happens automatically when a new Done,
device is configured or when any device Upload Xmtr Config,
Supr Send Config to Xmtr,
Command* configuration is changed.
Save Xmtr Config,
SEND— Sends the transmitter
Update Xmtr Variables.
configuration from the static portion of
the HOB to the device in the field. Also
causes an automatic upload of the
device configuration.
SAVE— Copies the field device
configuration (HOB dynamic portion) to
the HOB (static) configuration.
UPDATE— Tells the controller to obtain
all configured slot variables from the
device.

IO: 8-2-23
Access
Displays the status of the current

command.
Failed command and transmitter
response code status. in the form xx.yy,
where xx is the HART command
number, and yy is the HART status for
the given command. Only the first
failure or response code in a group of
commands is retained.
There are two types of definitions for
command--specific response
codes:those with the word warning in
them and those without.
D The error definitions with
WARNING indicate that the
Stat NA command was accepted and Display Only
successfully executed, but some
condition existed within the
device that affected the result.
The response data bytes are
returned with the data as
modified by the device.
D Error definitions that do not
begin with WARNING indicate
that an error was found while
attempting to execute the
command and the execution of
the command could not be
completed. The response data
bytes are not returned when
errors are being reported.
Displays the HART Command number.
NOTE: For more information on HART
codes and status information, see the
HART--Smart Communications
Num NA Protocol, Universal Command Display Only
Specification (HCF_Spec--127), and
Common Practice Command
Specification (HCF_Spec--151)
manuals, or your specific device’s
specification manual.

IO: 8-2-24
How to Assign a Tag, Descriptor, Message, or Date
The HART Output Device Configuration screen may be used to assign a

tag, descriptor, message, or date to a transmitter. Although this
descriptor is for the transmitter, you can also use it as an HOB
descriptor. If the HOB information is being trended, this descriptor
appears on the trend display. The tag is only the transmitter tag. It is
not the HOB tag.
The shaded area of Figure 8.2.10 shows the section of the HART
Output Device Configuration screen used for assigning a tag,
descriptor, message, or date to a SMART field device. To assign any of
these, the block must be in Manual mode.
- To assign a tag, descriptor, message, or date:
1. Be sure that the HOB is in Manual mode.
2. Cursor to the “Tag”, “Desc”, “Mesg”, or “Date” field and enter the
desired tag, descriptor, message, or date. Press [ENTER].
select “Save Xmtr Config”; then press [ENTER].

Addr =47AA103
Mfr ID ÞUnknown Field Device Type Unknown DateÞ29-Nov-00
Tag Þ NEWTAG DescÞ NEWDESCRIPTOR Mesg Þ NEWMESSAGE
Dead TimeÞ 0. Sec Dev. Alarm Val.Þ0.% Inst. ModeÞ Norm

0. Sec 0.% Norm
# of VariablesÞ 4
4
Command >Done Stat 44.0 064 cmd not implemented Num 38.0 000
FULL CONFIG 1
Figure 8.2.10. HART Output Device Configuration Screen

IO: 8-2-25
Configuring Dead Time
This field displays the time, in seconds, that a deviation alarm will be
allowed to persist before being reported by the field device. Use this
field to prevent consistent alarm conditions from variables that fluctuate
around the setpoint. The upper field is enterable; the lower field returns
the currently stored value. The allowed range is 0.015 to 60 seconds.
Figure 8.2.11 highlights the Dead Time field.

Addr =47AA103
Mfr ID ÞUnknown Field Device Type Unknown Date Þ29-Nov-00
Tag Þ NEWTAG Desc Þ NEWDESCRIPTOR Mesg Þ NEWMESSAGE
Dead TimeÞ 0. Sec Dev. Alarm Val.Þ0.% Inst. ModeÞ Norm

0. Sec 0.% Norm
# of VariablesÞ 4
4
FULL CONFIG 1
Figure 8.2.11. The Dead Time field

IO: 8-2-26
Deviation Alarm Value
The Deviation Alarm Value field displays the range, in percent, that the
requested setpoint will be allowed to fluctuate around the actual
setpoint. For example, if the Deviation Alarm Value is 10% and the
requested setpoint is 50%, then the actual setpoint must be between
40% and 60%, or a deviation alarm will be generated.
Configure this field in coordination with the Dead Time field to allow for
greater consistency in reporting alarm conditions. Figure 8.2.12 shows
the Dev. Alarm Val. field. The upper field is enterable; the lower field
represents the currently stored value.

Addr =47AA103
Mfr ID Þ Unknown Field Device Type Unknown Date Þ 29-Nov-00
Tag Þ NEWTAG Desc Þ NEWDESCRIPTOR Mesg Þ NEWMESSAGE
Dead TimeÞ 0. Sec Dev. Alarm Val. Þ 0.% Inst. ModeÞ Norm
0. Sec 0.% Norm
# of Variables Þ 4
4
FULL CONFIG 1
Figure 8.2.12. The Deviation Alarm Value field

IO: 8-2-27
Configuring Slots in the HOB
The HOB is similar to an SIB because it can receive inputs from SMART
field devices. The Slot fields on the HART Output Device Configuration
Screen provide this functionality. The four slots are labeled 0 through 3,
and allow the following inputs from the field:
D Slot 0 Var ID Code always displays the primary variable, and is

not configurable.
D Slot 1 Var ID Code always displays “pressure” if the SMART field
device is a transducer, and “position” if it is a valve positioner. It is
not configurable.
D Slot 2 Var ID Code and Slot 3 Var ID Code can each be
configured to display a number from 1--255 that represents a
signal from the SMART device. Table 8.2.6., Table 8.2.7,and
Table 8.2.8 list variables and their corresponding numbers for
specific SMART devices.
NOTE: If the device is recognized by the HOB, [NEXT OPTION] pages

through the list of valid variables.
Figure 8.2.13 shows the Slots in one possible configuration.

Addr =47AA103
Mfr ID Þ Unknown Field Device Type Unknown Date Þ 3-Jan-93
Fisher Controls DFI Tran 3-Jan-93
Tag ÞNEWTAG Desc Þ NEWDESCRIPTOR Mesg Þ NEWMESSAGE
Dead TimeÞ 0. Sec Dev. Alarm Val. Þ 0.% Inst. Mode Þ Norm
0. Sec 0.% Norm
# of VariablesÞ 4
4
FULL CONFIG 1
Figure 8.2.13. The Slot Fields on the HART Output Device Configuration Screen

IO: 8-2-28
HOB Slot Variable Tables for SMART Field Devices
Table 8.2.6. Slot Variables for Fisher Transducer Output Device
Variable No. Function
0 Primary Analog In
1 Aux Analog In
2 Pressure
3 Position
4 Servo Drive
211 Temperature
Table 8.2.7. Slot Variables for Fisher valve, no pressure sensor
0 Primary Analog In
1 Aux Analog In
2 Position (implied position)
3 Servo Drive
4 Valve Position (actual position)
211 Temperature
Table 8.2.8. Slot Variables for Fisher valve with pressure sensor
0 Primary Analog In
1 Aux Analog In
2 Pressure
3 Position (implied position)
4 Servo Drive
10 Valve Position (actual position)
211 Temperature

IO: 8-2-29
Linking a VIB Block to an HOB
When configuring a VIB block, the block must be linked to an HOB

residing on the same FIC or FIM. An FIC card may have only one HOB
configured; a FIM may have up to 16. FIC block address 1 is reserved
for HOBs. FIC block addresses 4 through 16 are reserved for VIB
blocks. FIM block addresses 1 through 16 are reserved for HOBs,
whereas block addresses 17 through 32 are reserved for VIB blocks.
Up to four VIB blocks can serve as inputs from an HOB. The HOB input
number identifies which HOB input is being linked to a particular VIB
block. For more information on configuring a VIB block, see page
8-1-17.
The shaded area of Figure 8.2.14 shows the section of the VIB Block
Configuration screen that is used for linking a VIB block to an HOB.
The example in Figure 8.2.14 shows the VIB block at =129AB204 is
linked to an HOB at =129AB203.
- To link a VIB block to an HOB:
1. Cursor to the “SIB/HOB Tag” field and enter the tag or address of
the HOB to which the VIB block is to be linked.
2. Cursor to the “SIB/HOB Input” field and enter the number of the
HOB input to which the VIB block is to be linked, then press
[ENTER].

Address =129AB204 Device Type NO DEVICE
Block Tag > Block Type >VIB Mode > AUTO
Auto Lock >no
.00 % .00 %
SIB/HOB Tag >=129AB203 Eng Units >
Addr =129AB203 Sim Tag >
Addr Zero >.00
SIB/HOB Input >4
Max >100.00
Xmtr Units ???
Plant Unit >0
Alarm Priority >0
HW Alarm Code 9
Figure 8.2.14. VIB Block Configuration Screen—Linking a VIB Block to an HOB

IO: 8-2-30
Hints for Configuring HART Output Blocks
This section contains information about problems you could encounter

when configuring HOBs.
Listed below are typical problems that occur when configuring HART
Output Blocks and possible ways to handle them.
- When I plug in a redundant FIM, I lose all HART communication.
You should configure an RIOB before plugging in a redundant FIM.
Similarly, when removing redundancy, you should pull the FIM first,
then deconfigure the RIOB.
- When I execute a ‘Kill Controller’ command, with a redundant
FIM configuration, HART communication locks up.
If you have redundant controllers, you must switch to the backup
controller to maintain HART communication.
Without redundant controllers, you must disable and re--enable the
controller to re--establish HART communication.

IO: 8-3-1
Section 3:
Hints for Configuring SIBs and VIBs
when configuring smart transmitter input blocks and some possible
ways to deal with them. This section also provides tips that are helpful
when configuring SIBs and VIBs.
RS3: Configuring Smart Blocks Hints for Configuring SIBs and VIBs
IO: 8-3-2
Listed below are typical problems that occur when configuring smart
transmitter input blocks and possible ways to handle them.
- I cannot access some of the SIB and VIB Block Configuration
screen fields.
In order to configure many screen fields, the block must be in
- The Transmitter Status screen shows FIC Comm Error 10001000
and Controller Comm Error 132.
The transmitter is probably not communicating with the FIC. Check
the following conditions:
D The Analog FIC PWR jumpers are correctly set.
D The redundant Analog FIC PWR jumpers are correctly set.
D The polarity of the transmitter wiring to the marshalling panel is
correct.
D The address of the transmitter is set to zero.
D The transmitter type is supported by the RS3.
IO: 8-3-3
Configuration Tips
Listed below are hints to help you when configuring SIBs and VIBs.
- Assigning a descriptor
Remember that when assigning a descriptor to a transmitter on the
SIB Block Configuration screen, you must enter the descriptor in the
“Desc” field, even if the exact descriptor already appears.
- Using both the analog and digital PV values
If you would like to use both analog and digital PV values, configure
an SIB for the analog value and a VIB for the digital value.
- Configuring SIB alarms
D Remember that you will probably want to configure instrument
alarms and the alarm priority for each SIB.
D Remember that if you configure an SIB alarm, you should also
- Configuring a VIB
When configuring a VIB, be sure to link the VIB to an SIB residing on
the same FIC. The VIB must have a block address in the range of
4--16. (Addresses 1--3 are reserved for SIBs.)
- Difference between the field transmitter configuration and the
SIB transmitter configuration
The field transmitter configuration is the configuration that exists in
the transmitter. It appears as the bottom line of text on the
Transmitter Status screen and Configuration screens. It cannot be
edited from the console.
The SIB transmitter configuration is the configuration that is saved to
the SIB and can be changed by the configuror. The SIB
configuration can then be loaded into the transmitter in order to
change the field transmitter configuration.
- Trending the SIB information
When trending SIB information, it is helpful to have a descriptor to
label the data on the trend display.
To have a descriptor appear on a trend display for an SIB, assign a
descriptor on the Transmitter Configuration screen. The descriptor
is actually assigned to the transmitter, but can be used for an SIB as
well.
IO: 8-3-4
- Using the procedures and commands for the RS3

The procedures and commands that are used to configure a smart
transmitter with the RS3 control system are different than the
procedures and commands used with the Rosemount Model 268
SMART FAMILY interface.
- Using the Set Output Current command
If:
D while using the digital PV input value in an SIB,
D you used the Set Output Current command to set the transmitter
output analog PV to a particular value, and
D a redundant FIC switchover occurred, and
D the FICs switch back,
then:
D the output analog PV will continually change with the transmitter
current and will not be set at the value from the Set Output
Current command.
RS3t
Chapter 9:
Configuring PLC Blocks
Section 1: What is a PLC Interface? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1-1

PLC Interface Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1-2
PLC Interface Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1-4
Protocols Supported by a PLC Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1-6
Network Configurations Supported by a PLC Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1-7
Sample Configuration with One I/O Card and One Data Highway . . . . . . . . . 9-1-8
Sample Configuration with Two I/O Cards and One Data Highway . . . . . . . . 9-1-9
Sample Configuration with Two I/O Cards and Two Data Highways . . . . . . . 9-1-10
Sample Configuration with Modbus PLC and Data Highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1-11
Sample Configuration with Mitsubishi PLC RS422 Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1-12
Sample Configuration with Mitsubishi PLC Melsec Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1-14
Section 2: Communicating with the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2-1

Modbus Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2-1
Using Consecutive Addresses for PLC Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2-3
PLC Block Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2-4
Mitsubishi Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2-5
Checking Logic Steps with a Simulated PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2-7
Switch Position Requirements for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley PLC . . 9-2-8
Module Switch Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2-8
PLC Communication Module Switch Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2-9
Defining Port-PLC Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2-10
Factors Affecting PLC Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2-15
Section 3: Configuring a PLCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-1

PLC Block Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-1
Preparing to Read and Write to a PLC Register or Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-2
Mapping Between the RS3 and PLC Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-3
Mapping Between the RS3 and PLC Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-8
Reading the Contents of a PLC Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-10
Configuring an I/O Block to Read a PLC Register Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-11
Linking I/O Block Bit Data to a ControlBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-15
Linking Input Directly to a Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-16
I/O Block Bit Descriptor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-17
RS3: Configuring PLC Blocks Contents

IO: ii
I/O Block Bit Alarm Descriptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-18

Writing to a PLC Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-20
Configuring an I/O Block to Write to a PLC Register Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-21
Writing to Selected Bits of a PLC Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-24
Masking Within the PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-24
Masking Within the I/O Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-24
Reading and Writing Through a Single I/O Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-26
Section 4: PLC Interface Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4-1

FIC Redundancy Information for All Supported PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4-2
FIC Redundancy for Allen-Bradley PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4-5
FIC Redundancy for Modicon PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4-6
FIC Redundancy for Mitsubishi PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4-7
Hints for Using the Redundant PLC Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4-8
Section 5: PLC Guidelines and Reference Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-1

PLC Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-1
Reference Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-2
Checking the PLC Interface Hardware (Loopback Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-3
Port I/O Card Functional Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-4
RS422/RS232 Port I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-4
RS422/RS422 Port I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-6
Interfacing to Allen-Bradley PLC-2, PLC-3, and PLC-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-7
Cable Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-7
Notes on Data Highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-8
Jumpers on Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-9
Jumpers on FICs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-9
PLC Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-10
PLC-2 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-12
PLC-2 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-13
PLC--3 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-14
PLC--3 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-15
PLC-5 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-16
PLC--5 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-17
Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-18
General PLC Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-18
PLC Communication Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-19
Mitsubishi Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-20

IO: iii
List of Figures
Figure Page
9.1.1 PLC Interface Hardware Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1-3
9.1.2 PLC Interface Software Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1-5
9.1.3 Sample Configuration—One Port I/O Card and One Data Highway . . 9-1-8
9.1.4 Sample Configuration—Two Port I/O Cards and One Data
Highway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1-9
9.1.5 Sample Configuration—Two Port I/O Cards and Two Data
Highways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1-10
9.1.6 Sample Configuration—Modbus PLC and Data Highway . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1-11
9.1.7 Sample Configuration—Mitsubishi PLC RS422 Network
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1-13
9.1.8 Sample Configuration—Mitsubishi PLC Melsec Network
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1-15
9.2.1 PLC Addressing Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2-4
9.2.2 Sample Simulation Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2-7
9.2.3 PLC Configuration Screen for Modbus-Compatible Devices . . . . . . . . 9-2-11
9.2.4 PLC Configuration Screen for Allen-Bradley-Compatible Devices . . . . 9-2-11
9.2.5 PLC Configuration Screen for Mitsubishi Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2-12
9.3.1 PLCB I/O Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-2
9.3.2 Typical PLC Register Contents and Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-10
9.3.3 PLCB I/O Block Configuration Screen (Read Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-11
9.3.4 Bit Designators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-12
9.3.5 Using PLC Data in a ControlBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-15
9.3.6 Configuration Window Linking PLC Bit Input to a Graphic . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-16
9.3.7 Bit Descriptor Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-17
9.3.8 Alarm Descriptor Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-19
9.3.9 Writing to a PLC Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-20
9.3.10 PLCB I/O Block Configuration Screen (Write Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-22
9.3.11 Designating a Source for the I/O Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-22
9.3.12 PLCB I/O Block Configuration Screen (Data Type Other Than
Flags) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-23
9.3.13 Using the Write Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-25
9.3.14 Reading and Writing Through a Single I/O Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-26
9.4.1 PLC Configuration Screen with Redundancy Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4-3
9.4.2 Typical PLC Interface FIC Redundancy for Allen-Bradley PLCs . . . . . 9-4-5

IO: iv
9.4.3 Typical PLC Interface FIC Redundancy for Modicon PLCs . . . . . . . . . 9-4-6
9.4.4 Typical Configuration for Mitsubishi PLC Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4-7
9.5.1 PLC Configuration Screen with Loopback Test Selected . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-3
9.5.2 RS422/RS232 Port I/O Card Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-5
9.5.3 RS422/RS422 Port I/O Card Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-6
9.5.4 PLC Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-11
9.5.5 Configuring a PLC--2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-12
9.5.6 PLC--2 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-13
9.5.7 PLC--3 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-15
9.5.8 PLC--5 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-17

IO: v
List of Tables
Table Page
9.2.1 Function Codes for Specific Modbus Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2-2
9.2.2 Modbus Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2-2
9.2.3 Mitsubishi PLC Device Ranges and Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2-6
9.2.4 Station Numbers Octal-Decimal Conversion Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2-9
9.2.5 PLC Configuration Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2-13
9.3.1 Discrete Bit Maps for RS3 and Modicon Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-3
9.3.2 Discrete Bit Map for RS3
and Modicon Interface (GE Series 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-4
9.3.3 Discrete Bit Map for RS3 and Allen--Bradley PLC 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-5
9.3.4 Discrete Bit Map for RS3 and Allen--Bradley PLC 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-7
9.3.5 Register Map for RS3 and GE Series 6 PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-8
9.3.6 Register Map for RS3 and Modicon PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-8
9.3.7 Register Map for RS3 and MItsubishi PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-9
9.3.8 16-bit Binary-to-Hexadecimal Conversion Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-12
9.3.9 PLCB I/O Block Configuration Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-13
9.3.10 Bit Descriptor and Alarm Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-18
9.3.11 Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3-23
9.4.1 PLC Configuration Redundancy Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4-3
9.5.1 General PLC Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-18
9.5.2 PLC Communication Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-19
9.5.3 Mitsubishi Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5-20

IO: 9-1-1
Section 1:
What is a PLC Interface?
This section describes the hardware and software used to interface with
programmable logic controllers (PLCs). This section also describes the
protocols and network configurations that this PLC interface supports.
The PLC interface hardware and software permit an RS3 ControlFile to

exchange process data with one or more PLCs and other compatible
devices. The PLC interface software currently supports communication
with devices that use Modbus, Allen-Bradley, and Mitsubishi protocols.
Both the RTU and ASCII formats of the Modbus protocol are supported.
You can attach PLCs to the RS3 PLC interface with either an RS232C
or an RS422 connection. Allen-Bradley Data Highways One, Two, and
Plus are supported.
You can incorporate data that is received from or sent to a PLC into the
RS3 operating displays in the same way as any other process data
stored in a controller. This interface does not, however, allow you to
configure a PLC through an RS3 console.
RS3: Configuring PLC Blocks What is a PLC Interface?

IO: 9-1-2
PLC Interface Hardware
Figure 9.1.1 shows that, like other members of the RS3 controller
family, the PLC interface consists of a Controller Processor card and a
Communication FlexTerm. The Controller Processor can be a PLC
Processor card (1984-1494-000x) or a MultiPurpose Controller card
(1984-2500-000x or 1984-4068-0006). One FlexTerm can be shared by
two Controller Processor cards. Communication between a Controller
Processor card and a FlexTerm is carried by an RS422 cable.
Communication between the PLCs and the FlexTerm is carried by either
an RS232C cable or an RS422 cable.
A FlexTerm has two ports (A and B) for each Controller Processor card.
Each port consists of a Port I/O card. This card provides electrical
isolation of the system and connection of the PLCs to the system. The
attributes of each port, such as the baud rate and the communication
format, are configured separately on a PLC Configuration screen.
There are eight port slots on the FlexTerm, but only four are used by the
PLC software. Slots 1 and 2 in the Flexterm contain ports A and B for
Processor card 1; slots 5 and 6 contain ports A and B for Processor
card 2.
The port I/O card uses an RS422 connection to the Controller

Processor. The kind of PLC connector determines which port I/O card to
use:
D The RS422/RS232C card provides a single RS232C cable
connection to the PLC.
D The RS422/RS422 card provides a single RS422 cable
connection to the PLC.

IO: 9-1-3
PLC Interface Hardware (continued)
Controller Processor
Card
RS422 Port A
CB CB IO IO Field
PLCs or Discrete/
Port B other Analog
CB CB IO IO
Compatible Inputs and
CB CB IO IO Devices Outputs
Port A
Controller Processor Port B

Card
FlexTerm
CB CB IO IO
(Each port
CB CB IO IO consists of
one Port I/O Card)
CB CB IO IO
Figure 9.1.1. PLC Interface Hardware Functional Overview

IO: 9-1-4
PLC Interface Software
The PLC interface software supports configuration and operation of

standard ControlBlocks and PLC I/O Blocks. The same library of
ControlBlock functions that is available on other Controller Processors is
available on the Processor used for the PLC interface. Figure 9.1.2
shows a functional diagram of PLC interface software.
You configure a PLC I/O Block (PLCB) on a PLC I/O Block

Configuration screen. Although PLCBs can be configured in any other
controller type, a PLCB does not function unless the controller contains
the proper program image (PLC or PLC+). The Nonvolatile Memory
card stores the PLC program image and loads it to the Processor upon
power-up.
The maximum number of I/O Blocks available on a single Controller

Processor depends on the number of alarms configured, the length of
the descriptors in the I/O Blocks, the method by which the PLC memory
map is read, and the number of ControlBlocks configured and their
functions.
Each I/O Block is mapped to a PLC register address (word) within a

PLC, which is connected to a port. The PLC register may act on or
receive an input from a field device, depending on the configuration of
the PLC.
The PLC register contains one of the following items (data types):
D Signed integer (S INT)
D 3-bit BCD value (BCD3)
D 16 bits, each representing an individual point (Flags)
D Unsigned integer (U INT)
D 4-bit BCD value (BCD4)
D 32-bit floating point number read only (Float for Daniels Gas
Chromatograph only)

IO: 9-1-5
PLC Interface Software (continued)
A single PLC I/O Block can do the following:

D Read the entire contents of a single PLC register.
D Write the entire contents of a single PLC register (except floating
point values).
D Write portions (bits) of a single PLC register.
D Read some bits of a single PLC register, while writing to other
bits of the same register.
D Label and generate alarms for specific bits that it is reading.
Card Port A
PLC 1 PLC 32
CB CB IO IO Port B
Register 1 Register 1
CB CB IO IO Port A Register 2 Register 2
Register 3 Register 3
CB CB IO IO Port B Register 4 Register 4
etc. etc.
Card FlexTerm M5
CB CB IO IO Motor
Control M6
CB CB IO IO Center
No. 5
CB CB IO IO M7
M8
Figure 9.1.2. PLC Interface Software Functional Diagram

IO: 9-1-6
Protocols Supported by a PLC Interface
The PLC interface supports Modbus, Allen-Bradley, and Mitsubishi

protocols.
Modbus Protocols
D Modbus/RTU A mode of transmission that uses 8-bit
binary format
D Modbus/ASCII A hexadecimal-oriented mode of
transmission that uses 7-bit ASCII
characters
D Square D A variation of Modbus/RTU
D Modbus/5-6 A variation of Modbus/RTU that uses
function codes 5 and 6 only
D Daniels/RTU Gas Chromatograph that communicates via
a specialized Modbus link.
D Daniels/ASCII Gas Chromatograph that communicates via
a specialized Modbus link.
Allen-Bradley Protocol
D Allen-Bradley only
Mitsubishi Protocol
D Mitsubishi/FMT1
Any PLC that is compatible with one of these protocols can

communicate with the PLC interface. The PLC interface supports
Modbus devices that use function codes 1 through 6, 15, and 16. The
remaining function codes and user defined function codes are not
supported. For a complete description of the Modbus protocol, refer to
the Standard Modbus Protocol Specification.
NOTE: Modbus/RTU uses half as many bytes as ASCII Modbus.

Modbus/RTU and Modbus/ASCII can be used on the same Controller
Processor at the same time (for example, Modbus/RTU on port A and
Modbus/ASCII on port B); however, only one mode (RTU or ASCII) can
be used on a given port.

IO: 9-1-7
Network Configurations Supported by a PLC Interface
The PLC interface supports several network configurations, which are

described in more detail on the following pages:
D PLC configuration with one port I/O card and one Allen-Bradley
data highway
D PLC configuration with two port I/O cards and one Allen-Bradley
data highway
D PLC configuration with two port I/O cards and two Allen-Bradley
data highways
D Modbus PLC configuration and Allen-Bradley data highway
D Mitsubishi PLC configuration with connection through the RS422
port on an AJ71C24 computer link module
D Mitsubishi PLC configuration with connection through the
Mitsubishi Melsec network

IO: 9-1-8
Sample Configuration with One I/O Card and One Data Highway
Figure 9.1.3 shows an Allen-Bradley configuration with a single Port I/O

card connected to the data highway.
An Allen-Bradley host computer interface is required for the PLC

interface to communicate with the Allen-Bradley data highway.
For a list of the modules that are used to connect the PLCs and the RS3
control system to the data highways, see the Allen-Bradley
documentation. These modules can be rack- or wall-mounted.
Rack-mounted modules are installed in the PLC. Wall-mounted
modules are installed in the RS3 cabinet.
Communication FlexTerm
Controller
Processor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
KE Module
Allen-Bradley Data Highway
KA Module KA Module
PLC PLC PLC
Figure 9.1.3. Sample Configuration—One Port I/O Card and One Data Highway

IO: 9-1-9
Sample Configuration with Two I/O Cards and One Data

Highway
Figure 9.1.4 shows two Port I/O cards connected to the same data
highway. Using a second KE communication module increases the
throughput.
Controller 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Processor
KE Module KE Module
KA Module KA2 Module KA Module
PLC PLC PLC PLC
Figure 9.1.4. Sample Configuration—Two Port I/O Cards and One Data Highway

IO: 9-1-10
Sample Configuration with Two I/O Cards and Two Data Highways
Figure 9.1.5 shows two Port I/O cards, each connected to a different
data highway.
Controller 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Processor
KE Module KE Module
Allen-Bradley Data Highway Allen-Bradley Data Highway
KA Module KA2 Module KA Module KA2 Module
PLC PLC PLC PLC PLC PLC
Figure 9.1.5. Sample Configuration—Two Port I/O Cards and Two Data Highways

IO: 9-1-11
Sample Configuration with Modbus PLC and Data Highway
Figure 9.1.6 shows two Port I/O cards, one connected to an

Allen-Bradley data highway and the other to a Modbus/RTU PLC. The
two device types in this example, Modbus/RTU and Allen-Bradley, are
linked to the same PLC controller.
Controller
Processor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
KE Module
Modbus/ KA Module KA2 Module

RTU PLC
PLC PLC PLC
Figure 9.1.6. Sample Configuration—Modbus PLC and Data Highway

IO: 9-1-12
Sample Configuration with Mitsubishi PLC RS422 Network
A Mitsubishi PLC base unit consists of a power supply, the CPU unit, I/O
cards, and up to two AJ71C24 computer link modules. An RS3
distributed control system or any other external computer can
communicate with the PLC through the AJ71C24 module, which
handles the communication between the CPU and external computer.
Figure 9.1.7 shows a sample configuration that uses the RS422 port on
the AJ71C24 unit. In this type of configuration, each base unit must
have an AJ71C24 card.
An external computer connected to any AJ71C24 module on the

network can get information from any CPU on that network. In this type
of configuration, however, the PLC number that you specify on the PLC
I/O block screen must always be 255 (FF hex).
The Station number specified on the Configure PLC screen is the

number of the AJ71C24 module on the network but not necessarily the
number of the AJ71C24 module physically connected to the RS3
distributed control system. For example, although the control system is
physically connected to Station #2, it can read and write information to
and from Station #23.
NOTE: One and only one external computer (including an RS3

controller/PLC card) can be connected to an RS422 network of
Mitsubishi PLCs.

IO: 9-1-13
Sample Configuration with Mitsubishi PLC RS422 Network (continued)
Controller 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Processor
NOTE: maximum 32
stations: #0 -- #31
RS232
PLC card: only one

connection to RS422
network allowed.
C C C
P P P
......
U U U
PLC # 255 PLC # 255 PLC # 255

.............
Station # 0 Station # 1 Station # 31
RS422 RS422
AJ71C24
Figure 9.1.7. Sample Configuration—Mitsubishi PLC RS422 Network Configuration

IO: 9-1-14
Sample Configuration with Mitsubishi PLC Melsec Network
Figure 9.1.8 shows a sample configuration using the Mitsubishi Melsec

network. In this configuration, the PLC base units are connected
directly to the CPU module or to a different network module through a
co-axial or a fiber-optic network. An RS3 or any other computer is
connected to the network through an AJ71C24 unit, which is located on
the Master PLC (Mitsubishi PLC #0).
The Station number specified on the Configure PLC screen is the

number of the AJ71C24 module directly connected to the RS3
distributed control system.
NOTE: In this type of configuration, the PLC number that you specify
on the PLCB configuration screen is between 1 and 63; these are the
numbers of the PLC base units on the Melsec network, and they must
be consecutive. To access the Master PLC (see Figure 9.1.8), enter
255 as the PLC number on the PLCB configuration screen.

IO: 9-1-15
Sample Configuration with Mitsubishi PLC Melsec Network (continued)
Master PLC
C
P PLC # 0
Station # 0 Coaxial or Fiber--Optic Cable RS232
U
AJ71C24
C C C
P P P
U U U
......
Local Station Local Station Local Station

PLC # 1 PLC # 2 PLC # 63
NOTE: maximum 64
PLC bases: #0 -- #63
Controller
Processor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure 9.1.8. Sample Configuration—Mitsubishi PLC Melsec Network Configuration

IO: 9-2-1
Section 2:
Communicating with the PLC
This section describes the function codes, addressing, switch position

requirements, and PLC Configuration screen used to define
communications.
Modbus Function Codes
Table 9.2.2 gives the standard Modbus function codes that are
supported by the RS3. These function codes are part of the Modbus
protocol. They set the function to be executed by the
Modbus-compatible PLC. For a complete description of the Modbus
Function Codes, see the Standard Modbus Protocol Specification.
Table 9.2.1 shows the Modbus Function Codes that are required for
communication to be established with specific devices. Square D and
Modbus/5-6 devices use the RTU format of the Modbus protocol.
RS3: Configuring PLC Blocks Communicating with the PLC

IO: 9-2-2
Table 9.2.1. Function Codes for Specific Modbus Devices
Function Code
Device Type
1 2 3 4 5 6 15 16
Modbus/ASCII X X X X X X
Modbus/RTU X X X X X X
Square D X X X X X X
Modbus/5-6 X X X X X X
Daniels RTU X X X X X X
Daniels ASCII X X X X X X
Table 9.2.2. Modbus Function Codes
Code Object Definition
1 Read/Write Coils Read coil status. This code obtains the current status (on/off) of a group
(0xxxx) of logic coils.
2 Input Coils (1xxxx) Read input coil status. This code obtains the current status (on/off) of a
group of discrete inputs.
3 Read/Write Registers Read holding registers. This code obtains the binary value in one or
(4xxxx) more holding registers.
4 Input Registers Read input registers. This code obtains the binary value in one or more
(3xxxx) input registers.
5 Read/Write Coils Force single coil. This code forces a coil to a state of on or off.
(0xxxx)
6 Read/Write Registers Preset single register. This code changes the binary value in a single
(4xxxx) register.
15 Read/Write Coils Force multiple coils. This code changes the status of one or more coils.
(0xxxx)
16 Read/Write Registers Force multiple registers. This code changes the binary value in one or
(4xxxx) more registers.

IO: 9-2-3
Using Consecutive Addresses for PLC Optimization
To use the PLC interface most efficiently, the PLC reads and writes
should be done from consecutive PLC addresses as often as possible.
For example, if the confirmation signals from a number of motors must
be read at one time, put these signals in registers with consecutive
addresses. In this way, the registers can be read with a single
message. Do the same thing with the registers to which the PLC is
writing: write the values to consecutive registers.
By contrast, if the registers are not consecutive in memory, multiple

messages may be required to read or write the same information, which
increases the amount of overhead. Use of the communication line
between the PLC interface and the PLC is optimized by using
consecutive reads and writes.
For the function codes for consecutive reads and writes, see the
Standard Modbus Protocol Specification. All devices listed in
Table 9.2.1 support consecutive reads. However, Square D and
Modbus/5-6 devices do not support consecutive writes.

IO: 9-2-4
PLC Block Addressing
Addressing a PLC block is done at the Controller Processor slot level.

An example of a valid PLC block address is 1A001, where 1 is the
PeerWay node number, A is the Controller Processor card slot number
(ControlFile), and 001 is the block number of the PLC. See Figure 9.2.1
for the PLC addressing scheme.
With an MPCI, the maximum number of blocks per controller is 200.

Using an MPCII, the maximum number of blocks per controller is 256.
NOTE: MPCI controller is typically limited to 150 by memory

constraints. MPCII is limited to 130 per port for optimum I/O
performance.
=16 A 45
PeerWay Node Number

(Leading zeros can be omitted) PLC Block #
1--992 MPCI: 1--200
MPCII: 1--256
Controller Processor Card

Slot
(ControlFile)
A -- H
Figure 9.2.1. PLC Addressing Scheme
The PLC I/O block addresses corresponding to a series of consecutive

PLC addresses do not have to be consecutive. For example, PLC
register X0000 can be assigned to I/O block =1A001; PLC register
X0001 can be assigned to I/O Block =1A010; and PLC register X0002
can be assigned to I/O Block =1A100.

IO: 9-2-5
Mitsubishi Devices
The RS3 control system uses two commands to read and write PLC
data. Both of the following commands always manipulate 16 bits of
data:
D Batch Word Read (WR)
D Batch Word Write (WW)
Mitsubishi provides 17 different types of devices for reading and writing

data. Table 9.2.3 lists these devices and the associated addresses.
NOTE: Consecutive bit-device operations are limited to 32 registers;

read and write operations must begin on word boundaries: for example,
X0000, X0010, X0020, etc. and F0000, F0016, F0032, etc.
Consecutive word-device operations are limited to 64 registers.

IO: 9-2-6
Table 9.2.3. Mitsubishi PLC Device Ranges and Addresses
Bit Device Word Device

Device # range Dec/Hex Device # range Dec/Hex
Device Device
(char) repres. (char) repres.
Timer T (pres.
Input X X0000 to X07FF Hex TN000 to TN255 Dec
value)
Counter C (pres.
Output Y Y0000 to Y07FF Hex CN000 to CN255 Dec
value)
Internal relay M M0000 to M2047 Dec Data register D D0000 to D1023 Dec
W0000 to
Latch relay L L0000 to L2047 Dec Link register W Hex
W03FF
Link relay B B0000 to B03FF Hex File register R R0000 to R8191 Dec
Annunciator F F0000 to F0255 Dec Special register D* D9000 to D9255 Dec
Special relay M* M9000 to M9255 Dec
Timer T (contact) TS000 to TS255 Dec
Timer T (coil) TC000 to TC255 Dec
Counter C (contact) CS000 to CS255 Dec
Counter C (coil) CC000 to CC255 Dec
Step Relay S S0000 to S2047 Dec
* Special Relays M9000 to M9255 and Special Registers D9000 to D9255 are read only; no Batch Word
Write is allowed to these registers.

IO: 9-2-7
Checking Logic Steps with a Simulated PLC
Simulation is a way of checking the logic steps in a ControlBlock without

having a PLC connected to the RS3. In Simulate mode, a ControlBlock
simulates a PLC address register and an I/O block reads from that
ControlBlock just as it would from a PLC.
NOTE: When using Simulate mode, you must remove the Source tag
from the I/O Block Configuration screen.
Figure 9.2.2 shows a simulation example:
D A faceplate on a group display contains points that simulate
inputs from the field to a PLC. These points are passed to a
ControlBlock, which simulates the PLC.
D On the I/O Block Configuration screen, you specify Simulate
mode and the tag and address of the “simulation” ControlBlock.
D The I/O block reads up to 16 points from from the “simulation”
ControlBlock and passes the points to another ControlBlock that
defines the logic.
D The “logic” ControlBlock uses the points in its logic steps and
passes the outputs to another faceplate display.
Controller Processor Card
I/O Block
Group Display Addr 1A1 normal
“Logic” mode
ControlBlock
Sim
Tag Þ cb PLC
Faceplate Faceplate Addr 1A-3
simulate
“Simulation” mode
ControlBlock Plant
Addr 1A-3 a
b
c
.
Simulation Inputs .
(a-p)
.
p
Figure 9.2.2. Sample Simulation Configuration

IO: 9-2-8
Switch Position Requirements for Communicating with

an Allen-Bradley PLC
The Allen-Bradley modules that provide access to the data highways

must be set correctly for communication to occur between the PLC
interface and the data highway. Because there are many revisions of
these modules and each has different switch settings, a list of all the
switch settings is not given. Instead, a list of requirements to
communicate with the Allen-Bradley data highway is listed. For a
description of the module switch settings, see the Allen-Bradley
documentation.
Module Switch Requirements
The modules provide an interface between the data highway and the
RS3. The switch settings on the modules must meet the following
requirements:
D Half duplex, even parity, BCC (Block Check Character)
error-check field
D Ignore RS232 handshaking when not using a modem
D Detect and ignore duplicate messages
D Data highway rate of 57.6 Kbits per second
D Recommended baud rate of 9600
The station number selected for the Allen-Bradley module that connects
RS3 to the Allen-Bradley data highway is the same number that should
be entered on the PLC Configuration screen. This number is in octal in
the PLC.

IO: 9-2-9
PLC Communication Module Switch Requirements
The Allen-Bradley PLC communication module provides an interface

between the data highway and the PLC. The switch settings on the
PLC communication module must meet the following requirements:
D The PLC should be configured to receive and send responses to
unprotected read and write commands.
D The Allen-Bradley Highway Station number should be configured
to a legal station number. The same number should be entered
on the I/O Block Configuration screen in decimal form.
Table 9.2.4 provides an octal-decimal conversion chart.
Table 9.2.4. Station Numbers Octal-Decimal Conversion Chart
Octal Decimal Octal Decimal

00 00 20 16
01 01 21 17
02 03 22 18
03 03 23 19
04 04 24 20
05 05 25 21
06 06 26 22
07 07 27 23
10 08 30 24
11 09 31 25
12 10 32 26
13 11 33 27
14 12 34 28
15 13 35 29
16 14 36 30
17 15 37 31
40 32

IO: 9-2-10
Defining Port-PLC Communications
The PLC Configuration screen allows you to define the rules of

communication between a single port and the PLCs connected to that
port. This screen also allows you to monitor the communication status
of that port. You use a separate PLC Configuration screen for each
PLC interface to be defined.
- To call up a PLC Configuration screen:
D Type:
CP ControlFile slot address [ENTER]
The screen appears only if a Controller Processor jumpered for the PLC
additional image is installed in the specified ControlFile slot. Unless you
specify an address, the screen for the lowest-numbered Controller
Processor appears.
Press [PAGE AHEAD] to configure the other port on the controller or to

configure a port on the next PLC controller. Each port can use a
different protocol (Modbus, Allen-Bradley, or Mitsubishi).
Figure 9.2.3 shows the PLC Configuration screen for a Modbus-

compatible device connected to port A. Figure 9.2.4 shows the PLC
Configuration screen for an Allen-Bradley-compatible device connected
to port A. Figure 9.2.5 shows the PLC Configuration screen for a
Mitsubishi device. Table 9.2.5 describes the fields on the PLC

IO: 9-2-11
Defining Port-PLC Communications (continued)
PLC CONFIGURATION SCREEN 28-Jul-92 13:42:34

Comm Port > A Controller Address > =2B
Port Status OK
COMMUNICATION CONFIGURATION
Device Type Þ Modbus/RTU Parity Bit ÞEven Soft Error Inhibit >No
Data Bits Þ8 Msg Timeout in 1/100 Seconds Þ 10
Stop Bits Þ2 Number of Retries Þ 5
Baud Rate Þ9600 Device Timeout >0 Sec
COMMUNICATION STATISTICS
Number of PLCs 1 Number of Bad PLCs 0
Quality 1000 Messages/Seconds 5
Blocks/Eval Time 0 Comm Idle Rate 100%
Figure 9.2.3. PLC Configuration Screen for Modbus-Compatible Devices

Port Status OK
Device Type Þ Allen Bradley Parity Bit Even Soft Error Inhibit ÞNo
Stop Bits 1 Number of Retries Þ 5
AB Highway Station # Þ 11
Figure 9.2.4. PLC Configuration Screen for Allen-Bradley-Compatible Devices

IO: 9-2-12
Defining Port-PLC Communications (continued)

Port Status OK
Device Type Þ Mitsubishi/FMT1 Parity Bit Þ Even Soft Error Inhibit ÞNo
Mitsubishi Station # Þ 11
Figure 9.2.5. PLC Configuration Screen for Mitsubishi Devices

IO: 9-2-13
Table 9.2.5. PLC Configuration Screens
Field Description Allowable Entries*
Designates the port to which the PLC interface is connected.

Comm Port This entry should be the same as the jumper settings on the A, B
Port I/O Card for this port.
Controller ControlFile node number and card slot in which the Processor =1 to =992
Address resides. Slots A to H
Indicates OK when operating properly.

Port Status Display only
ERR signifies communication error on port.
Modbus/ASCII,
Modbus/RTU,
Square D,
Allen-Bradley,
Device Type Specifies the type of PLC device to which the port is connected. Modbus/5-6,
Loopback Test,
Daniels/RTU,
Daniels/ASCII,
Mitsubishi/FMT1
Number of bits per character. Defaults to 7 bits for ASCII and 8

Data Bits 7, 8
bits for RTU.
Stop Bits Number of stop bits per character. 1, 1.5, 2
Communication rate between the port and the PLCs to which it 1200, 2400, 4800,
Baud Rate
is connected. 9600
The octal station address on the Allen-Bradley module that links

the RS3 Port I/O Card to the Allen-Bradley Data Highway; field
AB Highway appears only if device type is Allen-Bradley. Octal number
Station # (See Table 9.2.4.)
For the Allen-Bradley PLC 5, this is the same as the KE module
address.
or
Mitsubishi The number of the primary station communicating through Port
0 to 31 (Decimal)
Station # A; field appears only if device type is Mitsubishi/FMT1.
None, Even, Odd,

Parity Bit Parity condition used for error-checking.
Mark, Space
For Daniels/RTU and Daniels/ASCII only: should be set to ‘Yes’

only if the system receives periodic communication alarms
Soft Error Inhibit (parity, msg chksum, etc). Yes, No
For all other device types, the ‘Soft Error Inhibit’ should remain
at ‘No’, the default.
* Bold indicates default.


IO: 9-2-14
Table 9.2.5. PLC Configuration Screens (continued)
Field Description Allowable Entries*
Time the PLC Interface waits for a reply from a PLC before
sending the request again. Enter a higher value for slower
Msg Timeout in PLCs. 0 to 1000
1/100 Seconds
For Allen-Bradley PLCs, the timeout should remain at the
default value of 10 seconds.
Number of times a request is to be repeated by the port before

Number of signaling an error condition.
0 to 5
Retries For Allen-Bradley PLCs, the number of retries should remain at
the default value of 5.
For Daniels/RTU or Daniels/ASCII only, set the ‘Device

Timeout’ to 65.
Device Timeout 0 to 6000
For all other device types, the value should remain at 0, the
default.
Number of The total number of PLCs with which this port is attempting to
Display only
PLCs communicate.
Number of Bad
Number of PLCs not communicating properly with the port. Display only
PLCs
Total number of messages, including read requests, write

Messages/ requests, and reply messages, passing through this port each Display only
Seconds
second.
Percentage of time this port is idle. Should be at least 10-15%.

Comm Idle Rate To increase the idle time, reduce the number of PLCs Display only
configured or increase the PLCB “Sample Time” on the PLC
Block Configuration screens.
Relative measure of the error rate on this port.

Quality Display only
No errors = 1000
Blocks/Eval Number of times PLCBs are being evaluated through this port
Display only
Time during each processing cycle.
* Bold indicates default.

IO: 9-2-15
Factors Affecting PLC Communication
The following factors affect the performance of the communication

between the PLC and the RS3 control system:
D Baud rate
D Scan rate on the PLC controller (must be set to one second on
the ControlFile Status screen)
D Latency time of communications between the PLC controller and
the PLC
D Sampling rate of the PLCB
D Address information: PLC address, port number, PLC number,
write mask
D Overall load on the Controller Processor

IO: 9-3-1
Section 3:
Configuring a PLCB
This section describes the applications of a Programmable Logic

Controller Block (PLCB) and how to configure a PLCB. This
configuration links the PLC and RS3.
PLC Block Applications
A PLCB can be configured to perform one of the following functions:

D Read the contents of a PLC register
D Write the contents of a PLC register
D Both read from and write to a single PLC register
RS3: Configuring PLC Blocks Configuring a PLCB

IO: 9-3-2
Preparing to Read and Write to a PLC Register or Coil
The RS3 can read and write to PLC registers and coils. You need to
map the communications between the RS3 and PLC. The tables on the
following pages have two columns: one column tells you what to enter
into the RS3 and the other tells you the corresponding register or coil in
the PLC.
NOTE: Not all PLC coils available can be accessed by the RS3. The
upper 16 coils in a PLC can not be accessed.
The process of configuring the I/O Block is described later in this

section; however, before you configure the I/O Block, you need to know
what to enter into the “PLC Word Address” field on the I/O Block
Configuration screen. The “PLC Word Address” field is where you enter
the mapping information for communications between the RS3 and
PLC. Figure 9.3.1 shows the I/O Block Configuration Screen and the
“PLC Word Address” field where the coil or register information is
entered.
Mapping information for

communication between RS3
and PLC is entered here.
I/O BLOCK CONFIGURATION 7-Jul-92 13:15:30

Address =2B008 Device Type PLCB
Block Tag Þ Block Type ÞPLCB Mode ®AUTO
Auto Lock Þno
Source Þ
Addr Data Type ÞFlags
Sample Time Þ1 S
Sim
TagÞ PortÞ A PLC number Þ 7
Addr
Value From PLC 0.
ponmlkjihgfedcba 8001x Read ® yes PLC Word Address Þ 1
a : e : i : m :
b : f : j : n :
c : g : k : o :
d : h : l : p :
Hardware Alarm Code 0 Plant Unit Þ233 Alarm Priority Þ 0
Figure 9.3.1. PLCB I/O Block Configuration Screen

IO: 9-3-3
Mapping Between the RS3 and PLC Coils
Table 9.3.1 and Table 9.3.2 represent the mapping between the RS3 I/O
block bits and the discrete bits in the PLC. Mapping with discrete bits
(coils) is only applicable when the “Data Type” field on the I/O Block
Configuration screen is set to Flags.
Entering a value of 1 in the “PLC Word Address” field on the PLC I/O
Block Configuration screen reads 16 bits from the PLC, starting with coil
1. Coil 1 corresponds to bit “a” in the PLC I/O block; coil 2 corresponds
to bit “b”; etc.
Table 9.3.1. Discrete Bit Maps for RS3 and Modicon Interface
RS3* Modicon
1/a 00001
1/b 00002
... ...
1/p 00016
17/a 00017
17/b 00018
... ...
17/p 00032
33/a 00033
33/b 00034
... ...
33/p 00048
* Entering a value of 1 in the “PLC
Word Address” field on the PLC I/O
Block Configuration screen reads 16
bits from the PLC starting with coil 1.
Coil 1 corresponds to bit “a” in the
PLC I/O block, coil 2 corresponds to
bit “b” and so on.

IO: 9-3-4
Mapping Between the RS3 and PLC Coils (continued)
Entering a value of 1 in the “PLC Word Address” field on the PLC I/O
Block Configuration screen reads 16 bits from the PLC, starting with coil
1. Coil 1 corresponds to bit “a” in the PLC I/O block; coil 2 corresponds
to bit “b”; etc.
Table 9.3.2. Discrete Bit Map for RS3

and Modicon Interface (GE Series 6)
GE Series 6
RS3* (Modicon
Interface)
1/a 00001
1/b 00002
... ...
1/p 00016
17/a 00017
17/b 00018
... ...
17/p 00032
33/a 00033
... ...
33p 00048
* Entering a value of 1 in the “PLC
Word Address” field on the PLC I/O
Block Configuration screen reads 16
bits from the PLC starting with coil 1.
Coil 1 corresponds to bit “a” in the
PLC I/O block, coil 2 corresponds to
bit “b” and so on.

IO: 9-3-5
Mapping to Allen--Bradley PLC 2
Entering an octal value of 010 in the “PLC Word Address” field on the
PLC I/O Block Configuration screen reads 16 bits from the PLC, starting
with address 010/00. Address 010/00 corresponds to bit “a” in the PLC
I/O block, address 010/01 corresponds to bit “b”, etc.
Table 9.3.3. Discrete Bit Map for RS3 and Allen--Bradley PLC 2
RS3 (Octal)* Allen--Bradley RS3* Allen--Bradley

010 010 /a /00
011 011 /b /01
012 012 /c /02
013 013 /d /03
014 014 /e /04
015 015 /f /05
016 016 /g /06
017 017 /h /07
020 020 /i /10
021 021 /j /11
022 022 /k /12
023 023 /l /13
... ... /m /14
777 777 /n /15
1000 1000 /o /16
1001 1001 /p /17
1002 1002 * Bit values that are available in the RS3

when you enter an octal number into
1003 1003 the “PLC Word Address” field and the
corresponding
di values
l in
i the
th PLC.
PLC
.... ...
* When you enter 010 in the “PLC Word

Address” field, the RS3 reads or writes
to 16 bits (a to p) to match the 16 bits
in the PLC (00 to 17).

IO: 9-3-6
Mapping to Allen--Bradley PLC 5
Entering an octal value of 00 in the “PLC Word Address” field on the

PLC I/O Block Configuration screen reads 16 bits from the PLC, starting
with address 00/0. Address 00/0 corresponds to bit “a” in the PLC I/O
block, address 00/1 corresponds to bit “b,” etc.
The address switches on the PLC 5 designate the PLC number on the
highway and correspond to the “PLC Word Address” field on the PLCB
I/O Block screen. It is an octal address.
The address on the KE module tells you which file is going to be

accessed inside the PLC. For example, if the KE module is set to octal
address 020, file 16 inside the PLC is accessible from the RS3. PLC
memory move commands can be used to fill the PLC table with
appropriate data.

IO: 9-3-7
Mapping to Allen--Bradley PLC 5 (continued)
Table 9.3.4. Discrete Bit Map for RS3 and Allen--Bradley PLC 5
Allen--Bradley Allen--Bradley
RS3 (Octal)* RS3*
(Octal) (Octal)
00 0 /a /0
01 1 /b /1
02 2 /c /2
03 3 /d /3
... ... /e /4
07 7 /f /5
010 8 /g /6
011 9 /h /7
012 10 /i /8
013 11 /j /9
... ... /k /10
017 15 /l /11
... ... /m /12
030 24 /n /13
031 25 /o /14
032 26 /p /15
... ... * Bit values that are available in the

RS3 when you enter an octal number
* When you enter 010 in the “PLC into the “PLC Word Address” field
Word Address” field, the RS3 reads and the corresponding values in the
or writes to 16 bits (a to p) to match PLC.
the 16 bits in the PLC (00 to 17).

IO: 9-3-8
Mapping Between the RS3 and PLC Registers
Table 9.3.5 and Table 9.3.6 represent the logical mapping between RS3
and the PLC when using register access.
This table shows the relationship between RS3 (using the Modbus
Device Configuration) and a GE Series 6 PLC. Entering 40001 in the
“PLC Word Address” field on the PLC I/O Block Configuration screen
accesses register 1 in the PLC. Entering 40002 accesses register 2,
etc.
Table 9.3.5. Register Map for RS3 and GE Series 6 PLC
GE Series 6
RS3 (Modicon
Interface)
40001 R0001
40002 R0002
40003 R0003
Table 9.3.6 shows the relationship between the RS3 (using the Modbus
Device Configuration) and a Modicon PLC. Entering 40001 in the “PLC
Word Address” field on the I/O Block Configuration screen accesses
register 40001 in the Modicon PLC. Entering 40002 accesses register
40002, etc.
Table 9.3.6. Register Map for RS3 and Modicon PLC
RS3 Modicon
40001 40001
40002 40002
40003 40003
... ...

IO: 9-3-9
Mapping Between the RS3 and PLC Registers (continued)
Table 9.3.7 shows the relationship between the RS3 and a Mitsubishi
PLC. Entering R0001 in the “PLC Word Address” field on the I/O Block
Configuration screen accesses register R0001 in the MItsubishi PLC.
Entering R0002 accesses register R0002, etc.
Table 9.3.7. Register Map for RS3 and MItsubishi PLC
RS3 Mitsubishi
R0001 R0001
R0002 R0002
R0003 R0003
... ...

IO: 9-3-10
Reading the Contents of a PLC Register
You can configure the contents of a specific PLC register to be read by

a PLCB so that one or more of the bits in that PLC register can
generate alarms through the PLCB and so that one or more bits in that
PLC register can be linked to a ControlBlock as inputs. These inputs
can be used in ControlBlock step logic and/or discrete faceplate
displays.
The example shown in Figure 9.3.2 assumes that the bits a, o, and p of
PLC register 1000 are directly related to the states of three contacts in
the field.
PLC 7
PLC Register 1000

Interface Port A
Processor
Card Port B p o n m l k j i h g f e d c b a
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
FlexTerm Port
PLC Control Logic
CB I /O Port
1000a
Field
Contact
Closed
Field
1000o Contact
Open
1000p FIeld
Contact
Closed
Figure 9.3.2. Typical PLC Register Contents and Logic

IO: 9-3-11
Configuring an I/O Block to Read a PLC Register Address
- To configure a PLC block to read:

D Cursor to the “Read” field and press [ENTER] to select “Yes”.
The shaded areas in Figure 9.3.3 show the fields for specifying the PLC
register that is to be read.
When an I/O Block is configured to read a PLC word with “Flags”

selected as the “Data Type”, all 16 bits of that register address are
displayed below the “Value From PLC” field in both hexadecimal and
binary notation: bit values in one state (true or false) are in reverse
video, and those in the opposite state are in normal video. Figure 9.3.4
shows the relationship between the 16-bit binary code and the
hexadecimal code. Table 9.3.8 is a 16-bit binary-to-hexadecimal
conversion chart.
NOTE: To determine what entry to make for the “PLC Word Address”
field, see “Preparing to Read and Write to a PLC Register or Coil” on
page 9-3-2. Table 9.3.9 describes all fields on the I/O Block

Auto Lock Þno
Source Þ
Sample Time Þ1 S
Sim
Addr
Value From PLC 0.
a : e : i : m :
b : f : j : n :
c : g : k : o :
d : h : l : p :
Figure 9.3.3. PLCB I/O Block Configuration Screen (Read Only)

IO: 9-3-12
Configuring an I/O Block to Read a PLC Register Address (continued)
Hexadecimal F F F F
16 bit binary 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Letter Designator p o n m l k j i h g f e d c b a
Figure 9.3.4. Bit Designators
Table 9.3.8. 16-bit Binary-to-Hexadecimal Conversion Chart
Binary
Hexadecimal
p o n m l k j i h g f e d c b a
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 3
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 4
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 5
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 6
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 7
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 9
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 A
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 B
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 C
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 D
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 E
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 F

IO: 9-3-13
Table 9.3.9. PLCB I/O Block Configuration Fields
Access
Field Description Allowable Entries(1)
Level
Block Tag CONF User defined block tag.
characters
PLCB indicates that the controller contains the
appropriate image (PLC or PLC2).
Device Type NA NONE indicates that even though the block is Display only
configured, it will not function because the
controller does not contain the appropriate image.

COB DIB, DOB, ADS,
Block Type CONF Type of input/output block.
PLCB, MIB, SIB, RIOB,
VIB, PIOB, TIB
Current block mode.
If “AUTO”, the block function drives the block
output.
Mode SUPV AUTO, SIMULATE
If “SIMULATE”, a ControlBlock simulates the PLC
address register and the block functions drives
the block output.
Tag or address of the ControlBlock from which Up to 16 alphanumeric

data written to the PLC is obtained; used only characters for tag
Source Tag/Addr CONF when values are to be written to the PLC. See
“Configuring an I/O Block to Write to a PLC Up to 10 alphanumeric
Address” on page 9-3-21. characters for Address
Flags, BCD3, BCD4, S

Type of word that is being read from or written to Int, U Int, Float(2)
Data Type CONF
the PLC. For more information,
see Table 9.3.11.
Interval (in seconds) between the PLC read/write

Sample Time CONF 1 to 250
cycles.
Invokes a logic step that allows the write of a
PLC block to occur at a configured time, rather
than at the default sample time of the controller.
Write Filter SUPV yes, no
When set to ’yes’, the write filter is latched to the
source link block and logic can act on a PLC
write. See page 9-3-21 for more information.
Tag or address of the ControlBlock from which characters for tag
Sim Tag/Addr CONF
data is obtained when in simulation mode. Up to 10 alphanumeric
characters for Address
Indicates whether data is to be read from the

Read SUPV yes, no
PLC. (Use [ENTER] to change)
(1) Bold type indicates default value.
(2) “Float” data type is a special function that is available only for the Daniels Chromatograph.

IO: 9-3-14
Table 9.3.9. PLCB I/O Block Configuration Fields (continued)
Access
Field Description Allowable Entries(1)
Level
Identifies the communication port that is being
Port CONF A, B
used by the PLC.
Allen-Bradley and
Address of the PLC with which this block Modbus PLCs: 1 - 250;
PLC Number CONF
communicates. Mitsubishi PLC: 0 to 63
and 255.
Hex or decimal value;
depends on PLC
PLC Word Word address within the PLC with which this address structure.
CONF
Address block communicates.
(Table 9.3.1 through
Table 9.3.7.)
Indicates an FIC hardware fault. For information
Hardware Alarm on alarm messages, see the Alarm Messages
NA Display only
Code
Manual.
Assigns priority to hardware alarms. 0 indicates
Alarm Priority CONF 0-3
highest priority, and 3 indicates lowest priority.
Indicates the user defined group to which the
block is assigned. Access to I/O blocks from a
Plant Unit CONF console may be restricted if the console has not 0-255
Value from PLC NA Value received from the PLC. Display only
Each letter represents one bit of the “Value from
ponmlkjihgfedcba NA Display only
PLC.”
(1) Bold type indicates default value.
(2) “Float” data type is a special function that is available only for the Daniels Chromatograph.

IO: 9-3-15
Linking I/O Block Bit Data to a ControlBlock
One or more of the 16 bits from a PLC register can be used as inputs to
a ControlBlock. Just as with any other discrete input, you can use an
individual bit in a ControlBlock discrete faceplate display or in
ControlBlock logic steps, as shown in Figure 9.3.5.
You link I/O block bits to ControlBlocks by using the ControlBlock

Discrete Links screen. PLC bit inputs to the ControlBlock are in the
following format:
[I/O Block tag or address] [ / ] [bit designator], for example =2B008/p.
ControlBlock
Discrete Links Discrete Logic

Screen Faceplate Step
CONDITIONS
@a: =2B008/p
MOTOR 6 a> @a & @ b
@b: =2B008/a
ON ACTIONS
@c: OFF
@d:
ETC
Figure 9.3.5. Using PLC Data in a ControlBlock

IO: 9-3-16
Linking Input Directly to a Graphic
You can link an individual bit input directly from a PLC register to a
graphic display. The bit input can only be displayed and cannot be
controlled. Figure 9.3.6 shows a process graphic configuration window
that links a graphic object with a PLC bit input. The bit input is specified
as =2B008/p.
Edit Object Menu

Type LINK Num ColÞ8
CondÞ
ColorÞWhite 1n BlinkÞNO
LinkÞ=2B008/p
FontÞNormal
Close Undo Top Menu
Figure 9.3.6. Configuration Window Linking PLC Bit Input to a Graphic

IO: 9-3-17
I/O Block Bit Descriptor
A PLC I/O Block allows you to attach a bit descriptor to specific bits and
to generate custom alarm messages (bit alarm descriptors) for
individual bits. You should use this feature with care because naming
and alarming I/O block bits rapidly depletes the Controller Processor
memory.
You can assign a bit descriptor of up to 16 characters to each bit (a

through p). The bit descriptor is for reference only and cannot be used
to call up individual bits. For example, bit “a” in Figure 9.3.7 is linked
using the address =2B008/a, not the descriptor MCC-101.

Block Tag Þ Block Type ÞPLCB Mode ® AUTO
Auto Lock
Source Þ
Sample Time Þ1 S
Sim
Addr
Value From PLC 0.
ponmlkjihgfedcba 0001x Read Þ yes PLC Word Address Þ 1000
a :MCC-101 e :NAME 5 i :NAME 9 m :NAME 13
b :NAME 2 f :NAME 6 j :NAME 10 n :NAME 14
c :NAME 3 g :NAME 7 k :NAME 11 o :NAME 15
d :NAME 4 h :NAME 8 l :NAME 12 p :NAME 16
Hardware Alarm Code 0 Plant Unit Þ 0 ALARM Priority Þ 0
Figure 9.3.7. Bit Descriptor Fields

IO: 9-3-18
I/O Block Bit Alarm Descriptors
Each bit read by the I/O Block has an associated configuration screen.
Table 9.3.10 describes the fields in the shaded area of Figure 9.3.8,
which shows the I/O Block Configuration screen for bit “a”.
- To call up the I/O Block Configuration screen for a specific bit:
D Cursor to the desired bit, and press [SELECT].
You can configure each bit read by the I/O Block to generate one of the
following alarm types: None, Evt, Adv, Crit, Hard, or Batch. Additional
fields appear on the screen when the alarm type is changed from its
default type (None). These fields function the same as the fields in the
“Report” section of a Logic Step in a ControlBlock. For information
about configuring alarms on a logic step of a ControlBlock, see CB: 6.
The “Color” field allows you to specify a color for the bit descriptor. The
“Backlight State” entries of High or Low allow the configuror to
determine when the bit descriptor is backlighted. The “Alarm
Descriptor” field allows configuration of custom alarm messages that
can be up to 32 characters. These alarms are displayed, listed, and
traced in the same manner as all other RS3 alarms. For more
information about alarms, see CC: 6.
Table 9.3.10. Bit Descriptor and Alarm Fields
Access
Level
Up to 16 standard keyboard
a (through p) Conf Bit descriptor.
characters
Color selection for the flag name. Press [NEXT
OPTION] to select and then press [ENTER].
Color Conf Configured console colors
For more information about color configuration,
see CC: 1.
State in which the bit descriptor is displayed in
Backlight State Conf Low, High
reverse video.
Type of alarm to generate (same as logic steps None, Event, Adv, Crit, Hard,
Alarm Type Conf
alarms). Batch
State in which alarm is to be generated (same
When Conf Rise, On, Fall, Off, Chng
as logic steps alarms).
Event number (same as logic steps alarms).
Event Type Conf This field is shown only when Event is selected 1 to 255
as the Alarm Type.
Alarm Text to be displayed when the alarm is Up to 32 standard keyboard

Conf
Descriptor generated. characters

IO: 9-3-19
I/O Block Bit Alarm Descriptors (continued)
I/O BLOCK CONFIGURATION

Block Tag > Port >
Source > PLC # >

PLC Word Address >
a:MCC-101 e: i: m :
b: f: j: n :
[SELECT] c: g: k: o :
d: h: l: p :

Block Tag Þ Block Type ÞPLCB Mode ® AUTO
Auto Lock Þ no
Source Þ
Sample Time Þ1 S
Sim
Tag Þ PortÞ PLC Number Þ
Addr
Value from PLC 0/
ponmlkjihgfedcba 0000x Read Þ yes PLC Word Address Þ 0
a ÞMCC-101 Color Þred 15n Backlight State ÞHigh

Alarm Type ÞAdv When ÞRise
Alarm Descriptor Þ Motor on confirm timeout
Hardware Alarm Code 0 Plant Unit Þ 0 Alarm Priority Þ 0
Figure 9.3.8. Alarm Descriptor Fields

IO: 9-3-20
Writing to a PLC Register
You can configure an I/O Block to write to a specific PLC register. The
I/O Block receives inputs from a ControlBlock. The I/O Block can write
to the PLC register using a mask to specify the PLC register bits to
which the I/O Block writes. The PLC then controls a field device
through its control logic.
Figure 9.3.9 shows an example of an I/O Block writing to a PLC register.

In the example, the I/O Block writes a start command to bits j and k of
PLC register 1000.
NOTE: To determine what entry to make for the “PLC Word Address”
field, see “Preparing to Read and Write to a PLC Register or Coil” on
page 9-3-2.
PLC 7
PLC Register 1000

Interface Port A
Processor p o n m l k j i h g f e d c b a
Card Port B
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
a through p Port
Flexterm
PLC Control Logic
CB I/O Port
1000j Start
Start
Command
to Field
1000k Stop
Stop
Command
to Field
1000a Start
Figure 9.3.9. Writing to a PLC Register

IO: 9-3-21
Configuring an I/O Block to Write to a PLC Register Address
Perform the following procedure to configure an I/O Block to write to a

PLC register:
- To configure a PLCB to write to a PLC register:
1. Enter a Source Tag or Address as shown in Figure 9.3.10. Three
fields appear:
“Value From Source” Hexadecimal representation of the 16
logic step outputs (a through p) of the
source ControlBlock (Figure 9.3.11).
NOTE: This is true only when the data type is “Flags.”
Figure 9.3.12 shows what the I/O Block Configuration screen
looks like when the “Data Type” field is set to something other
than Flags. For more information about data types, see
Table 9.3.11.
“PLC Write Mask” Configurable value that provides a
means to write to selected bits of the
PLC register. The default hexadecimal
value, FFFF, indicates that the I/O
Block can modify all 16 bits of the PLC
register.
“Value to PLC” Hexadecimal representation of the 16
bits of data currently being sent to the
PLC.
“Write Filter” Invokes a logic step that allows the
write of a PLC block to occur at a
configured time, rather than the default
sample time of the controller. When set
to ’yes’,the field operates in the
following manner:
Data Type =Flags Data Type=Other
Logic step p of the source link The source link (Q) determines
determines when a write occurs when a write occurs.
2. Configure the “Port,” “PLC Number,” and “PLC Word Address”

fields to specify the destination PLC register (Figure 9.3.10).

IO: 9-3-22
Configuring an I/O Block to Write to a PLC Register Address (continued)

Auto Lock ÞNo
Source Þ DMC-6
Addr =2B-010 Data Type ÞFlags PLC Write Mask Þ FFFFx
Value From Source 0200x Sample Time Þ1 S Value To PLC 0200x
Write Filter > no Sim
Tag Þ PortÞ A PLC Number Þ 7
Addr
Read Þ no
PLC Word Address Þ 1000
a : e : i : m :
b : f : j : n :
c : g : k : o :
d : h : l : p :
Hardware Alarm Code 0 Plant Unit Þ 0 Alarm Priority Þ 0
Figure 9.3.10. PLCB I/O Block Configuration Screen (Write Only)
=2B--10 MOT--6
All Fields Not Shown
Operator =2B8 PLCB

@a MOTOR i
6 0
Operator SOURCE > =2B--10
> START 1
@b j SOURCE VALUE x 0 2 0 0
> STOP 0
@c k 0
0
@d l
ETC ETC
Figure 9.3.11. Designating a Source for the I/O Block

IO: 9-3-23
Configuring an I/O Block to Write to a PLC Register Address (continued)
Table 9.3.11. Data Types
Field Description Value from Source

Will accept an integer between --32767 and 32767 as an
S INT Block Output (Q)
analog value.
Will accept an integer between 0 and 65536 as an analog
U INT Block Output (Q)
value.
BCD3 Block Output (Q)
value.
BCD4 Block Output (Q)
value.
Read Only Any number that can
Float NOTE: A special function provided for reading data from be represented by a 32
the Daniels Chromatograph. bit float.
Flags Used for discrete representation. Links user flags

Auto Lock Þno
Source Þ DMC-6
Addr =2B-010 Data Type Þ BCD4 PLC Write Mask Þ FFFFx
Value From Source 0200x Sample Time Þ1 S Value To PLC 0200x

Write Filter >no Sim
Tag Þ PortÞ A PLC number Þ 7
Addr
.
Read ® no PLC Word Address Þ 1000
Figure 9.3.12. PLCB I/O Block Configuration Screen (Data Type Other Than Flags)

IO: 9-3-24
Writing to Selected Bits of a PLC Register
Masking of specific bits can be accomplished either in the I/O Block or

within the PLC itself. The choice of masking locations is dependent on
several factors, some of which have significance on system optimization
and some of which are purely arbitrary.
Masking Within the PLC
For information on masking within the PLC itself, see the PLC
manufacturer’s instruction manual.
Masking Within the I/O Block
The “PLC Write Mask” field allows you to write to selected bits of the
PLC register. The “PLC Write Mask” field defaults to the value FFFF,
specifying that this I /O Block writes all 16 bits of the “Value From
Source” field to all 16 bits of the PLC register and overwrites the current
contents of that PLC register.
You can change the mask value to allow the I /O Block to write only to
specific bits in the register as shown in Figure 9.3.13. A Write Mask
value of 000F would allow the I/O Block to write to bits a through d only.
In the following example, the I/O Block will be allowed to write to only
the j bit (Start) and the k bit (Stop) of the PLC register; therefore the
value 0600 will be used in the Write Mask. Table 9.3.8 provides a
binary--to--hexadecimal conversion chart.

IO: 9-3-25
Masking Within the I/O Block (continued)
I/O BLOCK CONFIGURATION

PLC Write Mask Þ FFFFx
Value From Source 0200x
PLC 7
Register 1000
Port A ponml k j ihgfedcba
0 0000 10000000 000
Port B
Register 1001
Port ponmlkjihgfedcba
Port PLC Control Logic

FlexTerm
Run Command
Stop Command
Examples
Original
Register Contents 1111-- 0000 --1111-- 0000 1111-- 0000 --1111-- 0000 1111-- 0000 --1111-- 0000
0 2 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 4 0 0
Source Value
0000-- 0010 --0000-- 0000 0000-- 0010 --0000-- 0000 0000-- 0100 --0000-- 0000
F F F F 0 6 0 0 0 6 0 0
Write Mask(1)
yyyy-- yyyy --yyyy-- yyyy nnnn-- nyyn --nnnn-- nnnn nnnn-- nyyn --nnnn-- nnnn
Resulting
Register Contents 0000-- 0010 --0000-- 0000 1111-- 0010 --1111-- 0000 1111-- 0100 --1111-- 0000
* y=yes, bit may be changed

n=no, bit may not be changed
Figure 9.3.13. Using the Write Mask

IO: 9-3-26
Reading and Writing Through a Single I/O Block
You can configure a PLC I/O Block to read from and write to a single
PLC register. A block configured to read always reads all 16 bits in the
register even though some bits may never be used as inputs. The
“Write Mask” field, discussed in the previous section, is used to write to
specific bits in the register.
In the example shown in Figure 9.3.14, the I/O Block is linked to the
discrete section of a ControlBlock. Only two of the 16 step outputs, a
Start command (Step h) and a Stop command (Step g), are to be
passed on to PLC register 1000 as bits h and g, as determined by the
Write Mask value 00C0. The PLC uses these commands as inputs to a
motor control logic configuration. Bits o and p in the PLC register
represent the Run Confirm and Off Confirm states of the motor.
FlexTerm
PLC 7
Register 1000
Card Port A
po n m l kj i hg f e dc b a
Port B 0 1 0 0 00 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Port
CB I/O
Port
1000h Start
Start Command
to Field
1000g Stop
Stop Command
to Field
Start Confirm
1000o Closed
Stop Confirm
1000p Open
Figure 9.3.14. Reading and Writing Through a Single I/O Block

IO: 9-4-1
Section 4:
PLC Interface Redundancy
The PLC interface supports FIC redundancy for some types of PLCs.
This section is divided into the following subjects:
D FIC redundancy information for all supported PLCs
D FIC redundancy for Allen-Bradley PLCs
D FIC redundancy for Modicon PLCs
D FIC redundancy for Mitsubishi PLCs
D Hints for using the redundant PLC interface
PLC interface Controller Processor redundancy is covered in the

Service Manual.
NOTE: The PLC interface redundancy feature provides a redundant

path to a PLC or PLC network and may not be compatible with the
redundancy features of all PLC vendors.
RS3: Configuring PLC Blocks PLC Interface Redundancy

IO: 9-4-2
FIC Redundancy Information for All Supported PLCs
This portion of the section provides information common to all FIC

redundancy applications.
D FIC redundancy can be used with devices with the following
protocols:
— Modbus/RTU
— Modbus/ASCII
— Allen-Bradley
— Mitsubishi
D The primary and redundant FICs must have the same “Device
Type” field entries on their respective PLC Configuration screens.
D If FICs are redundant, all PLC blocks must be configured on port
A with one redundant PLC per redundant controller.
D The port B FIC backs up the port A FIC.
D The backup PLC port number must be greater than or equal to
the primary PLC port number.
D Press [EXCH] from the PLC Configuration screen to access the
redundancy configuration fields. Figure 9.4.1 shows the PLC
Configuration screen with the Redundancy Configuration section
visible. Table 9.4.1 describes the FIC redundancy fields.

IO: 9-4-3
FIC Redundancy Information for All Supported PLCs (continued)
PLC CONFIGURATION SCREEN 28-Mar-90 13:42:34

Comm Port Þ A Controller Address Þ =2B
Port Status OK
Device Type Þ Allen Bradley Parity Bit ÞEven Soft Error Inhibit >No
Data Bits 8 Msg Timeout in 1/100 Seconds Þ 10
Baud Rate Þ9600 Device Timeout Þ0 Sec
AB Highway Station # Þ 0
REDUNDANCY CONFIGURATION
Comm Port A Comm Port B
Health Addr Þ040 Status GOOD GOOD
Mode ACTIVE NOT ACTIVE
PLC Health Num Þ1 Enable FIC Redundancy ÞYes
PLC Num Offset Þ0 Force Comm on Fic Þ None Fic reset
AB Highway Station # Þ0 Backup AB Highway Station Þ0
AB Highway or Mitsubishi depending on PLC type

NOTE: Field appears only for Allen-Bradley or
Mitsubishi device type.
Figure 9.4.1. PLC Configuration Screen with Redundancy Fields
Table 9.4.1. PLC Configuration Redundancy Fields

Access Allowable
Field Description
Level Entries
Specifies the address in the PLC to which the health check read
Health Addr
message is sent.
Displays the status of FIC 1 (port A) and FIC 2 (port B).
GOOD = PLC is communicating with Controller Processor. It
is reading the health address on the backup PLC.
Status NA Display Only
Good means a switchover would be successful.
ERROR = PLC is not communicating with Controller
Processor.
Displays the redundancy mode of FIC 1 (on port A) and FIC 2
(on port B).
Mode NA Display Only
ACTIVE = FIC is primary FIC.
NOT ACTIVE= FIC is not the primary FIC.

IO: 9-4-4
Table 9.4.1. PLC Configuration Redundancy Fields (continued)

Access Allowable
Field Level Description Entries
PLC Health
CONF Specifies the number of the PLC unit that the message is sent to.
Num
Specifies whether or not FIC redundancy is enabled for the FICs

Enable FIC on port A and port B. Enables port B to back up port A (only one
CONF Yes, No
Redundancy
direction.)
Specifies a PLC number offset. When an FIC switch occurs, the

“PLC Num Offset” field entry is added to the “PLC Number” field
entry on the affected PLC blocks. For example, if the “PLC
Number” field, on the I/O Block screen, has an entry of 2 and the
PLC Num
CONF “PLC Num Offset” field has an entry of 3, after a switch the I/O
Offset
request for this block is set to 5. As a result, the PLC blocks
configured on port A can communicate with the PLC connected
to port B. The redundant PLC number must be greater than or
equal to the primary PLC number.
Allows the user to cause an FIC switch manually. When the new
value is entered, the switch occurs.
None = Removes and forced FIC redundancy.
Reset = Resets the FIC redundancy. FIC 1 (port A) becomes
Force Comm the primary FIC and FIC 2 (port B) becomes the
CONF
on FIC backup FIC.
1 = Disables redundancy and forces communication with
FIC 1.
2 = Disables redundancy and forces communication with
FIC 2.
Resets FIC redundancy. FIC 1 (port A) becomes the primary FIC

FIC Reset and FIC 2 (port B) becomes the backup FIC. To reset the FICs,
cursor to this field and press [ENTER].
Octal
Address of the Allen-Bradley highway interface module that is
AB Highway Number
CONF connected to the RS3 Field Interface Card on Port A; appears
Station # (See
only for Allen Bradley PLCs.
Table 9.2.4.)
or
Mitsubishi Address of the primary station communicating through port A; 0 to 32
CONF
Station # appears only for Mitsubishi PLCs. (Decimal)
Address of the Allen-Bradley highway interface module that is

connected to the RS3 Field Interface Card on Port B. A number Octal
Backup AB
Number
Highway CONF must be entered in this field. If a number is not entered, an FIC
(See
Station comm error such as the following is generated: “error not active.”
Appears only for Allen Bradley PLCs. Table 9.2.4)
or
Address of the backup or redundant station communicating
Backup through Port b. A number must be entered in this field, which
Mitsubishi appears only for Mitsubishi PLCs. If a number is not entered, an O to 32
CONF
(Decimal)
Station FIC comm error such as the following is generated: “error not
active.” Appears only for Mitsubishi PLCs.

IO: 9-4-5
FIC Redundancy for Allen-Bradley PLCs
Figure 9.4.2 shows a typical PLC Interface FIC redundancy scheme for
Allen-Bradley PLCs. When configuring the PLC Configuration screen:
D The “AB Highway Station” and “Health Addr” fields must be
specified in octal.
D The “PLC Health Num” field must be specified in decimal.
Controller 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Processor
Allen-Bradley Allen-Bradley
RS232/Data Highway RS232/Data Highway
Interface Interface
Allen-Bradley PLC
Interface Module
Allen-Bradley PLC
Figure 9.4.2. Typical PLC Interface FIC Redundancy for Allen-Bradley PLCs

IO: 9-4-6
FIC Redundancy for Modicon PLCs
Figure 9.4.3 shows a typical PLC Interface FIC redundancy scheme for
Modicon PLCs.
Controller 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Processor
Comm Port Comm Port
Modicon PLC
Figure 9.4.3. Typical PLC Interface FIC Redundancy for Modicon PLCs

IO: 9-4-7
FIC Redundancy for Mitsubishi PLCs
Figure 9.4.4 shows a typical redundancy configuration using Mitsubishi

PLCs and the Melsec network. In a redundant configuration, all PLC
numbers must be set to 255 on the PLCB configuration screen;
therefore, only the Master PLC can serve as the primary. Station
numbers are specified in the redundancy portion of the Configure PLC
screen as shown in Figure 9.4.1.
If the health of Station #23 (in the example in Figure 9.4.4) is detected
as bad, then all communications will occur through port B to Station
#25, the backup station.
NOTE: Only the Melsec network can be used in a redundant

configuration because the RS422 network does not allow more than
one PLC card connection.
Controller 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Processor
Port A Port B
RS232 RS232
C C
P P
...... ......
U U
NOTE: Maximum 32 stations

Master Station Local Station #0 to #31
PLC # 0 PLC # 34
Station #23 Station #25
Coaxial or fiber optic cable AJ71C24
Figure 9.4.4. Typical Configuration for Mitsubishi PLC Redundancy

IO: 9-4-8
Hints for Using the Redundant PLC Interface
Listed below are some hints on using the redundant PLC interface:
- FIC switches from primary to secondary
D An FIC might switch when communications are interrupted, a
cable is pulled out, there is no reply, there is a bad FIC, etc.
When a fault occurs on the primary FIC, it switches to the
secondary FIC. You must switch communications from the
secondary FIC (port B) to the primary FIC (port A) manually.
Force the switch using the PLC Configuration screen “FIC reset”
field.
- Assigning an address to a redundant PLC
D Remember that, depending on the type of PLC you have, you
can define any address that you need. For more information
about PLC address ranges, see Section 3 of this chapter.
- Setting up ports A and B
D To ensure that the primary PLC can communicate with the
secondary PLC, be sure to set up ports A and B the same.
- Redundancy on PLC end
D Remember to check with your PLC vendor to find out what is
required on the PLC end to have PLC redundancy.

IO: 9-5-1
Section 5:
PLC Guidelines and Reference Material
This section provides PLC guidelines, reference material for configuring

PLCs, and alarm message information.
PLC Guidelines
Following are items to verify if there are problems with the PLC
interface:
D The Allen-Bradley PLC must be in Run mode during PLC setup,
not Program mode.
D Make sure that the baud rate jumpers on the PLC controller are
set to the industry standard. For more information on the baud
rate jumper positions, see SV: 3.
D If you get the following error message: “Bad PLC FIC Card,”
communications have been interrupted.
Check the following things:
— Are the communication parameters set correctly—baud rate,
data bits, addresses, device type? Communication
parameters have a high probability of being the problem.
— Is the cable disconnected on either end?
— Is the card pulled out?
— Is the card bad? Hardware has a low probability of being the
problem?
The following test can be run when connecting a PLC interface:

1. Configure a PLCB I/O Block with the Source Tag of a
ControlBlock that is configured to count from 0 to 99, changing
count once a second.
2. Configure the PLCB to Data Type Signed Integer on the I/O
Block Configuration screen.
3. Set the “Read” field to yes.
4. After a delay, counts should come back from the PLC.
RS3: Configuring PLC Blocks PLC Guidelines and Reference Material

IO: 9-5-2
Reference Material
The following reference material is provided:

D Checking the PLC interface hardware (loopback test)
D PLC Block Configuration screen
D Port I/O card functional block diagrams
— RS422/RS232 Port I/O card
— RS422/RS422 Port I/O card

IO: 9-5-3
Checking the PLC Interface Hardware (Loopback Test)
- To check the PLC interface hardware:

1. Ensure that the port select jumpers on the Port I/O card are set
for the port to be checked with the loopback test.
2. At the end of the RS232C cable, short together pins 2 and 3
(transmit data and receive data) so that the loopback includes
the cable.
3. Go to the PLC Configuration screen for the port on which the
loopback is to be done. This should be the same port that has
pins 2 and 3 shorted.
4. Select Loopback Test in the “Device Type” field. When Loopback
Test is selected, the loopback test statistics appear at the bottom
of the screen as shown in Figure 9.5.1.
5. The Loopback Test Statistics screen displays the number of
attempts of the loopback and the number of errors. Zero errors
are displayed if messages sent from the controller are being
received correctly back at the controller, indicating that the
hardware is operational. To reset the number of attempts/errors,
cursor to the “Number of Attempts” field and press [RETURN].
6. Reselect the PLC type in the “Device Type” field on the PLC
Configuration screen to display the original data for the PLC.
NOTE: The Loopback Test works on only one port at a time and does
not function at 1200 baud. FIC redundancy must be disabled to use this
test.
PLC CONFIGURATION SCREEN 25-Feb-90 11:22:31

Comm Port Þ A Controller Address Þ =2B
Port Status OK
Device Type Þ Loopback Test Parity BitÞ Even Soft Error Inhibit >No
Data Bits 8 Msg Timeout in 1/100 SecondsÞ 10
LOOPBACK TEST STATISTICS
Number of Attempts > 11 Number of Errors 0
Figure 9.5.1. PLC Configuration Screen with Loopback Test Selected

IO: 9-5-4
Port I/O Card Functional Block Diagrams
Figure 9.5.2 and Figure 9.5.3 show functional diagrams for the
RS422/RS232 port I/O card and the RS422/RS422 port I/O card.
RS422/RS232 Port I/O Card
Figure 9.5.2 shows a block diagram of the RS422/RS232 Port I/O card.
Power is supplied to the Port I/O card through a 2-A board power fuse
(F1). The fuse supplies 30 V DC to the power regulator on the card. The
power regulator generates and regulates the DC voltages. The isolated
voltages are used to power all components on the PLC side of the
optical isolation. The non-isolated +5 V DC is used on the Controller
Processor side of the optical isolation. Optical isolation isolates the PLC
data from the Controller Processor.
Receive and transmit data between the Port I/O card and the Controller
Processor are in RS422 format. The data must pass through four
jumpers (HD1A through HD1D), which determine if communication port
A or B is being used. In normal operation, communication port A is
used. Figure 9.5.3 shows the jumper settings for port A.
The data passing between the Port I/O card and the PLC is in RS232
format. A set of jumpers (HD2A and HD2B) enable the Port I/O card to
be designated as the modem or terminal side of the RS232 interface.
Set the jumpers as a pair with both jumpers in the same position.
If the Port I/O card is talking to one PLC, set jumper HD3 to the S
(single point) position. This pulls RTS and CTS high all of the time. If
the card is talking to more than one PLC, set the jumper to the M
(multi-drop) position. In the M position, the card uses the CTS and RTS
from the PLCs.

IO: 9-5-5
+5Vdc Isolated DS1

Fuse Blown LED (Green)
DS2 (RED) +12Vdc Isolated
--12Vdc Isolated
Power
30 V(A) Regulator Isolated Return
Board Power +5Vdc

30 V (B)
Fuse Return Pin 1
1/2 A (F1) Ground
RETURN
+ HD1C RS--422 MODEM

A DS3 HD2A HD2B
TXD A COMM A TXMT M M TXD Pin 2
-- B Optical
+ HD1D Isolation RCVD Pin 3
A T
TXD B COMM B TXMT RS232 T
B Terminal
--
CTS Pin 5
+ HD1A RS--422
A DS4 RTS Pin 4 PLC
RCVR A COMM A RCVR RS232
-- B Optical M Device
+ HD1B Isolation
A HD3
RCVR B COMM B RCVR
B Optical +12V S
--
Isolation ISO
PLC DSR Pin 6
+12 V ISO
Controller DTB Pin 20
DCD Pin 8
GND Pin 7
Figure 9.5.2. RS422/RS232 Port I/O Card Block Diagram

IO: 9-5-6
RS422/RS422 Port I/O Card
Figure 9.5.3 shows a block diagram of the RS422/RS422 Port I/O card.
FUSE BLOWN +5V NON--ISOLATED

LED DS2
(RED) +5V ISOLATED
POWER
30 V(A) ISOLATED RETURN
REGULATOR
30 V (B) BOARD
POWER FUSE RETURN
2 A (F1)
30V RETURN
RS422
HD1
P + C A
RS--422 TRANSMITTER
L TXD COMM A TXMT PIN
C A ---- B 9+
OPTICAL
HD1
C + ISOLATION P
D A PIN
O TXD COMM B TXMT L
B 3--
N B -- C
T D
RS422
R RCVR HD1 E
O A + RS--422 RECEIVER
AA PIN V
L COMM A RCVR I
L ---- B
OPTICAL
6+ C
E HD1
+ ISOLATION
PIN E
R BA
COMM B RCVR
4--
-- B
RCVR
B ISOLATED PIN
RETURN 5
Figure 9.5.3. RS422/RS422 Port I/O Card Block Diagram

IO: 9-5-7
Interfacing to Allen-Bradley PLC-2, PLC-3, and PLC-5
This section contains information about interfacing the RS3 to

Allen-Bradley PLCs.
Cable Requirements
To connect an RS3 to either a KF or KE Allen-Bradley communications

module, you must use a shielded cable with at least four individually
shielded pairs of wire, for a total of eight conductors:
D One wire of each pair carries one RS-232 signal.
D The second wire of each pair is tied to ground, pin 7.
The maximum length of the cable is 50 feet.
The Allen-Bradley user’s manual for each communications module

contains wiring diagrams for cables that you use to connect that
communications module to the RS3:
D A wiring diagram for connecting a 1770-KF2 module is shown in
Diagram 3.6b, page 3-15, of the 1770-KF2 User’s Manual
(Allen-Bradley publication 1770-6.5.13 - June 1987) and in
Figure 3.6c, page 3-13 of the 1770-KF2 User’s Manual
(Allen-Bradley publication 1770-6.5.13 - March 1989).
D A wiring diagram for connecting to a 1785-KE module is shown in
Figure 4.2, page 4-5 of the 1785-KE User’s Manual
(Allen-Bradley publication 1785-6.5.2 - May 1989). This is the
wiring diagram for the Allen-Bradley 1770-CG cable, which can
be ordered from Allen-Bradley.
NOTE: For the cables above, jumper the PLC FICs in the TERMINAL
position; for a straight-through RS-232 cable, jumper the PLC FIC in the
MODEM position. A normal serial cable is not recommended but may
work in some situations.
For additional information on cabling, see SV:5-4.

IO: 9-5-8
Notes on Data Highway
The Allen-Bradley 1770-KF2 or 1785-KE communications modules

allow the RS3 to communicate with the Allen-Bradley Data Highway
One, Two, or Plus. Although RS3 cannot distinguish which highway is
being used, the preferred one is Data Highway Plus, which has better
diagnostics than Data Highway One.
The Allen-Bradley Data Highway One and Data Highway Plus are
similar to the RS3 PeerWay:
D The Allen-Bradley Data Highways use a twinax cable with
termination at both ends.
D Because only one cable is used, there is no redundancy.
D Each device on the Data Highway has a unique station address,
just like the node numbers on the PeerWay. Allen-Bradley
station addresses, however, use the octal numbering system
(0..7,10..17,20..27, etc.).
D The minimum configuration for the RS3 to talk to an
Allen-Bradley PLC is one PLC and one AB communications
module, each with their own unique station address.
NOTE: When using Data Highway One or Data Highway Plus, no

station should have the address of 0 or 10 octal. The Data Highway
has problems using these station addresses and it is best to avoid
them.

IO: 9-5-9
Jumpers on Controller Board
The jumpers on the controller board should be set as follows for the
PLC and Multi-Purpose Controller Processor boards:
D Jumpers HD21 through HD24 select 9600 baud.
D Jumpers HD6 through HD8 select which additional image to load.
This should be the same as the additional image number on the
ControlFile Status screen which contains the PLC image. This is
not the setup for the Controller Processor II. See SV:4-2 for
details.
Jumpers on FICs
Every FIC card in the PLC FlexTerm needs either a 1770-KF2 or a

1785-KE module connected to it even if it is a redundant card;
The jumpers on the FIC card should be set as follows:

D Jumpers HD1A through HD1D should either be in the Port A or
Port B position depending on which port is used on the controller.
D Jumpers HD2A and HD2B should be in the TERM (Terminal)
position for one of the cables described on page 9-5-7 is used
or for any other cable which swaps pins 2 and 3. Jumpers HD2A
and HD2B should be in the MOD (Modem) position for any cable
which does not swap pins 2 and 3.
D Jumper HD3 should be in the S (Single) position.
For additional FIC jumper information, see SV:4-2.

IO: 9-5-10
PLC Configuration Screen
Two fields on the PLC Configuration Screen (Figure 9.5.4) determine

functionality with the Allen-Bradley PLC:
D Set the “Device Type” field to Allen-Bradley.
D In the “AB Highway Station #” field, enter the number of the octal
station address of the communications module that is connected
to the port being configured.
For example, if a 1770-KF2 or 1785-KE communications module
with a station address of 23 octal is connected to the RS3 port,
enter 23 in the“ AB Highway Station #” field.

IO: 9-5-11
PLC CONFIGURATION SCREEN 28-Nov-90 09:48:14

Comm Port >A Controller Address >=2B
Port Status OK
Device Type =>Allen-Bradley Parity Bit Even Soft Error Inhibit =>No
Data Bits =>8 Msg Timeout in 1/100 Seconds =>10
Stop Bits 1 Number of Retries =>5
Baud Rate =>9600 Device Timeout =>0 Sec
AB Highway Station # =>23
CONFIG 1
Figure 9.5.4. PLC Configuration Screen

IO: 9-5-12
PLC-2 Setup
The PLC-2 has one data storage area. The RS3 can read or write to
any word/register in that storage area. Two fields on the I/O Block
Configuration screen (Figure 9.5.5) allow you to define this interface to
a PLC-2:
D The “PLC Number” indicates which PLC-2 on the Data Highway
to access. The number that you enter in this field is the decimal
equivalent of the octal Data Highway station address of the
PLC-2.
For example, to read data from a PLC-2 at octal station address
36, enter 30 in the “PLC Number” field.
D The “PLC Word Address” field indicates a word/register in the
PLC-2. This field accepts only an octal number. The memory on
the PLC-2 is also addressed in octal.
For example, to read word/register number 42 from the PLC-2,
enter 42 in the “PLC Word Address” field.

Auto Lock Þno
Source Þ
Sample Time Þ1 S
Sim
Addr
Value From PLC 0.
a : e : i : m :
b : f : j : n :
c : g : k : o :
d : h : l : p :
Figure 9.5.5. Configuring a PLC--2

IO: 9-5-13
PLC-2 Example
To access word/register 57 on the PLC-2 at station address 35, enter

the following on the I/O Block Configuration screen as shown in
Figure 9.5.6:
Field Enter . . .
PLC Number 29 (octal equivalent of 35)
PLC Word Address 57
NOTE: The number entered in the “AB Highway Station #” field on the
PLC Configuration screen has no effect on which word/register or which
PLC-2 is accessed.

Auto Lock Þno
Source Þ
Sample Time Þ1 S
Sim
Addr
Value From PLC 0.
a : e : i : m :
b : f : j : n :
c : g : k : o :
d : h : l : p :
Figure 9.5.6. PLC--2 Example

IO: 9-5-14
PLC--3 Setup
The PLC-3 has multiple data input/output areas called input files, unlike
the PLC-2 which only has one data storage area. The input files are
used for bidirectional transfer of data into and out of the PLC-3.
Because the RS3 was originally designed to talk to a PLC-2, it can

access only one input file on the PLC-3. The input file number, which is
decimal in the PLC-3, is specified by the octal address of the Data
Highway communications module (1770-KF2 or 1785-KE).
NOTE: There is no octal-to-decimal conversion even though the station

address of the communications module is octal and the input file is
decimal.
For example, if the Data Highway communications module has a station

address of 23 (octal), the RS3 can access input file number 23
(decimal) on all PLC-3s connected to that Data Highway. If another port
on the RS3 connects to the same Data Highway, this port accesses a
different input file for all PLC-3s on that Data Highway.
Two fields on the I/O Block Configuration screen (Figure 9.5.5) allow
you to define this interface to a PLC-3.
PLC-2.
36, enter 30 in the PLC Number field.
D The “PLC Word Address” field indicates a word/register within an
input file in the PLC-3. This field accepts only an octal number.
The memory on the PLC-3 is also addressed in octal.
For example, to read word/register number 42 from the PLC-3,
enter 42 in the “PLC Word Address” field.

IO: 9-5-15
PLC--3 Example
To access word/register 33:57 on the PLC-3 at station address 35, enter

the following on the PLC Configuration screen:
Field Enter . . .
AB Station Highway # 33
Enter the following on the I/O Block Configuration screen as shown in

Figure 9.5.7:
Field Enter . . .
PLC Number 29 (decimal equivalent of 35 octal)
PLC Word Address 57
NOTE: Input file 33 is defined by entering 33 in the “AB Station

Highway #” field on the PLC Configuration screen. This is the station
address of the communications module (1770-KF2 or 1785-KE).

Auto Lock Þno
Source Þ
Sample Time Þ1 S
Sim
Addr
Value From PLC 0.
a : e : i : m :
b : f : j : n :
c : g : k : o :
d : h : l : p :

IO: 9-5-16
PLC-5 Setup
The PLC-5 has multiple data input/output areas called files, unlike the
PLC-2, which only has one data storage area.
Because the RS3 was originally designed to talk to a PLC-2, it can

access only one data file on the PLC-5. The file number is the decimal
equivalent of the octal address of the Data Highway communications
module (1770-KF2 or 1785-KE).
For example, if the Data Highway communications module has a station

address of 23 (octal), the RS3 can access file number 19 (decimal
equivalent of 23 octal) on all PLC-5s connected to that Data Highway. If
another port on the RS3 connects to the same Data Highway, this port
accesses a different file for all PLC-5s on that Data Highway.
NOTE: The RS3 can access any file type in the PLC-5 except floating
point. The integer or N file type is preferred.
Two fields on the I/O Block Configuration screen (Figure 9.5.5) allow
you to define this interface to a PLC-5.
PLC-5.
36, enter 30 in the PLC Number field.
D The “PLC Word Address“ field indicates a word/register within the
file in the PLC-5. This field accepts only an octal number
although the PLC-5 uses decimal addresses within the file. The
actual word/register accessed on the PLC-5 is the decimal
equivalent of the octal number that you enter in the “PLC Word
Address” field.
For example, to read word/register number 38 in the file on the
PLC-5, enter 46 in the “PLC Word Address” field.

IO: 9-5-17
PLC--5 Example
To access read or write to word/register N27:47 on the PLC-5 at station

address 35, enter the following on the PLC Configuration screen:
Field Enter . . .
AB Station Highway # 33 (octal equivalent of 27)
Enter the following on the I/O Block Configuration screen as shown in

Figure 9.5.8:
Field Enter . . .
PLC Number 29 (decimal equivalent of 35 octal)
PLC Word Address 57 (octal equivalent of 47)
NOTE: N27:47 indicates word/register 47 of integer file 27; 27 is the

decimal equivalent of the station address (33) of the communications
module (1770-KF2 or 1785-KE). The PLC-5 station address 35 is the
octal equivalent of the decimal 29 entered in the PLC Number Field.
The 47 is the decimal equivalent of the 57 octal entered in the PLC
Word Address field.

Auto Lock Þno
Source Þ
Sample Time Þ1 S
Sim
Addr
Value From PLC 0.
a : e : i : m :
b : f : j : n :
c : g : k : o :
d : h : l : p :

IO: 9-5-18
Alarm Messages
Alarm messages can occur when you use or communicate with a PLC
interface.
General PLC Alarms
Table 9.5.1 provides some of the alarm messages that can occur when
you use the PLC interface.
Table 9.5.1. General PLC Alarms
Alarm Message Description
PLC Address Out of Range An attempt has been made to read from or write to an address which is out
of range for the PLC.
PLC Read Exception ## An error code returned to the control system from the PLC device. The
PLC Write Exception ## error code can be referenced in the PLC manuals.
Too Many PLCs Configured An attempt has been made to communicate with more than 32 PLC
devices from one controller.
Writing to a Read Only An attempt has been made to write to a read-only address. Generally
Address limited to Modbus configurations.

IO: 9-5-19
PLC Communication Alarms
Table 9.5.2 provides some of the alarm messages that can occur as a
result of communicating with a PLC device.
Table 9.5.2. PLC Communication Alarms
Alarm Message Description
No PLC Communication An unsuccessful attempt has been made to communicate with the PLC
device. This alarm is generated after the number of retries specified on the
PLC Configuration screen has been attempted and the message timeout
has expired. An attempt to reestablish communications will occur in five
seconds.
Out of Comm Bandwidth There is not enough communication time to meet all read/write requests.
A Break Was Caught An illegal break character was received from the slave.
A Framing Error Occurred A message framing error has occurred.
A Parity Error Occurred Communication parity errors.
Bad CRC/Checksum on The calculated CRC or checksum for a message from a slave was wrong.
Message
Premature End of Message End of Message (EOM) was detected before it was expected.
An Overrun Error Occurred After an EOM was detected, extra characters were received.
Bad Message Received A message which did not fit any of the expected formats was received.

IO: 9-5-20
Mitsubishi Error Codes
Table 9.5.3 lists the error codes that can be returned from a Mitsubishi
PLC. If several errors occur simultaneously, the error with the lower
number takes precedence. For additional information, and corrective
action, see the Mitsubishi user’s manual for the AJ71C24 computer
interface module.
Table 9.5.3. Mitsubishi Error Codes
Error Code
Description
(Hexadecimal)
00H Disable during run: invalid access has been made during the run.
01H Parity error: parity check result does not match the odd/even parity setting.
Sum check error: sum check result of received data does not match sum check of data
02H
transmitted.
03H Protocol error: communications protocol is invalid.
04H Framing error: data does not comply with stop bit setting.
Overrun error: new data has been sent before AJ71C24 could complete reception of
05H
preceding data.
06H Character area error: characters in data areas doe not match the mode set.
Character error: characters other than A to Z, 0 to 9, space, and control codes have
07H
been received.
08H PLC access error; buffer memory is unable to communicate with the PLC.
PLC number error: defined PLC number does not exist; number specified in control
10H
protocol must be FFH.
Mode error: invalid processing request mode has been sent; processing request
11H
command has been corrupted.
Special function unit specification error: addressed I/O location does not contain a
12H
special function unit.
Error in designation of program step number; step number is outside range designated
13H by PLC CPU parameters; or a subsequence program that does not exist was
designated.
18H Remote error: remote run/stop is not possible.
Data link error: system attempted to access a station with which communications have
20H
been disconnected.
Special function unit bus error: memory access to special function unit cannot be made
21H
(for command TR, TW).

RS3t
Chapter 10:
Configuring Discrete Blocks
Section 1: Configuring a Discrete Input Block (DIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-1

Configuring a DIB Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-2
DIB Filter Options Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-3
Configuring the DIB Field Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-4
Configuring DIB Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-11
DIB Alarm Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-12
DIB Reference Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-13
DIB Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-13
DIB Filter Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-17
DIB Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-29
Section 2: Configuring a Discrete Output Block (DOB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2-1

Configuring the DOB Field Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2-2
Configuring DOB Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2-11
DOB Reference Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2-12
DOB Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2-12
DOB Functional Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2-15
RS3: Configuring Discrete Blocks Contents

IO: ii
List of Figures
Figure Page
10.1.1 DIB Block Configuration Screen—Filter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-2
10.1.2 DIB Block Configuration Screen—Field Contact
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-4
10.1.3 DIB Block Configuration Screen—Message Pair
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-5
10.1.4 DIB Block Configuration Screen—Descriptor Configuration . . . . . . . . . 10-1-6
10.1.5 DIB Block Configuration Screen—Fail Safe Configuration . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-7
10.1.6 DIB Block Configuration Screen—FIM Switch Voltage
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-9
10.1.7 DIB Block Configuration Screen—Event Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-10
10.1.8 DIB Block Configuration Screen—Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-11
10.1.9 DIB Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-13
10.1.16 DIB Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-29
10.2.1 DOB Block Configuration Screen—Contact Type
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2-2
10.2.2 DOB Block Configuration Screen—Output Hold
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2-3
10.2.5 Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2-6
10.2.6 DOB Block Configuration Screen—Message Pair
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2-7
10.2.7 DOB Block Configuration Screen—FIM Switch Volt
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2-9
10.2.8 DOB Block Configuration Screen—Fail Safe Configuration . . . . . . . . . 10-2-10
10.2.9 DOB Block Configuration Screen—Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2-11
10.2.10 DOB Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2-12
10.2.11 DOB Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2-15

IO: iii
List of Tables
Table Page
10.1.1 Discrete Input Block (DIB) Filter Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-3
10.1.2 Discrete Input Block (DIB) Configuration Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1-14
10.2.3 Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2-6
10.2.4 Discrete Output Block (DOB) Configuration Screen Fields . . . . . . . . . 10-2-13

IO: 10-1-1
Section 1:
Configuring a Discrete Input Block (DIB)
The Discrete Input Block (DIB) is used with discrete hardware while the
Contact Input Block is used with contact hardware.
This section provides the following information for configuring a DIB

block:
D Configuring a DIB filter
D Configuring the DIB field contact
D Configuring a descriptor
D Setting the fail safe
D Configuring an event
D Configuring the transition voltage for inputs
D Configuring DIB alarms
D DIB reference material
— DIB Block Configuration screen and table of screen fields
— DIB filter options
— DIB functional block diagram
RS3: Configuring Discrete Blocks Configuring a Discrete Input Block (DIB)

IO: 10-1-2
Configuring a DIB Filter
You can use a DIB filter to eliminate contact bounce by filtering the DIB
Raw State when it is received to determine the Output State. The
shaded area of Figure 10.1.1 shows the section of the DIB Block
Configuration screen used for configuring a DIB filter. To configure a
filter, the block must be in Manual mode.

Address =15HA802 Device Type DIB or DOB
Block Tag Þ Block Type ÞDIB Mode ®MANUAL
Auto Lock Þno
Output Stat > OFF
Raw State OFF
Field Contact ÞNO
Message Pair Þ*1 Filt Type ÞNONE Filtered State OFF
true ON Fail Safe ÞHold
false OFF
Descriptor Þ FIM Switch volt.5.506 V
EVENTS ALARMS
Rising Edge ®no Event Type ®0 When ®None
Falling Edge ®no
Hardware Alarm Code 8 Priority Þ0 Plant UnitÞ0

CONFIG 1
Figure 10.1.1. DIB Block Configuration Screen—Filter Configuration

IO: 10-1-3
DIB Filter Options Available
Table 10.1.1 lists and briefly describes the DIB filter options available.
The effect on the Output State by the FIM is explained in detail in “DIB
Filter Options” later in this section.
- To select a filter type:
2. Cursor to the “Filt Type” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to select
the desired filter type. Press [ENTER].
3. For options other than “None”, cursor to the “Filt Time” field to
assign the desired filter time. Enter the time in seconds using a
minimum of 0.00 seconds and a maximum of 1023.75 seconds.
Press [ENTER].
Table 10.1.1. Discrete Input Block (DIB) Filter Options
Filter Option Effect on the DIB
None No effect on the block. The Output State always equals the Raw State.
The Output State turns on (or off) after the Raw State has been on (or off) for at
Delay
least the duration of the time configured in the “Filt Time” field.
The Output State turns on after the Raw State has been on for at least the duration
Delay On (D--On)
of the time configured in the “Filt Time” field.
The Output State turns off after the Raw State has been off for at least the duration
Delay Off (D--Off)
of the time configured in the “Filt Time” field.
An Output State change is held for at least the interval assigned in the “Filt Time”
field. A change in the Raw State during the hold time causes the Output State to
Glitch
respond to the change after the hold expires and again hold for the time assigned
in the “Filt Time” field.
An Output State change is held until a matching Raw State is maintained for the
Settle interval assigned in the “Filt Time” field. A change in the Raw State causes a
change in the Output State.
The Output State is held for the interval assigned in the “Filt Time” field. The
Extend
Output State responds only to the most recent Raw State at the end of the hold.

IO: 10-1-4
Configuring the DIB Field Contact
You can configure a DIB to allow inversion of the field contact position.
The shaded area of Figure 10.1.2 shows the section of the DIB Block
Configuration screen used for configuring the DIB field contact position.
To configure the field contact, the block must be in Manual mode.

“Field Contact” field displays “NO” to indicate the field contact is
normally open. “NC” indicates the field contact is normally closed. This
option allows optional logic inversion.
Manual. Press [ENTER].
2. Cursor to the “Field Contact” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to
select the desired field contact. Press [ENTER].
Auto. Press [ENTER].

Auto Lock Þno
Output Stat > OFF
Raw State OFF
Field Contact ÞNO
false OFF
EVENTS ALARMS
Falling Edge ®no

CONFIG 1
Figure 10.1.2. DIB Block Configuration Screen—Field Contact Configuration

IO: 10-1-5

DIB block. The shaded area of Figure 10.1.3 shows the section of the
DIB Block Configuration screen used for assigning message pairs.
One hundred standard message pairs and up to 155 user message
pairs are available. Standard message pairs are designated by an
asterisk. The default message pair is standard message pair number 1
(*1) that displays “on” when the designated value is true and “off” when
the designated value is false.
For more information about message pairs, see CC: 1.
- To assign a message pair to a DIB block:
D Cursor to the “Message Pair” field and enter the desired message
message pair); then press [ENTER]. The true and false
statements for the block are displayed below the field. The
message pair statements appear in the “Raw State”, “Output
State”, and “Filtered State” fields.
or
D Repeatedly press [NEXT OPTION] to quickly scroll through the
message pair options, or enter the first letter of the desired
option, such as S for the Start/Stop messages, and use [NEXT
OPTION] to begin scrolling with the selected letter.

Auto Lock Þno
Output Stat > OFF
Raw State OFF
Field Contact ÞNO
false OFF
EVENTS ALARMS
Falling Edge ®no

CONFIG 1
Figure 10.1.3. DIB Block Configuration Screen—Message Pair Configuration

IO: 10-1-6
Configuring a Descriptor
You can configure a descriptor for a DIB block. The descriptor appears
on the Alarm Message and Alarm Lists. The shaded area of
Figure 10.1.4 shows the section of the DIB Block Detail Configuration
screen used to assign descriptors to a DIB.

Auto Lock Þno
Output Stat > OFF
Raw State OFF
Field Contact ÞNO
false OFF
Descriptor Þ Mated to SCOB11 FIM Switch volt.5.506 V
EVENTS ALARMS
Falling Edge ®no

CONFIG 1
Figure 10.1.4. DIB Block Configuration Screen—Descriptor Configuration

IO: 10-1-7
loss of communication of the FIM with the controller.
D “Hold” indicates that the controller block holds the last valid
Output State if communication is lost. “Hold” is the default
selection.
D “On” indicates that the “Output State” is set to on.
D “Off” indicates that the “Output State” is set to off.
Configuration screen used for setting the DIB fail safe.

Auto Lock Þno
Output Stat > OFF
Raw State OFF
Field Contact ÞNO
false OFF
EVENTS ALARMS
Falling Edge ®no

CONFIG 1
Figure 10.1.5. DIB Block Configuration Screen—Fail Safe Configuration

IO: 10-1-8
Configuring the Transition Voltage for I/O Points
FIM Switch Voltage specifies the voltage level for the transition point
between low (off) and high (on) for FIM inputs. There is a 12.5%
hysteresis above and below the configured voltage level. For example,
if the switch voltage is set to 10 volts, it switches on at 11.25 volts (10
volts plus 12.5%) and won’t switch off until it reaches 8.75 volts. The
FIM A/D convertor also has a 5% tolerance.
When the FIM is initially configured, the FIM switch voltage will come up
in its default setting of 2.447 volts. This setting will have to be updated
for most applications. The FIM Switch Voltage is configured on the first
point of the FIM. Because this voltage is applied to all points on the
FIM, the block at address 1 must remain configured. The nominal
Switch Voltage should be set at 50% of the supply voltage for the
discrete I/O points. For instance, if output voltage switched at the field
is +24 volts, the FIM voltage should be set at +12.0 volts. For DIO
marshalling panels that use optically isolated modules, including the
High Density Isolated Discrete TP, Isolated Discrete TPA, and Isolated
Discrete TPB, the switch voltage should be set at 2.3 volts (which
actually appears as 2.294). The shaded area of Figure 10.1.6 shows
the section of the DIB used to specify the FIM Switch Voltage.
WARNING
You must not delete the DIB at address 1 on any FIM.
Deleting this block establishes a condition that can cause
all other points on a FIM to lose their switch voltage after
that FIM reboots. If the DIB at address 1 is deleted, all
other points continue to operate correctly until the FIM is
rebooted. (Rebooting can be caused by events such as a
power loss or online replacement.) Following a FIM reboot,
all points lose the switch voltage that was configured in a
block that no longer exists. As a result, the switch voltage
defaults to .3 volts; and incorrect or random switching of
the inputs can occur.
FIMs used on termination panels without optical isolation
modules, including direct connect and multi-FIM TPs, must
not have the switch voltage set to less than 2.447 if any of
the input signal voltages is equal to or greater than 10
volts. Doing so could cause thermal problems and reduce
the life of the product.

IO: 10-1-9
Configuring the Transition Voltage for I/O Points (continued)

Auto Lock Þno
Output Stat > OFF
Raw State OFF
Field Contact ÞNO
false OFF
Descriptor Þ FIM Switch volt.Þ5.506 V
EVENTS ALARMS
Falling Edge ®no

CONFIG 1
Only when the address is the

first point on the DIO FIM is
the FIM Switch Volt field
available for configuror entry
Figure 10.1.6. DIB Block Configuration Screen—FIM Switch Voltage Configuration

IO: 10-1-10
Configuring an Event
A rising or falling Raw State can be used to trigger an event message.

The event message may appear on an event list. A rise occurs when
the Raw State changes from 0 to 1. A fall occurs when the Raw State
changes from 1 to 0. A value of “Yes” in the “Rise” or “Fall” field triggers
an event message. A value of “No” does not trigger an event. The
default condition is “No”. For information about configuring event lists,
see CC: 1.
Configuration screen used for configuring DIB events. The example in
Figure 10.1.7 shows a DIB block with an event triggered on the rising
edge, that is when the output changes to 1.
- To set an event type:
D Cursor to the “Event Type” field and enter the desired event type
number (1--255); then press [ENTER].
- To set an event trigger using a rising edge:
D Cursor to the “Rising Edge” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to
select Yes. Press [ENTER].
- To set an event trigger using a falling edge:
D Cursor to the “Falling Edge” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to
select the desired falling edge state. Press [ENTER].

Auto Lock Þno
Output Stat > OFF
Raw State OFF
Field Contact ÞNO
false OFF
EVENTS ALARMS
Rising Edge ®yes Event Type ®0 When ®None
Falling Edge ®no

CONFIG 1
Figure 10.1.7. DIB Block Configuration Screen—Event Configuration

IO: 10-1-11
Configuring DIB Alarms
The shaded areas of Figure 10.1.8 show the sections of the DIB Block
Configuration screen used for configuring DIB alarms. An alarm may be
generated depending on the on or off state of the Output State. If no
alarm is desired, select “None”. “None” is the default alarm condition.
Figure 10.1.8 shows a sample DIB block that generates a critical alarm
when the Output State is off.
- To configure a DIB input alarm:
1. Cursor to the “When” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to select
the condition that is to trigger the alarm. Press [ENTER].
2. Cursor to the “Alarm Type” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to
select the desired type of alarm to be generated. Press
[ENTER].

Auto Lock Þno
Output Stat > OFF
Raw State OFF
Field Contact ÞNO
false OFF
EVENTS ALARMS
Rising Edge ®no Event Type ®0 When ®OFF
Falling Edge ®no Alarm TypeÞ Crit

CONFIG 1
Figure 10.1.8. DIB Block Configuration Screen—Alarm Configuration

IO: 10-1-12
DIB Alarm Priority
If you have configured a DIB alarm, we recommend that you also

configure the alarm priority. Configure alarm priority using a numeral
from 0 to 3. An entry of 0 indicates the highest alarm priority. An entry
of 3 indicates the lowest priority. The default value is 0.
If the RS3 distributed control system generates more than one

unacknowledged critical or advisory process alarm or hardware alarm at
one time, the corresponding alarm banner for each alarm appears at the
bottom of the console screen in the order of priority. Configure the
priority of a DIB block critical or advisory process alarm or hardware
alarm in the “Priority” field on the DIB Block Configuration screen. You
can configure the default value for the “Alarm Priority” field on the Alarm

IO: 10-1-13
DIB Reference Material
A DIB Block Configuration screen and a DIB functional block diagram

are provided for reference.
DIB Block Configuration Screen
Configure a DIB block on the I/O Block Configuration screen.

Figure 10.1.9 shows the DIB Block Configuration screen. Table 10.1.2
provides a description of the DIB Block Configuration screen fields.

Auto Lock Þno
Output Stat > OFF
Raw State OFF
Field Contact ÞNO
true ON Filt Time Þ45. S Fail Safe ÞHold
false OFF
EVENTS ALARMS
Rising Edge ®no Event Type ®0 When ®ON
Falling Edge ®no Alarm TypeÞ NONE

CONFIG 1
Figure 10.1.9. DIB Block Configuration Screen

IO: 10-1-14
Table 10.1.2. Discrete Input Block (DIB) Configuration Screen Fields
Access
Level
Device Type Conf FIM device type. Display only
characters
NONE, AIB,CIB,
DIB,AOB,COB,DOB
ADS, MIB, PLCB, SIB,
RIOB, VIB, PIOB, TIB
Current block mode.

If “Manual”, the operator can directly manipulate the

Auto mode.
Raw State NA Displays the raw (unfiltered) input state. Display only
The signal value at the output of the block. Toggle (OFF, ON),
Output State Oper
Must be in Manual mode to manipulate. Clear (OFF), Set (ON)

Field Contact Conf NO, NC
User selectable signal characterization. None, D--On, D--Off,

Filt Type Conf Delay, Glitch, Settle,
Must be in Manual mode to configure. Extend
0 -- 999 seconds
Displayed only when an option other than none is Time resolution is to
Filt Time Conf
chosen for “Filt Type”. the smallest 0.25
seconds for inputs.
The signal value of the block after block

Filtered State NA Display only
conditioning.


IO: 10-1-15
Table 10.1.2. Discrete Input Block (DIB) Configuration Screen Fields (continued)
Access
Level
Used to determine the block output when the

communications to the FIM is lost.
Fail Safe Conf If “off”, the Output State is off. off, on, hold
If “on”, the Output State is on.
If “hold”, the Output State stays the same.
Any characters up to
Descriptor Conf User configured descriptor.
24
Voltage level for the transition point between low

(off) and high (on) for FIM points. The voltage
affects every point on the FIM; therefore, it is
FIM Switch desirable to have a single configuration point. This
Conf 0--39
Volt field is displayed on every DIB or DOB
configuration screen, but it can be changed only at
DIB or DOB address 1, the first DIB or DOB
address for the DIO FIM.
Rising Edge Supr Triggers an event message. no, yes
Falling Edge Supr Triggers an event message. no, yes
User selectable event type to be generated. For

Event Type Conf 0--255
information about event types, see CC: 1.
Selects the type of alarm to be generated if the

“When” condition occurs.
“None” = no message is generated.
“Adv” = an advisory process alarm is generated. None, Adv, Crit, Hard,
Alarm Type Conf
Batch
“Crit” = a critical process alarm is generated.
“Hard” = a hardware alarm is generated.
“Batch” = a batch alarm is generated.
Activate an alarm if the field state is on or off. If on

or off is selected, the “Alarm Type” field appears for
When Conf selection of the desired type of alarm to be None, ON, OFF
activated: None, Advisory (Adv), Critical (Crit), or
Hardware (Hdwr).
Indicates the FIM hardware fault. For information

Hardware
NA about alarm messages, see the Alarm Messages Display only
Alarm Code
Manual.


IO: 10-1-16
Table 10.1.2. Discrete Input Block (DIB) Configuration Screen Fields (continued)
Access
Level

Priority Conf critical and advisory process alarms. 0 indicates 0--3
highest priority, and 3 indicates lowest priority.

the block is assigned. Access to I/O blocks from a
Plant Unit Conf console may be restricted if the console has not 0--255

IO: 10-1-17
DIB Filter Options
Use one of the filter options available in the DIB to manipulate the Raw
State. This section explains the effect on the Output State relative to
the Raw State supplied by the FIM. It also provides a brief description
and timing diagram for each of the following filter types:
D None filter option
D Delay filter option
D Delay On filter option
D Delay Off filter option
D Glitch filter option
D Settle filter option
D Extend filter option
None Filter Option
If no filter is used on a DIB block, there is no effect on the block. The

Output State always equals the Raw State when the block is in Auto
mode.
Delay Filter Option
Using a delay filter on a DIB block delays the DIB by the interval
assigned in the “Filt Time” field. The delay has an effect on the DIB
block when the Raw State changes to on (0 to 1) and changes to off (1
to 0) (0 = off, 1= on). If the Raw State changes but does not maintain
that state for greater than or equal to the “Filt Time”, the Output State
does not change.
Figure 10.1.10 shows the effect of a delay filter used on a DIB block.
different times.

IO: 10-1-18
Delay Filter Option (continued)
T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
1
Raw
State
0
1
Output
State
0
Filt Time duration

< duration duration
duration>Fi Filt < >
TIME lt Time Time Filt Filt
Time Time
Figure 10.1.10. Delay Filter Option
Table 10.1.3. Delay Filter Option

T1 Raw State changes to on condition. Output State remains off.
T2 Raw State remains on. Output State changes to on in response to Raw

State changing to on at T1 plus interval
assigned in “Filt Time” field of DIB.
T3 Raw State changes to off condition. Output State remains on.
T4 Raw State changes to on condition. Output State remains on because the duration
of the Raw State off condition was less than the
Filt Time.
T5 Raw State changes to off condition. Output State remains on because there has
been no uninterrupted off Raw State condition
greater than or equal to the Filt Time.
T6 Raw State remains off. Output State changes to off when the Raw
State off exceeds the Filt Time.
* The Output State is equal to the Filtered State when the block is in Auto Mode.

IO: 10-1-19
Delay On (D--On) Filter Option
The D--On filter delays the DIB output by the interval assigned in the
“Filt Time” field. The delay has an effect only when the Raw State
changes to on (0 to 1). The Output State responds immediately when
the Raw State changes to off (1 to 0).
Figure 10.1.11 shows the effect of a D--On filter used on a DIB block.
different times.
T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5
1
Raw
State
0
Output 1
State
duration
TIME = Filt Time duration
< Filt Time
Figure 10.1.11. Delay--on Filter Option

IO: 10-1-20
Delay On (D--On) Filter Option (continued)
Table 10.1.4. Delay--on Filter Option

T1 Raw State changes to on. Output State remains off.

Raw State changing to ON at T1 plus interval
T3 Raw State changes to off. Output State changes to off. Output State
always changes immediately to off in response
to Raw State changing to off.
T4 Raw State changes to on. Output State remains off and begins delay
interval.
T5 Raw State changes to off. Output State remains off. Delay is canceled
when the Raw State is changed to off.

IO: 10-1-21
Delay Off (D--Off) Filter Option
The delay off filter delays the DIB Output State by the interval assigned
in the “Filt Time” field. The delay has an effect only when the Raw State
is changing to off (1 to 0). The Output State responds immediately
when the Raw State changes to on (0 to 1).
Figure 10.1.12 shows the effect of a delay off filter used on a DIB block.
different times.
T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
1
Raw
State 0
1
Output
State 0
duration
TIME = Filt duration
Time < Filt Time
Figure 10.1.12. Delay--off Filter Option

IO: 10-1-22
Delay Off (D--Off) Filter Option (continued)
Table 10.1.5. Delay--off Filter Option

T1 Raw State changes to on. Output State changes to on. Output State
always changes immediately to on in response
to the Raw State changing to on.
T2 Raw State changes to off. Output State remains on and begins delay
interval.
T3 Raw State remains off. Output State changes to off in response to the
Raw State changing to off at T2 plus interval
T4 Raw State changes to on. Output State changes to on. Output State
always changes immediately to on in response
to the Raw State changing to on.
T5 Raw State changes to off. Output State remains on and begins delay
interval.
T6 Raw State changes to on. Output State remains on. Delay is canceled
when the Raw State is changed to on.

IO: 10-1-23
Glitch Filter Option
A glitch filter holds the DIB Output State each time that the Output State
changes for a minimum time as specified in the “Filt Time” field. If the
Raw State changes state during the hold time, the Output State
responds to that change after the hold expires and again holds for the
time defined by “Filt Time”. In the event of multiple Raw State changes
during the hold time, the Output State responds to the first and last Raw
State changes only.
Figure 10.1.13 shows the effect of a glitch filter used on a DIB block.
different times.
T2 T4 T6 T10 T11
T0 T1 T3 T5 T7 T8 T9 T12 T13
1
Raw
State
0
1
Output
State
0
duration
TIME = Filt Time
Figure 10.1.13. Glitch Filter Option

IO: 10-1-24
Glitch Filter Option (continued)
Table 10.1.6. Glitch Filter Option

T1 Raw State rises to on. Output State changes to on. Duration defined by
Filt Time begins.
T2 Raw State falls to off. Output State remains on in response to T1 for the
duration of the Filt Time.
T3 Raw State remains off. Output State changes to off in response to Raw
T4 Raw State rises to on. Output State remains off in response to T2 for the
T5 Raw State remains on. Output State changes to on in response to the Raw
State rising to on at T4.
T7 Raw State rises to on. Output State remains on in response to T4 for the
T8 Raw State remains on. Output State changes to off in response to the Raw
T11 Raw State rises to on. Output State remains on in response to T7 for the
T12 Raw State remains on. Output State changes to off in response to the Raw

IO: 10-1-25
Settle Filter Option
A settle filter holds the DIB output change until a Raw State of the same
state is maintained for a minimum time equal to “Filt Time”. At that time
a change in the Raw State causes an immediate change in the Output
State. Figure 10.1.14 shows the effect of a settle filter used on a DIB
block. Table 10.1.7 describes the Raw State effect on the Output State
at different times.
This filter type creates a state where the Output State refuses to change
until the Raw State stays equal to the Output State for the filter time.
Once the Raw State stays equal to the Output State for the filter time,
the Output State will change immediately when the Raw State changes.
Note that when the Raw State remains 0 at T10, the output will remain 1
forever (until another Raw State change). Glitches less than the filter
time will have this effect, which may or may not be desirable.
T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10
1
Raw
State
0
1
Output
State
0

duration
= Filt Time = Filt > Filt Time
> Filt Time
TIME Time
< Filt Time < Filt Time < Filt Time
Figure 10.1.14. Settle Filter Option

IO: 10-1-26
Settle Filter Option (continued)
Table 10.1.7. Settle Filter Option

T1 Raw State changes to on. Output State changes to on immediately.
the interval between T1 and T2 was equal to Filt
Time.
T3 Raw State changes to on. Output State remains off because the interval
T4 Raw State changes to off. Output State remains off.

the interval between T4 and T5 was equal to the
Filt Time.
T6 Raw State changes to off. Output State remains on because the interval
T7 Raw State changes to on. Output State remains on.
the interval between T7 and T8 was greater than
the Filt Time.

the interval between T8 and T9 was greater than or
equal to the Filt Time.
T10 Raw State changes to off. Output State remains on because the Output State
was not equal to the Raw State for the filter time.
The Output State will remain different from the Raw
State forever until the Raw State changes.

IO: 10-1-27
Extend Filter Option
An extend filter holds the DIB Output State for the time assigned in the
“Filt Time” field. Subsequent Raw State changes which occur within the
output hold time are ignored, with the exception of the most recent Raw
State at the end of the hold to which the Output State responds.
Figure 10.1.15 shows the effect of an extend filter used on a DIB block.
different times.
T2
T0 T1 T3 T4 T5 T6
Raw
State
0
1
Output
State
0
duration duration
TIME = Filt Time = Filt Time
Figure 10.1.15. Extend Filter Option

IO: 10-1-28
Extend Filter Option (continued)
Table 10.1.8. Extend Filter Option

T1 Raw State rises to on. Output State changes to on immediately.
T2 Raw State falls to off. Output State remains on in response to Raw

State at T1 for the duration of Filt Time.
T3 Raw State remains off. Output State changes to off in response to

Raw State at T2.
T4 thru T5 Raw State changes of various durations. Output State remains off in response to Raw
State at T2 for the duration of Filt Time.
T6 Raw State changes to on. Output State changes to on immediately

because interval between T3 and T5 was
equal to Filt Time. The Raw State changes
which occurred during the interval T4 through
T5 were ignored. The Output State will
respond only to the Raw State present at the
end of or after the Filt Time.

IO: 10-1-29
DIB Functional Diagram
Figure 10.1.16 shows the Discrete Input Block functional diagram. All
items within the dotted line reside in the DIB software.
Filtered State Output State

Raw State
Off Off
Off
FIM MAN To
NC
Inverter Debounce CB
Filter
AUTO
NO
Alarms
Events
Figure 10.1.16. DIB Functional Block Diagram

IO: 10-2-1
Section 2:
Configuring a Discrete Output Block (DOB)
Discrete Output Blocks (DOBs) prepare a specific discrete state for

output to the field. The DOB performs discrete output signal storage
and addressing, and provides for inverting output relative to input.
This section provides the following information for configuring a DOB

block:
D Configuring the DOB field contact
D Configuring Output Hold
D Configuring the FIM switch voltage
D Setting the Fail Safe
D Configuring DOB Alarms
D DOB reference material
— DOB Block Configuration screen and table of screen fields
— DOB functional block diagram
RS3: Configuring Discrete Blocks Configuring a Discrete Output Block (DOB)

IO: 10-2-2
Configuring the DOB Field Contact
You can configure a DOB to allow inversion of the field contact position.
The shaded area of Figure 10.2.1 shows the section of the DOB Block
Configuration screen that is used for configuring the DOB field contact
position. To configure the field contact, the block must be in Manual
mode.

“Field Contact” field displays “NO” to indicate the field contact is
normally opened. “NC” indicates the field contact is normally closed.
This option allows optional logic inversion.
2. Cursor to the “Contact Type” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to
select to the desired field contact. Press [ENTER].

Address =13A102 Device Type DOB
Block Tag Þ Block Type ÞDOB Mode ®MANUAL
Auto Lock Þno
Source Þ
Addr
Contact Type ÞNO
Source State OFF Output Hold ÞNONE Output State>OFF
Message Pair Þ*1 FIM Switch volt. 5.506 V Fail Safe ÞHold
true ON
false OFF

CONFIG 1
Figure 10.2.1. DOB Block Configuration Screen—Contact Type Configuration

IO: 10-2-3
Configuring Output Hold
You can delay the DOB output state for a designated hold time
depending on the output hold configuration. The block output state can
be held on (Off), held off (On), set to pulse (Pulse), or not held at all
(None). “None” is the default selection. If you choose On, Off, or Pulse
options, a “Hold Time” field appears. In the “Hold Time” field, configure
the number of seconds, from 0 to 511, that the output state is to hold.
To configure output hold, the block must be in Manual mode.
Configuration screen used for configuring output hold for a DOB. The
block in Figure 10.2.2 has an On output hold configured for 5 seconds.
- To set the output hold:
2. Cursor to the “Output Hold” field and press [NEXT OPTION] to
select the desired hold condition. Press [ENTER]. If an output
hold is selected, the “Hold Time” field appears.
3. Cursor to the “Hold Time” field and enter the number of seconds
for which the output state is to be held. Press [ENTER].

Auto Lock Þno
Source Þ
Addr
Contact Type ÞNO
Source State OFF Output Hold ÞON Output State>OFF

Hold Time Þ5. S
true ON
false OFF

CONFIG 1
Figure 10.2.2. DOB Block Configuration Screen—Output Hold Configuration

IO: 10-2-4
Configuring Output Hold (continued)
stay on. Table 10.2.1 describes the field input effect on the block output
at different times.
T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
1
Block Input
0
1
Block Output
0
Hold
TIME Time Hold
Time
Figure 10.2.3. Output Hold Off (Delay On)
Table 10.2.1. Output Hold Off (Delay On)
T1 Block input changes to on condition. Output remains off because the hold time
interval has not elapsed.
T2 Block input remains on. Hold time interval is Output changes to on condition in response to
complete. the block input change to on at T1 and the
interval assigned in “Hold Time” field of DOB
has expired.
T3 Block input changes to off condition. Output changes to off immediately.
T4 Block input changes to on condition. Output remains off because the hold time
interval has not elapsed.
T5 Block input changes to off condition. Output remains off because the input was not
in the on state for the duration of the hold
time.

IO: 10-2-5
stay off. Table 10.2.2 describes the field input effect on the block output
at different times.
T0 T1 T2 T3
1
Block Input
0
1
Block Output
0
TIME Hold
Time
Figure 10.2.4. Output Hold On (Delay Off)
Table 10.2.2. Output Hold On (Delay Off)
T1 Block input changes to on condition. Output changes to on condition immediately.
T2 Block input changes to off condition. Output remains on for the duration of the hold
time.
T3 Block input remains off. Output changes to off condition because the
hold time interval is complete.

IO: 10-2-6
Figure 10.2.5 shows the effect of configuring the “Output Hold” field for
the pulse option. Table 10.2.3 describes the field input effect on the
block output at different times.
T0 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
1
Block Input
0
1
Block Output
0
TIME Hold Hold

Time Time
Figure 10.2.5. Pulse
Table 10.2.3. Pulse
T2 Block input remains on. Output changes to off condition when the hold time
T3 Block input changes to off condition. Output remains off. This resets the hold time.
T5 Block input changes to off condition. Output changes to off condition. Because the hold
time interval was not complete the output follows the
input.

IO: 10-2-7

DOB block. The shaded area of Figure 10.2.6 shows the section of the
DOB Block Configuration screen used for assigning message pairs to a
DOB.
One hundred standard message pairs and 155 user message pairs are
available. Designate a standard message pair with an asterisk. The
default message pair is standard message pair number 1 (*1) that
displays “ON” when the designated value is true and “OFF” when the
- To assign a message pair to a DOB block:
D Cursor to the “Message Pair” field, enter the desired message
message pair), then press [ENTER]. The true and false
message pair statements appear in the “Source State” and
“Output State” fields.
D Repeatedly press [NEXT OPTION] to quickly scroll the available
message pair options; or enter the first letter of the desired
option, such as the letter S for the Start/Stop messages, and use
[NEXT OPTION] to scroll the messages beginning with the
selected letter.

Auto Lock Þno
Source Þ
Addr
Contact Type ÞNO
true ON
false OFF

CONFIG 1
Figure 10.2.6. DOB Block Configuration Screen—Message Pair Configuration

IO: 10-2-8
Configuring the Transition Voltage for I/O Points
FIM Switch Voltage specifies the voltage level for the transition point
between low (off) and high (on) for FIM inputs. There is a 12.5%
hysteresis above and below the configured voltage level. For example,
if the switch voltage is set to 10 volts, it switches on at 11.25 volts (10
volts plus 12.5%) and won’t switch off until it reaches 8.75 volts. The
FIM A/D convertor also has a 5% tolerance.
When the FIM is initially configured, the FIM switch voltage will come up
in its default setting of 2.447 volts. This setting will have to be updated
for most applications. The FIM Switch Voltage is configured on the first
point of the FIM. Because this voltage is applied to all points on the
FIM, the block at address 1 must remain configured. The nominal
Switch Voltage should be set at 50% of the supply voltage for the
discrete I/O points. For instance, if output voltage switched at the field
is +24 volts, the FIM voltage should be set at +12.0 volts. For DIO
marshalling panels that use optically isolated modules, including the
High Density Isolated Discrete TP, Isolated Discrete TPA, and Isolated
Discrete TPB, the switch voltage should be set at 2.3 volts (which
actually appears as 2.294). The shaded area of Figure 10.2.7 shows
the section of the DOB used to specify the FIM Switch Voltage.
WARNING
You must not delete the DIB at address 1 on any FIM.
Deleting this block establishes a condition that can cause
all other points on a FIM to lose their switch voltage after
that FIM reboots. If the DIB at address 1 is deleted, all
other points continue to operate correctly until the FIM is
rebooted. (Rebooting can be caused by events such as a
power loss or online replacement.) Following a FIM reboot,
all points lose the switch voltage that was configured in a
block that no longer exists. As a result, the switch voltage
defaults to .3 volts; and incorrect or random switching of
the inputs can occur.
FIMs used on termination panels without optical isolation
modules, including direct connect and multi-FIM TPs, must
not have the switch voltage set to less than 2.447 if any of
the input signal voltages is equal to or greater than 10
volts. Doing so could cause thermal problems and reduce
the life of the product.

IO: 10-2-9
Configuring the Transition Voltage for I/O Points (continued)

Auto Lock Þno
Source Þ
Addr
Contact Type ÞNO
Message Pair Þ*1 FIM Switch volt. Þ5.506 V Fail Safe ÞHold
true ON
false OFF

CONFIG 1
Only when the address is the

first point on the DIO FIM is
the FIM Switch Volt field
available for configuror entry
Figure 10.2.7. DOB Block Configuration Screen—FIM Switch Volt Configuration

IO: 10-2-10
loss of communication with the FIM.
D “Hold” indicates that the FIM holds the last valid output value if
communication is lost. “Hold” is the default selection.
D “Off” indicates the FIM turns the output off if communication is
lost.
Configuration screen used for setting the DOB fail safe.

Auto Lock Þno
Source Þ
Addr
Contact Type ÞNO
true ON
false OFF

CONFIG 1
Figure 10.2.8. DOB Block Configuration Screen—Fail Safe Configuration

IO: 10-2-11
Configuring DOB Alarms
Configuration screen used for configuring the alarm priority for DOB
hardware alarms. If the RS3 generates more than one
the order of priority. Configure the priority of a DOB block hardware
alarm in the “Priority” field on the DOB Block Configuration screen.
Configure alarm priority using a numeral from 0 to 3. An entry of 0

priority. The default value is 0. You can configure the default value on
the Alarm Configuration screen.

Auto Lock Þno
Source Þ
Addr
Contact Type ÞNO
true ON
false OFF

CONFIG 1
Figure 10.2.9. DOB Block Configuration Screen—Alarm Configuration

IO: 10-2-12
DOB Reference Material
A DOB Block Configuration screen and a DOB functional block diagram

are provided for reference.
DOB Block Configuration Screen
Configure a DOB block on the I/O Block Configuration screen.

Figure 10.2.10 shows the DOB Block Configuration screen.
Table 10.2.4 provides a description of the DOB block configuration
screen fields.

Auto Lock Þno
Source Þ
Addr
Contact Type ÞNO
true ON
false OFF

CONFIG 1
Figure 10.2.10. DOB Block Configuration Screen

IO: 10-2-13
Table 10.2.4. Discrete Output Block (DOB) Configuration Screen Fields
Access
Level
Device Type Conf FIM device type. Display only
characters
NONE, AIB,CIB, DIB,

AOB,COB, DOB,
ADS, MIB, PLCB, SIB,
RIOB, VIB, PIOB, TIB
Current block mode.


Auto mode.
mode.
The tag of the block from which the input

originated. The source tag may be entered as a
Source block tag, block link (tag/x), or the address of the Up to 16 alphanumeric
Conf
Addr characters
source block. After entering the source tag, the
address of the block appears below the tag.
Source State NA The value being received from the block. Display only
User--defined block input to output relationship.

Contact Type Conf NO, NC
User selectable signal characterization.

Output Hold Conf NONE, On, Off, Pulse
User--assigned signal characterization time in

seconds. This field appears only when “Output
Hold Time Conf Hold” is selected. 0--511 seconds
The signal value at the output of the block. TOGGLE (OFF, ON),
Output State Oper CLEAR (OFF), SET
Must be in Manual mode to configure. (ON)


IO: 10-2-14
Table 10.2.4. Discrete Output Block (DOB) Configuration Screen Fields (continued)
Access
Level
Voltage level for the transition point between low

or off and high or on for FIM points. The voltage
affects every point on the FIM. This field is
FIM Switch Volt Conf displayed on every DIB or DOB configuration 0--39
screen, but it can only be changed at DIB or DOB
address 1, the first DIB or DOB address for the
DIO FIM.
Used to determine the point value when the

communication to the FIM is lost.
Fail Safe Conf off, hold

If “off”, the output state is turned off by the FIM.
If “hold”, the output state stays the same.
Indicates an FIC hardware fault. For information

Hardware on alarm messages, see Alarm Messages
NA Display only
Alarm Code
Manual.
Assigns alarm priority to hardware alarms. 0

Priority Conf indicates highest priority, 3 indicates lowest 0--3
priority.
Indicates the user defined group of blocks to

which the block is assigned. Access to I/O
blocks from a console may be restricted if the
Plant Unit Conf console has not been assigned to the I/O block 0--255
plant unit.

IO: 10-2-15
DOB Functional Diagram
Figure 10.2.11 shows the DOB functional block diagram. All items
within the dotted line reside in the DOB software.
Console Keyboard
Input State Output State
Off Off
MAN
From Output NC Inverter FIM

CB Hold
AUTO
NO
Figure 10.2.11. DOB Functional Block Diagram

IO: Index-1
RS3t
Index
Symbols Communication Connect Card III, 1-3-12

Communication Termination Panel II, 1-3-13
Controller Processor card slot, 1-3-4– 1-3-5
# of Variables field, HOB, 8-2-21 discrete I/O point, 1-3-21– 1-3-22
MAIO, 1-3-16
within ControlFiles, 1-3-4
Numbers addressing card cages, 1-3-6
analog, 1-3-10
card slots, 1-3-6– 1-3-8
0% Value field contact, 1-3-11
AOB, 2-2-8 addressing consoles, 1-3-2
HOB, 8-2-11 addressing I/O points, 1-3-14– 1-3-18
100% Value field analog, 1-3-15
AOB, 2-2-8 contact, 1-3-18
HOB, 8-2-11 pulse, 1-3-17
addressing PeerWay nodes, 1-3-2– 1-3-3
Adv Dev field, MIB, 7-2-6
A Adv High field
AIB, 2-1-13
AB Highway Station # field, PLC Configuration MIB, 7-2-5
screen, 9-2-13, 9-4-4 TIB, 4-2-6
access arrows, 1-2-3– 1-2-4 Adv Low field
accessing HOB screens, 8-2-4 AIB, 2-1-13
Actual Value field MIB, 7-2-5
AOB, 2-2-7 TIB, 4-2-6
HOB, 8-2-10 Adv Rate--Chg field, MIB, 7-2-6
Addr field advisory process alarms, AIB, 2-1-9
HOB, 8-2-15 AIB, 1-1-2
Transmitter Configuration screen, 8-1-44– alarm configuration, 2-1-8– 2-1-9
8-1-45 configuration hints, 2-3-2– 2-3-3
Transmitter Status screen, 8-1-24 configuring, 2-1-1– 2-1-14
Address field filter configuration, 2-1-2
AIB, 2-1-12 functional diagram, 2-1-15
AOB, 2-2-7 I/O Block Configuration screen, 2-1-11– 2-1-14
CIB, 6-1-11 instrument bias configuration, 2-1-7
COB, 6-2-10 reference material, 2-1-11– 2-1-15
DIB, 10-1-14 signal characterization configuration, 2-1-3–
DOB, 10-2-13 2-1-5
HOB, 8-2-10, 8-2-20 Al DdBand field
MIB, 7-2-3 AIB, 2-1-14
PIOB, 3-2-3 MIB, 7-2-5
PLC, 9-3-13 TIB, 4-2-6
SIB, 8-1-14 Alarm Cond field, CIB, 6-1-9, 6-1-12
TIB, 4-2-4 alarm configuration
VIB, 8-1-18 AIB, 2-1-8– 2-1-9
addressing, 1-3-1– 1-3-16 AOB, 2-2-4
RS3: I/O Block Configuration Index

IO: Index-2
CIB, 6-1-9 analog function type PIOB, outputting a signal,

COB, 6-2-8 3-1-6, 3-2-28– 3-2-31
DIB, 10-1-11 analog I/O point addressing, 1-3-15
DOB, 10-2-11 Analog Input Block. See AIB
MIB, 7-1-11– 7-1-12 Analog Output Block. See AOB
PLC communication, 9-5-19 analog output PIOB, 3-2-2
PLC general, 9-5-18 applications, 3-1-6
alarm deadband configuration, 3-2-28– 3-2-31
CIB, 2-1-10 loader applications, 3-1-7– 3-1-8, 3-2-32,
MIB, 7-1-12 3-2-36– 3-2-40
SIB, 8-1-12 Analog Val field, Transmitter Status screen, 8-1-24
Alarm Descriptor field, PLCB, 9-3-17– 9-3-18 AOB, 1-1-2
Alarm field, Block Directory screen, 1-4-3 alarm configuration, 2-2-4
alarm limits configuration hints, 2-3-2– 2-3-3
MIB, 7-1-12 I/O Block Configuration screen, 2-2-5– 2-2-7
SIB, 8-1-12 output action configuration, 2-2-2
alarm low cutoff, SIB, 8-1-12 reference material, 2-2-5– 2-2-8
alarm PLC, 9-3-17– 9-3-20 Auto Lock field
alarm priority AIB, 2-1-12
AIB, 2-1-9– 2-1-10 AOB, 2-2-7
AOB, 2-2-4 CIB, 6-1-11
CIB, 6-1-9 COB, 6-2-10
HOB, 8-2-9 DIB, 10-1-14
MIB, 7-1-10 DOB, 10-2-13
SIB, 8-1-11 HOB, 8-2-10
Alarm Priority field MIB, 7-2-3
AOB, 2-2-4, 2-2-8 PIOB, 3-2-3
COB, 6-2-8, 6-2-11 RIOB, 5-2-2
HOB, 8-2-9, 8-2-11 SIB, 8-1-14
PIOB, 3-2-3 TIB, 4-2-4
PLCB, 9-3-14 VIB, 8-1-18
RIOB, 5-2-4
SIB, 8-1-11, 8-1-15
VIB, 8-1-19 B
Alarm Set field, Transmitter Status screen, 8-1-24
Alarm Type field Backup field, RIOB, 5-1-3, 5-1-6, 5-2-2
CIB, 6-1-9 backup modes, 5-1-6
PLCB, 9-3-17– 9-3-18 backup option, 5-1-6
alarm types Backup Status field, RIOB, 5-1-6, 5-1-7, 5-2-3
deviation MIB, 7-1-12 Base Units field, Transmitter Configuration screen,
instrument CIB, 2-1-8– 2-1-9 8-1-46
instrument MIB, 7-1-10 Baud Bits field, PLC Configuration screen, 9-2-13
process CIB, 2-1-9– 2-1-10 baud rate jumper, 9-5-1
process MIB, 7-1-10 binary code and hexadecimal code relationship,
rate of change MIB, 7-1-12 9-3-12
Allen--Bradley binary output loader PIOB, 3-1-7, 3-2-32– 3-2-35
configuration, 9-1-8, 9-1-9, 9-1-10, 9-1-11 binary--to--hexadecimal conversion chart, 9-3-12
modules, 9-2-8 bit descriptor, PLC, 9-3-17– 9-3-20
PLC 2, 9-3-5, 9-5-12– 9-5-13 bit designators, PLC, 9-3-12
PLC 3, 9-5-14– 9-5-15 Block bits, PLC, 9-3-3, 9-3-15
PLC 5, 9-3-6, 9-5-16– 9-5-17 Block Directory screen, 1-4-2– 1-4-3
PLC configuration, 9-5-10 Block field
protocol, 9-1-6 Block Directory screen, 1-4-3
redundancy, 9-4-5 Block Status screen, 1-4-5
analog blocks Block Out field
configuration hints, 2-3-1– 2-3-2 AIB, 2-1-12
configuration troubleshooting, 2-3-1 HOB, 8-2-15, 8-2-20
configuring, 2-1-1– 2-1-7, 2-3-1– 2-3-2 MIB, 7-1-14, 7-2-3
Analog Card Cage, 1-3-7, 1-3-9– 1-3-10, 5-1-3 PIOB. See Block Output field
FIC (Field Interface Card) slot addressing, SIB, 8-1-14
1-3-10 TIB, 4-2-4

IO: Index-3
Transmitter Configuration screen, 8-1-44– card slot addressing, 1-3-7, 1-3-9

8-1-45 contact, 1-3-11
Transmitter Status screen, 8-1-24 Change Xmtr Address command, 8-1-31– 8-1-32
VIB, 8-1-18 CIB, 1-1-2, 6-1-1– 6-1-24
block output configuration, MIB, 7-1-14 alarm configuration, 6-1-9
Block Output field, PIOB, 3-2-3 configuration, 6-1-1– 6-1-24
Block Status screen, 1-4-4– 1-4-5 configuration hints, 6-3-1
Block Tag field descriptor configuration, 6-1-6
AIB, 2-1-12 event configuration, 6-1-8
AOB, 2-2-7 fail safe configuration, 6-1-7
CIB, 6-1-11 field contact configuration, 6-1-4
COB, 6-2-10 filter configuration, 6-1-2– 6-1-3
DIB, 10-1-14 filter options, 6-1-3, 6-1-13– 6-1-23
DOB, 10-2-13 functional diagram, 6-1-23
HOB, 8-2-10, 8-2-15, 8-2-20 I/O Block Configuration screen, 6-1-10– 6-1-12
MIB, 7-2-3 message pair configuration, 6-1-5
PIOB, 3-2-3 reference material, 6-1-10– 6-1-24
PLCB, 9-3-13 CJC Link field, thermocouple sensor TIB, 4-2-11
SIB, 8-1-14 CJC sensor TIB, 4-2-10
TIB, 4-2-4 configuring, 4-2-12, 4-2-18
Transmitter Configuration screen, 8-1-44– CJC Value field, thermocouple sensor TIB, 4-2-11
8-1-45 COB, 1-1-2, 6-2-1– 6-2-3, 6-2-7– 6-2-12
Transmitter Status screen, 8-1-24 alarm configuration, 6-2-8
VIB, 8-1-18 configuration, 6-2-1– 6-2-4, 6-2-7– 6-2-12
Block Type field, 1-2-2 configuration hints, 6-3-1
AIB, 2-1-12 field contact configuration, 6-2-2
AOB, 2-2-7 functional diagram, 6-2-12
CIB, 6-1-11 I/O Block Configuration screen, 6-2-9– 6-2-11
COB, 6-2-10 message pair configuration, 6-2-7
DIB, 10-1-14 output hold configuration, 6-2-3
DOB, 10-2-13 reference material, 6-2-9– 6-2-12
HOB, 8-2-10 coils, 9-3-2
MIB, 7-2-3 cold junction compensator
PIOB, 3-2-3 application, 4-1-4– 4-1-5
PLCB, 9-3-13 configuration, 4-2-10– 4-2-12
RIOB, 5-2-2 ranges, 4-2-7
SIB, 8-1-14 summary, 4-2-18
TIB, 4-2-4 Comm Fail field
VIB, 8-1-18 analog output PIOB, 3-2-31
blocks in alarm, 1-4-4– 1-4-5 loader application with binary , 3-2-35
Blocks/Eval Time field, PLC Configuration screen, loader applications with analog , 3-2-39
9-2-14 pulse output PIOB, 3-2-21, 3-2-25, 3-2-27
Comm field, pulse output PIOB, 3-2-23
Comm Idle Rate field, PLC Configuration screen,
C 9-2-14
Comm Port field, PLC Configuration screen, 9-2-13
Command error messages, 8-1-26
cable requirements, Allen--Bradley PLCs, 9-5-7 Command field
Cage Line field, RIOB, 5-2-2 HOB, 8-2-15, 8-2-22
Cal Const field, MIB, 7-2-4 SIB, 8-1-30– 8-1-31
Cal Mode field, TIB, 4-2-5 Transmitter Configuration screen, 8-1-46
Calibrate field Transmitter Status screen, 8-1-25
AIB, 2-1-12 communication alarms, 9-5-19
AOB, 2-2-7 Communication Connect Card III, addressing,
HOB, 8-2-11 1-3-12
MIB, 7-2-4 Communication FlexTerm, 9-1-2
SIB, 8-1-15 Communication Termination Panel II, addressing,
card cage 1-3-13
addressing, 1-3-6, 1-3-7 compensator RTD application, 4-1-4– 4-1-5
analog, 1-3-10 configuring a Discrete Input Block (DIB), 10-1-1
card slot, 1-3-6– 1-3-8 configuring dead time, HOB, 8-2-25

IO: Index-4
configuring I/O blocks

hints, 1-5-1
D
troubleshooting, 1-5-1
configuror arrow, 1-2-3– 1-2-4
consecutive read, 9-2-3 Damping field, 8-1-40
consecutive write, 9-2-3 Transmitter Configuration screen, 8-1-46
console, addressing, 1-3-2 Transmitter Status screen, 8-1-24
Cont Comm ERR field, HOB, 8-2-11, 8-2-15 Daniels Chromatograph, 9-1-6
contact blocks Data Bits field, PLC Configuration screen, 9-2-13
configuration hints, 6-3-1 data highway, 9-1-7, 9-5-8
troubleshooting, 6-3-1 Data Type field, PLCB, 9-1-4, 9-3-13, 9-3-23
Contact Card Cage, 1-3-11 Date field
FIC (Field Interface Card) slot addressing, HOB, 8-2-15, 8-2-20
1-3-11 Transmitter Configuration screen, 8-1-45
contact FICs (Field Interface Cards), 1-3-18 Transmitter Status screen, 8-1-24
Contact I/O Card Rev field dates, assigning, 8-2-24
CIB, 6-1-12 Dead Time field, HOB, 8-2-15, 8-2-21
COB, 6-2-11 Deadband field, SIB, 8-1-16
contact I/O point addressing, 1-3-18 deadbands, AIB alarms, 2-1-10
Contact Input Block. See CIB Debounce field
contact input signals, PIOB, 3-2-4, 3-2-6 contact pulse input PIOB, 3-2-6
Contact Output Block. See COB PIOB, 3-2-6
contact pulse input PIOB, configuring, 3-2-6 default display scaling, 4-2-15
Contact Type field Delay field, CIB, 6-1-3
COB, 6-2-2, 6-2-10 delay filter, CIB, 6-1-13
DOB, 10-2-13 delay filter option, DIB, 10-1-17, 10-1-18
control loop, 1-1-4– 1-1-6 Delay Off field, CIB, 6-1-3
Delay Off filter option, DIB, 10-1-21, 10-1-22
block roles, 1-1-4
Delay On field, CIB, 6-1-3
scaling, 1-1-6
Delay On filter option, DIB, 10-1-19, 10-1-20
values, 1-1-6
delay--off filter, CIB, 6-1-16– 6-1-17
Control Mode field, HOB, 8-2-15
delay--on filter, CIB, 6-1-15
ControlBlock
Desc field
definition, 1-1-5
HOB, 8-2-15, 8-2-20
linking to thermocouple sensor TIB, 4-2-18
Transmitter Configuration screen, 8-1-45
relationship to input/output blocks, 1-1-5 Transmitter Status screen, 8-1-24
role in control loop, 1-1-4 descriptor, DIB, 10-1-6
ControlFiles, addressing within, 1-3-4– 1-3-16 Descriptor field, 6-1-6
Controller Address field, PLC Configuration screen, CIB, 6-1-11
9-2-13 DIB, 10-1-15
Controller Processor, addressing, 1-3-4– 1-3-8 MIB, 7-2-4
conversion chart binary--to--hexadecimal, 9-3-12 TIB, 4-2-5
counter function type descriptors, assigning, 8-2-24
ControlBlock, 3-2-13– 3-2-14, 3-2-16 Dev Alarm Val field, HOB, 8-2-15, 8-2-21
PIOB counting pulses, 3-2-13, 3-2-16– 3-2-17 Dev field, MIB, 7-1-11– 7-1-12
PIOB outputting pulses, 3-2-26– 3-2-27 Deviation Alarm field
Crit Dev field, MIB, 7-2-5 coordinating with Dead Time field, 8-2-26
Crit High field HOB, 8-2-11
AIB, 2-1-13 Deviation Alarm Value, 8-2-26
MIB, 7-2-5 deviation alarms, MIB, 7-1-12
TIB, 4-2-6 Device Timeout field, PLC Configuration screen,
Crit Low field 9-2-14
AIB, 2-1-13 Device Type field
MIB, 7-2-5 DIB, 10-1-14
TIB, 4-2-6 DOB, 10-2-13
Crit Rate--Chg field, MIB, 7-2-5 HOB, 8-2-10
critical process alarms, AIB, 2-1-9 PLC Configuration screen, 9-2-13
Current field, analog output PIOB, 3-2-31 Diagnostic Status field

IO: Index-5
HOB, 8-2-15 End Fixed Current command, 8-1-30

Transmitter Status screen, 8-1-25 Eng Max field, 1-1-7
DIB, 1-1-3, 10-1-1– 10-1-28 AIB, 2-1-12
alarms, 10-1-11 MIB, 7-2-3
assigning message pair, 10-1-5 pulse input PIOB, 3-2-10
configuring, 10-1-1– 10-1-28 TIB, 4-2-5, 4-2-13
delay filter option, 10-1-17, 10-1-18 Eng Units field, 1-1-7
Delay Off filter option, 10-1-21 AIB, 2-1-12
Delay On filter option, 10-1-19, 10-1-20 AOB, 2-2-7
descriptor, 10-1-6 HOB, 8-2-11
event, 10-1-10 MIB, 7-2-3
Extended filter option, 10-1-27– 10-1-29 pulse input PIOB, 3-2-10
field contact, 10-1-4 SIB, 8-1-14
filter, 10-1-2 TIB, 4-2-5
filter options, 10-1-17 VIB, 8-1-18
functional diagram, 10-1-29 Eng Zero field, 1-1-7
Glitch filter option, 10-1-23, 10-1-24 AIB, 2-1-12
I/O Block Configuration screen, 10-1-13 pulse input PIOB, 3-2-10
none filter option, 10-1-17 TIB, 4-2-5, 4-2-13
reference material, 10-1-13 event, DIB, 10-1-10
setting the fail safe, 10-1-7 event message, configuring, 6-1-8
Settle filter option, 10-1-25, 10-1-26 Event Type field
transition voltage for inputs, 10-1-8, 10-1-9 CIB, 6-1-8, 6-1-12
Dig PV Read field, HOB, 8-2-11 DIB, 10-1-15
Digital Val field, Transmitter Status screen, 8-1-25 Ext. Res field
discrete bit map RTD sensor TIB, 4-2-9
Allen--Bradley PLC 2, 9-3-5 TIB, 4-2-9
Allen--Bradley PLC 5, 9-3-7 Extend field, CIB, 6-1-3
GE Series 6 (Modicon), 9-3-4 extend filter, CIB, 6-1-21– 6-1-23
discrete bits, 9-3-3 Extended filter option, DIB, 10-1-27, 10-1-28
discrete I/O point, addressing, 1-3-21– 1-3-22
Discrete Input Block. See DIB
Discrete Links screen, 9-3-15 F
Discrete Output Block. See DOB
display scaling, 1-1-7 Fail Safe field
default, 4-2-15 CIB, 6-1-7, 6-1-11
other, 4-2-16 DIB, 10-1-7, 10-1-15
TIB, 4-2-13– 4-2-16 DOB, 10-2-10, 10-2-14
display screen access arrows, 1-2-3– 1-2-4 Fail Safe Jumper field
DOB, 1-1-3 AOB, 2-2-8
alarms, 10-2-11 COB, 6-2-11
assigning a message pair, 10-2-7 HOB, 8-2-12
configuring, 10-2-1– 10-2-3, 10-2-7– 10-2-14 failure option jumper position, COB, 6-2-11
field contact, 10-2-2 Falling Edge field
I/O Block Configuration screen, 10-2-12 CIB, 6-1-8, 6-1-12
output hold, 10-2-3, 10-2-4, 10-2-5, 10-2-6 DIB, 10-1-15
reference material, 10-2-12 FEM, 1-1-5
setting the fail safe, 10-2-10 FEM (Front End Module), 1-3-19
transition voltage for I/O points, 10-2-8, 10-2-9 i/o points addressing, 1-3-14
Done command, 8-1-30 FEM Type field, MIB, 7-2-4
duration function type PIOB FIC, 1-1-5
input states, 3-2-11 backup modes, 5-1-6
measuring a pulse, 3-2-11– 3-2-12 backup option, 5-1-6
Duty Cycle field, pulse output PIOB, 3-2-27 backup status, 5-1-7– 5-1-8
redundancy, 9-4-1
redundancy scheme, 5-1-1
E redundant configuration, 5-1-3
FIC (Field Interface Card)
analog addressing, 1-3-10– 1-3-13, 1-3-14–
Enable FIC Redundancy field, PLC Configuration 1-3-15
screen, 9-4-4 contact addressing, 1-3-14, 1-3-18

IO: Index-6
i/o point addressing, 1-3-14 FIM Switch Voltage, 10-1-8

pulse addressing, 1-3-10– 1-3-12 FlexTerms, Multiplexer, 1-3-19
FIC Type field Force Backup on Number field, RIOB, 5-2-3
RIOB, 5-2-3 Frame Duration field, pulse output PIOB, 3-2-25
SIB, 8-1-16 frequency function type PIOB
FIC/Device Comm ERR field, HOB, 8-2-11, 8-2-15 measuring a pulse, 3-1-2, 3-2-9– 3-2-10
FIC/Device Communication Error messages, HOB, outputting a pulse, 3-1-4, 3-2-22– 3-2-23
8-2-17 Front End Module. See FEM
field contact Full Range field, TIB, 4-2-5
DIB, 10-1-4 Full Scale field, pulse output PIOB, 3-2-23
DOB, 10-2-2 function codes
Field Contact field Modbus, 9-2-1
CIB, 6-1-4, 6-1-11 specific Modbus devices, 9-2-2
DIB, 10-1-14 Function field, pulse output PIOB, 3-2-21
Field Device field, HOB, 8-2-11 Function Type field
Field Device Status field, HOB, 8-2-11, 8-2-15, contact pulse input PIOB, 3-2-6
8-2-16 voltage pulse input PIOB, 3-2-8
Field Device Type field, HOB, 8-2-15, 8-2-20 functional diagram
Field Interface Card. See FIC AIB, 2-1-15
Field Interface Module. See FIM CIB, 6-1-23
field transmitter COB, 6-2-12
configuration, 8-1-28 MIB, 7-2-7
status, 8-1-23– 8-1-25 SIB, 8-1-21
Field Value field TIB, 4-2-17
AIB, 2-1-12 VIB, 8-1-22
MIB, 7-2-3
TIB, 4-2-4
VIB, 8-1-18 G
File Name field, Transmitter Maintenance Log
Screen, 8-1-49
gas chromatograph, 9-1-6
Filt Time field
GE Series 6 PLC, 9-3-4, 9-3-8
AIB, 2-1-2, 2-1-13
Glitch field, CIB, 6-1-3
CIB, 6-1-3
glitch filter, CIB, 6-1-17– 6-1-18
DIB, 10-1-14
Glitch filter option, DIB, 10-1-23, 10-1-24
MIB, 7-1-6, 7-2-4
graphic, linking PLC input to, 9-3-16
SIB, 8-1-7, 8-1-14
Filt Type field
CIB, 6-1-11
DIB, 10-1-14 H
filter configuration
AIB, 2-1-2 hardware
CIB, 6-1-2– 6-1-3 address, 1-3-4
delay option, 6-1-13 address jumpers, 1-3-2, 1-3-6
delay--off option, 6-1-16– 6-1-17 Hardware Alarm Code field
delay--on option, 6-1-15 AIB, 2-1-14
extend option, 6-1-21– 6-1-23 AOB, 2-2-8
glitch option, 6-1-17– 6-1-18 CIB, 6-1-12
MIB, 7-1-6 COB, 6-2-11
none option, 6-1-13 DIB, 10-1-15
settle option, 6-1-19– 6-1-20 DOB, 10-2-14
SIB, 8-1-7 HOB, 8-2-12
filter options MIB, 7-2-5
CIB, 6-1-3, 6-1-13– 6-1-18 PLCB, 9-3-14
DIB, 10-1-17 TIB, 4-2-6
Filtered State field HART Output Block. See HOB
CIB, 6-1-11 HART Output Device Configuration screen, 8-2-18–
DIB, 10-1-14 8-2-24
FIM, 1-1-5 HART Output Device Status Screen, 8-2-13–
FIM Switch Volt field 8-2-16
DIB, 10-1-15 Health Addr field, PLC Configuration screen, 9-4-3
DOB, 10-2-14 Health field, RIOB, 5-2-2

IO: Index-7
Health Num field, PLC Configuration scree, 9-4-4 relationship to ControlBlocks, 1-1-5
hexadecimal--to--binary conversion char, 9-3-12 relationship to hardware, 1-1-5
HIA (Highway Interface Adapter), 1-3-2 role in control loop, 1-1-4
High Cutoff field, pulse input PIOB, 3-2-12 types, 1-1-2
hints Input Scale field, MIB, 7-1-8, 7-2-3
configuring analog blocks, 2-3-1– 2-3-2 input signal hysteresis, 3-2-5
configuring HOB, 8-2-30 Input State field, COB, 6-2-10
configuring I/O blocks, 1-5-1 input/output blocks, general description, 1-1-1–
configuring MIB, 7-3-1– 7-3-2 1-1-2, 1-1-4– 1-1-6
configuring PIOB, 3-3-1– 3-3-2 Inst Bias field, AIB, 2-1-7, 2-1-13
configuring RIOBs, 5-3-1 Inst High field
configuring SIB, 8-3-3 AIB, 2-1-13
configuring TIB, 4-2-2 MIB, 7-2-5
configuring VIB, 8-3-3 SIB, 8-1-16
contact blocks, 6-3-1 TIB, 4-2-6
TIB configuration, 4-3-1 Inst Low field
HOB, 1-1-3, 8-2-1 AIB, 2-1-13
accessing screens, 8-2-4 MIB, 7-2-5
communicating with SMART field devices, 8-2-1 SIB, 8-1-16
HART Output Device Configuration screen, TIB, 4-2-6
8-2-18– 8-2-24 Inst. Mode field, HOB, 8-2-15, 8-2-21
HART Output Device Status screen, 8-2-13– instrument alarms, AIB, 2-1-8
8-2-16 instrument bias, AIB, 2-1-7
I/O Block Configuration screen, 8-2-5 internal scaling, 1-1-6
linking, 8-2-29
transmitting data, 8-2-2
using in a control loop, 8-2-3 J
using with Value Input Blocks, 8-2-2
HOB Slot configuration, 8-2-27
Hold Time field jumper positions
COB, 6-2-3, 6-2-10 PLCs and CP, 9-5-9
DOB, 10-2-13 PLCs and FIC, 9-5-9
HW Alarm Code field RS422/RS232 Port I/O card, 9-5-5
PIOB, 3-2-3 jumpers
SIB, 8-1-16 addressing of card cages, 1-3-6
VIB, 8-1-19 hardware address, 1-3-2
hysteresis
contact pulse input PIOB, 3-2-4
in input signal, 3-2-5 K
voltage pulse input PIOB, 3-2-5
KE/KF/KFL module, 9-2-8
I
L
I/O Block Configuration screen, 1-2-1– 1-2-2
bit descriptor and alarm fields, 9-3-17– 9-3-19 Limits field
calling up, 1-2-1 Transmitter Configuration screen, 8-1-42
initial configuration, 1-2-1– 1-2-2 Transmitter Status screen, 8-1-24
simulation configuration, 9-2-7 Limits High field, Transmitter Configuration screen,
write only, 9-3-20 8-1-46
I/O point addressing, discrete, 1-3-21– 1-3-22 Limits Low field, Transmitter Configuration screen,
I/O points addressing, 1-3-14– 1-3-18 8-1-46
analog, 1-3-15 Lo Cutoff field
contact, 1-3-18 AIB, 2-1-13
Multiplexer, 1-3-19 SIB, 8-1-14
MultiPurpose, 1-3-2 loader address options, 3-2-32
pulse, 1-3-17 loader counter function type PIOB
input block analog output, 3-1-7
configuration hints, 1-5-1 binary output, 3-2-32– 3-2-34
definition, 1-1-1– 1-1-2, 1-1-4– 1-1-6 loader function type PIOB

IO: Index-8
analog output, 3-1-7, 3-2-32, 3-2-35– 3-2-39 miscellaneous devices, MIB, 7-1-5
binary output, 3-1-7, 3-2-32– 3-2-34 Mitsubishi
Log Entry field, Transmitter Maintenance Log error codes, 9-5-20
Screen, 8-1-49 Melsec network, 9-1-14, 9-1-15
Log Files Directory screen, 8-1-47 protocol, 9-1-6
loopback test, PLC, 9-5-3 Mitsubishi PLC, configuration, 9-1-12, 9-1-13
Low Cutoff field Mitsubishi redundancy, 9-4-7
AIB, 2-1-10, 2-1-13 Mitsubishi Station # field, 9-2-13
pulse input PIOB, 3-2-10 PLC Configuration screen, 9-4-4
Modbus
function codes, 9-2-1
M function codes for specific devices, 9-2-2
protocol, 9-1-6, 9-1-11
Mode field
MAIO addressing, 1-3-16 AIB, 2-1-12
Manufacturer ID field. See Mfr ID field AOB, 2-2-7
mapping, 9-3-3– 9-3-9 Block Directory screen, 1-4-3
mask value, 9-3-24 CIB, 6-1-11
masking, within the PLC, 9-3-24 COB, 6-2-10
Max Entries field, Transmitter Maintenance Log DIB, 10-1-14
Screen, 8-1-49 DOB, 10-2-13
Max field HOB, 8-2-5, 8-2-10, 8-2-15, 8-2-20
SIB, 8-1-15 MIB, 7-2-3
VIB, 8-1-18 PIOB, 3-2-3
Max On Time field, pulse output PIOB, 3-2-23, PLCB, 9-3-13
3-2-25 SIB, 8-1-14
Measure From field, pulse input PIOB, 3-2-12 TIB, 4-2-4
Mesg field Transmitter Configuration screen, 8-1-44–
HOB, 8-2-15, 8-2-21 8-1-45
Transmitter Configuration screen, 8-1-46 Transmitter Status screen, 8-1-24
Transmitter Status screen, 8-1-24 VIB, 8-1-18
message pair Mode Type field, RIOB, 5-2-2
DIB, 10-1-5 Modicon interface, 9-3-4
DOB, 10-2-7 Modicon PLC redundancy, 9-4-6
Message Pair field More Transmitter Configuration screen, 8-1-3
CIB, 6-1-5, 6-1-11 Msg Timeout field, PLC Configuration screen,
COB, 6-2-7, 6-2-10 9-2-14
DIB, 10-1-14 Multiplex Input Block. See MIB
DOB, 10-2-13 Multipoint Analog I/O Point addressing. See MAIO
messages, assigning, 8-2-24 addressing
Messages/Seconds field, PLC Configuration screen, MultiPurpose Controller card, 9-1-2
9-2-14 MultiPurpose I/O address, 1-3-1
Mfr ID field MUX (Multiplexer) FlexTerm, 1-3-19
HOB, 8-2-15, 8-2-20 MUX (Multiplexer) inputs addressing, 1-3-19
Transmitter Configuration screen, 8-1-44–
8-1-45
Transmitter Status screen, 8-1-24
MIB, 1-1-2, 7-1-10– 7-1-11, 7-1-14, 7-2-1– 7-2-5
N
alarm configuration, 7-1-11– 7-1-12
block output configuration, 7-1-14 node addressing, 1-3-2
configuration hints, 7-3-1– 7-3-2 Nom Out field
configuration troubleshooting, 7-3-1 AIB, 2-1-12
filter configuration, 7-1-6 MIB, 7-1-10, 7-2-4
functional diagram, 7-2-7 None field, CIB, 6-1-3
I/O Block Configuration screen, 7-2-2 none filter
ranges, 7-1-3– 7-1-5 CIB, 6-1-13
reference material, 7-2-1– 7-2-5 DIB, 10-1-17
scaling configuration, 7-1-8 Num field
signal characterization configuration, 7-1-2 HOB, 8-2-15, 8-2-23
skip function configuration, 7-1-7 Transmitter Configuration screen, 8-1-46
Minimum On Time field, pulse output PIOB, 3-2-25 Transmitter Status screen, 8-1-25

IO: Index-9
Number of Bad PLCs field, PLC Configuration analog output PIOB configuration, 3-2-28–
screen, 9-2-14 3-2-31
Number of PLCs field, PLC Configuration screen, binary output loader application, 3-2-32
9-2-14 configuration, 3-2-1– 3-2-6, 3-2-7– 3-2-14
Number of Retries field, PLC Configuration screen, configuration hints, 3-3-1– 3-3-2
9-2-14 I/O Block Configuration screen, 3-2-2– 3-2-3
pulse input, 3-1-2– 3-1-3, 3-1-7– 3-1-8
pulse input PIOB, 3-2-4– 3-2-6, 3-2-7– 3-2-8
O pulse input PIOB contact, 3-2-4, 3-2-6
pulse input PIOB voltage, 3-2-5, 3-2-7– 3-2-8
pulse output, 3-1-4– 3-1-5, 3-1-7– 3-1-8
operator arrow, 1-2-3– 1-2-4 troubleshooting, 3-3-1
Orig Node field, Transmitter Maintenance Log PIOB applications, 3-1-1– 3-1-9
Screen, 8-1-49 analog output, 3-1-6
Orig Plant Unit field, Transmitter Maintenance Log pulse input, 3-1-2– 3-1-3
Screen, 8-1-49 pulse output, 3-1-4– 3-1-5
output action PIOB blocks, combining, 3-1-7– 3-1-8
AOB, 2-2-2 Plant Unit field
HOB, 8-2-7 AIB, 2-1-14
output block AOB, 2-2-8
configuration hints, 1-5-1 Block Directory screen, 1-4-3
definition, 1-1-1– 1-1-2, 1-1-4– 1-1-6 Block Status screen, 1-4-5
relationship to ControlBlocks, 1-1-5 CIB, 6-1-12
relationship to hardware, 1-1-5 COB, 6-2-11
role in control loop, 1-1-4 DIB, 10-1-16
types, 1-1-2 DOB, 10-2-14
Output Card Rev field HOB, 8-2-12
AOB, 2-2-8 MIB, 7-2-4
HOB, 8-2-12 PIOB, 3-2-3
Output Device Status field, 8-2-16 RIOB, 5-2-4
Output field SIB, 8-1-15
Transmitter Configuration screen, 8-1-35, TIB, 4-2-6
8-1-41, 8-1-46 VIB, 8-1-19
Transmitter Status screen, 8-1-24 PLC
output hold, DOB, 10-2-3, 10-2-4, 10-2-5, 10-2-6 alarm messages, 9-5-18– 9-5-19
output hold configuration, COB, 6-2-3 reference material, 9-5-2– 9-5-6
Output Hold field PLC coil, 9-3-2– 9-3-8
COB, 6-2-3, 6-2-10 PLC communication
DOB, 10-2-13 alarms, 9-5-19
Output Option field, HOB, 8-2-6, 8-2-10 checking logic steps, 9-2-7
Output State field communicating with an Allen--Bradley PL, 9-2-8,
CIB, 6-1-11 9-2-9
COB, 6-2-10 consecutive addresses for PLC optimization,
DIB, 10-1-14 9-2-3
DOB, 10-2-13 define port--PLC communications, 9-2-10–
Output Type field, analog output PIOB, 3-2-31 9-2-15
Output Value field factors affecting, 9-2-15
AOB, 2-2-7 Modbus function codes, 9-2-1
HOB, 8-2-11 module switch requirements, 9-2-8
PLC configuration
Modbus PLC and data highway, 9-1-11
P one Port I/O Card and one data highway, 9-1-8
two Port I/O Cards and one data highway, 9-1-9
two Port I/O Cards and two data highways,
Parity Bit field, PLC Configuration screen, 9-2-13 9-1-10
PeerWay node addressing, 1-3-2 PLC Configuration Screen, Allen--Bradley PLC,
PIOB, 1-1-2, 3-1-1– 3-1-9, 3-2-1– 3-2-6, 3-2-7– 9-5-10
3-2-14, 3-3-1– 3-3-2 PLC general alarms, 9-5-18
analog output, 3-1-6, 3-2-2, 3-2-28– 3-2-31, PLC interface
3-2-35– 3-2-39 hardware, 9-1-2, 9-1-3
analog output loader application, 3-1-7– 3-1-8 network configurations supported, 9-1-7

IO: Index-10
optimization, 9-2-3 measuring frequency of, 3-2-9– 3-2-10

protocols supported, 9-1-6 pulse input PIOB
redundancy, 9-4-1– 9-4-8 analog output loader, 3-2-32
software, 9-1-4 analog output loader application, 3-2-35– 3-2-39
software functional diagram, 9-1-5 applications, 3-1-2– 3-1-3, 3-1-7– 3-1-8
PLC masking within, 9-3-24 binary output loader application, 3-2-32– 3-2-34
PLC Number field, PLCB screen, 9-3-14 configuration, 3-2-4– 3-2-6, 3-2-7– 3-2-14,
PLC optimization, 9-2-3 3-2-16– 3-2-18
PLC Processor card, 9-1-2 counting pulses, 3-2-13– 3-2-15
PLC program image, 9-1-4 measuring duration, 3-2-11– 3-2-12
PLC register, 9-3-2– 9-3-9 measuring frequency, 3-2-9– 3-2-10
address, 9-1-4 Pulse Input/Output Block. See PIOB
linking a bit input to a graphics display, 9-3-16 pulse input/output FICs, 1-3-17
reading contents, 9-3-10 pulse output PIOB
reading/writing through single I/O block, 9-3-26 applications, 3-1-4– 3-1-5, 3-1-7– 3-1-8
using bit inputs to a ControlBlock, 9-3-15 configuration, 3-2-20– 3-2-27
PLC register, writing to, 9-3-20– 9-3-25 duration, 3-2-24– 3-2-25
PLC troubleshooting, 9-5-1 frequency, 3-2-22– 3-2-23
PLC Word Address field number of pulses, 3-2-26– 3-2-27
Allen--Bradley PLC, 9-3-5 Pulse Rate field, pulse output PIOB, 3-2-27
Allen--Bradley PLC 5, 9-3-6
Modicon Interface, 9-3-4
PLCB, 9-3-2, 9-3-14 Q
PLC Write Mask field, PLCB, 9-3-14, 9-3-21
PLCB, 1-1-3, 9-3-1
Quality field, PLC Configuration screen, 9-2-14
addressing, 9-2-4
applications, 9-3-1
configuration, 9-1-4
function, 9-1-5 R
I/O Block Configuration screen, 9-2-10– 9-2-15
Point Type field, PIOB, 3-2-2– 3-2-3 Range 20mA field
ponmlkjihgfedcba field, PLCB, 9-3-14 SIB, 8-1-15
Port field, PLCB, 9-3-14, 9-3-21 Transmitter Configuration screen, 8-1-46
port I/O card Range 4mA field
RS422/RS232C, 9-5-4 SIB, 8-1-15
RS422/RS232C block diagram, 9-5-5 Transmitter Configuration screen, 8-1-46
RS422/RS232C jumper positions, 9-5-4– 9-5-6 Range field
RS422/RS422, 9-5-6 SIB, 8-1-29, 8-1-34
RS422/RS422 block diagram, 9-5-6 TIB, 4-2-5
Port Status field, PLC Configuration screen, 9-2-13 Transmitter Configuration screen, 8-1-29,
Prescale field 8-1-34
loader application with binary, 3-2-35 Transmitter Status screen, 8-1-24
loader applications with analog, 3-2-39 voltage pulse input PIOB, 3-2-8
PIOB, 3-2-15 Range Max field, pulse input PIOB, 3-2-10
pulse input PIOB, 3-2-15, 3-2-19 Range Zero field, pulse input PIOB, 3-2-10
prescale value for PIOB, 3-2-16 rate of change alarms, MIB, 7-1-12
Priority field Raw State field
AIB, 2-1-14 CIB, 6-1-11
CIB, 6-1-9, 6-1-12 DIB, 10-1-14
DIB, 10-1-16 Re--Zero Xmtr command, 8-1-31
DOB, 10-2-14 Read field, PLCB, 9-3-13
MIB, 7-1-10, 7-2-4 reading and writing through a single PLCB, 9-3-26
TIB, 4-2-6 redundancy, PLC, 9-4-1– 9-4-8
process alarms redundancy scheme, 5-1-1, 5-1-5– 5-1-9
AIB, 2-1-9– 2-1-10 Redundancy Scheme field, RIOB, 5-1-5, 5-2-2
MIB, 7-1-11 Redundancy Scheme jumper position, 5-1-2
Programmable Logic Controller Block. See PLCB Redundant Input/Output Block. See RIOB
pulse I/O point addressing, 1-3-17 register, PLC, 9-1-5, 9-3-3
pulse input register map
counting, 3-2-16 GE Series 6, 9-3-8
measuring duration of, 3-2-11– 3-2-12 Mitsubishi PLC, 9-3-9

IO: Index-11
Modicon PLC, 9-3-8 Serial # field, HOB, 8-2-15

Related Log field, Transmitter Maintenance Log Servo Action field, HOB, 8-2-15
Screen, 8-1-49 Set Output Current command, 8-1-31
Reset Backup field, RIOB, 5-2-3 Settle field, CIB, 6-1-3
resistance temperature device (RTD), AIB, 2-1-4– settle filter, CIB, 6-1-19– 6-1-20
2-1-5 Settle filter option, DIB, 10-1-25, 10-1-26
Returned Digital PV field, HOB, 8-2-15 SIB, 1-1-2, 8-1-1, 8-1-40– 8-1-44, 8-3-2
Rev field accessing screens, 8-1-3
HOB, 8-2-15 alarm configuration, 8-1-11– 8-1-12
Transmitter Status screen, 8-1-24 Auto mode, 8-1-4
Reverse Acting field block limits, 8-1-42
AOB, 2-2-2, 2-2-7 configuration troubleshooting, 8-3-1
HOB, 8-2-7, 8-2-10 filter configuration, 8-1-7
reverse output action, 2-2-2 functional diagram, 8-1-21
HOB, 8-2-8 I/O Block Configuration screen, 8-1-3, 8-1-11–
RIOB, 1-1-2, 5-1-3, 5-2-1– 5-2-2 8-1-16, 8-1-26– 8-1-27
configuration guidelines, 5-1-2 linking, 8-1-20
configuration hints, 5-3-1 Manual mode, 8-1-6
FIC backup option configuration, 5-1-6 PV, 8-1-8– 8-1-9
FIC backup status, 5-1-7– 5-1-8 Simulate mode, 8-1-5
I/O Block Configuration screen, 5-2-1– 5-2-3 transmitter configuration, 8-1-28
redundant analog FIC configuration, 5-1-3 use with MPC, 8-1-1, 8-1-40
redundant pulse FIC configuration, 5-1-3 using analog PV, 8-1-8
second redundant FIC, 5-1-7– 5-1-8 using combined PV, 8-1-9
Rising Edge field SIB Input field, VIB, 8-1-19
CIB, 6-1-8, 6-1-12 SIB Tag field, VIB, 8-1-18
DIB, 10-1-15 SIB Tag/Addr field, VIB, 8-1-18
routing data, 1-3-1 SIB, configuration hints, 8-3-1
RS232 cable, 9-1-2 Sig Char field
RS232C connection, PLC interface, 9-1-1 AIB, 2-1-6, 2-1-13
RS422 cable, 9-1-2 MIB, 7-1-2, 7-2-4
RS422 connection, PLC interface, 9-1-1 signal characterization
RTD, MIB devices, 7-1-2 AIB square root, 2-1-3
RTD ranges, AIB, 2-1-4 MIB miscellaneous devices, 7-1-5
RTD sensor MIB RTD, 7-1-4
definition, 4-2-1 MIB thermocouple device, 7-1-3
TIB, 4-1-1 signal characterization for AIB
TIB configuration, 4-2-8– 4-2-9 RTD, 2-1-4– 2-1-5
TIB ranges, 4-2-7 thermocouple , 2-1-4– 2-1-5
TIB scaling, 4-2-13– 4-2-16 Sim Tag field, SIB, 8-1-15
TIB summary, 4-2-17 Sim Tag/Addr field
RTD sensor TIB, configuring, 4-2-17 PLCB, 9-3-13
RTD signal characterization, 7-1-4 VIB, 8-1-18
simulation ControlBlock, 9-2-7
Size field
S Block Directory screen, 1-4-3
Block Status screen, 1-4-5
Skip field, MIB, 7-1-7, 7-2-4
Safe State field, CIB, 6-1-7 Slot configuration, HOB, 8-2-27
Sample Time field, PLCB, 9-3-13 Slot fields, HOB, 8-2-21
Save Xmtr Config command, 8-1-30, 8-1-33, Slot variables for specific Smart devices, 8-2-28–
8-2-24 8-2-30
scaling, 1-1-6 Smart device, assigning variables, 8-2-24
MIB, 7-1-9 Smart transmitter
TIB, 4-2-13– 4-2-16 address, 8-1-32
Send Config to Xmtr command, 8-1-30, 8-1-33– configuration commands, 8-1-30
8-1-34, 8-1-40, 8-2-24– 8-2-25 configuration screens, 8-1-3
Send To Both field, Transmitter Maintenance Log configuration values, 8-1-29
Screen, 8-1-49 damping, 8-1-40
Sensor Type field, TIB, 4-2-2– 4-2-4 descriptor, 8-1-33
Ser Num field, Transmitter Status screen, 8-1-24 field transmitter status, 8-1-23– 8-1-25

IO: Index-12
output, 8-1-43 tags, assigning, 8-2-24

ranges, 8-1-34 target count, 3-2-13– 3-2-15
relationship to SIBs and VIBs, 8-1-2 Target Count field
screens, 8-1-3 PIOB, 3-2-19
SIB, 8-1-7, 8-1-8– 8-1-15, 8-1-20– 8-1-21, pulse input PIOB, 3-2-19
8-1-28, 8-1-42 Temp field
Value Input Block, 8-1-4– 8-1-6, 8-1-17– 8-1-20, RTD sensor TIB, 4-2-9
8-1-22 thermocouple sensor TIB, 4-2-11
Smart Transmitter Input Block. See SIB Temperature Input Block. See TIB
Soft Error Inhibit field, PLC Configuration screen, temperature ranges, TIB, 4-2-7
9-2-13 Ten Period Avg. field, pulse input PIOB, 3-2-12
software blocks, addressing, 1-3-1 thermocouple
Source Addr field, DOB, 10-2-13 MIB device, 7-1-2
Source field, HOB, 8-2-10 MIB inputs, 7-1-3
Source HF field signal characterization, 7-1-3
loader applications with analog, 3-2-39 TIB, 4-1-1
pulse input PIOB, 3-2-15, 3-2-19 TIB application, 4-1-3– 4-1-4
Source Link field TIB configuration, 4-2-10– 4-2-11
analog output PIOB, 3-2-31 TIB ranges, 4-2-7
loader application with binary, 3-2-35 TIB scaling, 4-2-13– 4-2-16
loader applications with analog, 3-2-39 TIB summary, 4-2-18
pulse input PIOB, 3-2-15 thermocouple sensor for AIB
pulse output PIOB, 3-2-21 device, 2-1-4– 2-1-5
Source Output field ranges, 2-1-4
analog output PIOB, 3-2-31 thermocouple sensor TIB, configuring, 4-2-18
pulse output PIOB, 3-2-21 Threshold field, voltage pulse input PIOB, 3-2-8
Source State field, DOB, 10-2-13 TIB, 1-1-2, 4-1-1– 4-1-5, 4-2-1– 4-2-35
Source Tag Addr field, COB, 6-2-10 configuration, 4-2-1– 4-2-23
Source Tag field, AOB, 2-2-7 configuration hints, 4-2-2, 4-3-1
Source Tag/Addr field, PLCB, 9-3-13 functional diagram, 4-2-17
Source Value field I/O Block Configuration screen, 4-2-1– 4-2-4
loader application with binary, 3-2-35 linking a ControlBlock, 4-2-18
loader applications with, 3-2-39 scaling, 4-2-2– 4-2-3
square root signal characterization, AIB, 2-1-3 TIB applications, 4-1-1– 4-1-4
standard message pair configuration cold junction compensator, 4-1-4– 4-1-5
CIB, 6-1-5 thermocouple, 4-1-3– 4-1-4
COB, 6-2-7 Tied To field
Stat field loader application with binary, 3-2-35
HOB, 8-2-15, 8-2-23 loader applications with analog output, 3-2-39
Transmitter Configuration screen, 8-1-46 Top Entry field, Transmitter Maintenance Log
Transmitter Status screen, 8-1-25 Screen, 8-1-49
Steps in Manual field Transfer card, health, 5-2-2
Block Directory screen, 1-4-3 transition voltage for I/O points, DOB, 10-2-8,
Block Status screen, 1-4-5 10-2-9
Stop Bits field, PLC Configuration screen, 9-2-13 transition voltage for inputs, DIB, 10-1-8, 10-1-9
supervisor arrow, 1-2-3– 1-2-4 transmitter
supply function type PIOB, 3-2-28– 3-2-31 MIB, 7-1-2
switch settings recording and viewing, 8-1-47
module, 9-2-8 Transmitter Configuration screen, 8-1-3
PLC communication module, 9-2-9 accessing, 8-1-43
address, 8-1-33
block limit, 8-1-42
T damping, 8-1-40
descriptor, 8-1-33
fields, 8-1-43
Tag field output, 8-1-35, 8-1-41
Block Directory screen, 1-4-3 range, 8-1-34
Block Status screen, 1-4-5 transmitter events, 8-1-47
HOB, 8-2-15, 8-2-20 Transmitter Maintenance Log screen, 8-1-48
Transmitter Configuration screen, 8-1-45 accessing, 8-1-48
Transmitter Status screen, 8-1-24 Transmitter Status screen, 8-1-3

IO: Index-13
accessing, 8-1-23 functional diagram, 8-1-22

command error messages, 8-1-26 I/O Block Configuration screen, 8-1-17– 8-1-19
fields, 8-1-23– 8-1-25 linking, 8-1-20, 8-2-29
Trim Xmtr DAC commands, 8-1-30 Manual mode, 8-1-6
troubleshooting relationship to Smart transmitter, 8-1-2
configuring analog blocks, 2-3-1 relationship to Smart transmitter Input Block,
configuring I/O blocks, 1-5-1 8-1-2
configuring MIB, 7-3-1 Simulate mode, 8-1-5
configuring PIOB, 3-3-1 use with MPC, 8-1-1, 8-1-40
configuring RIOBs, 5-3-1 using analog PV, 8-1-8, 8-1-9
contact blocks, 6-3-1 using combined PV, 8-1-9
PLC, 9-5-1 voltage pulse input, PIOB, 3-2-5, 3-2-7– 3-2-8
PLC redundancy, 9-4-8
SIB configuration, 8-3-2
VIB configuration, 8-3-2
Type field
W
Block Directory screen, 1-4-3
Block Status screen, 1-4-5 When field, DIB, 10-1-15
contact pulse input PIOB, 3-2-6 Write Filter field, PLCB, 9-3-13, 9-3-21
PIOB, 3-2-6 Write Mask, PLCB, 9-3-24
voltage pulse input PIOB, 3-2-8 Write Mask field, PLCB, 9-3-21
Write Mask value, PLCB, 9-3-24
writing through a single PLCB, 9-3-26
U
Units field
X
HOB, 8-2-15
pulse output PIOB, 3-2-23 Xfer Health field, RIOB, 5-2-2
Transmitter Configuration screen, 8-1-46 Xmtr Address field
Transmitter Status screen, 8-1-24 SIB, 8-1-15
Upload Xmtr Config command, 8-1-30 Transmitter Configuration screen, 8-1-45
Use field, SIB, 8-1-14 Transmitter Status screen, 8-1-24
user message pair configuration Xmtr Self Test command, 8-1-30
CIB, 6-1-5 Xmtr Status field
COB, 6-2-7 SIB, 8-1-15
Transmitter Status screen, 8-1-24
Xmtr Type field
V SIB, 8-1-14
Transmitter Configuration screen, 8-1-45–
8-1-46
Value field Transmitter Status screen, 8-1-24
AOB, 2-2-7 Xmtr Units field, SIB, 8-1-14
HOB, 8-2-10
Value From PLC field, PLC, 9-3-11
Value From Source field, PLCB, 9-3-21
Value Input Block. See VIB
Z
Value to PLC field, PLCB, 9-3-14, 9-3-21
VIB, 1-1-2, 8-1-40– 8-1-44, 8-3-2 Zero field
Auto mode, 8-1-4 SIB, 8-1-14
configuration troubleshooting, 8-3-1 VIB, 8-1-18

IOV18

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

IOV18

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

IOV18

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RS3t

Software Version 18, Release 2

Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc.

Telephone: (512) 835--2190

I/O Block Configuration 1984-2645-18x1

Please give us your feedback to help improve this manual.

3. What could be changed in this manual to make it more useful?

May we contact you about your comments? j Yes j No

Fisher-Rosemount Systems, Inc.

Seal with tape.

About This Manual

D Chapter 1 Describes the I/O block types and explains how to

RS3: I/O Block Configuration About This Manual

Changes for This Release

Revision Level for This Manual

For This Refer to This Document:

18R2 I/O Block Configuration August 1994 1984-2645-18x1

18R1 I/O Block Configuration October 1993 1984-2645-18x1

RS3: I/O Block Configuration About This Manual

References to Other Manuals

Manual Title Chapter Manual Title Chapter-Section

Abbreviations of Manual Titles

RS3: I/O Block Configuration About This Manual

You should be familiar with the information in the following documents

RS3: I/O Block Configuration About This Manual

Chapter 1: Introduction to Input/Output Blocks

Section 1: What are Input/Output Blocks? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1-1

Section 2: Using an I/O Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2-1

Section 3: Input/Output Block Addressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3-1

Section 4: Block Directory and Block Status Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4-1

RS3: I/O Block Configuration Contents

Section 5: Hints for Configuring I/O Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5-1

Chapter 2: Configuring Analog Blocks

Section 1: Configuring an Analog Input Block (AIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1-1

Section 2: Configuring an Analog Output Block (AOB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2-1

Section 3: Hints for Configuring Analog Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3-1

Chapter 3: Configuring Pulse Input/Output Blocks

Section 1: Applications for the Pulse Input/Output Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-1

RS3: I/O Block Configuration Contents

Combining PIOB Blocks for Loader Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1-7

Section 2: Configuring a Pulse Input/Output Block (PIOB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-1

Section 3: Hints for Configuring PIOBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3-1

Chapter 4: Configuring Temperature Input Blocks

Section 1: Applications for the Temperature Input Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1-1

Section 2: Configuring a Temperature Input Block (TIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-1

RS3: I/O Block Configuration Contents

Other Display Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2-16

Section 3: Hints for Configuring TIBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3-1

Chapter 5: Configuring Redundant Input/Output Blocks

Section 1: Configuring a Redundant Input/Output Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1-1

Section 2: RIOB Block Configuration Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2-1

Section 3: Hints for Configuring RIOBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3-1

Chapter 6: Configuring Contact Blocks

Section 1: Configuring a Contact Input Block (CIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-1

RS3: I/O Block Configuration Contents

Delay Filter Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1-13

Section 2: Configuring a Contact Output Block (COB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2-1

Section 3: Hints for Configuring Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3-1

Chapter 7: Configuring Multiplex Input Blocks